Ricoh FT-7950 Service Manual

A246/A247/A248
SERVICE MANUAL
RICOH GROUP COMPANIES
PN: RCSMA246
A246/A247/A248
SERVICE MANUAL
A246/A247/A248
SERVICE MANUAL
PN:RCSMA246
It is the reader's responsibility when discussing the information contained within this
document to maintain a level of confidentiality that is in the best interest of Ricoh
Corporation and its member companies.
NO PART OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE REPRODUCED IN ANY
FASHION AND DISTRIBUTED WITHOUT THE PRIOR
PERMISSION OF RICOH CORPORATION.
All product names, domain names or product illustrations, including desktop images,
used in this document are trademarks, registered trademarks or the property of their
respective companies.
They are used throughout this book in an informational or editorial fashion only and for
the benefit of such companies. No such use, or the use of any trade name, or web
site is intended to convey endorsement or other affiliation with Ricoh products.
2000 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.
WARNING
The Service Manual contains information
regarding
service
techniques,
procedures,
processes and spare parts of office equipment
distributed by Ricoh Corporation. Users of this
manual should be either service trained or
certified by successfully completing a Ricoh
Technical Training Program.
Untrained and uncertified users utilizing
information contained in this service manual to
repair or modify Ricoh equipment risk personal
injury, damage to property. or loss of warranty
protection.
Ricoh Corporation
LEGEND
PRODUCT CODE
A246
A247
A248
COMPANY
GESTETNER
RICOH
2851
FT7950
2860
FT7960
2870
FT7970
SAVIN
2050
2060
2070
DOCUMENTATION HISTORY
REV. NO.
*
DATE
12/98
COMMENTS
Original Printing
Product Comparison Chart
A246/A247/A248 and A175/A176/A177
SM
No.
1.
Tandem LCT
Section/Item
Duplex copy
productivity
Last sheet
The tandem LCT (capacity: 1,550 x 2) is the

1st tray for easier paper replenishment.
First duplex sheet
Last sheet
A246/A247/A248
Duplex copy control has been revised. The
duplex copy productivity has been increased
in the simplex to duplex mode. Before the
last sheet of copy paper is stacked in the
duplex tray, the next job will start from the
bottom stacked sheet in simplex to duplex
mode.
A246G507.WMF
Remarks
Refer to SM, pg. 2-113 for
detailed information.
A246/A247/A248
The tandem tray (capacity: 500 x 2) is the 1st Refer to SM, pg. 2-85/89
tray for (A176/A177/A191/A192 copiers).
for detailed information.
First duplex sheet
Last sheet
A175/A176/A177
After the last sheet of copy paper is stacked
in the duplex tray, the next job will start.
THE FOLLOWING TABLE SHOWS THE MAJOR DIFFERENCES BETWEEN THE A246/A247/A248 AND A175/A176/A177
SERIES COPIERS.
SM
No.
Transfer belt
cleaning bias
roller
Section/Item
Toner re-cycling
system
Transfer Belt Cleaning Blade
Cleaning Bias Roller
A246G500.WMF
A175/A176/A177
Around 10% of toner is collected to the used
toner collection bottle without transferring the
toner to the copy paper.
Bias Roller Blade
A246/A247/A248
The toner from the drum cleaning unit and
transfer belt unit is collected and the filtering
equipment mechanism separates the reusable toner and unusable material (blocked
toner and paper dust). The re-usable toner is
returned to the toner tank and the unusable
material is collected in the used toner
collection bottle. About 3% of toner is
collected in the used toner collection bottle.
The estimated period before the toner
collection bottle is full has been extended
from 240 k to 1,500 k copies.
To improve the transfer belt function, a
cleaning bias roller and a bias roller blade
have been added to the transfer belt unit.
Even if the toner is not removed completely
by the transfer belt cleaning blade due to the
paper dust stuck on the transfer belt cleaning
blade, the toner is attracted to the negative
charged cleaning bias roller. The bias roller
blade scrapes off the toner on the cleaning
bias roller.
A246/A247/A248
The positively charged

toner then could not be
removed by the cleaning
bias roller.
The A229 (digital copier)

does not have a transfer
belt cleaning blade.
Reason:
If the toner on the transfer
belt were scraped by a
cleaning blade, some of
the normally negatively
charged toner could be
charged positively by
friction.
Refer to SM, pg. 2-65/67

Remarks
SM
No.
Process control
auto start mode
Operation
Operation panel
Section/Item
Optics/Scanner
return speed (70
CPM machine)
A246/A247/A248
To reduce the machine vibration while the
scanner is returning to the home position for
70 cpm machines, the appropriate return
speed for each reproduction ratio is adapted
so that the vibration of the machine is
reduced (to the 60 cpm machine level).
For easier operation, the LCD on the
operation panel has been enlarged to 640 x
240 dots. For easier key operation, the layout
of the keys has been changed.
Improvements resulting from experience with
A175/A176/A177 machines have been
incorporated to facilitate machine operation.
1) The key top for the UP mode has been
added for easier access in the UP mode.
2) Additional originals can be set on the ADF
table during copying and the copy
operation is continued (totally 100
originals).
3) A sample copy key is added to the
operation panel.
4) The range of the ID level has been
widened from 7 to 9. The number of
programs has been increased from 5 to
10. The digits of the user code has been
increased from 6 to 8.
5) The units (inch or mm) can be changed by
SP mode.
The process control auto start mode can be
selected in SP mode (Default: selected). To
maintain optimum copy quality, process
control occurs every 24 hours even if the
main switch is not turned off.
Remarks
Refer to the Operating

Instructions
A246/A247/A248
The process control only starts when the

Refer to SM, pg. 4-8 and
fusing temperature is low. If the main switch
SP 1-12-1 for detailed
of the copier is not turned off during 24 hours, information.
the fusing temperature does not go down to
100C. Process control cannot be carried
out.
The operators have to input 2 actions of the

key operation to enter the UP mode (Clear
mode key and Clear/Stop key).
Additional original can be set on ADF table
during copying but the copy operation is not
continued
The size of the LCD on the operation panel is Refer to the Operating
320 x 240 dots.
Instructions.
A175/A176/A177
SM
13
12
11
10
No.
Drum
Developer
A246/A247/A248
New developer is used to stabilize the

triboelectric charge after a long copy run
(300 k). The new developer maintains the
triboelectric chargeability over a long time.
This reduces the possibility of low image
density or dirty background.
To prevent the drum temperature from
increasing in the continuous duplex mode,
the drum has 12 holes in each drum flange.
To ensure good stacking in the duplex unit,

the following modification has been applied.
1) The duplex positioning roller rotation
speed has increased 1.6 times from the
A177 so that the positioning roller delivers
the paper to the duplex separation section
while the paper guide is down.
2) The positioning roller on timing can be
changed by SP mode (1-9-1).
Operators can open and close either the
copier or the sorter stapler door first because
the copier door swing to the right.
Duplex
Exterior/Front
doors
A246/A247/A248
An independent stepping motor drives the
registration roller to ensure good copy
quality.
Section/Item
Drive for the
registration roller

Remarks
A175/A176/A177
A246G503.WMF
The new type drum can be installed in the

A175/A176/A177 machines.
A246/A247/A248
See illustration. Refer to

SM, pg. 2-21 for detailed
information.
Toner, Type 6105

EDP Code: 887801
For exit jam removal, it is necessary to open

the sorter stapler door first and then the
copier front door. Also, it is necessary to
close the copier front door first and then the
sorter stapler door.
The PM cycle for replacing developer is every Developer, Type 9
120 k.
EDP Code: 887797
A175/A176/A177
When the registration clutch turns on, the
main motor rotation may sometimes be
shocked. Jitter may appear at 80 mm from
the leading edge on small fine dotted images.
It takes longer to deliver severely curled
paper such as recycled paper or paper which
was fed as far as the duplex separation
section in the duplex unit. In latter case, the
paper guide is already up for next sheet of
paper. The paper guide cannot guide the
paper. To solve the problem, a program in
SP mode has been added.
SM
16
15
14
No.
The upper and lower transport guides have

been combined into one part for easier
operation of jam removal. The open angle of
the upper guide is the same as that of the
lower guide.
Vertical thin line may be thicker than original

after generation copy. Vertical thin lines can
be made thinner by lowering the toner
density in the development unit. VP data can
be compensated by SP mode (SP1-13-4). L:
Thicker, N: Normal, H: Thinner, HH: Much
Thinner
VIDB = VP +300(V)
Character Thin
Line Adjustment
(Generation Copy
Mode)
When removing misfed paper in the vertical

transport section, it is necessary to open the
upper and lower vertical transport guides.
The open angle of the upper vertical
transport guide is narrower than that of the
lower vertical transport guides.
A246G504.WMF
Key Counter Holder
A246/A247/A248
A175/A176/A177
The key counter holder is installed at the
The key counter holder is installed at the
copier right front position for easier operation. copier right rear position.
Vertical transport
guide
Section/Item
Key counter
A246/A247/A248



Remarks
See illustration.
SM
20
19
18
17
No.
Exterior covers
Energy star
compliant
Fusing
Section/Item
Fusing/Pressure
roller
High durability rubber is used for the

pressure roller (450 k).
The European version machine meets the
Energy Star guidelines for energy efficiency
as well as US version machines.
The left and right covers can be removed
independently. The numbers of screws
required for removing following covers have
been reduced.
Operation panel (-4), Upper cover (-4), Right
upper cover (-4), Lower left & right cover (-2),
Lower rear cover (-4)
Retaining Ring
A246/A247/A248
The pressure levers securing method has
been changed. The levers are hooked by the
shaft and holes, and 2 retaining rings have
been eliminated. Thus, it is not necessary to
remove the connector bracket when
replacing the pressure roller and its bearings
without removing the hot roller.
Remarks
See illustration.
To remove the right or the left cover, it is

necessary to remove the other parts (front
cover, rear cover, and inner cover).
A246/A247/A248
Refer to SM, pages 6 1 to

6-9 for details.
The PM cycle for replacing the pressure roller Refer to SM, pg. 5-2 for
is every 240 k.
The Energy Star compliant, US version only. Refer to SM, pg. 2-115 for
A246G501.WMF
Retaining Ring
Lever
A175/A176/A177
When replacing the pressure roller and its
bearings without removing the hot roller, it is
necessary to remove the pressure levers,
retaining rings, and connector bracket.
SM
22
21
No.
Duplex/Separation The number of separation belts has been

belt
reduced from 3 to 1.
Section/Item
A246/A247/A248
The
bias
terminal
(development roller shaft)
Development/Bias
does not rotate but the outside of the
terminal
development roller shaft rotates. It is not
lubrication
necessary to lubricate the development bias
terminal.
Three separation belts are used for duplex

separation.
A246G502.WMF
A246/A247/A248
A175/A176/A177
A175/A176/A177
The bias terminal in the development roller
rotates in the bias receptacle. The bias
terminal must be lubricated.
A246/A247/A248
The two types of belt are

not interchangeable. The
two types of duplex unit
are also not interchangeable because of the
different connectors.
Remarks
See illustration.
SM
23
No.
Section/Item
Drum grounding
terminal
A175/A176/A177
Bearing
Drum Grounding Plate
Brush
Brush
A246G506.WMF
A246G505.WMF
A246/A247/A248
A246/A247/A248
A175/A176/A177
As the drum grounding terminal, a conductive The drum grounding plate contacts the drum
brush and a conductive bearing are used. It
shaft rotated. Replacement and lubrication
is not necessary to replace these parts at
every 1.2 M are necessary.
regular PM.
A246/A247/A248
Remarks
See illustration.
SM
29
28
27
26
25
24
No.
To ensure good copy quality in proof mode,

the proof exit roller (driving side) contacts the
rear side (non-image side) to deliver the copy
paper.
When making more than 20 sets of copies,
operators just input the number of sets and
press the start key. The operator must then
remove every 20 sets of copies stacked in
the 20 bins. Then reset the originals, and
press the start key again. The operator can
have more than 20 sets of copies.
Sorter
stapler/Original
tray
Sorter
stapler/Proof exit
roller
Sorter
stapler/limitless
sort function:
software
For easier operation of the next job or in the

platen mode, the original tray is added to the
top of the proof tray in the sorter stapler.
Sorter
stapler/Punch
waste collection
box

Remarks
When making more than 20 sets of copies,

operators have to divide the job. The
operator also has to input the settings after
each 20 sets of copies is finished.
In the proof mode the proof exit roller (driving

side) contacts the front side (image side) to
deliver the copy paper.
A246/A247/A248
See Operating
Instruictions

The capacity of the punch collection box is as Refer to SM, pg. 9-25 for
follows:
7 k sheets (2 holes/sheet) 5 k sheets (3
holes/sheet)
The operator can selects 4 staple positions

(top, bottom, slant, 2 staple).
User
program/Three
staple position
In addition to the 4 staple positions (top,

bottom, slant, 2 staple), the operator can
select either the 2 or 3 staple position by user
program. When the 3 staple position is
selected, the indication on the operation
panel will be changed from 2-staple to 3staple.
The capacity of the punch waste collection
box has been increased.
20 k sheets (2 holes/sheet)/13 k sheets (3
holes/sheet)
A175/A176/A177
There are 2 solenoids in the grip assembly.
One is used for opening and closing the grip
arms. The other is used for moving the grip
arms. The grip motor is used for moving the
grip arms.
Section/Item
A246/A247/A248
Sorter stapler/Grip There are 2 motors in the grip assembly. One
is used for opening and closing the grip arms,
instead of solenoids. The other (Grip motor)
is used for moving the grip arms. This reduce
the operation noise in staple mode.
SM
31
30
No.
10
A246/A247/A248
A175/A176/A177
The APS sensor emits 2 beams (ultra red
There are three reflective type sensors to
light LED) to scan the original size. To
detect the original size in platen mode.
distinguish between LT and LG paper sizes,
another APS sensor (usual reflective type) is
installed in the US version.
By-pass tray/Thick When the by-pass paper feed key is pressed
paper mode
twice, the copier enters the thick paper mode.
In this mode the by-pass feed clutch turns on
twice, the fusing temperature is controlled in
a higher than normal mode, the continuous
copy speed is reduced, and higher transfer
current is applied to the transfer belt.
Section/Item
Optics/APS
sensor
A246/A247/A248

Remarks
TABLE OF CONTENTS
OVERALL INFORMATION
1. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION ........................................ 1-1
1.1 SPECIFICATION ...................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 MACHINE CONFIGURATION .................................................................. 1-6
1.2.1 COPIER OVERVIEW ....................................................................... 1-6
1.2.2 SYSTEM OVERVIEW ...................................................................... 1-6
1.3 COPY PROCESS AROUND THE DRUM................................................. 1-8
1.4 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT................................................. 1-10
1.5 DRIVE LAYOUT ..................................................................................... 1-12
1.6 PAPER PATH ......................................................................................... 1-13
1.6.1 STANDARD COPYING.................................................................. 1-13
1.6.2 MULTIPLE 2-SIDE COPYING ....................................................... 1-14
1.7 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION ........................................ 1-15
DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS....................................... 2-1
2.1 PROCESS CONTROL.............................................................................. 2-1
2.1.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.2 PROCESS CONTROL DATA INITIAL SETTING............................. 2-4
2.1.3 LATENT IMAGE CONTROL ............................................................ 2-5
2.1.4 IMAGE DENSITY CONTROL ........................................................ 2-12
2.2 DRUM UNIT............................................................................................ 2-18
2.2.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................... 2-18
2.2.2 OPC DRUM CHARACTERISTICS................................................. 2-19
2.2.3 DRUM CHARGE............................................................................ 2-20
2.2.4 ERASE........................................................................................... 2-23
2.2.5 CLEANING..................................................................................... 2-25
2.2.6 QUENCHING ................................................................................. 2-30
2.3 DRUM CLEANING AND TONER-RECYCLING...................................... 2-31
2.3.1 TONER TRANSPORT ................................................................... 2-31
2.3.2 FILTERING .................................................................................... 2-32
2.3.3 PUMP MECHANISM...................................................................... 2-33
2.3.4 DRIVE MECHANISM ..................................................................... 2-34
2.3.5 TONER COLLECTION BOTTLE.................................................... 2-35
2.4 OPTICS .................................................................................................. 2-36
2.4.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................... 2-36
2.4.2 SCANNER DRIVE ......................................................................... 2-37
2.4.3 VERTICAL LENS DRIVE ............................................................... 2-38
2.4.4 HORIZONTAL LENS DRIVE.......................................................... 2-39
2.4.5 HORIZONTAL LENS POSITIONING ............................................. 2-40
2.4.6 3RD SCANNER DRIVE ................................................................. 2-42
SM
A246/A247/A248
2.4.7 OPTICS CONTROL CIRCUIT........................................................ 2-43

2.4.8 AUTOMATIC IMAGE DENSITY CONTROL SYSTEM (ADS) ........ 2-44
2.4.9 MANUAL IMAGE DENSITY CONTROL ........................................ 2-46
2.4.10 UNEVEN LIGHT INTENSITY CORRECTION.............................. 2-47
2.4.11 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION IN PLATEN MODE ...................... 2-48
2.4.12 HALF TONE MODE ..................................................................... 2-50
2.5 DEVELOPMENT..................................................................................... 2-51
2.5.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................... 2-51
2.1.2 DEVELOPMENT MECHANISM ..................................................... 2-52
2.1.3 DRIVE MECHANISM ..................................................................... 2-53
2.1.4 CROSSMIXING ............................................................................. 2-54
2.1.5 DEVELOPMENT BIAS................................................................... 2-55
2.1.6 TONER SUPPLY ........................................................................... 2-60
2.6 IMAGE TRANSFER ................................................................................ 2-64
2.6.1 PRE-TRANSFER LAMP ................................................................ 2-64
2.6.2 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION OVERVIEW ..... 2-65
2.6.3 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION MECHANISM... 2-66
2.6.4 TRANSFER BELT UNIT LIFT MECHANISM ................................. 2-68
2.6.5 PAPER TRANSPORTATION AND BELT DRIVE MECHANISM.... 2-69
2.6.6 TRANSFER BELT CLEANING MECHANISM................................ 2-70
2.6.7 TONER COLLECTION MECHANISM............................................ 2-71
2.6.8 TRANSFER ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER ............................. 2-72
2.7 PAPER FEED ......................................................................................... 2-73
2.7.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................... 2-73
2.7.2 FRR FEED SYSTEM ..................................................................... 2-74
2.7.3 SLIP CLUTCH MECHANISM......................................................... 2-76
2.7.4 FRR FEED DRIVE MECHANISM .................................................. 2-77
2.7.5 SEPARATION ROLLER RELEASE MECHANISM ........................ 2-79
2.7.6 PAPER RETURN MECHANISM .................................................... 2-80
2.7.7 PAPER SKEW PREVENTION MECHANISM ................................ 2-81
2.7.8 PAPER LIFT MECHANISM............................................................ 2-82
2.7.9 PAPER NEAR END/PAPER END DETECTION ............................ 2-85
2.7.10 TANDEM FEED TRAY................................................................. 2-86
2.7.11 PAPER SIZE DETECTION .......................................................... 2-90
2.7.12 VERTICAL TRANSPORT MECHANISM ..................................... 2-91
2.7.13 TRAY POSITIONING MECHANISM ............................................ 2-92
2.7.14 BY-PASS FEED TABLE .............................................................. 2-95
2.7.15 PAPER REGISTRATION ............................................................. 2-98
2.7.16 REGISTRATION DRIVE MECHANISM ....................................... 2-99
2.7.17 GUIDE PLATE RELEASE MECHANISM................................... 2-100
2.8 IMAGE FUSING.................................................................................... 2-101
2.8.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................. 2-101
2.8.2 FUSING ENTRANCE GUIDE ...................................................... 2-102
2.8.3 FUSING DRIVE MECHANISM..................................................... 2-103
2.8.4 FUSING LAMP CONTROL .......................................................... 2-104
2.8.5 INVERTER AND PAPER EXIT .................................................... 2-105
2.8.6 INVERTER AND EXIT DRIVE MECHANISM............................... 2-106
2.9 DUPLEX ............................................................................................... 2-107
2.9.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................. 2-107
A246/A247/A248
ii
SM
2.9.2 DRIVE MECHANISM ................................................................... 2-108

2.9.3 DUPLEX ENTRANCE TO DUPLEX TRAY .................................. 2-109
2.9.4 DUPLEX STACKING ................................................................... 2-110
2.9.5 DUPLEX PICK-UP ROLLER MECHANISM ................................. 2-111
2.9.6 DUPLEX PAPER FEED............................................................... 2-112
2.10 ENERGY STAR COMPLIANT MACHINES
(ALL THE DESTIMATIONS)............................................................... 2-115
2.11 ENERGY SAVING INFORMATION .................................................... 2-117
2.11.1 ABOUT THE ENERGY SAVING FEATURES OF
THIS COPIER............................................................................ 2-117
INSTALLATION
3. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ................................................... 3-1
3.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS .......................................................... 3-1
3.1.1 ENVIRONMENT .............................................................................. 3-1
3.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL ............................................................................ 3-1
3.1.3 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS.............................................. 3-2
3.1.4 POWER REQUIREMENTS.............................................................. 3-2
3.2 COPIER (A246/A247/A248)...................................................................... 3-3
3.2.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ..................................................................... 3-3
3.2.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE........................................................ 3-4
3.2.3 GUIDANCE ROM INSTALLATION
(OPTION: EUROPE VERSION ONLY) ......................................... 3-14
3.2.4 PLATEN COVER (OPTION) INSTALLATION................................ 3-15
3.2.5 KEY COUNTER HOLDER INSTALLATION (OPTION).................. 3-16
3.2.6 ORIGINAL TRAY INSTALLATION (OPTION)................................ 3-18
3.3 UNIVERSAL TRAY (TRAY 2) ................................................................. 3-19
3.4 550 SHEETS PAPER TRAY (TRAY 3) ................................................... 3-20
3.5 TANDEM FEED TRAY PAPER SIZE CHANGE (TRAY 1) ..................... 3-22
3.6 DUAL JOB FEEDER (A610) ................................................................... 3-25
3.6.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ................................................................... 3-25
3.6.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE...................................................... 3-26
3.7 SORTER STAPLER (A821).................................................................... 3-29
3.7.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ................................................................... 3-29
3.7.3 SORTER ADAPTER INSTALLATION (OPTION)........................... 3-34
3.8 20 BIN SORTER STAPLER (A658) (A246 ONLY) ................................. 3-36
3.8.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ................................................................... 3-36
3.9 LCT (A822) ............................................................................................. 3-41
3.9.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ................................................................... 3-41
3.9.3 PAPER SIZE CHANGE ................................................................. 3-46
3.10 TRANSPORTATION REMARKS .......................................................... 3-49
3.10.1 TONER RECYCLING TUBE CLEANING..................................... 3-49
3.10.2 OTHER OPERATIONS ................................................................ 3-49
SM
iii
A246/A247/A248
SERVICE TABLES
4. SERVICE TABLES ...................................................................... 4-1
4.1 GENERAL CAUTIONS ............................................................................. 4-1
4.1.1 DRUM .............................................................................................. 4-1
4.1.2 DRUM UNIT..................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.3 CHARGE CORONA......................................................................... 4-2
4.1.4 OPTICS ........................................................................................... 4-2
4.1.5 ERASE LAMP .................................................................................. 4-3
4.1.6 DEVELOPMENT UNIT .................................................................... 4-3
4.1.7 TRANSFER BELT UNIT .................................................................. 4-3
4.1.8 CLEANING SECTION...................................................................... 4-4
4.1.9 PRE-TRANSFER LAMP .................................................................. 4-4
4.1.10 PAPER FEED ................................................................................ 4-4
4.1.11 FUSING UNIT ................................................................................ 4-4
4.1.12 USED TONER ............................................................................... 4-5
4.2 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE................................................................... 4-6
4.2.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE OPERATION .................................... 4-6
4.2.2 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES ........................................... 4-8
4.2.3 INPUT CHECK............................................................................... 4-45
4.2.4 OUTPUT CHECK........................................................................... 4-48
4.3 USER PROGRAM .................................................................................. 4-51
4.3.1 HOW TO ENTER AND EXIT UP MODE ........................................ 4-51
4.3.2 UP MODE TABLE.......................................................................... 4-51
4.4 TEST POINTS/DIP SWITCHES/LEDS ................................................... 4-53
4.4.1 DIP SWITCHES ............................................................................. 4-53
4.4.2 TEST POINTS ............................................................................... 4-53
4.4.3 FUSES ........................................................................................... 4-54
4.4.4 LEDS ............................................................................................. 4-54
4.5 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS ................................................... 4-54
4.5.1 SPECIAL TOOLS........................................................................... 4-54
4.5.2 LUBRICANTS ................................................................................ 4-54
4.6 TOUCH PANEL DISPLAY POSITION ADJUSTMENT ........................... 4-55
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
5. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE............................... 5-1
5.1 PM TABLE ................................................................................................ 5-1
5.2 PM PROCEDURE .................................................................................... 5-5
5.2.1 CLEARING PM COUNTER.............................................................. 5-5
5.2.2 PM PROCEDURE............................................................................ 5-6
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

6. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT........................................ 6-1
6.1 EXTERIOR AND INNER COVER REMOVAL........................................... 6-1
6.1.1 FRONT COVER............................................................................... 6-1
A246/A247/A248
iv
SM
6.1.2 REAR SIDE...................................................................................... 6-2

6.1.3 INNER COVER ................................................................................ 6-3
6.1.4 RIGHT SIDE .................................................................................... 6-6
6.1.5 LEFT SIDE....................................................................................... 6-7
6.1.6 OPERATION PANEL ....................................................................... 6-8
6.1.7 UPPER COVER............................................................................... 6-9
6.2 PAPER FEED ......................................................................................... 6-10
6.2.1 PAPER TRAY UNIT REMOVAL .................................................... 6-10
6.2.2 PAPER TRAY REMOVAL.............................................................. 6-13
6.2.3 PAPER FEED ROLLERS REPLACEMENT................................... 6-16
6.2.4 PAPER FEED TIMING ADJUSTMENT.......................................... 6-17
6.2.5 PAPER FEED CLUTCH REMOVAL
(1ST TRAY PAPER FEED CLUTCH)........................................... 6-20
6.2.6 REAR FENCE RETURN SENSOR REPLACEMENT .................... 6-24
6.2.7 REAR FENCE HP SENSOR REPLACEMENT .............................. 6-25
6.2.8 BOTTOM PAPER SENSOR REPLACEMENT............................... 6-26
6.2.9 BY-PASS FEED TABLE REMOVAL .............................................. 6-27
6.2.10 BY-PASS FEED ROLLERS REPLACEMENT ............................. 6-28
6.2.11 BY-PASS PAPER SIZE SENSOR REPLACEMENT ................... 6-29
6.2.12 BY-PASS FEED CLUTCH AND GUIDE PLATE SOLENOID
REMOVAL ................................................................................... 6-31
6.2.13 REGISTRATION MOTOR REMOVAL ......................................... 6-33
6.2.14 PAPER DUST CLEANER CLEANING......................................... 6-34
6.2.15 REGISTRATION SENSOR CLEANING....................................... 6-35
6.2.16 UNIVERSAL TRAY SIZE SWITCH REPLACEMENT .................. 6-36
6.2.17 550-SHEET TRAY SET SWITCH REPLACEMENT .................... 6-37
6.2.18 LIFT MOTOR REMOVAL............................................................. 6-38
6.2.19 PAPER FEED MOTOR REMOVAL ............................................. 6-39
6.2.20 COPIER FEED UNIT REMOVAL................................................. 6-40
6.2.21 BOTTOM PLATE LIFT WIRE REPLACEMENT........................... 6-42
6.2.22 550 SHEETS PAPER TRAY (TRAY 3) ........................................ 6-44
6.2.23 TANDEM FEED TRAY PAPER SIZE CHANGE .......................... 6-46
6.3 OPTICS .................................................................................................. 6-49
6.3.1 EXPOSURE GLASS REMOVAL.................................................... 6-49
6.3.2 EXPOSURE LAMP REPLACEMENT ............................................ 6-50
6.3.3 OPTICS THERMOSWITCH REPLACEMENT ............................... 6-52
6.3.4 SCANNER HP SENSOR REPLACEMENT ................................... 6-53
6.3.5 ADS SENSOR REMOVAL ............................................................. 6-54
6.3.6 SCANNER DRIVE MOTOR ........................................................... 6-55
6.3.7 SCANNER DRIVE WIRES REPLACEMENT ................................. 6-56
6.3.8 THIRD SCANNER REMOVAL ....................................................... 6-72
6.3.9 THIRD SCANNER DRIVE MOTOR/HP SENSOR
REPLACEMENT............................................................................ 6-73
6.3.10 LENS HORIZONTAL DRIVE HP SENSOR REPLACEMENT...... 6-75
6.3.11 LENS HORIZONTAL DRIVE MOTOR REPLACEMENT ............. 6-77
6.3.12 APS SENSOR ADJUSTMENT (SENSITIVITY DOWN) ............... 6-79
6.3.13 ARS SENSOR ADJUSTMENT .................................................... 6-80
6.4 TONER RECYCLING ............................................................................. 6-81
6.4.1 TONER RECYCLING UNIT REMOVAL......................................... 6-81
SM
A246/A247/A248
6.4.2 TONER RECYCLING CLUTCH REPLACEMENT ......................... 6-82

6.5 DEVELOPMENT AND TONER SUPPLY................................................ 6-83
6.5.1 DEVELOPMENT UNIT REMOVAL ................................................ 6-83
6.5.2 DEVELOPER REPLACEMENT ..................................................... 6-85
6.5.3 DEVELOPMENT ROLLERS REPLACEMENT .............................. 6-87
6.5.4 TONER DENSITY SENSOR REPLACEMENT .............................. 6-89
6.5.5 TONER BOTTLE DRIVE MOTOR REPLACEMENT ..................... 6-90
6.5.6 DEVELOPMENT FILTER AND PRESSURE RELEASE FILTER
REPLACEMENT............................................................................ 6-91
6.5.7 DEVELOPMENT ROLLER SHAFT CLEANING............................. 6-92
6.6 DRUM UNIT............................................................................................ 6-93
6.6.1 DRUM UNIT REMOVAL AND OPC DRUM REPLACEMENT........ 6-93
6.6.2 QUENCHING LAMP REPLACEMENT .......................................... 6-94
6.6.3 GRID PLATE/CHARGE WIRE/WIRE CLEANER
REPLACEMENT............................................................................ 6-95
6.6.4 ERASE LAMP AND DRUM POTENTIAL SENSOR
REPLACEMENT............................................................................ 6-97
6.6.5 CLEANING BLADE REPLACEMENT ............................................ 6-98
6.6.6 CLEANING BRUSH REPLACEMENT ........................................... 6-99
6.6.7 PICK-OFF PAWL REPLACEMENT ............................................. 6-100
6.6.8 OZONE FILTER REPLACEMENT ............................................... 6-101
6.6.9 PRE-TRANSFER LAMP REMOVAL............................................ 6-102
6.7 TRANSFER BELT UNIT ....................................................................... 6-103
6.7.1 TRANSFER BELT UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ................. 6-103
6.7.2 TRANSFER BELT REPLACEMENT............................................ 6-105
6.7.3 CLEANING BLADE REPLACEMENT .......................................... 6-107
6.8 FUSING UNIT....................................................................................... 6-108
6.8.1 FUSING UNIT REMOVAL ........................................................... 6-108
6.8.2 FUSING THERMISTOR REPLACEMENT ................................... 6-109
6.8.3 FUSING THERMOFUSE REPLACEMENT ................................. 6-110
6.8.4 FUSING LAMP REPLACEMENT................................................. 6-111
6.8.5 OIL SUPPLY/CLEANING ROLLER REPLACEMENT.................. 6-113
6.8.6 OIL SUPPLY CLEANING BRUSH REPLACEMENT ................... 6-114
6.8.7 HOT ROLLER REPLACEMENT .................................................. 6-115
6.8.8 PRESSURE ROLLER AND BEARING REPLACEMENT ............ 6-117
6.8.9 FUSING STRIPPER PAWL REPLACEMENT.............................. 6-119
6.8.10 FUSING PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT........................................ 6-120
6.8.11 PAPER EXIT UNIT REMOVAL .................................................. 6-121
6.8.12 EXIT SENSOR AND FUSING EXIT SENSOR
REPLACEMENT ........................................................................ 6-123
6.8.13 DUPLEX PAPER GUIDE SENSOR AND DUPLEX
TRANSPORT SENSOR REPLACEMENT................................. 6-124
6.8.14 PRESSURE ROLLER CLEANING ROLLER
REPLACEMENT ........................................................................ 6-125
6.9 DUPLEX UNIT ...................................................................................... 6-126
6.9.1 FEED ROLLER REPLACEMENT ................................................ 6-126
6.9.2 SEPARATION BELT REPLACEMENT ........................................ 6-128
6.9.3 DUPLEX UNIT REMOVAL........................................................... 6-131
A246/A247/A248
vi
SM
Rev. 10/2000
6.9.4 SEPARATION CLUTCH/TRANSPORT CLUTCH REMOVAL ......6-132

6.9.5 JOGGER MOTOR REPLACEMENT ............................................6-133
6.10 COPY QUALITY ADJUSTMENT .........................................................6-138
6.10.1 SP ADJUSTMENT MODE ..........................................................6-138
6.10.2 SIDE-TO-SIDE REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT.......................6-140
6.10.3 UNEVEN EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT.......................................6-141
6.10.4 IMAGE DENSITY ADJUSTMENT...............................................6-143
6.10.5 SCANNER HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT...........................................6-144
6.10.6 APS SIZE CALIBRATION...........................................................6-145
6.10.7 FUSING EXIT COVER MAGNET POSITIONING
ADJUSTMENT ...........................................................................6-146
TROUBLESHOOTING
7. TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................ 7-1
7.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS .................................................................7-1
7.1.1 SUMMARY .......................................................................................7-1
7.1.2 EXPOSURE......................................................................................7-3
7.1.3 SCANNER ........................................................................................7-5
7.1.4 LENS MAGNIFICATION...................................................................7-8
7.1.5 OPTICS THERMISTOR..................................................................7-10
7.1.6 CHARGE CORONA UNIT ..............................................................7-10
7.1.7 DEVELOPMENT ............................................................................7-11
7.1.8 PROCESS CONTROL SENSORS .................................................7-12
7.1.9 TRANSFER CURRENT..................................................................7-15
7.1.10 DRUM...........................................................................................7-15
7.1.11 PAPER FEED...............................................................................7-16
7.1.12 DUPLEX .......................................................................................7-19
7.1.13 FUSING ........................................................................................7-20
7.1.14 SYSTEM CONTROL ....................................................................7-22
7.1.15 DUAL JOB FEEDER.....................................................................7-23
7.1.16 SORTER STAPLER .....................................................................7-24
7.1.17 OTHERS.......................................................................................7-28
7.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS ................................................7-30
7.2.1 SENSORS ......................................................................................7-30
7.2.2 SWITCHES.....................................................................................7-34
7.2.3 FUSES............................................................................................7-35
7.3 FIRMWARE HISTORY ............................................................................7-36
DUAL JOB FEEDER A610

1.1 SPECIFICATIONS.....................................................................................8-1
1.2 COMPONENT LAYOUT............................................................................8-2
1.2.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT...........................................8-2
1.2.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT ............................................8-3
1.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION...........................................8-4
SM
vii
A246/A247/A248
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTION.......................................................... 8-6

2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
ORIGINAL PICK-UP MECHANISM .......................................................... 8-6

SEPARATION AND FEED MECHANISM................................................. 8-7
FRICTION BELT DRIVE MECHANISM .................................................... 8-8
ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION .................................................................. 8-9
TRANSPORT MECHANISM................................................................... 8-11
2.5.1 BASIC OPERATION ...................................................................... 8-11
2.5.2 THIN/THICK ORIGINAL MODES................................................... 8-13
2.6 ORIGINAL FEED-OUT MECHANISM..................................................... 8-14
2.7 TRANSPORT BELT LEVELING MECHANISM ...................................... 8-15
2.8 LIFT MECHANISM ................................................................................. 8-16
2.9 SPECIAL FEATURES............................................................................. 8-17
2.9.1 PRESET MODE............................................................................. 8-17
2.9.2 TWO-SIDED ORIGINAL FEED (AUTO REVERSE) MODE........... 8-18
2.9.3 COMBINE TWO ORIGINALS MODE............................................. 8-19
2.10 TIMING CHARTS WITH ORIGINAL MISFEED DETECTION............... 8-22
2.10.1 A4 SIDEWAYS: ONE-SIDED, TWO ORIGINALS ........................ 8-22
2.10.2 COMBINE TWO ORIGINALS MODE........................................... 8-23
2.10.3 A4 SIDEWAYS: TWO-SIDED, TWO ORIGINALS ....................... 8-24
3. SP MODE .................................................................................. 8-25

3.1 SERVICE TABLES ................................................................................. 8-25
3.1.1 DIP SWITCHES AND SWITCH ..................................................... 8-25
3.1.2 VARIABLE RESISTORS................................................................ 8-26
3.1.3 LEDS ............................................................................................. 8-26
3.1.4 FUSE ............................................................................................. 8-26
4. REPLACEMENTS AND ADJUSTMENTS ................................. 8-27

4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
UPPER COVER REMOVAL ................................................................... 8-27

TRANSPORT BELT REPLACEMENT .................................................... 8-28
FEED ROLLER REPLACEMENT ........................................................... 8-30
FRICTION BELT REPLACEMENT ......................................................... 8-31
SENSORS REPLACEMENT .................................................................. 8-32
4.5.1 ORIGINAL SET/FEED, REGISTRATION-1/-2, AND
ORIGINAL WIDTH-1/-2/-3 SENSOR REPLACEMENT.................. 8-32
4.6 FEED-OUT UNIT REMOVAL.................................................................. 8-33
4.7 FEED-OUT MOTOR REPLACEMENT ................................................... 8-34
4.8 INVERTER SOLENOID REMOVAL AND ADJUSTMENT ...................... 8-35
4.9 FEED-OUT SENSOR REPLACEMENT.................................................. 8-36
4.10 INVERTER ROLLER REPLACEMENT................................................ 8-37
4.11 DF POSITION/APS START SENSOR REPLACEMENT ...................... 8-38
4.12 BELT DRIVE MOTOR REPLACEMENT............................................... 8-39
4.13 FEED-IN UNIT REMOVAL.................................................................... 8-40
4.14 FEED-IN MOTOR REPLACEMENT ..................................................... 8-41
4.15 FRICTION BELT MOTOR REPLACEMENT......................................... 8-42
4.16 FEED-IN CLUTCH REPLACEMENT .................................................... 8-43
A246/A247/A248
viii
SM
4.17 STOPPER SOLENOID REPLACEMENT ............................................. 8-44

4.18 VERTICAL REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT ....................................... 8-45
4.18.1 ONE-SIDED THIN ORIGINAL MODE.......................................... 8-45
4.18.2 TWO-SIDED ORIGINAL MODE................................................... 8-47
4.19 SIDE-TO-SIDE REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT................................. 8-49
4.20 ADJUSTIN PLATE REMOVAL ............................................................. 8-50
4.20.1 PREVENTING THE REAR SIDE OF ORIGINALS FROM
PBECOMING DIRTY ................................................................... 8-50
SORTER STAPLER A821

1. OVERALL MAHCINE INFORMATION ........................................ 9-1
1.1 SPECIFICATIONS .................................................................................... 9-1
1.2 COMPONENT LAYOUT ........................................................................... 9-4
1.2.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT .......................................... 9-4
1.2.2 DRIVE LAYOUT............................................................................... 9-5
1.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION .......................................... 9-6
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTION.......................................................... 9-8

2.1 BASIC OPERATION................................................................................. 9-8
2.1.1 NORMAL (PROOF MODE) AND SORT/STACK MODE.................. 9-8
2.1.2 STAPLE MODE ............................................................................. 9-11
2.2 TURN GATE SECTION .......................................................................... 9-13
2.3 BIN DRIVE MECHANISM ....................................................................... 9-14
2.4 BIN HOME POSITION ............................................................................ 9-15
2.5 JOGGER SECTION................................................................................ 9-16
2.6 BIN REAR PLATE DRIVE SECTION...................................................... 9-18
2.7 GRIP ASSEMBLY................................................................................... 9-19
2.7.1 GRIP MOTOR................................................................................ 9-20
2.7.2 GRIP SHIFT MOTOR .................................................................... 9-21
2.8 STAPLE UNIT......................................................................................... 9-22
2.8.1 STAPLE UNIT DRIVE MECHANISM ............................................. 9-22
2.8.2 STAPLER ...................................................................................... 9-23
2.8.3 PUNCH MECHANISM ................................................................... 9-25
2.8.4 STAPLE UNIT PULLED-OUT MECHANISM ................................. 9-26
2.9 JAM DETECTION................................................................................... 9-27
2.10 TIMING CHART .................................................................................... 9-28
2.10.1 SORTER/STAPLER TIMING CHART (PROOF MODE) .............. 9-28
2.10.2 SORTER/STAPLER TIMING CHART (STAPLE MODE) ............. 9-29
3. SP MODE .................................................................................. 9-30

3.1 SERVICE TABLES (MAIN CONTROL BOARD)..................................... 9-30
3.1.1 DIP SWITCHES ............................................................................. 9-30
3.1.2 PUNCH POSITION ........................................................................ 9-31
3.1.3 TEST POINTS ............................................................................... 9-31
3.1.4 FUSES ........................................................................................... 9-31
SM
ix
A246/A247/A248
4. REPLACEMENTS AND ADJUSTMENTS ................................. 9-32

4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
EXTERIOR COVER REMOVAL ............................................................. 9-32

STAPLER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION ..................................... 9-33
JOGGER PLATE REMOVAL AND INSTALLATIOIN.............................. 9-34
BINS REMOVAL..................................................................................... 9-35
MAIN MOTOR REMOVAL ...................................................................... 9-39
GRIP ASSEMBLY REMOVAL ................................................................ 9-40
UPPER GRIP ASSEMBLY REMOVAL ................................................... 9-41
GRIP SHIFT MOTOR REMOVAL........................................................... 9-42
GRIP MOTOR AND SENSORS REMOVAL ........................................... 9-43
4.9.1 GRIP MOTOR/GRIP MOTOR HP SENSOR/
GRIP SHIFT MOTOR HP SENSOR REMOVAL ............................ 9-43
4.10 MAIN CONTROL BOARD REPLACEMENT......................................... 9-44
4.11 STAPLE POSITION ADJUSTMENT ..................................................... 9-45
4.12 PUNCH POSITION ADJUSTMENT STANDARD ................................. 9-46
4.13 HELICAL WHEELS REMOVAL ............................................................ 9-47
4.14 PUNCH UNIT REMOVAL ..................................................................... 9-52
20-BIN SORTER STAPLER A658

1. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION ...................................... 10-1
1.1 SPECIFICATIONS .................................................................................. 10-1
1.2 COMPONENT LAYOUT ......................................................................... 10-2
1.2.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT ........................................ 10-2
1.2.2 DRIVE LAYOUT............................................................................. 10-3
1.2.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION ............................... 10-4
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTION........................................................ 10-5

2.1 BASIC OPERATION............................................................................... 10-5
2.1.1 NORMAL MODE AND SORT/STACK MODE................................ 10-5
2.1.2 STAPLE MODE ............................................................................. 10-7
2.1.3 BIN DRIVE MECHANISM .............................................................. 10-8
2.1.4 BIN HOME POSITION ................................................................... 10-9
2.1.5 JOGGER MECHANISM............................................................... 10-10
2.1.6 GRIP ASSEMBLY........................................................................ 10-11
2.1.7 STAPLER UNIT ........................................................................... 10-12
2.1.8 STAPLER SWITCH ..................................................................... 10-13
2.1.9 PAPER FEED AND MISFEED DETECTION TIMING.................. 10-14
2.1.10 JAM DETECTION ...................................................................... 10-16
3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTEMENT ................................. 10-17

3.1 EXTERIOR COVER REMOVAL ........................................................... 10-17
3.1.1 FRONT COVER........................................................................... 10-17
3.1.2 REAR COVER ............................................................................. 10-17
A246/A247/A248
SM
REV. 05/99
3.1.3 TOP COVER.................................................................................10-17

3.1.4 LOWER COVER ...........................................................................10-17
3.2 GRIP ARM REPLACEMENT .................................................................10-19
3.3 BIN REMOVAL ......................................................................................10-20
3.4 TRANSPORT MOTOR REMOVAL ........................................................10-21
LARGE CAPACITY TRAY A822

1. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION ....................................... 11-1
1.1 SPECIFICATIONS .................................................................................. 11-1
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTION......................................................... 11-4

2.1 MECHANICAL OPERATION .................................................................. 11-4
2.2 PAPER LIFT MECHANISM .................................................................... 11-5
2.3 PAPER END DETECTION ..................................................................... 11-7
3. REPLACEMENTS AND ADJUSTMENTS.................................. 11-8

3.1 EXTERIOR COVER REMOVAL ............................................................. 11-8
3.1.1 FRONT COVER REMOVAL .......................................................... 11-8
3.1.2 REAR LOWER COVER REMOVAL............................................... 11-8
3.1.3 TOP COVER REMOVAL ............................................................... 11-8
3.2 PAPER FEED ROLLERS REPLACEMENT............................................ 11-9
3.3 LCT FEED CLUTCH REMOVAL ...........................................................11-10
3.4 UPPER COVER SWITCHES REMOVAL ..............................................11-11
3.5 SIDE-TO-SIDE REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT ..................................11-12
APPENDIX
1.0 DUPLEX JAM TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE ............................A1
SM
xi
A246/A247/A248
IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICES

PREVENTION OF PHYSICAL INJURY
1. Before disassembling or assembling parts of the copier and peripherals,
make sure that the copier power cord is unplugged.
2. The wall outlet should be near the copier and easily accessible.
3. Note that some components of the copier and the paper tray unit are
supplied with electrical voltage even if the main switch is turned off.
4. If any adjustment or operation check has to be made with exterior covers off
or open while the main switch is turned on, keep hands away from electrified
or mechanically driven components.
5. The inside and the metal parts of the fusing unit become extremely hot while
the copier is operating. Be careful to avoid touching those components with
your bare hands.
6. The copier is not attached to the table. Pushing the copier too heard may
cause it to drop onto the floor. While moving the copier, push the table.
7. When the main switch is tuned on, the machine will suddenly start turning to
perform the developer initialization. Keep hand away from any mechanical
and electrical components during this period.
HEALTH SAFETY CONDITIONS

1. Never operate the copier without the ozone filters installed.
2. Always replace the ozone filters with the specified ones at the specified
intervals.
3. Toner and developer are non-toxic, but if you get either of them in your eyes
by accident, it may cause temporary eye discomfort. Try to remove with eye
drops or flush with water as first aid. If unsuccessful, get medical attention.
OBSERVANCE OF ELECTRICAL SAFETY STANDARDS

1. The copier and its peripherals must be installed and maintained by a
customer service representative who has completed the training course on
those models.
CAUTION: The RAM board on the main control board has a lithium battery
which can explode if replaced incorrectly. Replace the RAM board
only with an identical one. The manufacturer recommends replacing
the entire RAM board. Do not recharge or burn this battery. Used
RAM board must be handled in accordance with local regulations.
SM
A246/A247/A248
SAFETY AND ECOLOGICAL NOTES FOR DISPOSAL

1. Do not incinerate the toner cartridge or the used toner. Toner dust may ignite
suddenly when exposed to open flame.
2. Dispose of used toner, developer, and organic photoconductor according to
local regulations. (These are non-toxic supplies.)
3. Dispose of replaced parts in accordance with local regulations.
4. When keeping used RAM boards in order to dispose of them later, do not put
more than 100 RAM boards per sealed box. Storing larger numbers or not
sealing them apart may lead to chemical reactions and heat build-up.
A246/A247/A248
SM
INSTALLATION
SERVICE TABLES
TROUBLESHOOTING
TAB
POSITION 7
TAB
POSITION 8
TAB
POSITION 2
20 BIN SORTER STAPLER A658
TAB
POSITION 3
TAB
POSITION 4
APPENDIX
TAB
POSITION 5
SORTER STAPLER A821
TAB
POSITION 6
OVERALL INFORMATION
TAB
POSITION 1
Rev. 05/99
OVERALL INFORMATION
SPECIFICATION
Overall
Information
1. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION

1.1 SPECIFICATION
Configuration:
Console
Copy Process:
Dry electrostatic transfer system
Toner Supply Control:
Fuzzy Control
Photoconductor:
OPC drum
Originals:
Sheet/Book
Original Size:
Maximum A3/11" x 17"
Original Alignment:
Left rear corner
Copy Paper Size:
Maximum A3/11" x 17" (Tray & By-pass)

A4/81/2" x 11" (Tandem LCT)
Minimum A5/51/2" x 81/2" (Tray)
A4/81/2" x 11" (Tandem LCT)
A6/51/2" x 81/2" (By-pass)
Duplex Copying:
Maximum A3/11" x 17"

Minimum A5/51/2" x 81/2" (Sideways)
Copy Paper Weight:
Paper tray:
52 ~ 128 g/m2, 14 ~ 34 lb
By-pass feed table: 52 ~ 200 g/m2, 14 ~ 53 lb
Duplex copying:
64 ~ 104 g/m2, 17 ~ 24 lb
Reproduction Ratios:
4 Enlargement and 5 Reduction + Create Margin

(93%)
Enlargement
Full Size
Reduction
SM
1-1
A4/A3 Version
200%
141%
122%
115%
100%
82%
75%
71%
65%
50%
LT/LDG Version
200%
155%
129%
121%
100%
85%
77%
74%
65%
50%
A246/A247/A248
SPECIFICATION
Power Source:
115 V, 60 Hz, more than 20 A (for N.A)

220 ~ 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz, more than 10 A (for
Europe and Asia)
Power Consumption:
- A246 copier Warm up

Stand-by*2
Low Power mode*2
Copying
Maximum
Off-mode
Copier only
1.20 kVA
0.22 kVA
0.185 kVA
1.40 kVA
1.70 kVA
0.001 kVA
Full system*1
1.22 kVA
0.24 kVA
0.205 kVA
1.40 kVA
1.75 kVA
0.001 kVA
Copier only
1.20 kVA
0.22 kVA
0.21 kVA
1.50 kVA
1.70 kVA
0.001 kVA
Full system*1
1.22 kVA
0.24 kVA
0.23 kVA
1.50 kVA
1.75 kVA
0.001 kVA
Copier only
1.20 kVA
0.22 kVA
0.21 kVA
1.60 kVA
1.70 kVA
0.001 kVA
Full system*1
1.22 kVA
0.24 kVA
0.23 kVA
1.60 kVA
1.75 kVA
0.001 kVA

Stand-by*2
Low Power mode*2
Copying
Maximum
Off-mode

Stand-by*2
Low Power mode*2
Copying
Maximum
Off-mode
*1Full System:
Mainframe with dual job feeder, sorter stapler
and 3,500-sheet large capacity tray
2
* : When the anti-condensation heaters are off.
A246/A247/A248
1-2
SM
Noise Emission:
Sound Pressure Level:

The measurements are made according to
ISO7779
- A246 copier Sound pressure level
(The measurements are made according to ISO 7779 at

the operator position.)
Stand-by
Copying
Sound power level
Copier only
Less than 34 dB (A)
Less than 57 dB (A) (average)
(The measurements are made according to ISO 7779.)

Stand-by
Copying
Copier only
Less than 48 dB (A)

Stand-by
Copying
Sound power level
Copier only
Less than 34 dB (A)

Stand-by
Copying
Copier only
Less than 51 dB (A)

Stand-by
Copying
Sound power level

Stand-by
Copying
SM
Copier only
Less than 36 dB (A)
1-3
Copier only
Less than 54 dB (A)
A246/A247/A248
Overall
Information
SPECIFICATION
SPECIFICATION
Dimensions:
Copier only
Copier with dual job feeder, sorter stapler,
and 3,500-sheet large capacity tray
Copier with dual job feeder, sorter stapler with
punch, and 3,500-sheet large capacity tray
Width
690 mm
27.2"
1,659 mm
65.4"
1,659 mm
65.4"
Depth
698 mm
27.6"
698 mm
27.6"
698 mm
27.6"
Height
980 mm
38.6"
1,113 mm
43.9"
1,113 mm
43.9"
Weight:
Copier only: (Without the optional platen cover

= Approximately 2 kg)
Approximately 175 kg
Zoom:
From 50% to 200% in 1% steps
Copying Speed:
A4/LT (sideways) A3/DLT
B4/LG
51 (A4 others)
A246 copier 50 (A4/in France)
50 (LT)
26
32
A247 copier
60
31
38
A248 copier
70
36
44
Warm-up Time:
Less than 5 minutes (A246 copier, 20C)

Less than 5.5 minutes (A247/A248 copier, 20C)
First Copy Time:

(A4/51/2" x 11" sideways
from the 1st feed station)
3.1 seconds (A246 copier)

2.6 seconds (A247/A248 copiers)
Copy Number Input:
Number keys, 1 to 999 (count up or count down)
Manual Image Density

Selection:
9 steps
Automatic Reset:
1 minute standard setting; can also be set from 1

second to 999 seconds or no auto reset.
Copy Paper Capacity:
Toner Replacement:
By-pass feed table: approx.

50 sheets
Paper tray:
approx. 550 sheets
Tandem LCT tray: approx. 1,550 x 2=3100
sheets
1,160 g/cartridge
Developer Replacement:
1 Kg bag, black only.
A246/A247/A248
1-4
SM
Optional Equipment:
Platen cover (A528-04)

Dual job feeder (A610)
20 bin sorter stapler (Floor type) (A821-17:
Ricoh, -22: NRG, -15: Savin/Ges U.S.A. 26:
Infotec)
3,500-sheet Large capacity tray (A822)
Receiving tray (A446-05)
Key Counter Bracket D (A509-03)
20 bin sorter Stapler (Floor type) with punch
(A821-57 (3 holes), -67 (2 holes): Ricoh, -62:
NRG, -66: Infotec, -55: Savin/Ges U.S.A.)
Guidance ROM KIT Type U (A870) (Language)
Editing sheet (spare part)
Original Tray type F (A430-07)
Sorter Adapter type L (A902-19)
20 bin sorter stapler (Hunging type) (A658)
(A246 copier only)
When the 20 bin sorter stapler (A658) is installed onto A246 copier, sorter adapter
type L is required.
SM
1-5
A246/A247/A248
Overall
Information
SPECIFICATION
Rev. 06/99
MACHINE CONFIGURATION
1.2 MACHINE CONFIGURATION

1.2.1 COPIER OVERVIEW
- A246/A247/A248 copiers -
50
Tandem LCT
(including two 1,550-sheet LCT
Two 550-sheet paper trays
Optional 3,500-sheet large capacity tray
By-pass (approx. 50 sheets)
1,550 x 2
(3,500)
550
550
A246V500.WMF
1.2.2 SYSTEM OVERVIEW

DJF
Hanging S/S
S/S with Punch
Original Tray
S/S
Tandem LCT
Hanging Sorter Stapler
(A658) (A246 only)
Universal
Fixed
3,500 sheets
LCT
Floor type Sorter Stapler (A821-17, -15, -22, -26)

Floor type Sorter Stapler with Punch (A821-57, -67, -55, -62, -66)
Note: Sorter Adapter Type L (A902) needed for ST29 (A658)
A246/A247/A248
1-6
A246V501.WMF
SM
Overall
Information
MEMO
SM
1-7
A246/A247/A248
COPY PROCESS AROUND THE DURM
1.3 COPY PROCESS AROUND THE DURM

11
4
5
10
9
7
8
A246V502.WMF
1. OPC DRUM
The organic photo conductive (OPC) drum (100 mm diameter) has high resistance
in the dark and low resistance under light.
2. DRUM CHARGE
In the dark, the charge corona unit gives a uniform negative charge to the OPC
drum. The charge remains on the surface of the drum. The amount of negative
charge on the drum is proportional to the negative grid bias voltage applied to the
grid plate on the charge corona unit.
3. EXPOSURE
An image of the original is reflected to the OPC drum surface via the optics section.
The charge on the drum surface is dissipated in direct proportion to the intensity of
the reflected light, thus producing an electrical latent image on the drum surface.
The amount of charge remaining as a latent image on the drum depends on the
exposure lamp intensity controlled by the exposure lamp voltage.
4. ERASE
The erase lamp illuminates the areas of the charged drum surface that will not be
used for the copy image. The resistance of drum in the illuminated areas drops and
the charge on those areas dissipates.
A246/A247/A248
1-8
SM
5. DRUM POTENTIAL SENSOR

The drum potential sensor detects the electric potential on the drum to compensate
image processing elements.
6. DEVELOPMENT
Positively charged toner is attracted to the negatively charged areas of the drum,
thus developing the latent image. (The positive triboelectric charge of the toner is
caused by friction between the carrier and toner particles.)
The development bias voltage applied to the development roller shaft controls two
things:
1) The threshold level if toner is attracted to the drum or toner remains on the
development roller.
2) The amount of toner to be attracted to the drum.
The higher the negative development bias voltage is, the less toner is attracted to
the drum surface.
7. PRE-TRANSFER LAMP (PTL)
The PTL illuminates the drum to remove almost all the negative charge from the
exposed areas of the drum. This makes image transfer easier.
8. IMAGE TRANSFER
Paper is fed to the drum surface at the proper timing so as to align the copy paper
and the developed image on the drum surface. Then, a negative charge is applied
to the reverse side of the copy paper by the transfer belt, producing an electrical
force which pulls the toner particles from the drum surface onto the copy paper. At
the same time, the copy paper is electrically attracted to the transfer belt.
9. PAPER SEPARATION
Paper separates from the OPC drum by the electrical attraction between the paper
and the transfer belt. The pick-off pawls help to separate the paper from the drum.
10. CLEANING
The cleaning brush removes toner remaining on the drum after image transfer and
the cleaning blade scrapes off all the remaining toner.
11. QUENCHING
Light from the quenching lamp electrically neutralizes the charge potential of the
drum surface.
SM
1-9
A246/A247/A248
Overall
Information
COPY PROCESS AROUND THE DURM
MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
1.4 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT

3
10
11
12
2
13
14
15
16
39
17
38
18
37
36
19
20
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
41
40
23
22
21
A246V503.WMF
24
25
26
27
28
A246/A247/A248
1-10
A246V504.WMF
SM
Overall
Information
1. 3rd Mirror
22. Registration Rollers
2. 2nd Mirror
23. Transfer Belt
3. 1st Mirror
24. Vertical Transport Rollers
4. Exposure Lamp
25. Tandem LCT Tray
5. Lens
26. Universal Tray (550-sheet)
6. Cleaning Brush
27. 550-sheet Tray
7. Cleaning Blade
28. Toner Collection Bottle
8. Quenching Lamp
29. Transfer Belt Cleaning Blade
9. Charge Corona Unit
30. Hot Roller
10. OPC Drum
31. Pressure Roller
11. 6th Mirror
32. Jogger Fences
12. 4th Mirror
33. Duplex Positioning Roller
13. 5th Mirror
34. Duplex Pick-up Roller
14. Erase Unit
35. Duplex Feed Roller
15. Drum Potential Sensor
36. Separation Belt
16. Toner Hopper
37. Junction Gate
17. Development Unit
38. Exit Rollers
18. Pre-Transfer Lamp
39. Optics Cooling Fan
19. Pick-up Roller
40. Transfer Belt Cleaning Bias Roller
20. Feed Roller
41. Transfer Belt Bias Roller Blade
21. Separation Roller
SM
1-11
A246/A247/A248
DRIVE LAYOUT
1.5 DRIVE LAYOUT

9
10
4
5
A246V505.WMF
Main Motor
1. To OPC Drum
Scanner Drive Motor
2. To Scanner Unit
Fusing/Duplex Drive Motor
3. To Transfer Belt Unit
Paper Feed Motor
4. To Paper Exit Unit
Toner Collection Motor
5. To Fusing Unit
Registration Motor
6. To Duplex Unit
By-pass Feed Motor
7. To Cleaning Unit
By-pass Feed Clutch
8. To Paper Feed Units
Development Drive Motor
9. To Toner Hopper
10. To Development Unit
A246/A247/A248
1-12
SM
PAPER PATH
Overall
Information
1.6 PAPER PATH

1.6.1 STANDARD COPYING
[D]
[C]
[F]
[B]
[A]
[E]
[A]
A246V506.WMF
Paper feed begins from the exterior LCT, by-pass feed table or paper feed stations
in the paper tray unit. The copy paper then follows one of two paths inside the
copier. The path followed depends on which mode the operator has selected. For
copy processing, all sheets follow the same paths from the paper feed mechanism
[A] through the registration rollers [B], transfer belt [C], and fusing unit [D]. After
that, copies are delivered to the sorter bins [E] or proof tray [F], however, 2 sided
copies are diverted for further processing.
SM
1-13
A246/A247/A248
PAPER PATH
1.6.2 MULTIPLE 2-SIDE COPYING

a. Front Side
[A]
[D]
[B]
[C]
A246V507.WMF
b. Rear Side
A246V508.WMF
In this mode the junction gate [A] directs sheets exiting the fusing unit to the duplex
tray entrance. After that, all sheets follow the path through the duplex entrance
rollers [B].
After all front side copying is fed, the sheets on the duplex tray are fed in order
from the bottom to the top and follow the path through the duplex feed mechanism
and vertical transport rollers [C] to the registration rollers [D]. After that, these
sheets follow the same path as standard copying from the registration rollers to the
sorter.
A246/A247/A248
1-14
SM
1.7 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

Refer to the electrical component layout on the reverse side of the point-to-point
diagram for the location of the components using the symbols and index numbers.
Symbol
Motors
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
M7
M8
M9
M10
M11
M12
M13
M14
M15
M16
M17
M18
M19
M20
M21
M22
M23
M24
SM
Name
Scanner
3rd Scanner
Lens Horizontal
Lens Vertical
Main
Development
Toner Bottle
Charge Wire
Cleaner
Fusing/Duplex
Toner Collection
Toner Recycle
Paper Feed
1st Lift
2nd Lift
3rd Lift
By-pass Feed
Registration
Rear Fence
Jogger
Optics Cooling Fan
Optics Board
Cooling Fan
Drum Cooling Fan
Duplex Cooling Fan
Exhaust Fan
Function
Index No.
Drives the 1st and 2nd scanners.

Drives the 3rd scanner.
Shifts the lens vertical position.
Shifts the lens horizontal position.
Drives the main unit components.
Drives the development unit.
Rotates the toner bottle to supply toner to
toner hopper.
Drives the charge wire cleaner to clean
the charge wire.
Drives the fusing unit, the duplex unit,
and the exit rollers.
Transports the collected toner in the
toner recycle unit for toner recycle.
Drives the air pump to send recycled
toner to the development unit.
Drives all feed and transport rollers in the
paper tray unit.
Raises and lowers the bottom plate in the
1st paper tray.
Raises the bottom plate in the 2nd paper
tray.
Raises the bottom plate in the 3rd paper
tray.
Drives the by-pass feed rollers.
Drives the registration rollers.
Moves the paper stack in the left tandem
tray to the right tandem tray.
Drives the jogger fences to square the
paper stack in the duplex unit.
Removes heat from the optics unit.
Removes heat from around the optics
board.
Cools the drum unit to removes heat
from around the duplex unit.
Cools the paper on the duplex tray to
reduce the heat around the drum.
Removes heat from around the fusing
unit.
5
11
10
19
120
121
1-15
133
30
119
126
129
94
95
97
98
124
123
55
43
21
118
106
114
104
A246/A247/A248
Overall
Information
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

Symbol
Name
Magnetic Clutches
Toner Supply
MC1
MC2
MC3
MC4
MC5
MC6
Toner Recycling
1st Feed
2nd Feed
3rd Feed
By-pass Feed
Duplex Transport
MC7
MC8
Duplex Feed
Switches
SW1
Main
Front Door Safety
SW2
SW3
SW4
SW5
SW6
Toner Collection
Bottle
2nd Paper Size
3rd Tray Set
By-pass Table
Function
Turns the toner supply roller to supply
toner to the development unit.
Drives the toner recycling unit.
Starts paper feed from tray 1.
Starts paper feed from the by-pass table.
Drives the duplex transport rollers to
transport the paper to the vertical
transport rollers.
Starts paper feed out of the duplex tray
to the duplex transport rollers.
Provides power to the copier.

Cuts the power line and detects is the
front door is opened or not.
Detects if the toner collection bottle is set
or not.
Determines what size paper is in the 2nd
paper tray.
Detects if the 3rd tray is set or not.
Detects if by-pass feed table is open or
closed.
Index No.
122
125
75
79
82
64
39
38
117
115
128
100
99
62
Solenoids
SOL1
SOL2
SOL3
SOL4
SOL5
SOL6
SOL7
SOL8
Transfer Belt
Positioning
1st Pick-up
2nd Pick-up
3rd Pick-up
By-pass Pick-up
1st Separation
Roller
2nd Separation
Roller
3rd Separation
Roller
Right Tandem Lock
SOL9
SOL10
Left Tandem Lock
A246/A247/A248
Controls the up-down movement of the

transfer belt unit.
pick-up roller in tray 1.
pick-up roller for by-pass feed.
separation roller in tray 1.
Locks the right tandem tray during
transporting the paper from right tray to
left tray.
Locks the left tandem tray so that it can
be separated from the right tandem tray.
1-16
34
74
78
83
63
76
81
84
96
101
SM
SOL11
SOL12
SOL13
SOL14
SOL15
SOL13
Name
Front Side Fence
Rear Side Fence
Duplex Positioning
Pressure Arm
Guide Plate
Junction Gate
Function
Controls the open and close movement
of the front side fence.
Controls the open and close movement
of the rear side fence.
positioning roller.
Presses the paper on the duplex tray
against the duplex feed rollers.
Opens the guide plate when a paper
misfeed occurs around this area.
Moves the junction gate to direct copies
to the duplex tray or to the paper exit.
Index No.
54
49
40
44
67
60
Sensors
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
S9
S10
Scanner HP
3 rd Scanner HP
Lens Vertical HP
Lens Horizontal HP
APS
Auto Image Density
Drum Potential
Toner Density
Image Density
Toner Near End
1st Paper Feed
S11
2nd Paper Feed
S12
3rd Paper Feed
S13
S14
S15
S16
S17
SM
1st Lift
2nd Lift
3rd Lift
1st Paper End
Informs the CPU when the 1st and 2nd

scanners are at the home position.
Informs the CPU when the 3rd scanner is
at the home position.
Informs the CPU when the lens is at the
full-size position.
Informs the CPU when the lens is at the
horizontal home position.
Detects original size.
Senses the background density of the
original.
Detects the drum surface potential.
Detects the amount of toner in the
developer.
Detects the density of the ID sensor
pattern on the drum.
Detects the toner end condition.
Controls the 1st paper feed clutch off/on
timing and the 1st pick-up solenoid off
timing.
Controls the 2nd paper feed clutch off/on
timing and the 2nd pick-up solenoid off
timing.
Controls the 3rd paper feed clutch off/on
timing and the 3rd pick-up solenoid off
timing.
Detects when the paper in tray 1 is at the
correct height for paper feed.
Informs the CPU when tray 1 runs out of
paper.
1-17
2
9
7
12
20
6
31
37
32
36
91
89
87
93
80
85
92
A246/A247/A248
Overall
Information
Symbol

Symbol
S18
S19
S20
S21
S22
S23
Name
2nd Paper End
3rd Paper End
By-pass Paper End
1st Paper Near End
2nd Paper Near
End
3rd Paper Near End
Right Tray Down
S24
S25
S26
S27
S28
S29
S30
S31
S32
S33
S34
Right Tray Paper

Front Side Fence
Open
Front Side Fence
Close
Rear Side Fence
Open
Rear Side Fence
Close
Rear Fence HP
Rear Fence Return
Left Tandem Paper
Paper Guide
Duplex Entrance
Duplex Transport
S35
Duplex Exit
S36
S37
S38
Duplex Paper End

Jogger HP
Vertical Transport
S39
S40
Guide Plate
Position
A246/A247/A248
Function
Index No.
90
paper.
88
paper.
Informs the CPU that there is no paper in
65
the by-pass feed table.
Informs the CPU when the paper in tray
53
1 is almost finished.
77
86
Informs the CPU when the bottom plate
is completely lowered, to stop the 1st tray
52
lift motor.
Detects whether there is paper in the
50
right tandem tray.
Informs the CPU when the front side
58
fence is open.
Informs the CPU when the front side
57
fence is close.
Informs the CPU when the rear side
48
fence is open.
Informs the CPU when the rear side
47
fence is close.
Informs the CPU when the tandem tray
59
rear fence is in the home position.
Informs the CPU when the tandem tray
51
rear fence is in the return position.
Informs the CPU when the left tandem
56
tray runs out the paper.
Detects the misfeeds.
61
Detects the leading edge of the paper to
71
determine duplex feed clutch off timing.
control the jogger motor and the
45
positioning solenoid on timing.
determine duplex transport clutch on
42
timing.
Detects the paper in the duplex tray.
46
Detects if the duplex jogger fences at the
41
home position or not.
determine the paper feed timing of next
69
sheet.
Detects whether the registration guide
68
plate is closed.
1-18
SM
S41
S42
S43
S44
S45
Name
Registration
Fusing Exit
Exit
Auto Response
Toner Overflow
S47
Original Length
(LT version only)
Platen Cover
Position 1 (Option)
S48
Platen Cover
Position 2 (Option)
S46
PCBs
PCB1
PCB2
PCB3
PCB4
PCB5
PCB6
PCB7
PCB8
PCB9
Main
AC Drive
DC Power Supply
Optic Control
Paper Feed Control
Operation Panel
Control
Left Operation
Panel
Right Operation
Panel
By-pass Paper Size
Function
Detects misfeeds and controls the
registration roller on-off timing.
Detects misfeeds.
Detects misfeeds.
Returns the display from the screen
saver.
Detects when the toner collection bottle
is full.
Detects the original length.
Inform the CPU that the platen cover is in
the up or down position (related to
APS/ARE function).
Inform the CPU that the platen cover is in
the up or down position to detect if the
original has been removed or not.
Controls all machine functions.

Provides ac power to the fusing lamp and
exposure lamp.
Provides dc power.
Controls all optics components.
Controls all components in the paper
bank.
Controls LEDs and LCD on the operation
panel.
Interfaces the LEDs, keys, and the auto
response sensor on the left operation
panel.
Interfaces the LEDs and keys on the right
operation panel.
Inform the CPU what size of the paper is
in the by-pass feed table.
Index No.
70
72
73
17
127
8
3
107
102
110
105
109
15
18
13
66
Lamps
L1
L2
L3
L4
L5
SM
Exposure Lamp
Fusing Lamps
Quenching
Erase
Pre-transfer
Applies high intensity light to the original

for exposure.
Provide heat to the hot roller.
Neutralizes any charge remaining on the
drum surface after cleaning.
Discharge the drum outside of the image
area.
Reduce the charge on the drum surface
before transfer.
1-19
23
24
28
29
33
A246/A247/A248
Overall
Information
Symbol

Symbol
Name
Power Packs
Charge
PP1
Development
PP2
Transfer
PP3
Function
Provides high voltage for the charge
corona wires and the grid plate.
Interfaces the QL, PTL, and charge wire
cleaner motor control signals.
Provides high voltage for the
development unit.
Interfaces the transfer p.p. and the
charge p.p. signals.
Provides high voltage for the transfer
belt.
Interfaces the transfer belt positioning
solenoid control signal.
Index No.
27
108
35
Heaters
H1
Optic
Anti-condensation
H2
Transfer
Anti-condensation
H3
H4
Upper Tray
Lower Tray
Thermistors
Optic
TH1
TH2
TH3
Fusing
Drum
Turns on when the main switch is off to

prevent moisture from forming on the
optics.
prevent moisture from forming on the
optics.
keep paper dry in the paper tray.
keep paper dry in the paper tray.
Monitors the temperature of the optics

cavity.
Detects the temperature of the hot roller.
Monitors the temperature of the OPC
drum.
16
134
131
130
1
25
32
Others
CB1
CO1
CO2
LA1
LCD1
NF1
RA1
TF1
Circuit Breaker
Total Counter
Key Counter
Lightening Arrestor
LCD
Noise Filter
Main Power Relay
Fusing Thermofuse
A246/A247/A248
Provides back-up high current protection

for the electrical components.
Keeps track of the total number of copies
made.
Keeps track of the total number of copies
made when the key counter is set.
Removes current surges from the ac
input lines.
Displays the operation menus and
messages.
Remove the electrical noise.
Controls main power.
Opens the fusing lamp circuit if the fusing
unit overheats.
1-20
113
132
116
14
112
103
26
SM
TR1
TS1
SM
Name
Transformer
(220 V version only)
Optics
Thermoswitch
Function
Makes power for the exposure lamp.
Index No.
111
Opens the exposure lamp circuit if the

optics unit overheats.
1-21
22
A246/A247/A248
Overall
Information
Symbol
PROCESS CONTROL
2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS

2.1 PROCESS CONTROL
Detailed
Descriptions
2.1.1 OVERVIEW
Original Scale
Image Density Control (Fuzzy Control)
ADS Pattern
VD Pattern
Latent Image Control

VL Pattern
VD Pattern
VL Pattern
Original
Exposure Glass
Lamp Voltage
Exposure Control
Charge Control
Grid Voltage
Erase Lamp
QL
Drum Potential Sensor
Toner Supply On Time

Development Bias
Drum Thermistor
TD Sensor
Paper
ID Sensor
Image Density Control

(Fuzzy Control)
Toner Supply Control
Main PCB
A246D529.WMF
This model uses two process control methods. One compensates for variation in
the drum potential (latent image control) and the other controls the toner
concentration and toner supply amount (image density control).
SM
2-1
A246/A247/A248
PROCESS CONTROL

QL
Exposure
Black White
Charge
Erase
Potential Sensor
Vo
VD
VL
VR
Drum
A246D550.WMF
The figure shows drum potential changes during the copy process.
VO :
The drum potential just after charging the drum.
VD (Dark Potential):
The drum potential just after exposing the black

pattern (VD pattern)
VL (Light Potential):
The drum potential just after exposing the white

pattern (VL pattern)
VR (Residual Voltage):
The drum potential just after the exposure to the

erase lamp.
After long usage following installation or a PM, drum potential will gradually
increase due to the following factors:
Dirty optics or exposure lamp deterioration
A dirty charge corona casing and grid plate
A change in drum sensitivity
In this copier, the drum potential sensor detects the change in drum potential and
controls the following items to maintain good copy quality:
The grid-bias voltage
The exposure lamp voltage
The development bias voltage.
A drum thermistor detects the drum temperature and acquires data. The thermistor
uses this data to control the above voltages. It is impossible to explain this process
simply because it is controlled by methods developed in our laboratories using an
artificial neural network.
A246/A247/A248
2-2
SM
PROCESS CONTROL
Image Density Control
Data from the TD sensor maintains the toner concentration in the developer at a
constant level. However, the image on the OPC drum varies due to the variation in
toner chargeability (influenced by the environment), even if the toner concentration
is constant. Toner concentration changes to maintain the image density on the
OPC drum because of compensation by the ID sensor.
The following items are controlled to maintain a constant copy image density:
Toner supply clutch on time
Toner supply level data (VREF) of the TD sensor
SM
2-3
A246/A247/A248
Detailed
Descriptions
The following sensors control image density:

Toner Density sensor (TD sensor)
Image Density sensor (ID sensor)
PROCESS CONTROL
2.1.2 PROCESS CONTROL DATA INITIAL SETTING

The following flow chart shows the steps performed when turning on the machine
while the hot roller temperature is below 100C. This initializes all the process
control settings.
A246/A247/A248
2-4
SM
PROCESS CONTROL
2.1.3 LATENT IMAGE CONTROL
Detailed
Descriptions
Drum Potential Sensor Calibration
[A]
Case
Sensor
Output
Amp.
Drum
[B]
A246D554.WMF
Main PCB
A246D552.WMF
The potential sensor [A] for the drum is just above the development unit. The
sensor has a detector that detects the strength of the electric field from the electric
potential on the drum. The output of the sensor depends on the strength of the
electric field.
Since environmental conditions affect sensor output, such as temperature and
humidity, the sensor output is calibrated during process control data initialization.
The High Voltage Control PCB [B] has two relay contacts. Usually RA602 grounds
the drum. However, during the initial setting, the main PCB turns RA601 on and
RA602 off and applies the voltage to the drum shaft.
By measuring the output of the drum potential sensor when 100 V and 800 V are
applied to the drum, the sensor output is calibrated automatically. (The machine
recognizes the relationship between actual drum potential and the potential sensor
output.) To prevent toner attraction during potential sensor calibration, an
equivalent bias voltage (-100V and -800V) is applied to the development rollers.
SM
2-5
A246/A247/A248
PROCESS CONTROL
Drum Conditioning
When the fusing temperature reaches 180C, the machine starts the drum
conditioning process. In this mode, the main motor, main charge corona, erase
lamp and development bias are activated for about 30 seconds and drum
sensitivity and residual voltage (VR) are stabilized, as in continuous copy runs.
VSG Adjustment
During drum conditioning, the ID sensor checks the reflectivity of the bare drum
and calibrates the output of the ID sensor to 4 0.2 V.
VR Measurement
[-V]
VO
VD
New Drum
Used Drum
Drum
Potential
VL
VR
Dark
Original Density
Light
A246D561.WMF
The above figure shows the relationship between the drum potential and the
original density. This relationship must persist to maintain copy quality.
Since this relationship tends to change to the one represented by the dotted line by
various factors, some compensation is necessary.
Increasing the exposure lamp voltage cannot compensate for the residual voltage
(VR). Therefore, other means are required to compensate for VR change.
After drum conditioning the main control PCB turns on the erase lamps. Then the
drum potential is checked by the potential sensor. This measured drum potential is
in fact VR. This VR is used as the standard for the VD and VL corrections.
NOTE: In the figure above, the residual voltage (VR) for the new drum is 0 V.
Actually, there is some residual voltage even on a new drum.
A246/A247/A248
2-6
SM
PROCESS CONTROL
VD Correction
Exposure
Glass
VD
A246D566.WMF
VR
VD Compensated
Drum
Potential
-770
After many copies

New Drum
VR
Dark
Original Density
Light
A246D568.WMF
The drum potential just after the black pattern (VD Pattern) is exposed (VD: Dark
Potential) tends to lower during drum life due to a decrease in the capacity of the
drum to carry a charge.
To check the actual VD, the first scanner moves to the home position, exposing the
VD pattern (Black) stuck on the bottom side of the exposure glass bracket on the
drum.
The main control board measures VD using the drum potential sensor and adjusts
it to a target value by adjusting the grid-bias voltage (VGRID).
On the other hand, there is a change of the drum residual voltage (VR), so that the
target VO voltage is compensated as follows:
Target VD Value: VD = VR + (770)
The adjusted grid-bias voltage (VGRID) remains in memory until the next process
control data initialization.
SM
2-7
A246/A247/A248
Detailed
Descriptions
VD Pattern
[-V]
PROCESS CONTROL
VL Correction
Exposure
[-V]
Glass
A246D566.WMF
VD
VL Pattern
VR
Drum
Potential
Only VD Compensated
VL
VD and VL Compensated
-770
VR
New Drum
-140
VR
Dark
Original Density
Light
A246D594.WMF
Dirty optics and/or exposure lamp deterioration decreases the intensity of the light
that reaches the drum. In addition to this, the drum sensitivity also changes during
the life of the drum. These factors change the drum potential just after white pattern
exposure (VL: Light Potential).
To check the actual VL, the lens moves to the VL pattern check position. This
exposes the VL pattern (White) mounted underneath the original scale on the
drum.
The main control board measures VL using the drum potential sensor and adjusts it
to a target value by adjusting the exposure lamp voltage (VLAMP).
The residual voltage (VR) change also affects VL, so that VL's target voltage is
compensated as follows:
Target VL Value: VL = VR + (140)
The adjusted exposure lamp voltage (VLAMP) is stored in memory until the next
initial setting of the process control data.
A246/A247/A248
2-8
SM
PROCESS CONTROL
VR Correction
VD
VR
Drum
Potential
Development Bias (VBB)

VL
VD and VL Compensated
VR
New Drum
-770
-140
VR
Dark
Original Density
Light
A246D602.WMF
The potential sensor monitors potentials (VR, VD, and VL). During the check cycle,
the VD and VL patterns are exposed. The potential sensor checks the drum
potential on the area exposed by each pattern.
Compare the curve of the VD and VL compensated drum potential with the curve of
the new drum, they are parallel but the compensated potential is still higher (VR)
than the new drum potential. To prevent dirty backgrounds due to increased
residual potential, development bias (VBB) is applied as follows:
VBB = VR + (220)
The adjusted development bias (VBB) is stored in memory until the next process
control initial setting.
SM
2-9
A246/A247/A248
Detailed
Descriptions
[-V]
PROCESS CONTROL
Initial Setting Sequence

The following graph shows the sequence of events during the initial setting of the
process control data.
For the purpose
of ADS sensor
correction
Exposure
Lamp
V800
New VD
VD
VR
Potential
Sensor
Output
1. Potential
sensor
New VL
VL
V100
New VR
2. VR, VD, VL
potential
3. VD, VL
correction
4. ID sensor
pattern
potential

A246D604.WMF
1. Potential sensor calibration

Measuring the output of the drum potential sensor when applying 100 V and
800 V to the drum, automatically calibrates the sensor output (V100 and V800).
See page 2-5 for details.
2. VR, VD, VL potential detection
After about 30 seconds of drum conditioning, VD and VL Patterns are
developed by using the previous grid-bias voltage (VGRID) data and exposure
lamp voltage (VLAMP) data to detect the VR, VD, VL data.
The machine calculates the new VGRID and VLAMP data using the detected VR,
VD, and VL data.
A246/A247/A248
2-10
SM
PROCESS CONTROL
Specifications:
VD = 770 + VR 20 V
VL = 140 + VR 20 V
If VD is outside specifications, VGRID is shifted one step. Then the VD pattern is remeasured and VD is detected again. The same is done for VL and VLAMP. The
above process continues until both VD and VL fall within specifications. The graph
on the previous page shows an example of when only VL was outside the
specifications at the first VL detection. It came within specifications after one VL
correction by changing VLAMP 0.5 V/step, and VGRID by 20 V/step.
The machine stops VD/VL correction and uses the previous VGRID and VLAMP
values during copying in the following instances:
If V100 or V800 at the calibration of the drum potential sensor is outside
specifications.
If VD or VL does not fall within specifications after shifting VGRID or VLAMP to
their maximum and/or minimum levels.
In this case, the machine indicates nothing, but the SC counter increments.
Related SC codes (see troubleshooting section for details):
Code
361
364
365
366
Condition
Incomplete drum potential sensor calibration
Abnormal VD detection
Abnormal VL detection
VR abnormal
Utilizing VR in the following manner can also determine the development bias:
VBB = VR + (220)
4. The ID sensor pattern for potential detection
This determines the ID Sensor Bias Voltage. The development control section
explains this subject in more detail (see page 2-16).
SM
2-11
A246/A247/A248
Detailed
Descriptions
3. VD and VL corrections
Using the calculated VGRID and VLAMP data, the VR, VD, and VL patterns are
redeveloped thereby determining the new VR, VD, and VL data. If both VD and
VL data are within specifications, the new VD, VL, and VR values determine the
new VGRID, VLAMP and development bias (VBB).
PROCESS CONTROL
2.1.4 IMAGE DENSITY CONTROL

Toner Density Sensor
A: VOUT (Gain data) is high.
B: VOUT is within the specification.
C: VOUT (Gain data) is low.
Main PCB
VIN
VOUT
AGC
Gain
VOUT = VIN X
256
= 12 x
Gain
256
VD (12 V)
GND
TD
Sensor
Sensor
Output
A246D606.WMF
A246D531.WMF
Developer consists of carrier particles (iron) and toner particles (resin and carbon).
Inside the development unit, developer passes through a magnetic field created by
coils inside the toner density sensor. When the toner concentration changes, the
voltage output by the sensor changes accordingly.
<Toner Density Sensor Initial Setting>

When installing new developer with the standard toner concentration (2.0% by
weight, 20 g of toner in 1,000 g of developer), the initial setting for the developer
must be performed by using an SP mode (SP1-2-1).
During this setting, the output voltage (VOUT) from the auto gain control circuit
(AGC) on the main control board PCB varies to change the output voltage from the
toner density (TD) sensor. Changing the gain data does this:
VOUT = VIN x
Gain Data
Gain Data
= 12 x
256
256
If the data is large, VOUT and the sensor output voltage also become large. This
results in the sensor sensitivity illustrated by curve A. If the data is small, VOUT
becomes small, and the sensor output voltage becomes small. As a result, the
sensor sensitivity shifts as illustrated by curve C.
A246/A247/A248
2-12
SM
PROCESS CONTROL
By selecting the proper gain data, the sensor output is set within the targeted
control level (VREF, VREF = 2.5 0.1 V). Now, curve B shows the sensor
characteristic and the TD sensor initial setting is complete.
<Toner Supply Criteria>

Toner density detection in the developer occurs once in every copy cycle. The
sensor output voltage (VTD) during the detection cycle is compared with the toner
supply level voltage (VREF).
VTD VREF: Add more toner
VTD < VREF: Add little toner
A246D609.WMF
SM
2-13
A246/A247/A248
Detailed
Descriptions
The selected gain data is stored in memory, and VOUT from the auto-gain control
circuit stays constant during the detection cycle for the toner sensor.
PROCESS CONTROL
<Toner Supply Clutch on Period>

To stabilize toner concentration, the toner supply (toner supply clutch ON period) is
controlled by using VREF and VTD data.
The toner supply is calculated after each copy. The following factors determine the
remaining toner supply:
VREF VTD
VREF VTD (VTD = VTD of the previous copy cycle)
A246D512.WMF
By referring to these factors, the machine recognizes the difference between the
current and target toner concentration. The machine also understands how much
the toner concentration changed and can predict how much the toner supply
amount will probably change.
Precision changes in the toner supply maintain the toner concentration (image
density). Since updating the toner supply clutch ON period is under fuzzy control,
the relation among VTD, VTD, VREF cannot be expressed by a simple algebraic
formula.
<VREF Correction>
The image on the OPC drum changes due to the variation in toner chargeability
(influenced by the environment) even if the toner concentration is constant. The
image density sensor (ID sensor) directly checks the image on the OPC drum and
shifts VREF data (under fuzzy control) to keep the image on the OPC drum
constant, as explained in the next section.
NOTE: 1) The toner end sensor detects the toner end condition (see the
development section for details).
2) The toner supply clutch turns on at intervals between each copy
process, while image development is not occurring.
A246/A247/A248
2-14
SM
PROCESS CONTROL
Image Density Sensor Detection

[C]
Detailed
Descriptions
[B]
Drum
[A]
Bias
A246D514.WMF
A246D513.WMF
The ID sensor [A] checks VSG and VSP. The ID sensor is located underneath the
drum cleaning section.
There is no ID sensor pattern in the optics; however, the charge corona unit [B] and
the erase lamp [C] make a pattern image on the OPC drum.
VSG is the ID sensor output when checking the erased drum surface.
VSP is the ID sensor output when checking the ID sensor pattern image.
To compensate for any variation in light intensity from the sensor LED, the
reflectivity of both the erased drum surface and the pattern on the drum are
checked.
VSP Detection
VSP Detection
VSP Detection
2nd Series
of Copies
(5 copies)
1st Series of
Copies (8 copies)
VSG
Detection
VSG
Detection
3rd Series
of copies
(17 copies)
VSG
Detection
VSG
Detection
A246D515.WMF
VSG is detected every time the machine starts copying.

During VSG detection, the development sleeve rollers do not rotate and
development bias is not applied.
If 10 or more copies are made, the copier will re-detect VSP. Since the transfer belt
must be released when checking VSP, the machine cannot check the VSP during
continuous copying.
SM
2-15
A246/A247/A248
PROCESS CONTROL
800
VP
Potential
Sensor Detection
VP
ID Sensor
Bias Level
VIDB = VP + 300 (V)
300
4.0 V
ID Sensor
Output
VSP
A246D517.WMF
A246D516.WMF
While developing the ID sensor pattern, ID sensor bias is applied. ID sensor bias is
determined during process control data initialization as follows:
Apply charge while the grid voltage is 800 V to create the ID sensor pattern.
Check the drum potential (VP) of the latent image created by the charge with 800
V grid.
Adjust the ID sensor bias (VIDB) so that it satisfies the following formula:
VIDB = VP (300) (V)
= VP + 300 (V)
Change the bias to the calculated VIDB and detect VSP. The VSG value detected
during its adjustment sequence during process control data initialization and the
VSP determine the VREF data. The VIDB does not change until the next initial
setting for the process control data.
<VREF Correction Timing>

After the series of copies is completed, when 10 or more copies were made, VREF
is updated by referring to the previous VREF (VREF), VSG, VSP and the current TD
sensor output (VTD).
Since this VREF data updating is under fuzzy control, the relationship among VREF,
VREF, VSG, VSP and VTD cannot be expressed in a simple algebraic formula.
The VREF is not only updated in the above case, but also during the initial setting
for the developer and during process control data initialization.
A246/A247/A248
2-16
SM
PROCESS CONTROL
Sensor Abnormal Conditions
Normal detection of VSG and VSP occurs, as usual, during abnormal conditions. If
output returns to normal levels (VSG 2.5 V, VSP 2.5 V), the CPU returns the
toner concentration control to normal mode.
b) TD sensor (VTD) abnormal
Whenever VTD rises over 4.0 V or falls under 0.5 V, the CPU shifts the toner supply
to the fixed supply mode. In this condition, the CPU never stops the toner supply.
The fixed toner supply can be changed in four steps (4%, 7%, 11%, and 14%) by
using an SP mode. The default fixed toner supply is 4%.
Detection of VTD still occurs, as usual, during abnormal conditions. If its output
returns to a normal level, the CPU returns the toner concentration control to normal
mode.
c) Drum Potential Sensor abnormal
The CPU shifts the toner supply to fixed supply mode, when the TD sensor (VTD)
detects an abnormal condition, in the following cases:
V100 rises over 0.7 V or falls under 0.1 V
V800 rises over 4.2 V or falls under 2.7 V
Related SC codes. (See troubleshooting section of details.):
Code
351
352
353
354
355
356
358
361
SM
Condition
Abnormal VSG Detection (VSG > 4.2 V)
Incomplete TD Sensor Initial Setting
Abnormal VSP Detection (VSP > 2.5 V)
Abnormal VSG Detection (VSG 2.5 V)
Abnormal VTD Detection (VTD > 4.7 V)
Abnormal VTD Detection (VTD < 0.5 V)
Abnormal VSP/VSG Detection (VSP/VSG < 0.025 V)
Incomplete Drum Potential Sensor Calibration
2-17
A246/A247/A248
Detailed
Descriptions
a) ID sensor (VSG, VSP) abnormal

Whenever VSG falls under 2.5 V or VSP rises over 2.5 V, the CPU fixes the VREF
data and the TD sensor output controls the toner concentration.
DRUM UNIT
2.2 DRUM UNIT

2.2.1 OVERVIEW
14
13
15
16
1
3
12
4
11
10
9
5
2
7, 8
6
A246D518.WMF
The drum unit consists of the components as shown in the above illustration. This
model uses an organic photoconductor drum (diameter: 100 mm).
1. OPC Drum
9. Cleaning Brush
2. Paper Guide Spurs (60/70 cpm only)
10. Toner Collection Coil
3. Erase Lamp
11. Cleaning Blade
4. Drum Potential Sensor
12. Ozone Filter
5. Pre-transfer Lamp
13. Cleaning Filter
6. Pick-off Pawl
14. Charge Power Pack
7. Image Density Sensor
15. Quenching Lamp
8. Drum Thermistor
16. Main Charge Corona Unit
A246/A247/A248
2-18
SM
DRUM UNIT
2.2.2 OPC DRUM CHARACTERISTICS
2) Dissipates the electrical charge when exposed to light. (Exposure to light

greatly increases the conductivity of a photoconductor.)
3) Dissipates an amount of charge in direct proportion to the intensity of the
light. That is, the stronger the light focused on the photoconductor surface is,
the smaller the voltage remaining on the OPC.
4) Less sensitive to changes in temperature (when compared to selenium F
type drums).
5) Less sensitive to changes in rest time (light fatigue). This makes it
unnecessary to compensate for the development bias voltage resulting from
variations in the rest time.
SM
2-19
A246/A247/A248
Detailed
Descriptions
An OPC has the following characteristics:

1) Accepts a high negative electrical charge in the dark. (The electrical
resistance of a photoconductor is higher with the absence of light.)
DRUM UNIT
2.2.3 DRUM CHARGE

Overview
[A]
A246D519.WMF
This copier uses a double corona wire scorotron system for the drum charge. Two
corona wires are required to give sufficient negative charge on the drum surface
because of a rather high drum speed (50/51 cpm machine: 330 mm/seconds, 60
and 70 cpm machines: 430 mm/seconds.). The stainless steel grid plate makes the
corona charge uniform and controls the amount of negative charge on the drum
surface by applying negative grid-bias voltage.
The charge power pack [A] supplies constant current to the corona wires (1,200
A). Bias voltage supplied to the grid plate is automatically controlled to maintain
proper image density even if the OPC drum potential changes due to a dirty grid
plate or the charge corona casing.
A246/A247/A248
2-20
SM
DRUM UNIT
Air Flow Around the Drum
[C]
[E]
[D]
[B]
A246D520.WMF
The exhaust fan [A] located above the fusing unit provides an airflow to the charge
corona unit to prevent uneven build-up of negative ions that can cause an uneven
charge on the drum surface as shown.
An ozone filter [B] absorbs the ozone (O3) around the drum.
The exhaust fan rotates slowly during stand-by and rotates quickly during copying
to keep the temperature inside the machine constant.
There is another fan (the drum-cooling fan [C]), which is located on the right rear
side of the machine (front view). The drum-cooling fan cools the drum unit to
remove the heat from the duplex tray. The drum has 12 holes in each drum flange
[D]. Air flows into the drum, through the holes in the drum flange. To prevent
foreign matter from entering the inside of the copier, there is a dust protection filter
in the entrance [E] of the duct.
SM
2-21
A246/A247/A248
Detailed
Descriptions
[A]
DRUM UNIT
Charge Wire Cleaning Mechanism
[A]
[A]
[C]
[C]
[B]
A246D521.WMF
The flow of air around the charge corona wire may deposit toner particles on the
corona wires. These particles may interfere with charging and cause low-density
bands on copies.
The wire cleaner pads [A] automatically clean the wires to prevent such a problem.
A DC motor [B] drives the wire cleaner. Normally the wire cleaner [C] is in the frontend position (home position). After 5,000 copies and when the fusing temperature
is less than 100C after the main switch is turned on, the wire cleaner motor brings
the wire cleaner to the rear end and then back to the home position.
When the wire cleaner moves from the rear to the home position (black arrow in
the illustration), the wire cleaner pads clean the wires.
There are no home-position and return-position sensors. The CPU monitors the
input voltage (5 V). When the wire cleaner reaches the end, it is stopped and the
motor locks. At this time, input voltage slightly decreases (to about 4 V) and the
CPU determines when to reverse the motor.
A246/A247/A248
2-22
SM
DRUM UNIT
2.2.4 ERASE
EL
LE
SE
ES
LO
LC
A246D522.WMF
LE:
SE:
LO:
L C:
EL:
ES:
Lead edge erase margin

Side erase margin
Original width
Charged width of drum
Lead edge erase
Side erase
3.5 2.5 mm
total of both sides 3 mm or less
The erase lamp unit consists of a line of 123 LEDs extending across the full width
of the drum, the width of each being about 2.5 mm. In editing mode, the customer
determines the active LEDs.
SM
2-23
A246/A247/A248
Detailed
Descriptions
Overview
DRUM UNIT
Lead Edge and Trail Edge Erase

The entire line of LEDs turns on when the main motor turns on. They stay on until
the erase margin slightly overlaps the leading edge of the original image on the
drum (leading edge erase margin). It prevents the shadow of the original leading
edge from appearing on the copy paper. This lead erase margin is also necessary
for the leading edge of the copy paper to separate from the hot roller. An SP mode
can adjust the width of the leading edge erase margin (SP1-2-4).
When the scanner reaches the return position, the charge corona, the grid bias,
and the exposure lamp turn off. However, the charged area on the drum surface is
a little longer than the original length in order to capture the entire latent image of
the original.
The entire line of LEDs turns on when the trail edge of the latent image passes
under the erase lamp unit. This prevents developing unnecessary parts of the drum
surface; thereby reducing toner consumption and drum cleaning load.
The LEDs remain on, erasing the leading edge of the latent image in the next copy
cycle. After the final copy, the erase lamps turn off at the same time as the main
motor.
Side Erase
Based on the combination of copy paper size and the reproduction ratio data, the
LEDs turn on in blocks. This prevents the shadow of the original side edge and
unexposed front and rear sides of the drum surface in reduction mode from being
developed. This reduces toner consumption and drum cleaning load.
In the DJF mode, the horizontal original standard position on the exposure glass is
5 mm away from the rear scale.
On the other hand, the horizontal original standard position on the exposure glass
in the platen cover mode is the rear scale edge.
One more LED at the front side turns on to erase the shadow made by the edge of
the rear scale in platen cover mode. This is in addition to the LEDs that are on in
DJF mode.
A246/A247/A248
2-24
SM
DRUM UNIT
2.2.5 CLEANING
Overview
Detailed
Descriptions
[A]
4 mm
[C]
A246D523.WMF
[B]
[D]
A246D524.WMF
This copier uses the counter blade system for drum cleaning.
The blade [A] is angled against the drum rotation. This counter blade system has
the following advantages:
Causes less wear on the cleaning blade edge.
Has a high cleaning efficiency.
Due to the high efficiency of this cleaning system, this copier does not use the precleaning corona and cleaning bias.
The cleaning brush [B] supports the cleaning blade.
The brush collects toner from the drum surface and the cleaning blade scrapes the
toner off the drum. Toner on the cleaning brush is scraped off by the mylar [C] and
falls to the toner collection coil [D]. The toner collection coil transports the toner to
the toner recycle unit.
To remove the accumulated toner at the edge of the cleaning blade, the drum
reverses about 4 mm at the end of every copy job. The cleaning brush removes the
accumulated toner by this action.
SM
2-25
A246/A247/A248
DRUM UNIT
Drive Mechanism
[C]
[A]
[E]
[B]
[E]
[D]
A246D525.WMF
The timing belt [A] and the cleaning unit coupling [B] transmit drive from the main
motor to the cleaning unit drive gear. The cleaning unit drive gear [C] then
transmits the drive to the front through the cleaning brush [D]. The gear at the front
drives the toner collection coil gear [E].
A246/A247/A248
2-26
SM
DRUM UNIT
Toner Collection Mechanism
Detailed
Descriptions
[C]
[C]
[A]
[B]
A246D527.WMF
The toner collection tube [A] transports toner collected by the cleaning unit to the
toner recycle unit.
Drive belts [C] from the main motor drive the toner transport coil [B].
SM
2-27
A246/A247/A248
DRUM UNIT
Cleaning Blade Pressure Mechanism and Side-to Side Movement
[C]
[D]
[A]
[D]
[B]
A246D526.WMF
The spring [A] always pushes the cleaning blade against the drum. Pushing up the
release lever [B] manually releases the cleaning blade pressure. To prevent
cleaning blade deformation during transportation, the release lever must be locked
in the pressure release (upper) position.
The pin [C] at the rear end of the cleaning blade holder touches the cam gear [D],
which moves the blade from side to side. This movement helps to disperse
accumulated toner, preventing early wear of the blade edge.
A246/A247/A248
2-28
SM
DRUM UNIT
Detailed
Descriptions
Pick-off Mechanism
[A]
[B]
A246D528.WMF
The pick-off pawls are always in contact with the drum surface because of weak
spring pressure. They move from side to side during the copy cycle to prevent
drum wear at any particular location. A shaft [A] and a cam [B] create this
movement.
SM
2-29
A246/A247/A248
DRUM UNIT
2.2.6 QUENCHING
[A]
A246D530.WMF
In preparation for the next copy cycle, light from the quenching lamp [A] neutralizes
any charge remaining on the drum.
The quenching lamp consists of a line of 16 LEDs extending across the full width of
the drum.
A246/A247/A248
2-30
SM
DRUM CLEANING AND TONER-RECYCLING
2.3 DRUM CLEANING AND TONER-RECYCLING

2.3.1 TONER TRANSPORT
Detailed
Descriptions
[A]
[E]
[B]
[F]
[D]
[C]
A246D500.WMF
The toner transport tube transports the toner collected by the drum cleaning [A]
and transfer belt [B] units to the toner-recycling unit [C]. The toner transport coil [D]
transports the toner. The main motor [E], using timing belts, pulleys, and gears,
drives the transport coil. To ensure good toner flow, a fin [F] breaks up the toner
that drops from the tube of the drum-cleaning unit.
SM
2-31
A246/A247/A248
2.3.2 FILTERING
[D]
[B]
[A]
[D]
[B]
[C]
[C]
A246D501.WMF
[D]
A246D502.WMF
[D]
[E]
A246D503.WMF
A246D504.WMF
The toner collected by the toner transport coil is delivered to the filtering unit [A].
The filtering unit consists of a mesh filter [B] and agitation bar [C]. The re-usable
toner passes through the holes in the mesh filter. The agitation bar in the mesh
filter prevents the holes in the mesh filter from being blocked.
When the coil rotates, the ball [D] stays in the groove in the toner exit coil, and
prevents the toner from blocking the holes in the mesh filter.
The unusable material (blocked toner and paper dust) does not pass though the
holes in the mesh filter. It exits from the mesh filter and drops into the opening [E],
which leads to the toner collection bottle.
A246/A247/A248
2-32
SM
2.3.3 PUMP MECHANISM

[H]
[G]
[G]
Detailed
Descriptions
[A]
[F]
[B]
[E]
A246D505.WMF
[D]
[C]
[B]
[D]
[C]
[D]
[C]
A246D506.WMF
The screw in the toner-recycling unit delivers the re-usable toner to the screwpump unit [B] when the toner-recycling clutch [A] is activated.
The screw-pump consists of a rotor [C] and stator [D]. The rotor turns inside the
stator, and the screw-pump transports the toner as shown. The toner recycle motor
[E] pushes air into the screw-pump, blowing the toner from the screw-pump into the
development unit [G] through the toner-recycling tube [F].
The toner hopper has two air pressure release filters [H] because of the amount of
air sent to the toner hopper. When the toner supply clutch remains on for 9.3
seconds or the copying time reaches 60 seconds, whichever comes first, the tonerrecycling clutch turns on for 2 seconds. The air pump motor turns on for 6 seconds
at the same time as the toner-recycling clutch.
SM
2-33
A246/A247/A248
2.3.4 DRIVE MECHANISM

[F]
[E]
[A]
[B]
[D]
[C]
A246D507.WMF
The toner-collection motor [B] drives the exit coil [A] for the toner using gears. The
toner-recycling clutch [C] and gears drive the pump-unit. The toner recycle motor
[D] supplies air.
When the toner-collection motor locks, the LCD displays an SC345 (tonercollection motor abnormal) message. If the toner recycle motor disconnects for
more than one second, the LCD displays an SC346 (toner recycle motor
disconnected) error message.
A246/A247/A248
2-34
SM
2.3.5 TONER COLLECTION BOTTLE
Detailed
Descriptions
[A]
[B]
A246D508.WMF
The set switch [A] for the toner collection bottle detects whether it is set properly.
The operation panel indicates when the bottle is not set correctly. The toner
overflow sensor [B] detects when the toner collection bottle becomes full. In this
condition, the copy job can end, or make up to 100 continuous copies. Then
copying is disabled and the LCD displays the service call full toner collection
bottle. De-actuating and then actuating the set switch for the toner collection bottle
can clear this condition.
SM
2-35
A246/A247/A248
OPTICS
2.4 OPTICS
2.4.1 OVERVIEW
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
A246D532.WMF
The optics unit reflects an image of the original from the exposure glass onto the
OPC drum. This forms a latent electrical image of the original.
This model utilizes a halogen lamp (85 V 200 W: A246 copier, 225 W: others) for
the exposure lamp [A]. The lamp surface is frosted to ensure even exposure.
Six mirrors are used to make the optics unit smaller and obtain a wide reproduction
range ratio (50 ~ 200%).
Two stepper motors drive the lens [B] (1) vertically (parallel to the paper feed
direction) and (2) horizontally.
A stepper motor changes the position of the third scanner unit [C] (4th and 5th
mirrors) to correct the focal length changes during reduction and enlargement
modes.
The toner shielding filter [D] is green (a green filter partly absorbs red light) to
improve duplication for red originals.
The optic anti-condensation heater [E] (located on the optic base plate) turns on
while the main switch is off to prevent moisture from forming on the optical
equipment.
A246/A247/A248
2-36
SM
OPTICS
2.4.2 SCANNER DRIVE
[D]
Detailed
Descriptions
[B]
[A]
[C]
[E]
A246D533.WMF
The scanner drive motor [A] is a DC servomotor. The scanner drive speed is 330
mm/second (50/51-CPM version) or 430 mm/second (other versions) during
scanning. When the scanner goes back, scanner drive speed is 1,950 mm/second
(50/51, 60-CPM versions). For the 70-CPM version, the scanner drive speed
changes in relation to the paper size.
Paper size
DLT X > B4
B4 X > A4 lengthwise
A4 lengthwise X > LT sideways
LT sideways X > B5 sideways
B5 sideways X > A5 sideways
A5 sideways X
A248 copiers scanner return speed

(mm/seconds)
1,580
1,650
2,000
2,000
1,900
1,550
X: Paper size
The scanner drive motor drives the first [B] and second scanners [C] using two
scanner drive wires via the timing belt [D] and the scanner drive shaft [E]. The
second scanner speed is half the speed of the first scanner.
SM
2-37
A246/A247/A248
OPTICS
2.4.3 VERTICAL LENS DRIVE

- EU and Asia -
- U.S.A. [B]
[B]
[A]
[A]
A246D614.WMF
A246D534.WMF
Enlarge
Home position
(100%)
Reduce
(Enlarge home
position)
(Reduce home
position)
(Enlarge Enlarge)
(Reduce Reduce)
(Enlarge Reduce)
(Reduce Enlarge)
30
30
30
30
steps
A246D535.WMF
The vertical drive motor [A] for the lens changes its vertical position in accordance
with the selected reproduction ratio.
A stepper motor (approx. 0.095 mm/step) shifts the lens using a drive belt. The
maximum vertical-shift distance for the lens is 290 mm (from its position at 50% to
200%). The vertical HP sensor [B] detects the vertical position of the lens in fullsize mode. The optics control PCB keeps track of its position by the number of
pulses sent to the vertical drive motor.
A246/A247/A248
2-38
SM
OPTICS
2.4.4 HORIZONTAL LENS DRIVE

- U.S.A.-
Detailed
Descriptions
- EU and Asia -
[A]
[A]
A246D615.WMF
A246D536.WMF
40 steps
Enlarge
40
Home position
40
Reduce
A246D537.WMF
The original horizontal position on the exposure glass varies depending on the
mode (such as platen or DJF modes) to make it easier to handle the original.
However, the center paper feed is the standard position for paper.
Therefore, the horizontal position of the lens must change according to the paper
size, reproduction ratio and original feed and edit modes (centering, margin adjust,
etc.).
A stepper motor (approx. 0.07 mm/step) moves the lens using the drive belt. The
horizontal HP sensor [A] for the lens detects its horizontal position for A4/LT
sideways original, in full-size and platen modes.
The other positions are determined by counting the number of motor drive pulses.
Since this model has a horizontal lens drive mechanism, side-to-side registration
adjustment for each feed station can be done easily using an SP mode (SP1-1-1
Side to Side Registration Adj.).
SM
2-39
A246/A247/A248
OPTICS
2.4.5 HORIZONTAL LENS POSITIONING

For Original Position
Platen
[A]
DJF
Copy Paper
[C]
Center
Horizontal
Lens Position
[B]
A246D538.WMF
A246D539.WMF
There are two standard positions for the original in platen and DJF modes.
In platen mode, the original aligns with both the rear [A] and the left [B] original
alignment scales (rear left corner [C] is the standard position).
In DJF mode, the original position is 5 mm in front of the platen-mode original
position to maintain the original transport path (5 mm from the rear scale).
The above figure shows the horizontal lens positions in each mode when using one
paper size.
For Paper Size

Copy Paper
Original Rear Edge
Lens Position
Horizontal
A246D540.WMF
To maintain high paper feed performance, the center is the standard paper feed
position for paper. Consequently, the horizontal lens position changes according to
the paper size.
The figure shows the lens horizontal position for each paper size in full-size mode.
A246/A247/A248
2-40
SM
OPTICS
For Reproduction Ratio

<Original Rear Edge>
200%
100%
50%
Copy Paper
Detailed
Descriptions
Original
50%
100% 200%
3rd Scanner Position
A246D541.WMF
When the reproduction ratio changes, so does the vertical position of the lens. At
the same time, the total focal length must shift to adjust the focus of the image. To
change the focal length, the vertical position of the 3rd scanner adjusts to a
maximum distance of 50 mm (from its position at 100% to the position at 50 or
200%).
The figure shows the lens horizontal position at 50, 100 and 200%.
SM
2-41
A246/A247/A248
OPTICS
2.4.6 3RD SCANNER DRIVE

[B]
[A]
(Initialize)
(Reduce/Enlarge
(Reduce/Enlarge Reduce/Enlarge)
(Reduce/Enlarge Reduce/Enlarge)
(Reduce/Enlarge Enlarge/Reduce)
40 steps
40 steps
A246D543.WMF
For the focus to compensate for reproduction and lens position changes, the 3rd
scanner (4th and 5th mirrors) position is changed.
The 3rd scanner drive uses a stepper motor [A] (approx. 0.095 mm/step).
The 3rd scanner HP sensor [B] detects the unit position for full-size mode. The
optics control PCB keeps track of the unit position from the number of motor drive
pulses.
A246/A247/A248
2-42
SM
OPTICS
2.4.7 OPTICS CONTROL CIRCUIT

Sensors
Main
Control
Board
Data
Bus
Scanner Drive
Optics Control Board

Horizontal Lens Drive
Vertical Lens Drive
Optics
Control
CPU
Main
CPU
rd
3 Scanner Drive
Optic Cooling Fan
Exposure Lamp
Optic Thermistor
AC Drive
Board
A246D544.WMF
The optics control board communicates with the main board through a data bus. It
monitors all the sensor signals, encoder and thermistor output and controls all the
motors for optics.
At the programmed time, the main CPU sends a scanner start signal to the optics
control CPU.
The CPU generates a pulse-width modulation (PWM) signal. The PWM signal goes
to a driver circuit, which sends drive pulses to the scanner drive motor.
An encoder in the scanner drive motor generates pulse signals. A speed/direction
control circuit monitors the scanner speed and the direction of the signals, and
uses this data to regulate the motor speed.
The HP sensor monitors the position of the scanner. After turning on the copier, the
main CPU confirms the scanner position by moving the scanner out of the home
position and back again. This data is sent to the optics control CPU.
SM
2-43
A246/A247/A248
Detailed
Descriptions
Encoder
OPTICS
2.4.8 AUTOMATIC IMAGE DENSITY CONTROL SYSTEM (ADS)

[B]
[A]
A246D545.WMF
In ADS mode, the ADS sensor [A] detects the density of the original background
[A]. The main CPU determines an appropriate development bias voltage for the
original to prevent dirty backgrounds from appearing on copies.
The ADS sensor board is on the rear side of the optics side plate. The sensor
housing cover, which has a small hole to direct the reflected light from the original
to the ADS sensor, covers the sensor board.
The machine adjusts the ADS sensor standard voltage to 2.7 V when process
control data initialization is performed. The exposure lamp turns on with ID level 4
at the home position and the light reflected by the ADS pattern [B] (white painted)
reaches the ADS sensor. The main CPU adjusts the ADS gain data automatically
to make the output 2.7 V. The RAM board stores this data.
A246/A247/A248
2-44
SM
OPTICS
9.7
(mm)
M
M = 1.0 (m = 50 ~100)
m
M=
(m = 101~ 200)
100
8.25
x100 (mm)
B=
m
m: reproduction ratio
90 mm
20 mm
(50 ~ 200)
A
[V]
ADS Original Voltage
ADS
Sensor
Output
Peak hold
A246D546.WMF
For the first scanning of an original in ADS mode, the CPU starts sampling the ADS
sensor output while exposing the ADS pattern at the scanner home position. Then
the CPU stores the maximum ADS sensor output as a reference voltage. This
means that during every ADS check cycle the ADS reference voltage is renewed. It
is renewed by the latest exposure light reflected from the ADS pattern when the
original is first scanned.
In the full-size mode, the CPU takes samples from the ADS sensor output when
the scanner scans the original from 9.7 mm to 18 mm from the left scale edge. The
CPU takes the maximum ADS sensor output during the sampling period and
compares it with the ADS reference voltage to determine the correct developmentbias voltage. (See development bias control section for details.)
The sampling length of ADS sensor output for the original differs depending on the
reproduction ratio because scanner speed differs.
SM
2-45
A246/A247/A248
Detailed
Descriptions
A=
OPTICS
2.4.9 MANUAL IMAGE DENSITY CONTROL

When the image density is set manually, the voltage applied to the exposure lamp
changes as shown in the table below.
Lighter
Darker
V G R I D 150
Grid Bias
Voltage
(negative)
V G R I D 90
V G R I D 60
V GRID
Exposure
Lamp
Voltage
V L A M P +5.0
V L A M P +4.0
V L A M P +2.0
V L A M P 0.5
V L A M P 1.5
V L A M P 3.5
V L A M P 5.5
V L A M P 7.5
9
Manual ID
Position
A246D547.WMF
VLAMP: Exposure lamp voltage at ID level 5.

The initial setting for the process control data determines this value.
VGRID: Grid bias (negative) voltage at ID level 5.
This value is determined at the initial setting of the process control data.
A246/A247/A248
2-46
SM
OPTICS
2.4.10 UNEVEN LIGHT INTENSITY CORRECTION

Exposure
intensity
Illustration
distribution
Shading plate
[A]
[B]
[C]
A246D549.WMF
- EU and Asia -
- U.S.A. -
[D]
[D]
[D]
[D]
A246D548.WMF
A246D662.WMF
The entire surface of the exposure lamp is frosted to ensure even exposure.
A shading plate in front of the lens compensates for the reduced light at the edge
of the lens. The shading plate is fixed to the lens unit.
The shading plate compensates for the light intensity when the horizontal lens
position shifts (from [A] to [C]).
Also, the shading mylars [D] intercept any diffused reflected light from outside the
light path.
SM
2-47
A246/A247/A248
Detailed
Descriptions
Original
OPTICS
2.4.11 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION IN PLATEN MODE

[D] [C]
[A]
A246D509.WMF
[B]
A246D511.WMF
[H]
[E]
[J]
[G]
[I]
[F]
A246D669.WMF
A246D510.WMF
The APS sensor [A] in the optics cavity detects the size of the original by scanning
it on the exposure glass.
The APS sensor emits two beams of light onto the exposure glass. The APS
sensor receives the reflected light from the exposure glass. The machine measures
the period from when the APS sensor detects the start plate [B] until it detects the
original. It does this for each beam. When the period for beam 1 [C] is longer than
for beam 2 [D], the original is lengthwise. Otherwise, it is sideways. The results
from beam 1 determine the size of the original.
The beam from the LED [E] goes to the partially reflecting mirror [G]. This mirror
sends the beam to the spinning mirror [H], then to the exposure glass. The
exposure glass reflects the image back to the spinning mirror [H], which sends it to
the lens [I] and finally it reaches the light receiving element [F]. The spinning mirror
creates beam arcs. The spinning mirror has two mirrors at different angles to emit
two beams every rotation. SP mode 2-3-2 displays the size detected by the APS
sensor. SP modes 2-3-3 and 2-3-4 display the pulses and counts detected by APS
beam 1 and 2. There is also a reflective original length sensor [J] in the optics
cavity for Inch version copiers. It distinguishes original size LG (81/2" x 14") from LT
(81/2" x 11"), or F (81/2" x 13") from LT (81/2" x 11") or LTS (11x81/2) from DLT
(11x17).
A246/A247/A248
2-48
SM
A3
11" x 7"
8k
B4
10" x 14"
81/2" x 11"
A4L
8" x 10"
16 k-L
B5L
A5L
51/2" x 81/2"
B6L
A6L
11" x 81/2"
A4S
16 k-S
B5S
A5S
81/2" x 51/2"
B6S
A6S
Beam 1
standard
505
845
1,079
1,280
1,341
2,161
2,300
2,466
2,661
2,993
3,983
4,254
4,709
5,940
845
1,490
2,388
2,936
4,028
4,246
4,554
5,097
Beam 2
standard
518
843
1,067
1,258
1,317
2,096
2,227
2,384
2,567
2,878
3,792
4,037
4,438
5,411
1,669
2,031
2,713
3,184
4,174
4,376
4,664
5,411
Beam 1 tolerance
(Metric ver.)
110
89
71
57
standard
99
156
194
240
438
77
473
243
195
170
150
134
Beam 1 tolerance
(Inch ver.)
77
122
standard
144
208
116
162
L: Lengthwise
S: Sideways
NOTE: 81/2" x 13" and 81/2" x 14" tolerance values are the same as 81/2" x 11".
Check the APS sensor condition using the above table. The tolerance is the
standard after APS size calibration (SP1-10-1). After APS size calibration and the
correct placement of the original on the exposure glass, if the data from beam 1 is
not within the tolerance, the APS sensor is deemed defective.
SM
2-49
A246/A247/A248
Detailed
Descriptions
OPTICS
OPTICS
2.4.12 HALF TONE MODE
A246D553.WMF
This machine has a half-tone mode. In this mode, selected in the operation panel,
the grid voltage for the charge corona is decreased by 200 V. However, this
voltage may blank out low-density areas of the original. Decreasing the exposure
lamp voltage by 3V corrects this problem. Consequently, this process lowers the
image density for picture and half-tone originals.
A246/A247/A248
2-50
SM
DEVELOPMENT
2.5 DEVELOPMENT
2.5.1 OVERVIEW
[L]
Detailed
Descriptions
[G]
[F]
[B]
[L]
[C]
[J]
[H]
[A]
[D]
Paddle Roller [A]

Upper Development Roller [B]
Lower Development Roller [C]
Toner Density Sensor [D]
Developer Agitator [E]
Toner Auger [F]
[K]
[I]
[E]
Development Filter [G]

Toner Supply Motor [H]
Toner End Sensor [I]
Toner Agitator [J]
Toner Supply Roller [K]
Toner Hopper [L]
This copier uses a double roller development (DRD) system. Each roller has a
diameter of 20 mm.
This system differs from single roller development systems in that:
(1) It develops the image in a narrower area
(2) It develops the image twice
(3) There is a reduction in the relative speed for each development roller touching
the drum
In addition, this machine uses fine toner (about 7.5 m) and developer (about 70
m). Both the DRD system and the new consumables (developer and toner)
improve the image quality, especially of thin horizontal lines, the trailing edges of
the half-tone areas, and black cross points.
The machine contains a toner-recycling system. The toner-recycling motor carries
the recycled toner to the toner hopper [L] and mixes it with new toner using the
toner agitator [J]. (The Drum Cleaning and Toner-recycling section describes the
toner-recycling system.)
SM
2-51
A246/A247/A248
DEVELOPMENT
2.5.2 DEVELOPMENT MECHANISM
[C]
[B]
[D]
[A]
A246D643.WMF
The paddle roller [A] picks up developer and transports it to the upper-development
roller [B]. Internal permanent magnets in the development rollers attract the
developer to the development roller sleeve. The upper development roller carries
the developer past the doctor blade [C]. The doctor blade trims the developer to
the desired thickness and creates backspill for the cross-mixing mechanism.
The development rollers continue to turn, carrying the developer to the OPC drum
[D]. When the developer brush comes in contact with the drum surface, the
negatively charged areas of the drum surface attract and hold the positively
charged toner. In this way, the latent image is developed.
The development roller has a negative bias to prevent the toner from attracting to
the non-image areas on the drum surface that may have a slight residual negative
charge.
After turning another 100 degrees, the developer returns to the paddle roller [A].
A246/A247/A248
2-52
SM
DEVELOPMENT
Detailed
Descriptions
[C]
[D]
[E]
[A]
[B]
A246D555.WMF
The development drive gear [A] drives the gears of the development unit when the
development motor [B] (a DC servomotor) turns.
The drive gear [C] for the toner supply roller drives the gears of the toner hopper
when the toner supply clutch [D] activates.
The above gears are helical gears. Helical gears are quieter than normal gears.
The teeth of the development drive gear are chamfered, beveled symmetrically, so
that they smoothly engage the development roller gear [E] during installation.
SM
2-53
A246/A247/A248
DEVELOPMENT
2.5.4 CROSSMIXING
[B]
[C]
[E]
[F]
[A]
[D]
[E]
A246D556.WMF
[B]
[C]
[F]
[D]
[A]
A246D557.WMF
This copier uses a standard cross-mixing mechanism to keep the toner and
developer evenly mixed. It also helps agitate the developer to prevent developer
clumps from forming and helps create the triboelectric charge, an electric charge
generated by friction.
The developer on the turning development rollers [A] is split into two parts by the
doctor blade [B]. The part that stays on the development rollers forms the magnetic
brush and develops the latent image on the drum. The part that the doctor blade
trims off goes to the backspill plate [C].
As the developer slides down the backspill plate to the agitator [D], the mixing
vanes [E] move it slightly toward the rear of the unit. Part of the developer falls into
the auger inlet and the auger [F] transmits it to the front of the unit.
The agitator moves the developer slightly to the front as it turns, so the developer
stays level in the development unit.
A246/A247/A248
2-54
SM
DEVELOPMENT
2.5.5 DEVELOPMENT BIAS

Overview
[C]
Detailed
Descriptions
[B]
[A]
A246D558.WMF
The development bias control Board [A] applies the negative development bias to
both the lower sleeve roller and upper sleeve roller through the receptacles [B] and
the sleeve roller shaft [C].
The development bias prevents toner from attracting to the background of the nonimage area on the OPC drum where there is residual voltage. In addition, the
development bias adjusts image density according to the conditions the customer
selected.
SM
2-55
A246/A247/A248
DEVELOPMENT
Bias Control In Copy Cycle

Five factors determine the bias output:
The total bias is:
ADS Mode:
VB = VBB + VBU + VBMG + VBA
Manual ID Mode:
VB = VBB + VBU + VBMG
VB:
VBB:
VBA:
VBU:
VBMG:
Total bias
Base bias
ADS Compensation
User Tool mode ID Selection Compensation
Magnification Compensation
1) Base Bias (VBB)

VD
Drum
Potential
VBB
VL
Dark
VR
Original density
Light
A246D559.WMF
As explained in the process control section, the residual voltage (VR) measured
during process control data initialization determines the base bias for development.
VBB = VR + (220)
1.02 V
2) ADS Compensation (VBA)

300
VBA
(negative)
0
Dark
1
VADS (V)
2.3
Light
A246D560.WMF
According to the original background density, the bias is compensated. The

compensation value is determined with the voltage measured by the ADS sensor
(ADS sensor output: VADS) as follows:
VBA = 234 x (VADS 2.3)
NOTE: VBA has a limited range from 0V to 300V.
A246/A247/A248
2-56
SM
DEVELOPMENT
3) Manual ID Selection Position Compensation (VBM)
4) User Tool Mode ID Selection Compensation (VBU)

In User Tool mode, there are 7 selectable steps for the image density level. The
User Tool ID position setting determines the VBU as follows:
Darker
Lighter
90
VBU
(negative)
60
30
7
0
+30
+60
+90
User Tool
ID Position
A246D562.WMF
SM
2-57
A246/A247/A248
Detailed
Descriptions
This machine does not shift the bias according to the manual ID selection position.
The grid voltage and exposure lamp voltage shift to control the image density.
Refer to the optics section.
DEVELOPMENT
5) Magnification Compensation (VBMG)

The selected reproduction ratio determines VBMG as follows:
100
Dev. Bias
Voltage
(negative) 60
40
30
20
62%
50% 61%
81%
80%
116%
115%
122%
123%
142%
141%
161%
160%
A246D563.WMF
Bias Control Out of Copy Cycle

To hold the toner on the sleeve rollers while they are rotating without image
development, VB + (60 V) is applied.
A246/A247/A248
2-58
SM
DEVELOPMENT
ID Sensor Pattern Bias

800
VP
Potential
VP
ID Sensor
Bias Level
Detailed
Descriptions
Sensor Detection
VIDB = VP + 300 (V)
300
4.0 V
ID Sensor
Output
VSP
A246D565.WMF
While developing the ID sensor pattern, ID sensor bias is applied. ID sensor bias is
determined during the process control initial setting as follows:
A charge is applied while grid voltage is 800 V to create the ID sensor pattern.
The drum potential (VP) of the ID sensor pattern is checked.
The ID sensor bias (VIDB) is adjusted to satisfy the following formula:
VIDB = VP (300)
= VP + 300 (V)
VP Auto Shift (SP1-16-1)

The triboelectric charge generated on the toner and carrier become greater in
accordance with the copy quantity and is stabilized 450 minutes later after the
developer initial setting.
The value of the VP is compensated as shown in the table.
Period of the development motor
rotation after developer initial setting
Added value to VP value
SM
0 ~ 420
420 ~ 430
430 ~ 440
450 ~
+40 V
+30 V
+20 V
0V
2-59
A246/A247/A248
DEVELOPMENT
2.5.6 TONER SUPPLY

Toner Supply Mechanism
[B]
[F]
[A]
[B]
[C]
[E]
[D]
A246D644.WMF
[F]
[F]
[G]
A246D645.WMF
When the toner supply clutch [A] turns on, the agitator [B] mixes the recycled toner
transported by the air tube [G] with new toner. Then it moves the toner from the
front to the rear and sends it to the toner supply roller.
The toner supply clutch [A] located inside the development motor [C] applies the
rotation from the development motor to the toner supply roller gear [D], which
drives the agitator gear [E]. The grooves on the toner supply roller [F] catch the
toner. Then, as the grooves turn past the opening, the toner falls into the
development unit.
A246/A247/A248
2-60
SM
DEVELOPMENT
Detailed
Descriptions
Toner End Detection
[A]
A246D567.WMF
The toner end sensor [A] detects if sufficient toner remains in the toner hopper. The
toner end sensor monitors the toner end-condition when the toner supply clutch
turns on. When there is only a little toner inside the toner hopper and toner
pressure on the toner end sensor is low, the toner end sensor outputs a pulse
signal for each copy (one detection per one copy).
The LCD displays the toner near end indication after receiving the pulse signal 150
times. If a pulse signal is not output twice continually, the pulse count is canceled.
Fifty copies are allowed after entering toner near-end condition. After fifty copies
are made in toner near-end condition, the machine enters the toner end-condition
and copying is prohibited.
After turning the main switch off and on, or opening and closing the front door, the
machine drives the toner supply mechanism and monitors the toner end sensor
output. If the toner end sensor does not output the pulse signal twice continually,
the toner end condition is canceled.
SM
2-61
A246/A247/A248
DEVELOPMENT
Bottle Drive Mechanism
[D]
[C]
[A]
[B]
A246D646.WMF
[E]
[A]
A246D647.WMF
The drive mechanism for the bottle transports toner from the bottle to the toner
supply unit [A]. A worm gear [B] on the toner-supply motor [C] drives this
mechanism. The toner bottle [D] has a spiral groove that helps move toner to the
supply unit.
When the toner bottle holder is opened, the shutter hook [E] moves the toner
shutter, which closes the toner supply unit and prevents the toner in the toner
holder from spilling out.
The drive motor for the bottle turns on after 1.1 seconds when the toner end sensor
turns on five times continually.
A246/A247/A248
2-62
SM
DEVELOPMENT
Toner Supply Control
1) Auto Process Control Mode

Originals have various image proportions and image densities. To control the
toner supply in the best manner, it is necessary to link the amount of toner
supplied on each copy cycle to the amount of toner consumed for each copy.
This model uses Fuzzy Control to provide this kind of toner supply control.
Fuzzy Control 1
According to the TD sensor data, the CPU checks the following at every copy
cycle:
1. The results from the toner supply control process (TD sensor output) in the
previous copy cycle.
2. How quickly the toner density is changing.
Then the CPU decides the appropriate amount of toner (toner supply clutch
ON period) for the next copy cycle by using Fuzzy Logic.
Fuzzy Control 2
The image on the OPC drum changes due to variations in toner chargeability
(influenced by the environment) even if toner concentration is constant.
The ID sensor directly checks the image on the OPC drum and shifts the VREF
data under fuzzy control to keep the image on the OPC drum constant.
NOTE: The toner supply amount changes every copy cycle.
The target toner density sensor output is updated under the following
conditions:
1) During toner density sensor initialization
2) During process control data initialization
3) After the copy job is completed in case that 10 or more copies have
been made since the last update.
(Refer to section 2.1.4 Image Density Control for details.)
2) Detect Mode
In this mode, only the TD sensor controls the toner concentration (VREF data is
fixed). The machine only performs Fuzzy Control 1.
When the ID sensor detects an abnormal condition, the machine automatically
enters this mode.
3) Fixed Mode
In this mode, the SP mode determines the fixed amount of toner (4%, 7%, 11%,
14%) supplied every copy cycle (SP1-13-3). There is no over-toning detection
mechanism.
When the TD sensor or Drum Potential sensor detect an abnormal condition,
the machine automatically enters this mode.
SM
2-63
A246/A247/A248
Detailed
Descriptions
By using an SP mode (SP1-13-1), 3 kinds of toner-supply controls are available:

Auto Process Control Mode
Detect Mode
Fixed Mode
IMAGE TRANSFER
2.6 IMAGE TRANSFER

2.6.1 PRE-TRANSFER LAMP
[A]
A246D569.WMF
The pre-transfer lamp [A] located in the drum unit prevents incomplete toner
transfer.
The pre-transfer lamp illuminates the drum surface after developing the latent
image but before transferring the image to the copy paper. This illumination
reduces the negative potential on the drum surface, charged by the main charge
corona and partially discharged by the exposure. This makes image transfer
easier.
The pre-transfer lamp is turned on and off by the charge power pack at the same
time as when the main motor turns on and off.
A246/A247/A248
2-64
SM
IMAGE TRANSFER
2.6.2 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION OVERVIEW
[B]
Detailed
Descriptions
[A]
[E]
[D]
[F]
[C]
A246D570.WMF
This model uses a transfer belt unit consisting of the following parts:
[A]: Transfer belt
A belt (length: 321 mm) with high electrical resistance which holds a high
negative electrical potential and attracts the toner on the OPC drum onto the
paper. Also the electrical potential attracts the paper itself and helps paper
separation from the OPC drum.
[B]: Transfer bias roller
Applies transfer voltage to the transfer belt.
[C]: Transfer belt lift lever (driven by a solenoid)
Lifts the transfer belt to contact the transfer belt with the OPC drum.
[D]: Transfer power pack
Generates the constant transfer current.
[E]: Transfer belt cleaning blade
Removes toner attached on the transfer belt to prevent stains on the rear side
of the paper.
[F]: Transfer belt cleaning bias roller and bias roller blade
Even if the toner is not removed completely by the transfer belt cleaning blade,
the toner is attracted to the negative charged cleaning bias roller. The bias
roller blade scrapes off the toner on the cleaning bias roller.
SM
2-65
A246/A247/A248
IMAGE TRANSFER
2.6.3 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION MECHANISM

[C]
[A]
[D]
[B]
[A]
A246D571.WMF
The registration rollers [A] start feeding the paper [B] into the gap between the
OPC drum [C] and the transfer belt [D] at the proper time.
[E]
A246D572.WMF
When the leading edge of the paper reaches the gap between the transfer belt and
the OPC drum, the transfer belt lift lever [E] immediately raises the transfer belt into
contact with the transfer belt and the OPC drum. A solenoid drives the lift lever.
[F]
[G]
A246D573.WMF
Then a negative transfer bias is applied to the transfer bias roller [F] and attracts
the positively charged toner [G] on the OPC drum. It also attracts the paper and
separates the paper from the OPC drum.
A246/A247/A248
2-66
SM
IMAGE TRANSFER
I2
I1
Detailed
Descriptions
It
[A]
It + I1 = I2
A246D574.WMF
After the image transfer is completed, the charge on the transfer belt holds the
paper on the transfer belt. After separating the paper from the transfer belt, the
transfer belt drive roller [A] discharges the transfer belt.
[C]
[D]
[B]
[A]
[E]
A246D575.WMF
The transfer power pack [B] inside the transfer belt unit monitors the current (I1) fed
back from the drive rollers at each end of the transfer belt to adjust the transfer
current.
Then, the power pack adjusts it to maintain a constant current through the drum
(I2), even if the paper, environmental conditions, or transfer belt surface resistance
change.
4/5 of the voltage for the transfer belt bias roller is applied to the transfer belt
cleaning bias roller [C] through the cleaning bias terminal [D] from the power pack.
The grounding terminal [E] grounds the transfer belt drive roller.
SM
2-67
A246/A247/A248
IMAGE TRANSFER
2.6.4 TRANSFER BELT UNIT LIFT MECHANISM

[C]
[E]
[A]
[D]
[E]
[B]
[F]
A246D576.WMF
The transfer belt lift solenoid [A] located inside the transfer belt unit turns on to
raise the transfer belt into contact with the OPC drum at the appropriate time. Links
[D] connect the front lever [B] and the rear lever [C] to the solenoid and push up the
stays [E] when the solenoid turns on.
The support spring [F] helps the solenoid to raise the transfer belt.
The solenoid turns off after the copy job is finished.
The transfer belt must be released from the OPC drum for the following reasons:
1. To prevent the ID sensor pattern on the OPC drum from being rubbed by the
transfer belt because the transfer belt is located between the development unit
and the ID sensor.
2. To decrease the load sent to the transfer belt-cleaning blade, it is better to keep
toner on the non-image area (for example VD, VL, ID sensor pattern developed
during process control data initialization) from being transferred onto the
transfer belt.
3. To prevent changes to OPC drum characteristics influenced by additives inside
the rubber belt.
A246/A247/A248
2-68
SM
IMAGE TRANSFER
2.6.5 PAPER TRANSPORTATION AND BELT DRIVE MECHANISM
[B]
[C]
Detailed
Descriptions
[A]
A246D577.WMF
[F]
[E]
[D]
A246D578.WMF
The main drive motor [A] drives the transfer belt through the belt and gears. Since
the transfer belt electrically attracts the paper [B], the transport fan is not required.
At the turn in the transfer belt, the belt is discharged by the transfer belt drive roller
[C] to reduce paper attraction, and the paper separates from the belt as a result of
its own stiffness.
The tapered parts [D] at both sides of the roller [E] help keep the transfer belt [F] in
the center, so that it does not run off the rollers.
SM
2-69
A246/A247/A248
IMAGE TRANSFER
2.6.6 TRANSFER BELT CLEANING MECHANISM
[D]
[B]
[A]
A246D579.WMF
[E]
[G]
[C]
A246D580.WMF
[F]
[H]
A246D581.WMF
A246D663.WMF
Some toner may adhere to the transfer belt when a paper jams occurs, or when the
side fences for the by-pass feed table are set in the wrong position causing the
erase lamp to miss some toner. Removing adhered toner prevents the rear side of
the copy paper from getting dirty. The cleaning blade [A] scrapes off any toner
remaining on the transfer belt. A counter blade system cleans the transfer belt.
Even if the toner is not completely removed due to paper dust stuck on the transfer
belt cleaning blade [A], the negative charged cleaning bias roller [B] attracts the
remaining toner. The bias roller blade [C] scrapes off the toner on the cleaning bias
roller. The surface of the transfer belt is coated to make it smooth and prevent the
transfer belt from flipping the cleaning blade.
The gear [D] moves the agitator plate [E] from side to side to transport toner to the
toner collection coil [F]. The coil transports the toner cleaned off the transfer belt to
the toner recycle unit.
The lever [G] on the front end of the cleaning blade releases the cleaning blade
when the transfer belt unit is lowered and the lever is pushed by the transfer belt
unit support prop. (When the lever [H] turns counter-clockwise, the transfer belt unit
lowers.)
A246/A247/A248
2-70
SM
IMAGE TRANSFER
Detailed
Descriptions
2.6.7 TONER COLLECTION MECHANISM
[A]
[B]
A246D582.WMF
The idle gear [B] transmits the transfer belt drive to the toner collection coil [A]. The
toner collection coil transports the collected toner to the toner-recycling unit. See
Drum Cleaning and Toner Recycling for details.
SM
2-71
A246/A247/A248
IMAGE TRANSFER
2.6.8 TRANSFER ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER
[A]
A246D648.WMF
The transfer anti-condensation heater [A] is under the transfer belt unit. It turns on
when the main switch is off to prevent moisture from forming on the transfer belt.
A246/A247/A248
2-72
SM
PAPER FEED
2.7 PAPER FEED

2.7.1 OVERVIEW
[A]
Detailed
Descriptions
[B]
[B]
[A]
[C]
A246D583.WMF
This model has three paper tray feed stations.

The 1st tray is the tandem feed tray. It can hold 3,100 (1,550 x 2) sheets of paper.
The 2nd tray is universal tray. It can hold 550 sheets of paper. The 3rd tray also can
hold 550 sheets of paper.
The by-pass feed table, which has an independent feed mechanism, can also feed
paper. The by-pass feed table can hold 50 sheets of paper.
All feed stations use an FRR feed system. Rotation of the pick-up roller [A] drives
the top sheets of paper from each tray to the feed [B] and separation [C] rollers.
The feed and separation rollers then take over the paper drive. If the pick-up roller
feeds more than one sheet, the separation rollers rotate in the opposite direction
and prevent all but the top sheet from passing through to the registration rollers.
SM
2-73
A246/A247/A248
PAPER FEED
2.7.2 FRR FEED SYSTEM
[B]
[A]
[C]
A246D584.PCX
This copier uses an FRR paper feed system using three rollers.
Pick-up Roller
The pick-up roller [A] is not in contact with the paper stack before it starts feeding
paper. Shortly after the Start key is pressed, the pick-up roller drops down and
feeds the top sheet between the feed [B] and the separation rollers [C]. At almost
the same time that the leading edge of the paper arrives at the feed roller, the pickup roller lifts off the paper stack so that it does not interfere with the operation of
the feed and separation rollers. The feed and separation rollers then take over the
paper feed process.
Feed and Separation Rollers

There is a one-way bearing inside the feed roller so it can turn only in one direction.
The separation roller turns in the opposite direction of the feed roller. The
separation roller, however, has a slip clutch (torque limiter clutch), which allows it to
turn in either direction depending on the friction between the rollers. The separation
roller solenoid keeps the separation roller in contact with the feed roller.
A246/A247/A248
2-74
SM
PAPER FEED
[B]
F2
F2
F3
F2
F1
F1
F1
F3
[A]
F1
[A]
A246D585.PCX
The direction in which the separation roller [A] turns depends on the frictional
forces acting on it. The slip clutch applies a constant clockwise force (F1). When
there is a single sheet of paper between the rollers, the force of friction between
the feed roller [B] and the paper (F2) is greater than F1. Therefore, the separation
roller turns counter-clockwise.
If two or more sheets are fed between the rollers, the forward force on the second
sheet (F3), becomes less than F1 because the friction between the two sheets is
small. So, the separation roller starts turning clockwise and drives the second
sheet back to the tray.
SM
2-75
A246/A247/A248
Detailed
Descriptions
[B]
PAPER FEED
2.7.3 SLIP CLUTCH MECHANISM
A246D586.WMF
[A]
[F]
[G]
[D]
[B]
[C]
[E]
A246D587.PCX
The slip clutch [A] consists of the input [B] and output hubs [C]. The magnetic ring
[D] and the steel spacers [E] are fitted onto the input hub. The ferrite ring [F] is
fitted into the output hub. Ferrite powder [G] packed between the magnetic ring and
the ferrite ring [F] generates a constant torque due to magnetic force. The input
hub and the output hub slip when the rotational force exceeds the constant torque.
This type of slip clutch does not require lubrication.
A246/A247/A248
2-76
SM
PAPER FEED
2.7.4 FRR FEED DRIVE MECHANISM
[B]
[K]
[I]
[C]
[A]
[A]
[F]
A246D588.WMF
[D]
[G]
[F]
A246D589.WMF
[H]
The rotation of the paper feed motor is transmitted to the gear [A] via the timing belt
[B], and then transmitted to the separation roller via the feed clutch gear [C], gear
[D], gear [E] and gear [F].
If the paper feed station remains unselected, the separation-roller solenoid [G] deactivates and the separation roller [H] rotates freely in the reverse direction of
paper feeding.
The gear [A] also transmits drive to the vertical transport roller [I] via three other
gears [C], [J] and [K].
SM
2-77
A246/A247/A248
Detailed
Descriptions
[J]
[C]
PAPER FEED
[A]
[B]
[C]
[H]
[F]
[E]
[G]
[D]
A246D649.WMF
After selecting the paper feed station and pressing the start key, the feed clutch [A],
separation roller solenoid, and the pick-up solenoid [B] turn on at once.
When the feed clutch [A] activates to rotate the feed roller [C], the feed roller and
the pick-up roller [D] turn together because the idle gear [E] links them.
When the separation roller solenoid turns on, the separation roller [F] makes
contact with the feed roller [C] then rotates together with the feed roller. This occurs
despite the fact that the separation rollers move in the opposite direction. The
separation rollers move like this because of the torque limiter function in the
separation roller [F].
When the pick-up solenoid [B] activates, the pick-up roller [D] lowers to make
contact with the top sheet of the paper stack and send it to the feed and separation
rollers. When the paper feed sensor [G] detects the leading edge of the paper [H];
the pick-up solenoid de-energizes to lift the pick-up roller. The paper feed clutch
also de-energizes at a certain time to wait until it is ready to feed to the registration
roller.
A246/A247/A248
2-78
SM
PAPER FEED
Detailed
Descriptions
2.7.5 SEPARATION ROLLER RELEASE MECHANISM
A246D591.WMF
In this model, the separation roller [A] is normally away from the feed roller [B].
After selecting the paper feed station, the separation roller solenoid [C] activates
causing contact between the separation roller and the feed roller as explained in
the previous two pages.
This contact/release mechanism has the following three advantages:
1. When the paper feed motor turns on, the separation rollers in each feed station
rotate. If the separation roller is away from the feed roller, it reduces the
mechanical load on the paper feed motor and drive mechanism. It also reduces
the wear on the rubber surface of the separation roller, which is due to the
friction between the separation roller and the feed roller.
2. After paper feeding is complete, paper sometimes remains in the gap between
the feed roller and the separation roller.
If the feed tray is drawn out in this condition, it is possible for the remaining
paper to be torn.
When the separation roller is away from the feed roller, remaining paper is
released from the gap between the feed and the separation rollers.
3. When paper misfeeds occur around this area, the customer can easily pull out
the jammed paper between the feed and the separation rollers because the
separation roller is away from the feed roller.
SM
2-79
A246/A247/A248
PAPER FEED
2.7.6 PAPER RETURN MECHANISM

[D]
[A]
[C]
[B]
[E]
[C]
[F]
A246D592.WMF
A246D593.WMF
When the paper feed clutch [A] activates and the feed roller drive shaft [B] rotates,
the lever [C] rotates together with the shaft. However, the stopper [D] immediately
stops the lever.
After all paper is fed and the paper feed clutch turns off, the paper feed motor still
rotates to turn the separation roller [E] in the reverse direction. The separation
roller, still contacting the feed roller, turns the feed roller in the reverse direction
until the lever hits the rubber cushion [F].
By this feed roller reverse mechanism, the paper remaining in the gap between the
feed and the separation rollers returns 3-mm to the paper feed tray.
After that, the separation roller solenoid turns off to move the separation roller
away from the feed roller. This releases the leading edge of the paper and drops
the paper to the paper feed tray.
This prevents the remaining paper from tearing when drawing out the feed tray.
A246/A247/A248
2-80
SM
PAPER FEED
Detailed
Descriptions
2.7.7 PAPER SKEW PREVENTION MECHANISM
[A]
A246D595.WMF
To prevent paper skew or jam, the corner holders have both paper press arms [A]
press down both paper side edges, especially in the case of paper with a face curl.
This keeps the tray side fences from guiding the paper.
SM
2-81
A246/A247/A248
PAPER FEED
2.7.8 PAPER LIFT MECHANISM

When the tray is set in the machine, it detects this condition through the connector.
The 2nd tray detects by paper size switch.
The 3rd tray detects by tray set switch.
2nd and 3rd Tray Mechanism

[C]
[G]
[L]
[B]
[J]
[F]
[A]
[D]
[K]
[H]
A246D597.WMF
[E]
A246D596.WMF
When the machine detects that the paper tray is in the machine, the lift motor [A]
rotates and the coupling gear [B] on the tray lift motor engages the pin [C] for the
lift arm shaft [D]. Then it turns the tray lift arm [E] to lift the bottom plate for the tray
[F].
When the lift motor turns on, the pick-up solenoid [G] activates to lower the pick-up
roller [H]. When the top sheet of paper reaches the proper paper feed level, the
paper pushes up the pick-up roller and the actuator [J] on the pick-up roller
supporter [K] activates the lift sensor [L] to stop the lift motor.
After several paper feeds, the paper level gradually lowers then the lift sensor is
de-activated and the lift motor turns on again until the lift sensor is activated again.
When the tray is drawn out of the feed unit, the lift motor coupling gear [B]
disengages the pin [C] of the lift arm shaft [D], then the tray bottom plate [F] drops.
A246/A247/A248
2-82
SM
PAPER FEED
2.7.9 PAPER NEAR END/PAPER END DETECTION
Detailed
Descriptions
2nd and 3rd Tray Mechanism
[B]
[A]
A246D599.WMF
[C]
[D]
[E]
A246D600.WMF
A feeler [A] on the lift arm shaft rotates counterclockwise in accordance with the
change of the top paper level. When approximately 50 sheets remain in the tray,
the feeler activates the paper near end sensor [B] and informs the copier CPU of
the paper near end condition.
If paper in the paper tray, the paper stack raises the paper end feeler [C] and the
machine deactivates the paper end sensor [D]. When the paper tray runs out of
paper, the paper end feeler drops in the cut out [E] of the tray bottom plate and the
machine activates the paper end sensor.
SM
2-83
A246/A247/A248
PAPER FEED
2.7.10 TANDEM FEED TRAY

OVERVIEW
[B]
[A]
A246D601.WMF
1,550 sheets of paper can be set in each of the left [A] and right trays [B]. Paper is
fed from the right tray. When the paper in the right tray runs out, the paper in the
left tray automatically transfers to the right tray. After the paper transfer to the right
tray, paper feeding resumes.
Normally both the right and the left trays are joined together.
During copying, if there is no paper in the left tray, only the left tray can be pulled
out to load paper. During that time, paper feed continues.
A246/A247/A248
2-84
SM
PAPER FEED
2.7.11 PAPER LIFT MECHANISM

When the tray is set in the machine, it detects this condition through the connector.
1st Tray Lift Mechanism and Near End Detection
[A]
[E]
[B]
[H]
[M]
[C]
[F]
[K]
[N]
[D]
[I]
[L]
[G]
A246D650.WMF
When the machine detects that the 1st paper tray is set in the machine, the lift
motor [A] rotates and the coupling gear [B] on the tray lift motor engages the pin [C]
of the lift arm shaft [D]. The tray wires [E] are fixed in the slots [F] at the ends of the
tray support rods [G, H]. When the lift motor rotates clockwise, the tray support
rods and the tray bottom plate [I] move upward. The tray goes up until the top
paper pushes up the pick-up roller and the lift sensor in the 1st feed unit is
activated.
When the actuator [K] on the front end of the right support rod [G] activates the
paper near end sensor [J], the paper near end condition is detected.
When drawing out the tray, the coupling gear [B] separate from the pin [C], so that
the tray bottom plate move downward. The tray goes down until the actuator
activates the tray down sensor [L]. The damper [M] lets the tray bottom plate drop
down slowly.
The paper sensor for the right tray [N] checks that there are sheets of paper in right
tandem tray. If the machine determines that there are sheets of paper not using the
right tray paper sensor, it needs the bottom plate to go upward toward the paper
end sensor. The tandem tray capacity is 1,550 sheets, so it needs a long time to
check. Therefore, the right tray paper sensor is necessary.
SM
2-85
A246/A247/A248
Detailed
Descriptions
[E]
[J]
PAPER FEED
Paper Detection and Paper End detection

[A]
[E]
[C]
[F]
[G]
[D]
[H] [I]
[B]
A246D598.WMF
A246D597.WMF
[C]
[D]
[E]
A246D600.WMF
When the lift motor turns on, the pick-up solenoid [A] activates to lower the pick-up
roller [B]. When the top sheet of paper reaches the proper paper feed level, the
paper pushes up the pick-up roller and the actuator [C] on the pick-up roller
supporter [D] activates the lift sensor [E] to stop the lift motor.
After several paper feeds, the paper level gradually lowers then the lift sensor is
de-activated and the lift motor turns on again until the lift sensor is activated again.
If paper in the paper tray, the paper stack raises the paper end feeler [C] and the
machine deactivates the paper end sensor [D]. When the paper tray runs out of
paper, the paper end feeler drops in the cut out [E] of the tray bottom plate and the
machine activates the paper end sensor.
A246/A247/A248
2-86
SM
PAPER FEED
Fences Drive Mechanism

[A]
[D]
Detailed
Descriptions
[C]
[A]
[C]
[B]
[D]
[B]
A246D603.WMF
The side fences [A] of the right tray are normally closed. They open only when
paper in the left tray goes to the right tray.
The side fence solenoids [B] drive the side fences. When the paper loaded in the
left tray transfers to the right tray, the side fence solenoids turn on to open the side
fences until the side fence positioning sensor [C] activates.
When the rear fence in the left tray pushes paper into the right tray, the side fence
solenoids turn off to close the side fences.
When the side fence close sensor [D] actuates after pushing the tandem tray in,
the LCD displays a message advising the user to set the paper at the correct
position in the tandem tray.
SM
2-87
A246/A247/A248
PAPER FEED
Rear Fence Drive Mechanism

[E]
[C]
[D]
[A]
[B]
A246D651.WMF
[G]
[F]
A246D605.WMF
When the paper end sensor [A] in the left tray detects paper and the paper end
sensor in the right tray detects the paper end condition, the rear fence drive motor
[B] (DC motor) in the left tray rotates counter-clockwise causing the rear fence [C]
to push paper into the right tray.
When the actuator on the rear fence activates the return-position sensor [D], the
rear fence drive motor rotates clockwise until the actuator activates the rear fence
HP sensor [E].
When the rear fence is moving, the left tandem-lock solenoid [F] turns on and the
lock lever [G] locks the left tray.
A246/A247/A248
2-88
SM
PAPER FEED
Detailed
Descriptions
Tray Lock Mechanism
[A]
[B]
A246D653.WMF
[C]
A246D652.WMF
[A]
[D]
A246D654.WMF
Normally the left tray lock lever [A] in the left tray catches the pin [B] in the right
tandem tray. During copying, if there is no paper in the left tray, the tray lock
solenoid [C] turns on to release the tray lock lever so that the left tray separates
from the right tray. Therefore, only the left tray is pulled out to load paper.
When drawing out the tandem tray fully, the projection [D] pushes up the left tray
lock lever [A] so that both trays separate for easier paper loading.
SM
2-89
A246/A247/A248
PAPER FEED
2.7.12 PAPER SIZE DETECTION
A246D607.PCX
[A]
[B]
SW
Actuate..0
De-actuate..1
1 2 3 4 5
01111
00111
10011
01001
00100
00010
00001
10000
11000
11100
Paper size
L: Lengthwise
S: Sideways
A4/A3
version
LT/DLT
version
A3-L
B4-L
A4-L
A4-S
81/2 x 13
11 x 17-L
81/2 x 14-L
81/2 x 11-L
81/2 x 11-S
51/2 x 81/2-S
8 x 10-S
8 x 10-L
8 x 13-L
10 x 14-L
11 x 15-L
A5-S
8 k-L (*)
16 k-L (*)
16 k-S (*)
A246D608.WMF
For the first and the third feed trays, the paper size is stored by using the SP mode
(SP4-3 Tray Paper Size).
For the second feed tray (universal tray), the paper size switch [A] detects the
paper size. The paper size switch has five microswitches inside. An actuator plate
[B] located on the rear of the tray actuates the paper size switch. Each paper size
has its own unique combination as shown in the table and the CPU judges the
paper size by this combination of activated switches.
(*) It is necessary to set the Taiwanese paper size enable (SP4-12-2).
A246/A247/A248
2-90
SM
PAPER FEED
2.7.13 VERTICAL TRANSPORT MECHANISM
Detailed
Descriptions
[A]
[B]
A246D610.WMF
The paper feed motor drives the vertical transport rollers [A] in each feed unit. The
vertical transport rollers and the idle vertical transport rollers [B], on the inner and
the outer vertical guide plates, transport the paper from each feed unit to the
registration roller.
The vertical transport guides can be opened to remove jammed paper in the
vertical transport area.
SM
2-91
A246/A247/A248
PAPER FEED
2.7.14 TRAY POSITIONING MECHANISM
[B]
[C]
[A]
A246D655.WMF
A246D656.WMF
[D]
A246D612.WMF
Tray Lock Mechanism

When the feed tray is set in the paper feed unit, the lock lever [A] drops behind the
lock plate [B] on the Accuride support bracket to lock the tray in the proper position.
Side-To-Side Positioning Mechanism (Tandem Tray)

When the feed tray is set in the paper feed unit, the side-to-side positioning plate
[C] presses the feed tray against the stopper [D]. By moving the positioning plate,
the tray position can be changed to adjust the side-to-side registration.
A246/A247/A248
2-92
SM
PAPER FEED
[A]
[A]
[B]
A246D613.WMF
Side plates [A] are secured on the positioning plate [B]. By moving the positioning
plate (secured by four screws), the paper position can be changed to adjust the
side-to-side registration.
SM
2-93
A246/A247/A248
Detailed
Descriptions
Side-To-Side Positioning Mechanism (Universal Tray)
PAPER FEED
Side-To-Side Positioning Mechanism (550 Sheets Tray)
[A]
A246D657.WMF
By moving the side fences [A] (secured by one screw each), the paper position can
be changed to adjust the side-to-side registration.
A246/A247/A248
2-94
SM
PAPER FEED
2.7.15 BY-PASS FEED TABLE

Feed Mechanism/Paper End Detection
Detailed
Descriptions
[C]
[A]
[D]
[B]
A246D617.WMF
[E]
[F]
A246D616.WMF
The by-pass feed table uses the FRR feed system. The by-pass feed motor [A],
pick-up solenoid [B], and by-pass feed clutch [C] control paper feeding from the bypass feed table.
The by-pass paper end sensor [D] detects if there is paper on the by-pass feed
table.
When there is no paper on the by-pass feed table, the paper end feeler [E] drops in
the cut out [F] of the lower guide plate and the paper end sensor [D] deactivates.
When paper is present on the by-pass feed table, the paper pushes up the end
feeler [E] to activate the paper end sensor [D]. The CPU turns off the paper end
indicator on the LCD panel and turns the start key from red to green.
When the by-pass paper feed key is pressed twice, the copier enters the thick
paper mode. In this mode the by-pass feed clutch turns on twice, and the
continuous copy speed is reduced.
SM
2-95
A246/A247/A248
PAPER FEED
Table Open/Close Detection
[A]
[B]
A246D618.WMF
After opening the by-pass feed table, part of the feed table [B] activates the bypass table switch [A]. Then the CPU turns on the by-pass feed indicator on the
operation panel.
On this model, opening the by-pass feed table does not shift the copier into
interrupt mode. The selected modes and input data before opening the by-pass
feed table remain. In addition, other paper trays can be selected while the by-pass
feed table is open.
A246/A247/A248
2-96
SM
PAPER FEED
Paper Size Detection
[A]
[B]
A246D619.WMF
The paper width detection is necessary to decide the lens horizontal position
because the standard position of the optics (rear left corner) and the paper (center)
is different.
The by-pass paper-size sensor [A] (variable resistor) monitors the paper width.
When the paper side fences [B] and [C] are positioned according to the paper
width, the rear side fence is connected to the lever of the by-pass paper-size
sensor. The electrical resistance of the sensor changes in accordance with the side
fence position. This informs the CPU of the paper width.
At the first copy from the by-pass feed table, the scanner makes a full distance
scan. The registration sensor monitors the length of this paper (between the ON
timing by the leading edge and the OFF timing by the trailing edge). From the
following copies, the copier is controlled according to this paper length data.
SM
2-97
A246/A247/A248
Detailed
Descriptions
[C]
PAPER FEED
2.7.16 PAPER REGISTRATION
[A]
[B]
A246D620.WMF
The registration rollers [A] have two functions. One is aligning the lead edge of the
paper with the leading edge of the latent image on the OPC drum. When the CPU
receives the signal from the registration sensor, the registration clutch turns on. It
turns off 90ms after the registration sensor detects the trailing edge of the paper.
The other function is to correct skewing of paper fed from the trays. When the
leading edge of the paper reaches the registration rollers, the vertical transport
rollers [B] continuously turn to transport the paper. On the other hand, the
registration roller is not turning. The leading edge of the paper is pushed against
the registration roller. This makes a little buckle on the paper between the vertical
transport rollers and the registration rollers to correct paper skew.
Shortly after the leading edge of the paper reaches the registration roller, the
registration motor rotates the registration rollers to feed the paper.
A246/A247/A248
2-98
SM
PAPER FEED
2.7.17 REGISTRATION DRIVE MECHANISM
[A] [C]
Detailed
Descriptions
[D]
[B]
[E]
A246D621.WMF
Through the timing belt [A], registration motor [B] drive is transmitted to the lower
registration gear [C], then to the upper registration roller [D] via two gears [E] at the
front side.
SM
2-99
A246/A247/A248
PAPER FEED
2.7.18 GUIDE PLATE RELEASE MECHANISM

[C]
[B]
[D]
[F]
[E]
[G]
[A]
A246D623.WMF
When a paper misfeed occurs between the vertical transport rollers and the
registration rollers, the lower paper guide plate [A] automatically opens.
If the registration sensor is not active at a certain jam check timing, the guide plate
solenoid [B] turns on. The lever [C] raises the lock lever [D] on the guide plate to
release the pin [E] on the rear side frame. Then, the guide plate falls open.
The actuator [F] on the guide plate activates the guide plate position sensor [G]
when the guide plate opens.
To prevent the guide plate from remaining open, if the guide plate position sensor
is activated, copying will not occur and the LCD panel will display a caution
message.
A246/A247/A248
2-100
SM
IMAGE FUSING
2.8 IMAGE FUSING

2.8.1 OVERVIEW
[E]
[D]
[F]
[G]
[M]
[L]
[K]
[I]
[H]
[C]
[B]
[J]
A246D624.WMF
After transferring the image, the copy paper enters the fusing unit. A heat and
pressure process using a hot roller [A] and a pressure roller [B] fuses the image to
the copy paper.
There are two fusing lamps [C] inside the hot roller. They are turned on and off to
maintain the operating temperature of 185C. The CPU monitors the hot roller
surface temperature through a thermistor [D], which is in contact with the hot
roller's surface. A thermofuse [E] protects the fusing unit from overheating.
The hot roller strippers [F] separate the copy paper from the hot roller and direct it
to the fusing exit rollers [G]. The exit sensor [H] monitors the progress of the copy
paper through the fusing unit and acts as a misfeed detector while the exit rollers
drive the copy paper to the inverter section.
The hook positions of the tension springs [I] on the pressure lever [J] adjust the
roller pressure.
The oil supply roller [K] applies a light coat of silicon oil to the hot roller. The oil
supply cleaning roller [L] and oil supply cleaning brush [M] remove the paper dust
accumulated on the oil supply roller.
SM
2-101
A246/A247/A248
Detailed
Descriptions
[A]
IMAGE FUSING
2.8.2 FUSING ENTRANCE GUIDE
[A]
A246D625.WMF
The entrance guide [A] for this machine is adjustable for thick or thin paper by
changing the screw position from the upper to the lower.
With thin paper, set the entrance guide in the upper position. This slightly lengthens
the paper path, which prevents the paper from creasing in the fusing unit. With
thick paper, set the entrance guide in the lower position.
This is because thick paper does not bend as easily, and is therefore less prone to
creasing. In addition, the lower setting allows more direct access to the gap
between the hot and pressure rollers. This prevents thick paper from buckling
against the hot roller, which can cause blurring at the leading edge of the copy.
In this model, the transfer belt improves paper transport and stabilizes the paper
path to the fusing entrance. This reduces the chance of paper creasing due to
paper skews in the fusing unit.
Therefore, the screws secure the guide plate. Since there are very few reasons to
change the guide plate position, there is no guide plate position adjustment lever
for customer use.
A246/A247/A248
2-102
SM
IMAGE FUSING
2.8.3 FUSING DRIVE MECHANISM
[A]
[D]
[B]
Detailed
Descriptions
[C]
[E]
[F]
A246D626.WMF
The fusing drive gear [A] transmits drive from the fusing/duplex drive motor [B] to
the gear [C], which drives the hot roller gear [D]. Rotation passes from the gear [C]
through the idle gear [E] to the exit roller drive gear [F]. The friction between the hot
and pressure rollers drives the pressure roller.
SM
2-103
A246/A247/A248
IMAGE FUSING
2.8.4 FUSING LAMP CONTROL

C
200C
200
180C
185C
150
: Main switch on
: Process control data
100
initial setting start
: Idling start
: Ready
50
A246D627.WMF
After turning the main switch on, the CPU turns on the two fusing lamps.
When the fusing temperature reaches 180C, the machine starts the process
control data initialization. If the fusing temperature was already above 100C when
the main switch was turned on, the process control initial setting is not done.
When the CPU detects a fusing temperature of 200C, the copier starts fusing
idling. SP mode 1-15-1 can adjust the idling period. If the fusing temperature was
already above 100C after turning the machine on, it will not go into fusing idling
mode.
When fusing idling has finished, the warm-up period is completed and the Ready
indicator turns on. After this, the machine maintains a fusing temperature of 185C.
The CPU changes the fusing lamp ON period depending on the temperature
measured by the thermistor to keep the fusing temperature as close as possible to
the target temperature.
The on-off control mode controls the fusing temperature.
After pressing the by-pass paper feed key twice, the copier enters thick paper
mode. In this mode, the fusing temperature stays at 190C reducing the continuous
copy speed.
A246/A247/A248
2-104
SM
IMAGE FUSING
2.8.5 INVERTER AND PAPER EXIT

[C]
[B]
Detailed
Descriptions
[E]
[E]
[C]
A246D628.WMF
[D]
[A]
[D]
[I]
[F]
[I]
A246D629.WMF
[G]
[H]
A246D658.WMF
After passing the fusing unit, copies enter the inverter unit where paper is
distributed to the paper exit rollers [A] or the duplex unit. The junction gate solenoid
[B] changes the position of the junction gate [C]. In duplex mode, the junction gate
solenoid turns on to raise the junction gate so that the junction gate guides the
paper into the duplex unit. The fusing exit sensor [D] and exit sensor [E] monitor
paper misfeeds.
The duplex transport sensor [F] not only monitors paper misfeed detection, but also
activates the duplex jogger motor.
When the paper passes the duplex transport roller [G], the paper pushes the paper
guide [H] up, and the actuator on the rear end of the paper guide shaft de-activates
the paper guide sensor [I]. The duplex paper guide sensor monitors paper
misfeeds.
SM
2-105
A246/A247/A248
IMAGE FUSING
2.8.6 INVERTER AND EXIT DRIVE MECHANISM
[D]
[C]
[B]
[A]
A246D630.WMF
The gear [A] transmits the drive from the fusing/duplex drive motor [B] to the next
gear [C]. This gear [C] transmits the drive to the paper exit and the inverter section
through the timing belt [D].
A246/A247/A248
2-106
SM
DUPLEX
2.9 DUPLEX
2.9.1 OVERVIEW
Detailed
Descriptions
[A]
[B]
[C]
A246D631.WMF
In this mode, the junction gate [A] directs sheets exiting the fusing unit to the
duplex tray entrance. After that, all sheets follow the path through the entrance
rollers [B]. After all the front side copying is complete, the sheets follow (sheets in
the duplex tray feed in order from bottom to top) the path through the duplex feed
mechanism and vertical transport rollers [C] to the registration rollers.
SM
2-107
A246/A247/A248
DUPLEX

[E]
[B]
[D]
[C]
[A]
A246D632.WMF
The duplex drive gear [A] transmits drive from the fusing/duplex drive motor [B] to
the duplex unit. This drive is transmitted to the duplex paper feed section under the
control of the duplex feed clutch [C]. It is also transmitted to the duplex transport
section under the control of the duplex transport clutch [D]. The gear [E] drives the
duplex positioning roller, so this roller continuously rotates while the fusing/duplex
drive motor is on.
A246/A247/A248
2-108
SM
DUPLEX
2.9.3 DUPLEX ENTRANCE TO DUPLEX TRAY
[A]
Detailed
Descriptions
[G]
[A]
A246D633.WMF
[B]
[B]
[C]
[G]
[D]
[E]
[C]
A246D659.WMF
[B]
[F]
A246D660.WMF
After paper passes through the junction gate, it pushes the feeler [A] up. The feeler
and the paper guide [B] form one part, so that when it pushes up, the paper guide
moves out of the paper path. The paper then enters the duplex unit. After the
trailing edge of the paper passes the feeler, nothing holds it up and the paper guide
falls into place and is ready to guide the paper under brush roller. (If the paper
catches on top of the brush roller [C], the guide pushes it under as it falls.)
The paper guide sensor [G] is responsible for misfeed detection during duplex
copying. Movement of the paper guide assembly is detected by the paper gukde
sensor [G].
After opening the front door [D], the spring [E] and levers [F] lift the paper guide up
so that the paper guide does not interfere with the duplex unit pulled out and
pushed in for jam removal.
SM
2-109
A246/A247/A248
DUPLEX
2.9.4 DUPLEX STACKING

[B]
[D]
[C]
[A]
A246D634.WMF
[B]
10 mm
[C]
10 mm
A246D635.WMF
The jogger motor (stepping motor) [A] drives the side fence drive wire [B] to move
the side fences [C] inward or outward.
After turning the main switch on, the jogger motor rotates to place the jogger
fences at the home position by monitoring the signal of the jogger HP sensor [D].
When the start key is pressed, the jogger motor rotates to position the side fences
according to the selected paper size. 30 ms after the duplex transport sensor
detects the leading edge of the paper (OFF ON), the jogger motor rotates to
position the jogger side fences 10 mm away from the selected paper size. When
the copy paper is delivered in the duplex tray, actually 150 ms after the duplex
transport sensor detects the trailing edge of the paper (ON OFF), the jogger
fences move inward to square the paper. 30 ms after the duplex transport sensor
detects the leading edge of the next copy paper, the jogger fences move back to
the previous positions (10 mm away from the paper size) again.
The jogger fences move inward to square the paper stack for every copy paper
stack at the same timing as before. After the last copy of the first side that is
copying enters the duplex tray, the jogger fences remain against the paper stack.
A246/A247/A248
2-110
SM
DUPLEX
2.9.5 DUPLEX PICK-UP ROLLER MECHANISM
Detailed
Descriptions
[C]
[B]
A246D636.WMF
[A]
[A]
[E]
[D]
A246D637.WMF
The positioning roller [A] is in the upper position. 150 ms after the duplex entrance
sensor [E] detects the trailing edge of the paper (ON OFF), the positioning
solenoid [B] turns on to lower the positioning roller until it contacts the paper. The
positioning roller continuously rotates clockwise while the fusing/duplex motor [C]
rotates. The positioning solenoid turns on until the leading edge of the paper hits
the separation belt [D].
30 ms after the duplex entrance sensor [E] detects the leading edge (OFF ON)
of the next paper, the positioning roller solenoid turns off. This raises the
positioning roller so that it does not disturb the next paper as it enters.
SM
2-111
A246/A247/A248
DUPLEX
2.9.6 DUPLEX PAPER FEED

[B]
A246D638.WMF
[A]
[D]
[E]
[C]
[F]
A246D639.WMF
The paper in the duplex tray feeds in order from the bottom to the top sheet.
At the appropriate time, before the bottom sheet feeds, the duplex pressure
solenoid [A] turns on to lower the pressure arm [B]. This causes the pressure arm
to press the paper against the pick up roller [C].
Then, the paper feed clutch [D] turns on to rotate the pick-up roller [C], separation
belt [E] and the feed roller [F].
The separation belt [E] and the feed roller [F] rotate in opposite directions. Only the
bottom paper feeds because the separation belt prevents any other paper from
feeding.
The feed roller advances the bottom paper past the separation belts because the
force of the feed roller is greater than the resistance of the separation belts. The
separation belt prevents multiple feeds because the resistance of the separation
belt is greater than the friction between the papers.
A246/A247/A248
2-112
SM
DUPLEX
Detailed
Descriptions
A4/LT lengthwise or longer
[A]
[A]
[A]
[B]
[B]
A246D661.WMF
To increase duplex copy productivity from simplex to duplex mode with DF, the
duplex copy control will change as follows:
Before the last sheet [A] of copy paper is stacked in the duplex tray, the next job [B]
will start from the bottom stacked sheet (Except for A4/LT Lengthwise or longer).
SM
2-113
A246/A247/A248
DUPLEX
[D]
[D] [A]
[C]
A246D642.WMF
[F]
[E]
[B]
A246D671.WMF
A246D641.WMF
When the duplex transport sensor detects the trailing edge of the last paper, the
pressure solenoid turns off to raise the pressure arm.
200 ms after the duplex entrance sensor [A] detects the leading edge of the paper,
the duplex feed clutch [B] turns off and the paper is transported by the duplex
transport rollers [C].
When the paper activates the duplex exit sensor [D], the duplex transport clutch [E]
turns off and the paper waits there until the feed timing adjusts to match the
registration clutch timing of the previous paper.
The duplex paper end sensor [F], which is a reflective type photo sensor, detects
the duplex paper end condition.
A246/A247/A248
2-114
SM
ENERGY STAR COMPLIANT MACHINES (ALL THE DESTINATIONS)
In conjunction with the modification for the Energy Star compliance, Ricoh asks
that all field technicians understand the changes in operation modes to configure
the machine for the customer specific environment/requirements. This section
refers to all differences between the Energy Star compliant machines and other
machines previously produced.
Mode
Auto Off Mode
Non-Energy Star
If the user utilizes the copier after the
weekly timer turns it off, the copier will
turn itself back off after a selected
time.
The auto off time can be set from 1 to
999 minutes, or turned off.
Default: Off
Energy Star
The copier turns off after the selected
time after the last copying job.
The time can be adjusted from 1 to
240 minutes.
Default: 90 minutes
Auto Off Mode disabling (User Tools Auto Off - 2/2 page - AOF).
If Reset is selected, the machine will
never enter auto off mode.
In this condition (AOF: Reset), Set
date/Time and Weekly Timer touch
displays will appear on the User
Tools/Counter menu.
Low Power Mode The copier enters Low Power Mode
The copier enters Low Power Mode
automatically at the selected time
automatically at the selected time
after your job is finished. The time can after your job is finished. The time can
be set from 1 to 999 minutes or turned be adjusted from 1 to 240 minutes.
off.
Default: 15 minutes
Simplex/Duplex
Single sided original to single sided
Single sided original to two-sided copy
copy is default setting mode at the
Mode
is default setting mode at the factory.
factory.
Note: Program #10, which the copier
refers to at initialization, holds
the mode.
Weekly Timer
Available
Because the auto off mode is a
mandatory standard feature of the
Energy Star standards, the weekly
timer is no longer available.
Anti-condensation All plugged in
All unplugged. (CN2 and 4 on the
heaters
lightening arrestor PCB)
Lightening
Arrestor
CN4
CN2
Note: All anti-condensation heaters
are still on the machine.
Because the attached Energy Star Information will be available together with the
Operating Instructions, make sure that the customer understands how the machine
operates to save energy.
SM
2-115
A246/A247/A248
Detailed
Descriptions
2.10 ENERGY STAR COMPLIANT MACHINES (ALL THE

DESTINATIONS)
ENERGY STAR COMPLIANT MACHINES (ALL THE DESTINATIONS)
-A2
W24]
Main SW Trigger [
V A A [24]
CN113
-A1
RA
Main Control PCB

A246D665.PCX
A246D666.PCX
A246D667.PCX
A246/A247/A248
2-116
SM
ENERGY SAVING INFORMATION
2.11 ENERGY SAVING INFORMATION
This product was designed to reduce the environmental

impact associated with copying equipment by means of energy saving feature
such as Auto off, Low power, duplex default modes.
2.11.1 ABOUT THE ENERGY SAVING FEATURES OF THIS

COPIER
Auto Off Mode
NOTE: There is an explanation of Auto Off mode in your Operating Instructions.
The explanation of Auto Off mode described below is a
supplement/correction of that given in your Operating Instructions.
NOTE: The Weekly Timer is not available on this copier because of the Auto Off
mode.
To conserve energy, this copier model automatically turns off 90 minutes after the
last copying job is complete.
To exit the Auto Off Mode, turn on the main switch. The main switch for this copier
has three positions, press it all the way and hold for 1 - 2 seconds.
Changing The Auto Off Timer
A246D672.PCX
1. Press the User Tools/Counter key.

2. Touch the 2 Auto reset/Auto off key.
SM
2-117
A246/A247/A248
Detailed
Descriptions
As an Energy Star Partner, we have determined that this

copier model meets Energy Star Guidelines for energy
efficiency.
A246D670.PCX
3. Adjust the Auto off timer following the instructions on the display.
Time can be adjusted from 1 to 240 minutes in 1-minute steps.
You cannot cancel the Auto off mode. The OFF key cannot be selected.
4. To exit from the User Tools condition, touch the Exit key.
Low Power Mode

This copier automatically lowers its power consumption when this copier is not
used for a certain period after last copy job.
To exit the low power mode, press Clear Mode/Energy Saver key.
Changing Low Power Timer

1. Access 2 Auto reset/Auto off page in the user tools.
2. Adjust the Low power timer following the instruction on the display.
Time can be adjusted from 1 to 240 minutes in 1 minute steps.
You cannot cancel the low power mode. The OFF key cannot be selected.
3. Exit the user tools.
Duplex Default Mode (U.S.A. Version Only)

NOTE: There is an explanation of the Duplex mode in your Operating Instructions.
The explanation of the Duplex mode described below is a
supplement/correction of that given in your Operating Instructions.
The factory (Default) setting in Menu 10 (Set operation modes) of the User Tools
has been set at PROGRAM 10 rather than NORMAL. This allows copy modes
stored in Program 10 to be the default mode. (For detail, refer to your Operating
Instruction Book.)
To save paper resources, the following Duplex mode has been selected as the
factory (default) setting using Program 10:
Copiers with the document feeder and the sorter stapler are set for two sided
copies from an even number of originals.
A246/A247/A248
2-118
SM
Canceling The Duplex Default Mode

To cancel the Duplex Default mode, store one-sided copy mode in Program 10 as
follows:
2. Touch the Duplex/Series Copies key to cancel the duplex mode.

3. Press the Program key.
4. Touch the Store Program key.
5. Touch the 10 key. Then, the display shows Program 10 has been stored. Do
you want to revise the program?.
6. Touch the Yes key to overwrite a new program.
7. Touch the 10 key again to enter a new program.
Changing Duplex Default Mode

To change a duplex mode set at the factory as a default to an another duplex mode
you need as a default, select the appropriate duplex mode and overwrite it in
Program 10 as follows;
1. Press the Clear Modes key.
2. Touch the Duplex/Series Copies key to cancel the duplex mode. Then,
touch the Duplex/Series Copies key again and select the appropriate
duplex mode as the default.
You can select either Two sided copies from an odd number of originals or
Two sided copies from two sided originals.
3. Press the Program key.
4. Touch the Store Program key.
5. Touch the 10 key. Then, the display shows Program 10 has been stored. Do
you want to revise the program?.
6. Touch the Yes key to overwrite a new program.
7. Touch the 10 key again to enter a new program.
Recycled Paper
Please contact your sales or service representative for recommended recycled
paper types that this copier can use.
SM
2-119
A246/A247/A248
Detailed
Descriptions
1. Press the Clear Modes key.
INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
3. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
3.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
1. Temperature Range:
10C to 30C (50F to 86F)
2. Humidity Range:
15% to 90% RH
3. Ambient Illumination:
Less than 1,500 lux (Do not expose to direct

sunlight.)
4. Ventilation:
To avoid possible build-up of ozone, make sure to

locate this copier in a large well ventilated room
that has an air turnover of more than
30 m3/hr/person.
5. Ambient Dust:
Less than 0.10 mg/m3 (2.7 x 10-6 oz/yd3)
6. If the place of installation is air-conditioned or heated, do not place the machine

where it will be:
1) Subjected to sudden temperature changes.
2) Directly exposed to cool air from an air-conditioner.
3) Directly exposed to heat from a heater.
7. Do not place the machine where it will be exposed to corrosive gases.
8. Do not install the machine at any location over 2,000 m (6,500 feet) above sea
level.
9. Place the copier on a strong and level base.
10. Do not place the machine where it may be subjected to strong vibrations.
3.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL

1. Front to back:
Within 5 mm (0.2") of level
2. Right to left:
Within 5 mm (0.2") of level
NOTE: The machine legs may be screwed up or down in order to level the
machine. Set a carpenters level on the exposure glass.
SM
3-1
A246/A247/A248
Installation
3.1.1 ENVIRONMENT
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTSr 1998
3.1.3 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS

Place the copier near the power source, providing clearance as shown below. The
same amount of clearance is necessary when optional equipment is installed.
More than 10 cm, 3.9"
More than
20 cm, 7.9"
More than
10 cm, 3.9"
More than 70 cm, 27.6"

A246I518.WMF
3.1.4 POWER REQUIREMENTS
CAUTION
1. Make sure the plug is firmly inserted in the outlet.
2. Avoid multi-wiring.
3. Do not set anything on the power cord.
1. Input voltage level:
120 V/60 Hz:

More than 20 A
220 ~ 240 V/50-60 Hz: More than 10 A
110 V/60 Hz:
More than 20 A
2. Permissible voltage fluctuation:
10%
A246/A247/A248
3-2
SM
COPIER (A246/A247/A248)
3.2 COPIER (A246/A247/A248)

3.2.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following
list:
Description
Qty
1. Leveling Shoes ...................................................................... 2
Installation
2. SP mode data sheet .............................................................. 1
SM
3-3
A246/A247/A248
COPIER (A246/A247/A248)r 1998
3.2.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION
Rating voltage for Peripherals
Make sure plug the cables into the correct sockets.
ARDF
Rating voltage Output
Connector for Accessory;
Max. DC 24 V
SORTER
Max. DC 24 V
PAPER TRAY UNIT

Max. DC 24 V
A246I532.WMF
A246/A247/A248
3-4
SM
COPIER (A246/A247/A248)
NOTE: Since the installation procedure is not packed with the copier as an
accessory, always bring this manual with you.
[A]
Installation
[B]
A246I500.WMF
A246I510.WMF
CAUTION
When installing the copier, make sure that the copier is unplugged.
NOTE: Insert the leveling shoes [A] under the leveling feet [B] for the front side,
and level the machine before starting the installation. (The leveling feet [B]
can be screwed up or down.) Extra leveling shoes (AH013008) and
leveling feet (AH011004) are available as spare parts.
1. Remove the tape strips.
SM
3-5
A246/A247/A248
COPIER (A246/A247/A248)r 1998
[A]
[D]
[B]
A246I511.WMF
A246I512.WMF
[C]
[H]
[I]
[G]
[F]
[E]
[J]
A246I513.WMF
A246I537.WMF
2. Open the front door.

3. Remove the tape strips.
4. Remove the scanner clamp [A] (1 screw) and install the cap [B] attached on the
paper exit bracket with a tape.
5. Remove the transfer belt lock plate [C] (1 screw).
6. Turn the cleaning unit lock pin [D] about 180 then remove.
7. Pull out the fusing unit. Lower the lever [E], remove the oil supply unit [F], and
remove the front and rear clamps [G]. Reinstall the oil supply unit and push in
the fusing unit.
8. Pull out the 1st tray. Remove the clamp [H], shipping retainers [I], and tapes [J].
A246/A247/A248
3-6
SM
[A]
[C]
[C]
[B]
A246I501.WMF
A246I514.PCX
[E]
[H]
[G]
[F]
A246I502.WMF
9. Remove the shutter inner cover [A] (1 screw).

10. Release the shutter lever [B] fully to the front.
11. Remove the screw [C] securing the toner bottle holder bracket.
12. Swing out the toner bottle holder [D].
13. Remove the screw [E] securing the drum stay [F].
14. Remove the drum stay knob [G] and the drum stay. (Turn the knob clockwise to
remove it.)
15. Disconnect two connectors [H].
SM
3-7
A246/A247/A248
Installation
COPIER (A246/A247/A248)
COPIER (A246/A247/A248)r 1998
[B]
[C]
A246I503.WMF
[D]
[A]
[E]
A246I504.WMF
16. Pull out the development unit.

NOTE: 1) To prevent drum scratches, push the development unit to the right
while pulling it out.
2) Place the development unit on the sheet attached with the new
developer to prevent foreign matter from being attracted to the
sleeve rollers.
3) When pulling out the development unit, do not pull on the knob [A].
17. Remove two screws [B] securing the toner hopper [C].
18. Remove the toner hopper [C] from the development unit, as shown.
19. Evenly pour in one pack of developer [D] while turning the knob [E]. Distribute
the developer evenly along the development unit.
NOTE: To prevent the developer from spilling, do not rotate the gears in the
opposite direction.
A246/A247/A248
3-8
SM
COPIER (A246/A247/A248)
Installation
[A]
A246I505.WMF
[F]
[E]
[B]
[D]
[C]
A246I506.WMF
20. Attach the toner hopper [A] to the development unit (2 screws).
21. Install the development unit in the machine.
22. Connect two connectors [B].
23. Install the drum stay [C] and attach the drum stay knob [D] and one screw [E].
NOTE: When installing the drum stay, be careful not to pinch the harness and
keep the harness away from the gear [F].
SM
3-9
A246/A247/A248
COPIER (A246/A247/A248)r 1998
[E]
[A]
[D]
[F]
[C]
A246I507.WMF
[B]
A246I530.WMF
24. Set the toner bottle holder in position (1 screw [A]).

NOTE: Make sure that the projection [B] of the toner bottle holder is set on the
right side of the bracket [C],as shown, otherwise, toner will not be
supplied.
25. Install the shutter inner cover [D], as shown (1 screw).
NOTE: Hang the shutter lever [E] on the hook [F].
26. Install a toner bottle by following the instructions on the decal.
NOTE: -26, -27 machines only
Before plugging in the power cord, install the guidance ROMs.
(See GUIDANCE ROM INSTALLATION.)
27. Plug in the power cord, then turn on the main switch. The machine
automatically enters the process control data initial setting mode.
NOTE: Do not make any copies until the developer initial settings are
complete. Do not turn off the main switch during the process control
data initial setting mode.
A246/A247/A248
3-10
SM
COPIER (A246/A247/A248)
28. Enter SP mode as follows:

1) Press the Clear Mode key.
2) Enter 107.
3) Press the Clear/Stop key for more than 3 seconds.
$ F
[D]
Installation
[A]
A246I508.PCX
[C]
[B]
A246I533.PCX
29. Touch the SP Adjustment key [A].

30. Enter SP1-2-1 (Developer Initial Setting), then touch the Start key [B].
NOTE: Developer initial setting stops automatically.
31. Press the Index key [C].
NOTE: If the developer initial setting is not completed, you cannot exit the SP
mode by pressing the Exit key [D]. If this occurs, turn the main switch off
and on then repeat steps 26 to 29 again. If the result is the same, see the
troubleshooting section SC352.
SM
3-11
A246/A247/A248
COPIER (A246/A247/A248)r 1998
[A]
A246I508.PCX
[C]
[B]
A246I534.PCX
32. - Only in France This step is for the 50 CPM version machine only.
1) Touch SP Special Features key [A].
2) Enter SP4-14-4 (CPM Selection), then touch the 50 CPM key [B].
3) Press the Index key [C].
A246/A247/A248
3-12
SM
COPIER (A246/A247/A248)
[D]
A246I508.PCX
[C]
[B]
A246I536.PCX
33. Touch Counter Clear key [A].

34. Enter SP8-2-2 (Total Counter Clear), then touch the Clear key [B].
35. Touch the Index key [C].
36. Touch the Exit key [D] to exit SP mode.
37. Check copy quality and machine operation.
SM
3-13
A246/A247/A248
Installation
[A]
COPIER (A246/A247/A248)r 1998
3.2.3 GUIDANCE ROM INSTALLATION (OPTION: EUROPE

VERSION ONLY)
[A]
[B]
[C]
A246I516.WMF
[D]
A246I538.WMF
1. If necessary, replace the two guidance ROM chips on the operation panel PCB
with the optional guidance ROM chips as follows:
1) Remove the operation panel [A] (4 screws, 1 connector).
2) Replace the guidance ROMs (IC106 [B], IC108 [C]) on the operation panel
PCB [D].
3) Re-install the operation panel.
NOTE: Be careful not to touch the grounding wire terminal with the circuit
pattern on the operation panel when re-installing the operation
panel.
A246/A247/A248
3-14
SM
COPIER (A246/A247/A248)
3.2.4 PLATEN COVER (OPTION) INSTALLATION
[B]
[F]
[D]
Installation
[C]
[H]
[G]
[E]
[A]
[H]
A246I526.WMF
A246I525.WMF
Install the optional platen cover as follows:

1. Install the sensor assy [A] which is an accessory of the platen cover [B], as
follows:
1) Connect the red connector [C] to the rear sensor [D].
2) Connect the white connector [E] to the front sensor [F].
3) Secure the sensor assembly with a screw [G].
2. Install the platen cover hooks [H].
3. Install the platen cover [B].
SM
3-15
A246/A247/A248
COPIER (A246/A247/A248)r 1998
3.2.5 KEY COUNTER HOLDER INSTALLATION (OPTION)
[C]
[B]
[A]
A246I527.WMF
CAUTION
Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure.
NOTE: The Key Counter Bracket Set includes the following parts. The key counter
holder and key counter should be procured locally.
1. Key Counter Bracket ............................................................. 1
2. Key Counter Plate Nut........................................................... 2
3. Key Counter Cover ................................................................ 1
4. Accessory Harness................................................................ 1
5. Screws................................................................................... 4
6. Stepped Screw (not used for this model)............................... 1
1. Remove the two plastic caps [A] and [B] on the right upper cover of the copier.
2. Remove the short-circuit connector [C].
A246/A247/A248
3-16
SM
COPIER (A246/A247/A248)
[A]
[B]
Installation
[C]
[D]
A246I528.WMF
[E]
[G]
[I]
[H]
[F]
A246I529.WMF
3. Hold the key counter plate nuts [A] on the inside of the key counter bracket [B]
and insert the key counter holder [C].
4. Fix the key counter holder [C] to the bracket [B] (2 screws).
5. Install the key counter cover [D] (2 screws).
6. Install the connector of the accessory harness [E].
7. Replace the key counter hold pin [F] as shown.
8. Connect the connector [G] of the key counter holder.
9. Hook the key counter holder assembly [H] to the key counter hold pin [F].
10. Secure the key counter holder assembly [H] with a screw [I].
SM
3-17
A246/A247/A248
COPIER (A246/A247/A248)r 1998
3.2.6 ORIGINAL TRAY INSTALLATION (OPTION)

NOTE: The original tray includes the following parts.
[A]
[B]
[C]
A246I515.WMF
1. Original tray ........................................................................... 1

2. Stepped screw....................................................................... 2
1. Remove the two plastic caps [A].

2. Install the stepped screws [B].
3. Set the original tray [C], as shown.
A246/A247/A248
3-18
SM
UNIVERSAL TRAY (TRAY 2)
3.3 UNIVERSAL TRAY (TRAY 2)

NOTE: At the factory, this tray is set up for A4 or LT lengthwise depending on the
machine destination code.
Installation
[A]
A246I517.WMF
Slide the paper size slider [A] to the paper size indication that matches the paper
size in the tray. The following paper sizes can be selected with the paper size
slider.
A4/A3 Version
A3 (lengthwise)
A4 (lengthwise)
A4 (sideways)
A5 (sideways)
81/4" x 13" (lengthwise)
81/2" x 13" (lengthwise)
SM
3-19
LT/DL Version
11" x 17"
81/2" x 14"
81/2" x 11"
11" x 81/2"
81/2" x 51/2"
8" x 101/2"
11" x 15"
10" x 14"
8" x 10"
8" x 13"
A246/A247/A248
550 SHEETS PAPER TRAY (TRAY 3)r 1998
3.4 550 SHEETS PAPER TRAY (TRAY 3)

[C]
[B]
[C]
[A]
A246I519.WMF
At the factory, the 3rd paper cassette is set as A3 or DLT. Change the paper size
as follows.
1. Draw out the paper feed tray [A].
2. Change the position of the front and the rear side fences [B] (2 screws each)
and end fence [C] (one screw) according to the paper size.
A246/A247/A248
3-20
SM
550 SHEETS PAPER TRAY (TRAY 3)

2) Enter 107.
3) Press the clear/stop key more than 3 seconds.
$ F
Installation
[C]
[A]
A246I508.PCX
[B]
A246I535.PCX
4. Touch the SP Special Feature key [A].

5. Enter SP4-3-2 (Tray Paper Size 3rd), then touch the appropriate paper size of
the 3rd tray.
6. Touch the Index key [B].
7. Touch the Exit key [C] to exit SP mode.
NOTE: If A4/LT sideways or shorter size is selected, change the setting of the
side-to-side registration (SP1-1-1) so that its value is the same as that of
the duplex tray.
Then, reposition the tray (refer to the side-to-side registration adjustment).
Otherwise, lens will shift position slightly between duplex feed and tray
feeding. This may affect the duplex productivity a little bit.
SM
3-21
A246/A247/A248
TANDEM FEED TRAY PAPER SIZE CHANGE (TRAY 1)r 1998
3.5
TANDEM FEED TRAY PAPER SIZE CHANGE (TRAY 1)
NOTE: At the factory, this tray is set up for A4 or LT sideways. Only A4 or LT

sideways paper can be used for tandem feed.
[B]
[D]
A246I520.WMF
[A]
[C]
A246I521.WMF
1. Open the front cover.

2. Completely pull out the tandem feed tray [A] to separate right tandem tray [B]
from the left tandem tray.
3. Remove the right tandem inner cover [C].
4. Re-position the side fences [D] (1 screw each). The outer slot position is used
when loading A4 size paper.
5. Reinstall the right tandem inner cover [C].
A246/A247/A248
3-22
SM
TANDEM FEED TRAY PAPER SIZE CHANGE (TRAY 1)
[B]
Installation
[A]
[C]
A246I522.WMF
A246I523.WMF
6. Remove the tray cover [A] (2 screws).

7. Remove the DC motor bracket [B] (4 screws).
8. Re-position the side fences [C] (4 screws each). The outer slot position is used
9. Reinstall the DC motor bracket [B] and the tray cover [A].
SM
3-23
A246/A247/A248
TANDEM FEED TRAY PAPER SIZE CHANGE (TRAY 1)r 1998
[A]
[B]
A246I524.WMF
10. Remove the rear bottom plate [A] (1 screw).

11. Re-position the return position sensor bracket [B] (1 screw). To use the paper
tray for A4 size, set the screw on the left hole as shown. (For LT size, the screw
should be placed on the right.)
12. Reinstall the rear bottom plate.
13. Perform steps 3 to 7 from the 550 Sheet Paper Tray Size Change procedure.
A246/A247/A248
3-24
SM
DUAL JOB FEEDER (A610)
3.6 DUAL JOB FEEDER (A610)

Check the accessories against the following list:
Description
Qty
1. Stepped Screw ...................................................................... 2

2. Sponge Retainer (*)............................................................... 1
3. Philips Pan Head Screw with Washer - M5 x 10.................... 2
5. Philips Pan Head Screw - M4 x 6 .......................................... 2
6. Feed-out Guide Mylar............................................................ 1
7. Decal ..................................................................................... 1
(*) The sponge retainer is not necessary to install the DJF onto this copier.
SM
3-25
A246/A247/A248
Installation
4. Hinge Stopper Bracket .......................................................... 2
DUAL JOB FEEDER (A610)r 1998

[A]
A610I500.WMF
A610I501.WMF
[B]
[A]
A610I510.WMF
A610I502.WMF
CAUTION
1. Remove the tape strips and the cushions [A] as shown.
2. Remove the sensor [B], if installed (1 screw).
NOTE: Sensor [B] is not installed with the copier. It is an accessory of the
platen cover (option).
A246/A247/A248
3-26
SM
DUAL JOB FEEDER (A610)
[B]
[A]
[B]
[C]
Installation
A610I511.WMF
[E]
[D]
[B]
A610I513.WMF
A610I512.WMF
3. Install the cover [A] with the screw (if necessary). The cover and screw are
supplied as an accessory with the copier.
4. Install the two stepped screws [B].
NOTE: There is one screw hole on the left side for the stepped screw.
However, there are two screw holes on the right where the stepped
screw is to be installed. Install the stepped screw into the inner screw
hole [C], as shown in the illustration.
5. Mount the DF to the copier [B] by inserting the screws into the holes of the DF
hinge [D], then slide the DF to the front as shown.
6. Secure the DF to the copier by using the screw hole as shown (2 screws - M5 x
10 [E]).
SM
3-27
A246/A247/A248
DUAL JOB FEEDER (A610)r 1998
[C]
[A]
[B]
A610I514.WMF
A610I507.WMF
Face up
Mit der Schriftseite
nach oben
[F]
Face imprime
deuuus
Faccia in su
[D]
Boca arriba
[E]
[G]
A610I508.WMF
7. Remove the small cap on the upper rear cover, then connect the main
connector [A] and the fiber optic cable connector [B].
CAUTION: When connecting the fiber optic cable, make sure to mount it over the
main connector to prevent it from being bent.
8. Secure the hinge stopper bracket [C], as shown (2 screws - M4 x 6).
9. Attach the feed-out guide mylar [D] under the original table. Attach it between
the 3rd [E] and 4th [F] ribs (counting from the rear).
10. Apply appropriate decal at [G].
11. Plug in the copier and turn on the main switch.
NOTE: The copier automatically recognizes that the DF has been installed.
12. Make copies using the DF and confirm the machine functions properly.
13. Explain to the customer that some settings may now be changed, according to
the characteristics of each original.
A246/A247/A248
3-28
SM
SORTER STAPLER (A821)
3.7 SORTER STAPLER (A821)

Check the contents of the box according to the following list.
Description
Qty
1. Front Connection Bracket ...................................................... 1

2. Rear Connecting Bracket ...................................................... 1
3. Cushion ................................................................................. 1
5. Caster Stopper ...................................................................... 2
6. Relay Guide........................................................................... 1
7. Philips Pan Head Screw - M4 x 12 ........................................ 4
8. Tapping Screw - M4 x 6......................................................... 3
10. Punch Position Decal (Punch version only) ........................... 1
11. Lower Grounding Plate.......................................................... 1
SM
3-29
A246/A247/A248
Installation
4. Entrance Guide Mylar............................................................ 1
SORTER STAPLER (A821)r 1998
[A]
[A]
[E]
[A]
[B]
A821I502.WMF
(punch version only)
[D]
[C]
A821I503.WMF
CAUTION
NOTE: 1) Keep the shipping retainers after installing the machine. They will be
reused if the machine will be transported to another location.
2) Proper reinstallation of the shipping retainers is required in order to
avoid any transport damage.
1. Remove the strips of tapes [A] and the cushions [B].
3. Remove the strips of tapes [C].
4. Remove the shipping retainers [D, E] (1 screw each).
A246/A247/A248
3-30
SM
[C]
Installation
[A]
[D]
[B]
A821I504.WMF
[F]
[E]
A821I505.WMF
[G]
[H]
A821I506.WMF
5. Remove the five plastic caps [A] on the copier left cover.
6. Install the front connecting bracket [B] (2 screws - M4 x 12) and the rear
connecting bracket [C] (2 screws - M4 x 12) on the copier.
7. Attach the entrance guide mylar [D] to the copier exit area, as shown.
NOTE: Align the edge [E] of the cover and the mylar.
8. Attach the cushion [F], as shown.
9. Install the relay guide [G], as shown (2 screws M4 x 5).
10. Install the lower grounding plate [H] (2 tapping screws M4 x 6).
SM
3-31
A246/A247/A248
[B]
[C]
[A]
A821I507.WMF
[D]
[E]
A821I508.WMF
11. Secure the protective earth wire [A] (1 tapping screw M4 x 6).
12. Connect the 4P connector [B] and the fiber optic connector [C].
13. Open the front door of the sorter stapler and remove the screw [D] securing the
locking lever [E], then lower the locking lever.
14. Align and press the sorter stapler against the copier and secure it by raising the
locking lever [E].
15. Tighten the screw [D].
A246/A247/A248
3-32
SM
[A]
A821I500.WMF
[B]
A821I501.WMF
16. If the gap between the top of the sorter stapler and the copier is too great,
narrow the gap by placing caster stoppers [A] under the wheels, as shown.
17. Stick the punch position decal [B] on the DF entrance cover (punch version
only).
18. Plug in the copier.
19. Turn on the main switch of the copier and test the operation of the sorter
stapler.
NOTE: The copier automatically recognizes that the sorter stapler has been
installed.
SM
3-33
A246/A247/A248
Installation
3.7.3 SORTER ADAPTER INSTALLATION (OPTION)

1. Interface Harness Bracket ..................................................... 1
2. Exit Paper Guide ................................................................... 1
3. Clamp .................................................................................... 1
4. Tapping Screw - M4 x 8........................................................ 2
5. Screw - M4 x 20..................................................................... 5
NOTE: When the sorter stapler (A658) is installed on A246 copier, the sorter
adapter (A902-19) is required.
A246/A247/A248
3-34
SM
[A]
[I]
Installation
[B]
A902I500.WMF
[E]
[G]
[C]
[F]
[D]
A902I501.WMF
[H]
A902I502.WMF
NOTE: 5 flat head screws and the exit paper guide are included as accessories of
the sorter adapter. They should be used for the installation of the sorter
stapler (A658). For details see the sorter stapler installation procedure.
1. Remove the rear cover [A] (4 screws).
2. Remove the cap of the optics fiber cable [B].
3. Install the interface harness bracket [C] with two tapping screws, M4 x 8.
NOTE: Ensure the black harness [D] is not caught by the bracket.
4. Disconnect the 4P connector [E] (CN127) on the control board and clamp it as
shown.
5. Connect the 4P connector [F] of the interface harness bracket to CN127 and
the optics fiber cable [G] to CN129 on the main control board.
6. Install the clamp [H] and mount the harnesses to the clamps, as shown.
7. Remove the plastic cap [I] with a small screw driver and reinstall the rear cover
(4 screws).
SM
3-35
A246/A247/A248
20 BIN SORTER STAPLER (A658) (A246 ONLY)r 1998
3.8 20 BIN SORTER STAPLER (A658) (A246 ONLY)

Check the accessory against the following list:
Description
Qty
1. Staple Position Decal ............................................................ 1

2. Chain ..................................................................................... 1
3. Cap Remover ........................................................................ 1
5. Stepped Screw ...................................................................... 1
A246/A247/A248
3-36
SM
20 BIN SORTER STAPLER (A658) (A246 ONLY)
Installation
[A]
A658I500.WMF
A658I501.WMF
[C]
[D]
[B]
A658I508.WMF
CAUTION
When handling the sorter stapler, make sure to hold the parts shown [A].
Otherwise, the resulting damage may cause paper jams at the entrance.
NOTE: 1) Keep the shipping retainers after installing the machine. They will be
reused if the machine will be transported to another location.
2) Proper reinstallation of the shipping retainers is required in order to
avoid any transport damage.
3) A sorter adapter (A902-19) is required to install this sorter stapler to the
copier. Before installing this sorter stapler, install the sorter adapter.
1. Remove the strips of tape and the shipping retainers, as shown.
2. Open the front door [B] and remove the pieces of cardboard [C] and the strip of
tape [D] from the staple unit. Close the front door.
SM
3-37
A246/A247/A248
[B]
[C]
[A]
A658I503.WMF
[E]
[F]
[D]
A658I509.WMF
3. Release the open lever [A] of the sorter stapler and remove the sorter stapler
mounting frame [B], as shown.
4. Remove the exit paper guide [C] from the mounting frame [D], and install the
exit paper guide [E] which is an accessory of the sorter adapter (A902-19) (2
screws).
NOTE: Reinstall height adjusting bracket [F] to the original position.
A246/A247/A248
3-38
SM
20 BIN SORTER STAPLER (A658) (A246 ONLY)
[D]
[A]
[E]
Installation
[C]
[B]
A658I510.WMF
5. Remove the two plastic caps [A] from the copier left cover with a small screw
driver.
6. Remove the 4 4M x 8 round head screws [B] form the left cover of the copier.
7. Mount the sorter stapler mounting frame [C] on the copier, as shown (5 screws
M4 x 20 which are accessories of the sorter adapter (A902-19)).
NOTE: When hooking the sorter stapler mounting frame on the left side of the
copier, make sure that the positioning hooks [D] of the frame are
properly inserted in the positioning holes [E].
SM
3-39
A246/A247/A248
[A]
[C]
[D]
[F]
A658I505.WMF
[E]
A658I507.WMF
[B]
A658I506.WMF
8. Install the sorter stapler [A] on the frame (2 hinge pins at the rear), as shown.
9. Tighten the M4 x 14 screw [B].
NOTE: This screw prevents the sorter stapler from falling down.
10. Connect the cable [C] and the optic cable [D].
11. Install the chain [E] as shown.
12. Attach the staple position decal [F] as shown.
13. Plug in the copier.
14. Turn on the main switch of the copier and test the operation of the sorter
stapler.
NOTE: The copier automatically recognizes that the sorter stapler has been
installed.
A246/A247/A248
3-40
SM
LCT (A822)
3.9 LCT (A822)

Description
Qty
1. LCT Feed Unit ....................................................................... 1

2. Small Cap - Left Cover .......................................................... 1
3. Tapping Screw - M4 x 8......................................................... 3
Installation
SM
3-41
A246/A247/A248
LCT (A822)r 1998

[A]
[B]
[B]
[D]
A822I500.WMF
[B]
[E]
[C]
A822I501.WMF
CAUTION
1. Open the LCT cover [A] and remove the tapes [B] fixing the paper trailing edge
stopper.
2. Remove the lower by-pass cover [C].
3. Remove the 3 plastic caps [D].
4. Pull out the connector [E].
A246/A247/A248
3-42
SM
LCT (A822)
[A]
Installation
[B]
A822I502.WMF
[C]
[B]
A822I503.WMF
[D]
A822I504.WMF
5. Remove the LCT connector [A] (3 screws).

6. Remove the shipping retainers [B].
7. Install the LCT feed unit [C] to the copier (3 screws - M4 x 8).
8. Install the LCT connector [D] to the copier (3 screws - M4 x 16).
SM
3-43
A246/A247/A248
LCT (A822)r 1998
[C]
[B]
[A]
A822I505.WMF
[F]
[E]
[D]
A822I506.WMF
9. Remove the screw that holds the upper cover hinge [A], then slide the LCT
cover [B] and remove it [B].
10. Remove the rear upper cover [C] (2 screws).
11. Hold the LCT as shown and place the LCT on the bottom plates [D] of the LCT
connector.
CAUTION: Place the LCT on the bottom plate [D] of the LCT connector properly
(the sides of the LCT and the copier must be parallel).
12. Insert the two pins [E] on the LCT connector into the two holes in the LCT.
13. Secure the LCT to the LCT connector (3 screws - M4 x 8).
14. Insert the cap [F] in the front screw access hole.
A246/A247/A248
3-44
SM
[A]
[B]
A822I507.WMF
[C]
A822I505.WMF
15. Connect the connectors.

16. Secure the protective earth wire [A] on the copier (1 screw - M4 x 6).
17. Install the rear upper cover [B] (2 screws).
18. Install the LCT cover [C] (1 screw).
19. Plug in the copier and check machine operation.
NOTE: The copier automatically recognizes that the LCT has been installed.
SM
3-45
A246/A247/A248
Installation
LCT (A822)
LCT (A822)r 1998
3.9.3 PAPER SIZE CHANGE

[A]
[C]
[B]
[D]
A822I513.WMF
[D]
A822I514.WMF
Change the paper size, if the customer requests it.

NOTE: A4/Letter sideways is the factory setting.
1. While covering two sensors [A] with your hand, press the tray down key [B] to
lower the bottom tray.
2. Remove the screws [C] fixing the front and the rear side fences [D].
3. Tilt the side fences to the right (front view) and lift to remove.
4. Position the side fences according to the paper size.
5. Fix the side plates (1 screw each).
A246/A247/A248
3-46
SM
LCT (A822)
[C]
Installation
[A]
[B]
[B]
B5
A4 LT
A822I515.WMF
6. Remove the clip [A] and pull out the shaft [B]. Position the paper trailing edge
stopper [C] according to the paper size.
7. Re-install the shaft [B] and the clip [A].
2) Enter 107.
3) Touch the Clear/Stop key for more than 3 seconds.
$ F
SM
3-47
A246/A247/A248
LCT (A822)r 1998
[E]
[A]
A822I516.PCX
[D]
[C]
[B]
A822I512.PCX
9. Touch the SP Special Features key [A].

10. Touch the Next key [B] three times to enter SP4-4-2 (Tray Paper Size LCT),
then touch the appropriate paper size of LCT [C].
11. Touch the Index key [D], then touch the Exit key [E].
12. Check the copy quality and machine operation.
A246/A247/A248
3-48
SM
Rev. 07/99
TRANSPORTATION REMARKS
3.10 TRANSPORTATION REMARKS

3.10.1 TONER RECYCLING TUBE CLEANING
NOTE: 1) When transporting the machine, perform the following operations.
Otherwise the toner may be blocked.
2) When installing a new machine or transporting the machine which
copied less than 1,000-sheets, these actions are not necessary.
3) Be careful not to drop the toner.
Installation
Access SP mode and perform SP2-2-2 (Toner Collection Mode). After the
toner collection motor stops rotating, exit SP mode. Continue at Step 1
below.
[A]
[B]
A246I531.WMF
1. Turn off the main switch.

2. Remove the lower right cover. (Refer to Lower Right Cover Removal, section
6.1.4.)
3. While unhooking the tube clip [A] disconnect the end of tube [B], as shown.
4. While putting the end of the tube into a plastic bag, unhook the tube (1 clamp),
and set it vertically.
5. Tap the tube to remove the toner, as shown.
6. Reinstall the tube.
SM
3-49
A246/A247/A248
TRANSPORTATION REMARKSr 1998
Rev. 07/99
3.10.2 OTHER OPERATIONS

1. Remove the development unit and pack it.
2. Set the clamps which were removed at installation.
A246/A247/A248
3-50
SM
SERVICE TABLES
GENERAL CAUTIONS
4. SERVICE TABLES
4.1 GENERAL CAUTIONS
Do not turn off the power switch while any of the electrical components are active.
Doing so might cause damage to units such as the transfer belt, drum, and
development unit when they are pulled out of or put back into the copier.
4.1.1 DRUM
An organic photoconductor (OPC) drum is more sensitive to light and ammonia gas
than a selenium drum. Follow the cautions below when handling an OPC drum.
1. Never expose the drum to direct sunlight.
3. Never use alcohol to clean the drum; alcohol dissolves the drum surface.
4. Store the drum in a cool, dry place away from heat.
5. Take care not to scratch the drum as the drum layer is thin and is easily
damaged.
6. Never expose the drum to corrosive gases such as ammonia gas.
7. Always keep the drum in its protective sheet when out of the copier. Also
always close the protective shutter on the drum unit when keeping the drum
unit out of the copier. Doing so avoids exposing it to bright light or direct
sunlight this will protect it from light fatigue.
8. Dispose of used drums in accordance with local regulations.
9. When installing a new drum, do the process control initial setting (SP1-2-2).
4.1.2 DRUM UNIT

1. Before pulling out the drum unit, place a sheet of paper under the drum unit to
catch any spilt toner.
2. Make sure that the drum unit is set in position and the drum stay is secured
with a screw before the main switch is turned on. If the drum unit is loose, poor
contact of the drum connectors may cause electrical noise, resulting in
unexpected malfunctions (RAM data change is the worst case).
3. To prevent drum scratches, remove the development unit before removing the
drum unit.
SM
4-1
A246/A247/A248
Service
Tables
2. Never touch the drum surface with bare hands. When the drum surface is
touched with a fingers or becomes dirty, wipe it with a dry cloth or clean it with
wet cotton. Wipe with a dry cloth after cleaning with wet cotton.
GENERAL CAUTIONS
4.1.3 CHARGE CORONA

1. Clean the corona wires with a dry cloth. Do not use sandpaper or solvent.
2. Clean the charge corona casing with water first to remove NOx based
compounds. Then clean it with alcohol if any toner still remains on the casing.
3. Clean the end block with a blower brush first to remove toner and paper dust.
Then clean with alcohol if any toner still remains.
4. Do not touch the corona wires with bare hands. Oil stains from fingers may
cause uneven image density on copies.
5. Make sure that the corona wires are correctly positioned between the cleaner
pads and that there is no foreign material (iron filings, etc.) on the casing.
6. When installing new corona wires, do not bend or scratch the wire surface to
avoid any uneven charge. Also be sure that the corona wires are correctly
positioned in the end blocks. (See Charge Corona Wire Replacement)
7.
Clean the grid plate with a blower brush (not with a dry cloth).
8. Do not touch the charge grid plate with bare hands. Also, do not bend the
charge grid plate or make any dent in it. Doing so may cause uneven charge.
4.1.4 OPTICS
1. When installing the exposure glass, make sure that the paint mark on the edge
of the glass face up. This side has received special treatment to make it
smoother and generate less static electricity.
2. When moving the 1st and 2nd scanners, always hold them at the center. Move
them slowly, carefully, and gently.
3. Do not bend or crease the exposure lamp flat cable.
4. Do not touch the following parts with bare hands:
a) Reflectors
b) Exposure Lamp
c) Mirrors and lens
d) VD,ADS and VL patterns
5. To clean the mirrors and lens, use only a clean soft cloth damped with alcohol
or water.
6. Do not turn the vertical position adjusting cam. Adjusting the vertical lamp
position is very difficult because the filament cannot be seen clearly as the
lamp is frosted.
7. The mirror surface with the reflective coating must face the light pass. The
spring plate must contact the reverse side of the mirror (the side without
coating).
8. Because the toner shielding filter is coated with an anti-static solution (which is
removed when wiped with water or alcohol) clean the toner shielding filter very
gently to avoid generating static electricity, and wipe with a dry cloth.
A246/A247/A248
4-2
SM
GENERAL CAUTIONS
4.1.5 ERASE LAMP

1. A narrower lead edge erase margin increases the possibility of fusing jams.
The margin should be at least 1.0 mm.
2. After cleaning the erase lamp unit, rub it gently with your finger to discharge
any static electricity on the unit surface.
3. Use only a dry cloth to clean the potential sensor.
4.1.6 DEVELOPMENT UNIT

1. Be careful not to nick or scratch the development roller sleeve.
2. Place the development unit on a sheet of paper after removing it from the
copier. This prevents any small metal objects (staples, clips, E-ring, etc.) from
being attracted to the development roller and getting inside the unit.
3. Be careful not to bend the terminals on the rear side.
5. Dispose of used developer in accordance with local regulations.
6. Never load different types of developer and toner into the development unit.
Doing so will cause poor copy quality and toner scattering inside of the copier.
7. Developer initial setting is necessary when new developer is installed. Do not
perform the developer initial setting with used developer. Do not make any
copies before doing the initial setting.
8. When removing the development unit, push it to the right to prevent the drum
from being scratched by part of the development unit.
9. Never disassemble the development roller assembly. The position of the doctor
plate is set with special tools and instruments at the factory to ensure the
proper gap between the doctor blade and the development roller. Do not loosen
any screws covered with white paint.
10. Before pulling out the development unit, disconnect two connectors.
11. When pulling out the development unit, do not pull the knob.
12. When setting the development unit in the machine, do not forget to connect the
two connectors.
4.1.7 TRANSFER BELT UNIT

1. Never touch the transfer belt surface with bare hands.
2. Take care not to scratch the transfer belt, as the surface is easily damaged.
3. Apply setting powder or toner to the new cleaning blade.
4. Before installing the new transfer belt, clean all the rollers and the inner part of
the transfer belt with a dry cloth to prevent the belt from slipping.
SM
4-3
A246/A247/A248
Service
Tables
4. Clean the drive gears after removing used developer.
GENERAL CAUTIONS
4.1.8 CLEANING SECTION

1. When servicing the cleaning section, be careful not to damage the edge of the
cleaning blade.
2. Do not touch the cleaning brush with bare hands.
3. Before disassembling the cleaning section, place a sheet of paper under it to
catch any toner falling from it.
4. Apply setting powder to the new cleaning blade.
4.1.9 PRE-TRANSFER LAMP

1. After cleaning the pre-transfer lamp filter, rub it gently with your finger to
discharge any static electricity on the filter.
4.1.10 PAPER FEED

1. Do not touch the surface of the pick-up, feed, and separation rollers and friction
pads with bare hands.
2. To avoid paper misfeeds, the side fences and end fence of the paper tray must
be positioned correctly to align with the actual paper size.
3. Be careful when reinstalling the paper feed (pick-up, feed, separation) in the
paper tray unit. They are not interchangeable with feed rollers of the by-pass
feed tray and 3.5 k LCT because the feeding direction is different.
4.1.11 FUSING UNIT

1. Be careful not to damage the edges of the hot roller strippers or their tension
springs.
2. Do not touch the fusing lamp and rollers with bare hands.
3. Make sure that the fusing lamp is positioned correctly and that it does not touch
the inner surface of the hot roller.
4. Level the oil supply roller while it is stored, otherwise the silicone oil in the oil
supply roller comes out from the lowest part.
5. Silicon oil may slightly soak into the surface of the hot roller during machine
storage. The silicon oil may stick to the surface of the pressure roller when the
hot roller was in contact with the pressure roller at installation. The pressure
roller may slip due to the oil because the hot and pressure rollers are new.
Therefore, the smeared image may appear on the leading edge at about 10
mm on the 1st copy. This is because the hot roller is rubbing the leading edge
of the copy on the pressure roller. This symptom occurs only at the 1st copy
after installation. Make sample copies and make sure that the symptom does
not recur after several copies.
A246/A247/A248
4-4
SM
GENERAL CAUTIONS
4.1.12 USED TONER

1. Recommend checking the amount of used toner at every EM.
Service
Tables
2. Dispose of used toner in accordance with local regulations. Never throw toner
into an open flame, for toner dust may ignite.
SM
4-5
A246/A247/A248
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
4.2 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE

4.2.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE OPERATION
The service program (SP) mode is used to check electrical data, change modes,
and adjust values.
Service Program Access Procedure

1. Press the following keys in sequence.
#.-4$
NOTE: Hold the Clear/Stop key for more than 3 seconds.
2. A menu of SP modes is displayed on the LCD.
3. Touch the application which you need.
[A]
A246M500.PCX
Exiting SP mode
1. Touch the Exit [A] key to return to the standby mode display.
A246/A247/A248
4-6
SM
A246M563.PCX
Return to the index menu

1. Touch the Index key.
Service
Tables
Change the menu screen

1. To move to the next page, touch Next key.
2. To move to the previous page, touch Prev. key.
Accessing Copy Mode from within an SP Mode

1. Touch the Copy in SP key.
2. Select the appropriate copy mode and make trial copies.
3. To return to the SP mode, touch the SP mode key.
NOTE: For the adjustments for which the setting are entered by using +,
the defalt value is 00.
SM
4-7
A246/A247/A248
4.2.2 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES

Table
SP Mode No.
1 SP Adjustment
1-1-1
1-2-1
1-2-2
1-2-3
1-2-4
1-3-1
1-3-2
1-3-3
1-3-4
1-4-1
1-4-2
1-4-3
1-5-1
1-5-2
1-5-3
1-5-4
1-6-1
1-7-1
1-8-1
1-9-1
1-9-2
1-10-1
1-10-2
1-10-3
1-10-4
1-11-1
1-11-2
1-12-1
1-12-2
1-12-3
1-12-4
1-13-1
1-13-2
1-13-3
1-13-4
1-14-1
1-14-2
1-14-3
1-14-4
1-15-1
1-15-2
1-15-3
1-15-4
1-16-1
1-17-1 ~ 10
A246/A247/A248
Function
Side to Side Registration Adjustment
Developer Initial Setting
Process Control Initial Setting
Leading Edge Registration Adj.
Leading Edge Erase Adjustment
Vertical Magnification Adj.
Horizontal Magnification Adj.
Lens Error Correction
Focus Adjustment
Factory Use-D
Factory Use-P
Factory Use-L
DF Registration Adj. (1st, Thin)
DF 2nd side Registration Adj.
DF Registration Adj. (1st, Thick)
Original Distance Adj. (Comb.)
Paper Feed Timing
Jogger Span Adjustment
Positioning Roller OFF
Paper Size Correct. (By-pass feed)
Positioning Roller ON
APS Size Calibration
Scanner Motor Gain Adjustment
Optics Side Registration Adjustment
Duplex Jogger Home Position Adjustment
Staple Position Adjustment
Punch Hole Position Adjustment
Auto Process Control
Grid Voltage Adjustment
Development Bias Adjustment
Exposure Lamp Adjustment : 0.5V Step
Toner Supply Mode
Factory Use-T
Toner Supply Ratio (Fix Mode)
Character Thin Line Adjustment (Generation Copy Mode)
Charge Wire Cleaner
Tfr V Correction
Tfr Current Set (1st)
Tfr Current Set (2nd)
Fusing Idling Period Selection
Fusing Temperature Adjustment
ID Sensor Initial Setting
Auto ADS Initial Setting
VP Auto Shift
Not Used
4-8
SM

SP Mode No.
2 SP Test Mode
2-1-1
2-1-2
2-1-3
2-1-4
2-2-1
2-2-2
2-2-3
2-3-1
2-3-2
2-3-3
2-3-4
2-4-1
2-4-2
Function
Free Run Mode
Free Run Mode (Lamp OFF)
DF Free Run Mode
Sorter Free Run Mode
Toner Density Recovery
Toner Collection Mode
Jam Detection OFF Mode
Paper Size Detection (By-pass Feed)
APS Confirmation
APS Beam 1 Original Detection
APS Beam 2 Original Detection
Input Check
Output Check
3 Data Out
4 SP Special Features
4-1-1
4-2-1
4-2-2
4-3-1
4-3-2
4-4-1
4-4-2
4-5-1
4-5-2
4-5-3
4-6-1
4-6-2
4-6-3
4-7-1
4-7-2
4-7-3
4-7-4
4-8-2
4-8-4
SM
Drum Surface Potential

Grid Voltage
Development Bias Volt.
Exposure Lamp Volt.
Toner Sensor Output
ID Sensor Output
ID Pattern Potential
Current Toner Mode
Toner Supply Level
Transfer Voltage
ADS Sensor Present Measurement
Fusing Temperature
Drum Temperature
Optics Unit Temperature
Service
Tables
3-1-1
3-1-2
3-1-3
3-1-4
3-2-1
3-2-2
3-2-3
3-2-4
3-2-5
3-2-6
3-3-1
3-3-2
3-3-3
3-3-4
Serial No.
Service Telephone No.
ROM Part Number
Tray Paper Size 1st (Tandem LCT)
Tray Paper Size 3rd (Tray 3)
Tray Paper Size 4th
Tray Paper Size LCT (External)
Staple Mode Cancellation After Staple Job is finished
Staple Mode Enable in Stack Mode
Staple Key Indication
Fusing Lower Temp. Limit
Paper Size Selection : Lens Position in APS Mode
Trailing Edge Erase Duplex 2nd
Count (Up/Down)
A3/DLT Double Count (Set/Reset)
Input Unit Selection
Auto Erase Border in Book Mode
Enable Auto Reset Function at key Card/Counter Removal
APS Key Indication
4-9
A246/A247/A248

SP Mode No.
4-9-1
4-9-2
4-9-3
4-9-4
4-10-1
4-10-2
4-11-1
4-11-2
4-11-3
4-11-4
4-12-4
4-13-2
4-14-1
4-14-2
Function
User Code Mode
Access Code
PM Counter ON
PM Alarm Set
Auto Feed Out
Duplex Sorter Enable : By-pass
Stapler Limit
Sort/Stack Limit
Sort Bin Block Separation
Staple Bin Select
Original Size Detection (8x10)
Original Size Detection (F4, 8 x11 lengthwise, 8 x14)
Auto Response Sensor Enable
Process Control Auto Start Mode After 24 Hours Machine On
5 CSS
5-1-1
5-1-2
5-2-1
5-2-2
5-2-3
5-3-1
Customer Engineer Report Call to Center

CSS Enable
Jam Alarm Level
SC Alarm Level
CSS Emergency Call Enable Except For SC Alarm
Consumed Supply Report
6 Jam/SC Counter
6-1-1
6-1-2
6-2-1
6-2-2
6-3-1
6-3-2
6-3-3
Total SC
SC Counter
Total Jams
Total Copier Jams
No. of Copier Jams by Feed Station
Total No. of Original Jams
No. of DF Jams by Location
7 Copy Counter
7-1-1
7-1-2
7-1-3
7-1-4
7-1-5
7-2-1
7-2-2
7-3-1
7-3-2
7-3-3
7-3-4
Operation Time
DF Original Counter
Total Copy
Total Copies by Paper Size
Total Copies by Magnification
Total Copies by Edit Image Modes
Total Copies by Copy Modes
Consumable Counter
Total No. of Staple by Position
Punch
Total Copies by Feed Station
8 Counter Clear
8-1-1
8-1-2
8-1-3
8-1-4
8-2-1
SC Counter
Paper Jam
Original Jam
Copy Counter
Counter Clear
A246/A247/A248
4-10
SM

Function
Total Counter Clear
9 PM Counter (Clear)
9-1-1
9-1-2
9-1-3
9-1-4
9-2-1
9-2-2
9-2-3
9-2-4
9-3-1
9-3-2
9-3-3
9-3-4
9-4-1
9-4-2
9-4-3
9-4-4
9-5-1
9-5-2
9-5-3
9-5-4
PM Counter
Scanner
Drum
Cleaning Brush/Blade
1st Feed Unit (Tandem LCT)
2nd Feed Unit (Tray 2)
3rd Feed Unit (Tray 3)
4th Feed Unit (European Version Only)
LCT
By-pass Feed Table
Duplex Unit
Total No. of Original Feed by DF
Charge Corona Wire/Cleaner
Transfer Belt
Charge Grid
Transfer Belt Cleaning Blade
Hot Roller
Pressure Roller
Hot Roller Stripper
Toner Collection Tank
10 Memory Clear
10-1-1
10-1-2
Memory All Clear

Operation Mode Setting Clear
SM
4-11
Service
Tables
SP Mode No.
8-2-2
A246/A247/A248
Detail
1 SP ADUSTMENT
PAGE 1
A246M501.PCX
PAGE 2
A246M502.PCX
SP No.
1-1-1
1-2-1
Function
Adjust the lens horizontal stop position
for each paper feed station.
(0.1 mm/step)
Adjust the lens horizontal stop position
to compensate for variations in the side
to side positioning of the original (DF)
Both the TD sensor toner supply target
voltage (VREF) and the TD sensor gain
value are set automatically by using
new developer.
Starts the process control initial data
setting.
1-2-2
1-2-3
1-2-4
Changes the On timing of the

registration motor. (0.5 mm/step)
Changes the Off timing of the erase
lamp to adjust the leading edge erase
margin. (0.5 mm/step)
A246/A247/A248
4-12
Note
4th is not used.
With new developer, do not make any copy

before performing the developer initial setting.
This mode is required when new developer is
installed or the TD sensor is replaced.
Perform this program when the following parts
have been replaced (or cleaned).
Drum potential sensor/Exposure lamp/
Drum/Charge corona wire and casing/
Mirrors/Lamp around the drum/
Charge P.P./RAM etc.
Adjustment standard: 0 2 mm
Adjustment standard: 3.5 2.5 mm
SM
1 SP ADUSTMENT
PAGE 3
A246M503.PCX
Service
Tables
PAGE 4
A246M504.PCX
SP No.
1-3-1
1-3-2
1-3-3
1-3-4
1-4-1
1-4-2
1-4-3
SM
Function
Adjust magnification in the paper feed
direction by adjusting the scanner motor
speed. (0.1 %/step)
Adjust magnification perpendicular to
the direction of the paper feed. The lens
position in the full size mode is
changed. (0.1 %/step)
Adjust the lens position to correct focus
in enlarge/reduce modes. (0.1 %/step)
Adjust the 3rd scanner home position to
correct the focus.
Factory use only.
Factory use only.
Factory use only.
4-13
Note
Perform this adjustment when the optics
control board has been replaced.
Adjustment standard: 100 1 %
Perform this adjustment when the optics
control board has been replaced.
Adjustment standard: 100 1 %
Input only the value marked on the lens.
Do not change the setting in the field.

A246/A247/A248
1 SP ADUSTMENT
PAGE 5
A246M505.PCX
PAGE 6
[A]
[B]
A246M506.PCX
SP No.
1-5-1
1-5-2
1-5-3
1-5-4
1-6-1
Function
Note
Adjust the original stop position (thin
original mode) against the original side
scale in one-sided original mode.
(0.5 mm/step)
Adjust the original stop position against
the original side scale in two-sided
original mode. (0.5 mm/step)
Adjust the original stop position (thick
original mode) against the original side
scale in one-sided original mode.
(0.5 mm/step)
Adjust the gap between the 1st original
and 2nd original in combine 2 original
mode. (1.7 mm/step)
Change the paper feed clutch on timing Refer to the paper feed timing adjustment in
section 6.
to adjust the paper buckle at the
[A] First paper feed clutch On timing at the first
registration roller. (1 mm/step)
copy. (A246 only)
[B] First paper feed clutch On timing after the
first copy. 4th is not used.
A246/A247/A248
4-14
SM
1 SP ADUSTMENT
PAGE 7
A246M507.PCX
Service
Tables
PAGE 8
A246M508.PCX
SP No.
1-7-1
1-8-1
SM
Function
Adjust the duplex jogger fence position
for each paper size. (0.3 mm/step)
Note
Press + to decrease the distance between
the side fences.
Press to increase the distance between
the side fences.
Procedure:
1. Enter SP mode then press Copy in SP.
Note: Press Copy in SP after changing
the setting to correctly store the
changed setting in memory. If not,
sometime the setting will not be
stored in memory.
2. Feed a sheet of paper to the duplex tray.
3. Take out the duplex unit then check the
paper and jogger fence position.
4. Return to SP mode (touch SP mode key).
5. Touch the + or key to adjust the jogger
fence position so that the distance between
fences becomes 1 mm wider than the
paper width.
Changes the duplex positioning roller up Adjust the timing so that the paper leading
timing to adjust the paper buckle at the edge just touches the separation belt without
separation roller (5 ms/step).
any buckle.
4-15
A246/A247/A248
1 SP ADUSTMENT
PAGE 9
A246M509.PCX
PAGE 10
A246M510.PCX
SP No.
Function
Initializes the by-pass paper size
sensor.
1-9-1
1-9-2
1-10-1
Changes the duplex positioning roller

down timing. (5 ms/step)
Initializes the APS sensor.
1-10-2 Factory use only.

A246/A247/A248
4-16
Note
Procedure:
1. Set the by-pass table side fence to the
A4/81/2 x 11 position, then touch the Enter
key.
2. Set the by-pass table side fence to the
A6/51/2 x 81/2 position, then touch the
Enter key.
Perform this mode when the by-pass paper
size sensor has been replaced.
Perform this mode when duplex paper jam
caused by incorrect paper stack in the duplex
unit is occurred.
Perform this mode when APS sensor has been
replaced or re-installed.
Do not change the setting.
SM
1 SP ADUSTMENT
PAGE 11
A246M511.PCX
Service
Tables
PAGE 12
A246M512.PCX
SP No.
1-11-11
1-11-12
Function
Adjusts the vertical staple position.
(0.5 mm/step)
Adjusts the horizontal staple position.
(0.5 mm/step)
Adjusts the vertical punch holes
1-11-2
position. (1 mm/step)
Enables and disables the auto process
1-12-1 control (VR, VL, VD corrections).
Default: Set
Inputs the grid bias voltage when auto
process control is disabled or after RAM
1-12-2 is cleared. (1 V/step)
Default: 870 V
Note
Normally select Set. Select Reset only to

check if the cause of the problem is related to
process control or not.
Touch Adjust key and enter the setting using
the number keys, then touch #.
This data is used when the Auto Process
Control is disabled (SP1-12-1) is selected to
Reset.
Inputs the development bias voltage
when auto process control is disabled or the number keys, then touch #.
1-12-3 after RAM is cleared. (1 V/step)
Default: 220 V
Reset.
Inputs the exposure lamp voltage when Touch Adjust key and enter the setting using
auto process control is disabled or after the number keys, then touch #.
1-12-4 RAM is cleared. (0.5 V/step)
Default: 65.0 V
Reset.
SM
4-17
A246/A247/A248
1 SP ADUSTMENT
PAGE 13
A246M513.PCX
PAGE 14
A246M514.PCX
SP No.
1-13-1
1-13-2
1-13-3
1-13-4
1-14-1
1-14-2
Function
Selects toner supply mode.
Default: Auto Mode
Factory use only.
Changes the toner supply ratio in fix
toner supply mode.
Default: 4%
Adjusts the thickness of the character
mainly in generation copy mode.
Selects the charge wire cleaner motor
operation when performing the process
control Initial setting.
Default: ON
Selects whether or not the transfer
voltage detected in the process control
data initialization is used for
compensation of transfer current output
control for the duplex feed.
Default: Set
Adjusts the transfer current for the 1st

1-14-3 side (1 A/step)
Default: 40 A (A246), 45 A (Others)
Adjusts the transfer current for the 2nd
1-14-4 side (1 A/step)
Default: 50 A (A246), 55 A (Others)
A246/A247/A248
4-18
Note
Select Auto Mode in the field.
Select N in the field
Be careful, there is no overtoning protection
system.
L: Thick HH: Thin
Duplex feed compensation for the transfer

current output.
H: Tfr current setting (2nd) x 1.0 x paper size
compensation
M: Tfr current setting (2nd) x 0.9 x paper size
compensation
L: Tfr current setting (2nd) x 0.8
SM
1 SP ADUSTMENT
PAGE 15
A246M515.PCX
Service
Tables
PAGE 16
A246M516.PCX
SP No.
Function
Increases the period to sufficiently heat
1-15-1 the pressure roller at power on.
Default: 5min.
Adjusts the fusing temperature.
(1C/step).
1-15-2 Default: 185C (Normal copy paper),
190C (Thick paper mode)
1-15-3
Adjusts VSG to 4.0 0.2 V
Adjusts the ADS sensor output to 2.7

0.1 V while scanning the ADS pattern.
Selects the VP correction mode.
1-16-1
Default: Set
1-15-4
SM
4-19
Note
Perform this only if poor fusing occurs just after
the power is turned on.
Increase only when poor fusing occurs.
Procedure:
1. Touch Adjust key.
2. Enter the appropriate number by using the
number keys.
3. Press the # key.
This mode is also performed during the
process control data initial setting.
This mode is also performed during the
process control data initial setting.
A246/A247/A248
1 SP ADUSTMENT
PAGE 17
A246M565.PCX
SP No.
1-17-1
1-17-2
1-17-3
1-17-4
1-17-5
1-17-6
1-17-7
1-17-8
1-17-9
1-17-10
Function
Note
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
A246/A247/A248
4-20
SM
2 SP TEST MODE
PAGE 1
A246M517.PCX
Service
Tables
PAGE 2
A246M518.PCX
SP No.
2-1-1
2-1-2
2-1-3
2-1-4
2-2-1
2-2-2
2-2-3
SM
Function
Operates the copier without feeding
paper.
Operates the copier without feeding
paper and turning on the exposure
lamp.
Operates the DF without copier
operation.
Operates the Sorter without copier
operation.
Rotates the main and development
motors and turns on the toner supply
clutch to supply toner to the
development unit.
The TD sensor toner supply target
voltage (VREF) and detected voltage
(VT) are indicated.
Operates the toner collection drive
mechanism.
Disables jam detection.
(Not effective for peripherals.)
Note
Place sheet of white paper (A3/11x17) on the
exposure glass.
Do not operate the machine in this mode for a
long time because a lot of toner is used.
Set the original to the original tray.
Toner is supplied under the following

conditions.
1. Toner supply ratio: 25%
2. Repeats 0.5 s ON and 1.5 s OFF.
3. Continues for 30 s.
Check the image after this SP mode is
completed.
After touching the Start key, the main motor
and the toner collection motor turns on for 1
minute.
This mode is only effective in the Copy in SP
mode.
4-21
A246/A247/A248
2 SP TEST MODE
PAGE 3
A246M519.PCX
SP No.
2-3-1-1
2-3-1-2
2-3-2-1
2-3-2-2
2-3-3-1
2-3-3-2
2-3-4
Function
Indicates the paper width detected by
the by-pass paper size sensor.
Indicates the paper length detected by
the registration sensor.
Indicates the original size detected by
APS sensor.
Indicates the original size detected by
APS sensor when closing the DF or
platen cover. (This data is used as
original size.)
Indicates pulses and counts detected by
APS sensor.
Indicates the difference between
detected counts and standard value.
Indicates pulses and counts detected by
APS sensor.
A246/A247/A248
4-22
Note
Place a sheet of paper on the exposure glass

and close the DF or platen cover.


SM
2 SP TEST MODE
PAGE 4
SP No.
2-4-1
Function
Note
Procedure:
Use to check if the sensor or switches
are correctly activated and de-activated. 1. Touch Input No. key.
2. Enter the sensor/switch/signal number by
using the number keys on the operation
panel. (Refer to 4.2.3 INPUT CHECK)
3. Touch # key.
Use to check that the copier electrical

components are functioning properly.
2-4-2
SM
4-23
Status 0 ---- de-activate (no paper)

Status 1 ---- activate (paper)
Procedure:
1. Touch Output No. key.
2. Enter the electrical component number by
using the number keys on the operation
panel. (Refer to 4.2.4 OUTPUT CHECK)
3. Touch # key.
4. Touch ON to activate and touch OFF to
de-activate the electrical component.
A246/A247/A248
Service
Tables
A246M520.PCX
3 DATA OUT
PAGE 1
A246M521.PCX
SP No.
3-1-1-1
3-1-1-2
3-1-1-3
3-1-1-4
3-1-1-5
3-1-2
3-1-3-1
3-1-3-2
3-1-4
Function
Indicates the drum potential sensor output
when 100 V is applied to the drum.
Indicates the drum potential sensor output
when 800 V is applied to the drum.
Indicates the drum potential when
detecting the VD pattern.
detecting the VL pattern.
detecting the bare drum surface.
Indicates the charge corona grid bias
voltage decided during process control
data initial setting.
Indicates the development bias voltage
decided during process control data initial
setting.
Indicates the ID sensor bias voltage
decided during process control data initial
setting.
Indicates the exposure lamp voltage (ID
level 5) decided during process control
data initial setting.
A246/A247/A248
4-24
Note
Standard: 0.1 ~ 1.6 V
Standard: VR + 770 20 V
Standard: VR + 140 20 V
Standard: 0 ~ 200 V
Work only when auto process control is
enabled. (See SP 1-12-1)
Standard: 700 ~ 1,200 V
Standard: VR + (220) V
Standard: SP3-2-3 + VP 300 V
Standard: 50 ~ 80 V
SM
3 DATA OUT
PAGE 2
A246M522.PCX
3-2-1-1
3-2-1-2
3-2-1-3
3-2-1-4
3-2-2-1
3-2-2-2
3-2-2-3
3-2-3
Function
Indicates the current TD sensor output
voltage.
Indicates the last TD sensor output
voltage during ID sensor compensation.
(Previous: voltage at previous detected
voltage during ID sensor
compensation.)
Indicates the toner supply level target
voltage
Indicates the TD sensor output voltage
during the developer initialization.
Indicates the ID sensor output voltage
while detecting the bare drum surface
(with development bias and
development roller rotation.)
while detecting the ID sensor pattern
image.
while detecting the bare drum surface
(without development bias and without
development roller rotation.)
Indicates the drum potential while
detecting the ID sensor pattern
(grid voltage = 800 V).
Indicates the current toner supply mode.
3-2-4
3-2-5
3-2-6
SM
Note
Service
Tables
SP No.

Abnormal condition: VSGP < 2.5 V
Abnormal condition: VSP > 2.5 V
Abnormal condition: VSG < 2.5 V
Standard: 700 ~ 800 V
A: Auto Mode
T: Detected Mode (Drum potential sensor or
ID sensor abnormal)
C: Fixed Mode (TD sensor abnormal, constant
mode)
Standard: 0 ~ 60 %
Indicates the toner supply level by

image area ratio on the original surface.
This value changes every copy through
fuzzy control.
Indicates the transfer voltage detected L: 0 ~ 3.3 kV
in the process control data initialization. M: 3.3 ~ 5.6 kV
H: 5.6 kV ~
4-25
A246/A247/A248
3 DATA OUT
PAGE 3
A246M523.PCX
SP No.
3-3-1
3-3-2
3-3-3
3-3-4
Function
Note
Indicates the ADS sensor outputs at every Standard: 2.7 0.1 V
scan.
Present: Output at last detection
Initial: Output at ADS sensor initial
setting.
Indicates the fusing temperature based on Standard: Around 185C
the fusing thermistor output.
Indicates the drum temperature based on Standard: Less than 50C
the drum thermistor output.
Indicates the optics temperature based on
the optics thermistor output.
A246/A247/A248
4-26
SM
4 SP SPECIAL FEATURES
PAGE 1
A246M524.PCX
Service
Tables
PAGE 2
A246M525.PCX
SP No.
4-1-1
4-2-1
4-2-2
SM
Function
Holds the copier serial number.
Note
Procedure:
1. Touch the Serial Number Indicator key.
2. Enter the serial number.
Alphabet: Use LCD.
Number: Use number keys.
Correction: Use BS key.
3. Touch # to register.
Procedure:
Holds the service center telephone
number. This telephone number is
1. Touch the Telephone Number Indicator
indicated on the LCD with the SC number
key.
when problem occurred.
2. Enter the telephone number by pressing
the number keys.
3. Use key to enter a hyphen.
4. Touch # to register.
Indicates the part number with ROM
suffixes on each PCB.
1. Main Control Board
2. Optics Control Board
3. Operation Panel: Program
4. Operation Panel: Data 0
5. Operation Panel: Data 1
6. Sorter
4-27
A246/A247/A248
PAGE 3
A246M526.PCX
PAGE 4
A246M527.PCX
SP No.
4-3-1
4-3-2
4-4-1
4-4-2
Function
Selects the paper size for 1st tray.
(Tandem LCT)
Selects the paper size for 3rd tray.
(Tray 3)
Selects the paper size for 4th tray.
Note
Factory setting: A4/81/2 x 11 sideways
Factory setting: A3/11 x 17 lengthwise
Japanese version only:
Factory setting: A4/81/2 x 11 sideways
Selects the paper size for LCT.

(External)
A246/A247/A248
4-28
SM
PAGE 5
A246M528.PCX
Service
Tables
PAGE 6
A246M529.PCX
SP No.
4-5-1
4-5-2
4-5-3
4-6-1
4-6-2
4-6-3
SM
Function
Clears the staple mode after staple job
is finished.
Default: Reset
Allows the staple in stack mode.
Default: Reset
Effects the staple function.
Default: Set
Selects the fusing lower temperature
limit. During the copy run, when the
fusing temperature drops to certain
temperature, the copy speed will reduce
to keep the good fusing condition.
Default: Standard
Selects the lens waiting position in APS
mode.
Default: A4/81/2 x 11 sideways
Adjusts the trailing edge erase on 1st
side of duplex copies.
Default: 0 mm (1 mm/step)
4-29
Note
If set to Reset, the staple key is not displayed

on the LCD
If the customer complain of poor fusing of
copies, change the setting.
Standard: No CPM down
High:
40 CPM at less than 150C
V High:
40 CPM at less than 170C
If selects the size which frequently used at the
customer, 1st copy speed will be faster.
To prevent the paper from being sticking
around the pressure roller when making the
2nd side of duplex copies.
A246/A247/A248
PAGE 7
A246M530.PCX
PAGE 8
A246M531.PCX
SP No.
4-7-1
4-7-2
4-7-3
4-7-4
4-8-2
4-8-4
Function
Selects copy count up or down.
Default: Up
Counts the total counter twice when
A3/11 x 17 copy is made.
Default: Reset
Selects what unit of paper size is used.
Default: US version : inch
Other version: mm
Enables the automatic access to the
border/center erase mode in platen cover
mode.
Default: Reset
Resets the copy mode to default when
pulling out the key counter.
Default: Set
Deletes the APS indicator from the LCD.
Default: Reset
A246/A247/A248
4-30
Note
After changing the unit, turn the main switch

off and on.
SM
PAGE 9
SP No.
4-9-1
4-9-2
4-9-3
4-9-4
Function
Enables the user code mode.
Default: Reset
Limits user access to User Tool No.9.
(Set the key-operator code.)
Enables the PM counter alarm.

Default: Reset
Selects the PM alarm interval.
Default: 150K
Note
To enable this SP below procedures are
required.
Procedure:
key.
1. Touch the
2. Input the access with the number keys.
3. Touch the # key.
This interval is effective when SP 4-9-3 is

selected to Set.
[B]
[A]
A246M564.WMF
1. Register at least one user code by using user tool No.9.

2. Touch Set key in this SP.
4. Remove the plastic cap [A] on the right cover and disconnect the key counter
short-connector [B].
5. Reinstall plastic cap.
6. Turn on the main switch.
SM
4-31
A246/A247/A248
Service
Tables
A246M532.PCX
PAGE 10
A246M533.PCX
PAGE 11
A246M534.PCX
SP No.
Function
Note
Enables automatic feed-out of last copy
on the duplex tray without copying when
4-10-1 an odd number of originals is set on the
DF feed tray.
Default: Reset
Enables the duplex and sorter function The following mode is available:
from the by-pass tray.
One-sided original to duplex copy
4-10-2 Default: Reset
Two sided original to duplex copy
Sort, Stack, Staple, Punch
Skew problem may occur in duplex mode.
Changes the maximum copy quantity
Set: 40
4-11-1 limit in staple mode.
Reset: 50
Default: Reset
Set: 40
Changes the maximum copy quantity
Reset: 50
4-11-2 limit in sort and stack mode.
Default: Reset
OFF: 60
Enables the separation of two different 1st block: 1st to 10th bins
sort and stack jobs into two different
2nd block: 12th to 20th bins
4-11-3 blocks of the bins.
If a job selected requires 11 bins or more, 1st
Default: Set
to 20th bins are used for the 1st block.
Selects the staple mode for the 1st job
when the staple mode is selected for
4-11-4
the 2nd job in the pre-set mode.
Default: Reset
A246/A247/A248
4-32
SM
PAGE 12
A246M535.PCX
Service
Tables
PAGE 13
A246M536.PCX
PAGE 14
A246M537.PCX
SP No.
4-12-4
4-13-3
4-14-1
4-14-2
SM
Function
Enables the detection of 8x10 size by
APS. Default: Reset
Selects the original when F4 size is
detected by APS. Default: F4
Enables the auto response sensor.
Default: Set
Enables to start the auto process control
24 hours after last auto process control.
Default: Set
4-33
Note
A246/A247/A248
5 CSS
PAGE 1
A246M538.PCX
PAGE 2
A246M539.PCX
PAGE 3
A246M540.PCX
SP No.
5-1-1
5-1-2
5-2-1
5-2-2
5-2-3
5-3-1-1
5-3-1-2
5-3-1-3
Function
Japanese version only.
A246/A247/A248
Note
4-34
SM
6 JAM/SC COUNTER
PAGE 1
A246M541.PCX
Service
Tables
PAGE 2
A246M542.PCX
PAGE 3
A246M543.PCX
SP No.
Function
6-1-1 Indicates the total number of SCs.
6-1-2 Indicates the total number of each SCs.
Indicates the total number of jams in copier and all
6-2-1
peripherals.
6-2-2 Indicates the total number of jams in copier.
6-2-3 Indicates the total numbers of jams by locations.
6-3-1 Indicates the total number of jams by feed stations.
6-3-2 Indicates the total number of jams in the ADF.
6-3-3 Indicates the total number of jams by locations in the ADF.
SM
4-35
Note
A246/A247/A248
7 COPY COUNTER
PAGE 1
A246M544.PCX
PAGE 2
A246M545.PCX
PAGE 3
A246M546.PCX
SP No.
7-1-1
7-1-2
7-1-3
7-1-4
7-1-5
7-2-1
7-2-2
7-3-1
7-3-2
7-3-3
7-3-4
Function
Indicates the main motor rotation time.
Indicates the total number of original fed by the ADF.
Indicates the total number of copies.
Indicates the total number of copies by paper size.
Indicates the total number of copies by magnification.
Indicates the total number of copies by edit image mode.
Indicates the total number of copies by copy mode.
Indicates the total number related consumables.
Indicates the total number of staples by staple positions.
Indicates the total number of punches.
Indicates the total number of copies by feed stations.
A246/A247/A248
4-36
Note
SM
8 COUNTER CLEAR
PAGE 1
A246M547.PCX
Service
Tables
V
W
A246M548.PCX
SP No.
8-1-1
8-1-2
8-1-3
8-1-4
SM
Function
Clear all SC counter.
(SP6-1-1, SP6-1-2)
Clear all paper jam counter.
(SP6-2-1, SP6-2-2, SP6-2-3, SP6-3-1)
Clear all original jam counter.
(SP6-3-2, SP6-3-3)
Clear all copy counter.
(SP7-1-1, SP7-1-2, SP7-1-3, SP7-1-4,
SP7-1-5, SP7-2-1, SP7-2-2, SP7-3-1,
SP7-3-2, SP7-3-3, SP7-3-4)
4-37
Note
Procedure to clear:
1. Touch Clear.
The display changes as shown in lower
illustration.
2. Touch Yes.
(Touch No to cancel.)
The display returns to the upper illustration
and the beeper sounds four times.
A246/A247/A248
8 COUNTER CLEAR
PAGE 2
A246M549.PCX
V
W
A246M550.PCX
SP No.
8-2-1
Function
Clear all counter except total copy
counter.
Clear the total copy counter.
Note
Procedure to clear:
1. Touch Clear.
illustration.
2. Touch Yes.
The display returns to the upper illustration
and the beeper sounds four times.
8-2-2
The total copy counter can be cleared when

counter is minus ().
A246/A247/A248
4-38
SM
9 PM COUNTER (CLEAR)
PAGE 1
A246M551.PCX
Service
Tables
V
W
A246M552.PCX
SP No.
9-1-1
9-1-2
9-1-3
9-1-4
SM
Function
1. Indicates the total number of copies
since the last PM.
2. Clears the PM counter.
since the last PM for the scanner.
2. Clears the scanner counter.
since the last PM for the drum.
2. Clears the drum counter.
since the last PM for the cleaning
blade and cleaning brush.
2. Clears the cleaning blade and
cleaning brush counter.
4-39
Note
Procedure to clear:
1. Touch Clear.
illustration.
2. Touch Yes.
The display returns to the upper illustration.
A246/A247/A248
PAGE 2
A246M553.PCX
V
W
A246M554.PCX
SP No.
9-2-1
9-2-2
9-2-3
9-2-4
Function
feeding from the 1st feed unit since
the last PM for it.
2. Clears the 1st feed unit counter.
feeding from the 2nd feed unit since
the last PM for it.
2. Clears the 2nd feed unit counter.
feeding from the 3rd feed unit since
the last PM for it.
2. Clears the 3rd feed unit counter.
feeding from the 4th feed unit since
the last PM for it. (Japanese version
only)
2. Clears the 4th feed unit counter.
A246/A247/A248
4-40
Note
Procedure to clear:
1. Touch Clear.
illustration.
2. Touch Yes.
The 4th feed unit counter is for Japanese
version only.
SM
PAGE 3
A246M555.PCX
Service
Tables
V
W
A246M556.PCX
SP No.
9-3-1
9-3-2
9-3-3
9-3-4
SM
Function
Note
Procedure to clear:
feeding from the LCT since the last
1. Touch Clear.
PM for it.
2. Clears the LCT counter.
illustration.
2. Touch Yes.
feeding from the by-pass tray since
the last PM for it.
The display returns to the upper
2. Clears the by-pass tray counter.
illustration.
feeding from the duplex tray since the
last PM for it.
2. Clears the duplex tray counter.
1. Indicates the total number of originals
fed by the ADF since the last PM for
it.
2. Clears the ADF counter.
4-41
A246/A247/A248
PAGE 4
A246M557.PCX
V
W
A246M558.PCX
SP No.
9-4-1
9-4-2
9-4-3
9-4-4
Function
since the last PM for the charge
corona wire and cleaner.
2. Clears the charge corona wire and
cleaner counter.
since the last PM for the transfer
belt.
2. Clears the transfer belt counter.
since the last PM for the charge
grid.
2. Clears the charge grid counter.
since the last PM for the transfer
belt cleaning blade.
2. Clears the transfer belt cleaning
blade counter.
A246/A247/A248
4-42
Note
Procedure to clear:
1. Touch Clear.
illustration.
2. Touch Yes.
The display returns to the upper.
SM
PAGE 5
A246M559.PCX
Service
Tables
V
W
A246M560.PCX
SP No.
9-5-1
9-5-2
9-5-3
9-5-4
SM
Function
since the last PM for the hot roller.
2. Clears the hot roller counter.
since the last PM for the pressure
roller.
2. Clears the pressure roller counter.
since the last PM for the hot roller
strippers.
2. Clears the hot roller strippers
counter.
since the last PM for the toner
collection tank.
2. Clears the toner collection tank
counter.
4-43
Note
Procedure to clear:
1. Touch Clear.
illustration.
2. Touch Yes.
A246/A247/A248
10 MEMORY CLEAR
PAGE 1
A246M561.PCX
V
W
A246M562.PCX
SP No.
Function
Returns the all settings to
the default settings.
Note
Procedure to clear:
1. Open the front cover and touch Clear.
The display changes as shown in lower illustration.
2. Touch Yes. (Touch No to cancel.)
The display returns to the upper illustration and the
beeper sounds two times.
3. Turn the main switch off and on.
10-1-1
After clearing all memory, do the following:

1. Calibrate the touch screen.
2. Input the factory setting using data sheet coming with
machine.
3. Replace the developer and do the developer
initialization.
4. Perform the process control initial setting.
5. Adjust the copy image.
Clears the data related the The following data will be cleared.
operation.
1. UP mode (except user code, user counter and timer
setting.)
10-1-2
2. SP 4 Special Features (except tray paper size, serial
number, Service Telephone no.)
3. User Program
A246/A247/A248
4-44
SM
4.2.3 INPUT CHECK

1. Access SP2-4-1 (Input Check)
2. Enter the sensor/switch/signal number using following table.
SM
No.
Sensor/Switch/Signal
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
Registration Sensor
Fusing Exit Sensor
Exit Sensor
Vertical Transport Sensor
Not Used
By-pass Paper End Sensor
Rear Side Fence Open Sensor
2nd Paper End Sensor
3rd Paper End Sensor
Rear Side Fence Close Sensor
2nd Paper Near End Sensor
3rd Paper Near End Sensor
2nd Paper Size Switch (All SW)
2nd Tray Set Detection
Not used
3rd Tray Set Detection
1st Paper Feed Sensor
Not Used
2nd Paper Feed Sensor
3rd Paper Feed Sensor
Not Used
2nd Lift Sensor
3rd Lift Sensor
Fusing Unit Set Detection
Not Used
1st Paper End Sensor
Left Tray Paper Sensor
Right Tandem Tray Set Detection
Left Tandem Tray Set Detection
Rear Fence Return Sensor
Rear Fence HP Sensor
Right Tray Down Sensor
1st Paper Near End
1st Lift Sensor
Front Side Fence Close Sensor
Paper End Sensor - LCT
LCT Set Detection
Lift Sensor - LCT
Tray Down Switch - LCT
4-45
Start
0
1
No paper
Paper Detected
No paper
Paper Detected
No paper
Paper Detected
No paper
Paper Detected
Not paper end

Paper end
Not detected
Detected
Not paper end
Paper end
Not paper end
Paper end
Not detected
Detected
Not near end
Near end
Not near end
Near end
Not detected
Detected
Not Set
Set
Not Set
Set
No paper
Paper Detected
No paper
Paper Detected
No paper
Paper Detected
Detect
Not detect
Detect
Not detect
Not Set
Set
Not paper end

Paper end
Paper detected
No paper
Not Set
Set
Not Set
Set
Not detected
Detected
Not detected
Detected
Not detected
Detected
Not near end
Near end
Detect
Not detect
Detect
Not detect
Not paper end
Paper end
Not Set
Set
Not detected
Detected
Not pressed
Pressed
A246/A247/A248
Service
Tables
3. Check the status using following table.

No.
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
69 ~ 90
91
92
93 ~ 99
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
Paper Feed Sensor - LCT

Tray Down Sensor - LCT
Cover Switches - LCT
Paper Position Sensor - LCT
Duplex Jogger HP Sensor
Duplex Entrance Sensor
Duplex Transport Sensor
Duplex Exit Sensor
Duplex Unit Set Detection
Duplex Paper End Sensor
Toner End Sensor
Toner Overflow Sensor
By-pass Table Switch
Front Door Safety Switch
Toner Collection Bottle Set Switch
By-pass Feed Motor Lock Detection
Development Motor Lock Detection
Main Motor Lock Detection
Toner Collection Motor Lock Detection
Paper Feed Motor Lock Detection
Fusing/Duplex Motor Lock Detection
Not used
Paper Guide Sensor
1st Tray Detection (Tandem LCT)
1st Tray Detection (Tandem)
Paper Near End Sensor - LCT
Guide Plate Position Sensor
Feed Motor Lock - LCT
Front Side Fence Open Sensor
Right Tray Paper Sensor
Not Used
Auto Response Sensor
Key Counter Set Detection
Not Used
Entrance Sensor - S/S (A821)
Proof Exit Sensor - S/S (A821)
Bin Jam Sensor - S/S (A821,A658)
Paper Sensor - S/S (A821,A658)
Bin HP Sensor - S/S (A821,A658)
Wheel Sensor - S/S (A821,A658)
Bin Rear Plate Open Sensor - S/S (A821)
Bin Rear Plate Close Sensor - S/S (A821)
Jogger HP Sensor - S/S (A821,A658)
Grip HP Sensor - S/S (A821,A658)
Stapler Unit HP Sensor - S/S (A821)
A246/A247/A248
4-46
Start
0
No paper
Not detected
Closed
Not detected
Not detected
No paper
No paper
No paper
Not set
Not paper end
Toner end
Not detected
Close
Close
Not set
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
No Paper
Not installed
Not installed
Not near end
Closed
Normal
Detected
Paper detected
Not detected
Set
Paper detected
Paper detected
Paper detected
Paper detected
Not detected
Pulse
Detected
Not detected
Detected
Not detected
Not detected
1
Paper detected
Detected
Opened
Detected
Detected
Paper detected
Paper detected
Paper detected
Set
Paper end
Not toner end
Detected
Open
Open
Set
Overload
Overload
Overload
Overload
Overload
Overload
Paper detected
Installed
Installed
Near End
Open
Overload
Not detected
No paper
Detected
Not Set
No paper
No paper
No paper
No paper
Detected
Pulse
Not detected
Detected
Not detected
Detected
Detected
SM

112
113
114
115
Stapler HP sensor - S/S (A821,A658)

Staple End Switch - S/S (A821,A658)
Paper Sensor - S/S (A821,A658)
Door Safety Switch - S/S (A821,A658)
Transport Motor Encoder - S/S
116
(A821,A658)
117
Punch Unit Set Detection - S/S (A821)
118
Punch HP Sensor - S/S (A821)
Punch Waste Over Flow Sensor - S/S
119
(A821)
120
Cartridge Set Switch - S/S (A821)
121
Staple Unit Set Detection - S/S (A821)
Staple Unit Pull-out Position Sensor - S/S
122
(A821)
123
Grip Unit HP sensor - S/S (A821)
124 ~ 130 Not Used
131
Scanner HP Sensor
132
Lens Vertical HP Sensor
133
Lens Horizontal HP Sensor
134
3rd Scanner HP Sensor
135
Platen Cover Position Sensor 1
136
Platen Cover Position Sensor 2
137 ~ 151 Not Used
152
Original Set Sensor - DJF
153
Original Feed Sensor - DJF
154
Not Used
155
DF Position Sensor - DJF
156
Feed-out Motor Encoder - DJF
157
Transport Motor Encoder - DJF
158
Feed-in Motor Encoder - DJF
159
Registration Sensor 2 - DJF
160
Original Width Sensor 1 - DJF
161
162
163
Registration Sensor 1 - DJF
164
Feed-out Sensor - DJF
165
Friction Belt Turn Sensor - DJF
166
APS Start Sensor - DJF
167
Feed-in Cover Open Sensor - DJF
168
Not Used
169
Pulse Count Sensor - DJF
SM
4-47
Start
0
1
Detected
Not Detected
Not staple end
Staple end
Not detect
Detected
Closed
Open
Pulse
Pulse
Set
Not detected
Not set
Detected
Not detected
Detected
Set
Set
Not set
Not set
Not detected
Detected
Not detected
Detected
Not detected
Not detected
Detected
Not detected
Not detected
Not set
Not detected
Detected
Pulse
Pulse
Pulse
Not detected
Not detected
Not detected
Not detected
Not detected
Pulse
Pulse
Not detected
Close
Pulse
Detected
Not detected
Detected
Detected
Not detected
Detected
Detected
Set
Detected
Not detected
Pulse
Pulse
Pulse
Detected
Detected
Detected
Detected
Detected
Pulse
Pulse
Detected
Open
Pulse
A246/A247/A248
Service
Tables
No.
4.2.4 OUTPUT CHECK

1. Access SP 2-4-2 (Output Check)
2. Enter the electrical component number using following table.
3. Check the status using following table.
CAUTION: Do not turn on the toner supply clutch and development motor same
time. Becomes too much toner in the development unit.
When turns the toner bottle motor, the toner is supplied. Be careful too
much toner in the toner hopper.
The lift motor does not stop by the lift sensor when turned on them by
this SP.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
Electrical Component
Not Used
Junction Gate Solenoid
Feed Clutch - LCT
By-pass Feed Clutch
Duplex Transport Clutch
Toner Supply Clutch
By-pass Pick-up Solenoid
Guide Plate Solenoid
Pick-up Solenoid - LCT
Toner Bottle Motor
Duplex Feed Clutch
Pressure Arm Solenoid
Duplex Positioning Solenoid
Down Switch LED - LCT
Not Used
Main Motor forward
Main Motor Reverse
Fusing/Duplex Motor
Development Motor
By-pass Feed Motor - Low Speed
By-pass Feed Motor - High Speed
LCT Motor - UP
LCT Motor - Down
Paper Feed Motor - Low Speed
Paper Feed Motor - High Speed (First copy from the 1st feed tray)
Anti-condensation Heater Relay
1st Pick-up Solenoid
Front Side Fence Solenoid
2nd Pick-up Solenoid
3rd Pick-up Solenoid
1st Separation Solenoid
Rear Side Fence Solenoid
2nd Separation Solenoid
A246/A247/A248
4-48
SM
34
35
36
37
38
39
40, 41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
SM
3rd Separation Solenoid
Not Used
Not Used
Right Tandem Lock Solenoid
1st Lift Motor - UP
1st Lift Motor - Down
Not Used
2nd Lift Motor - UP
2nd Lift Motor - Down
3rd Lift Motor - UP
3rd Lift Motor - Down
Rear Fence Motor - Forward
Rear Fence Motor - Down
1st Feed Clutch
Left Tandem Lock Solenoid
2nd Feed Clutch
3rd Feed Clutch
Registration Motor
Toner Recycle Motor
Erase Lamp
Corona Wire Cleaner Motor
Transfer Belt Positioning Solenoid
Potential Calibration Mode (100V)
Potential Calibration Mode (800V)
QL/PTL
Charge Corona/Grid (Copying)
Charge Corona/Grid (ID Sensor Pattern)
Development Bias (Copying)
Development Bias (Non-image Area)
Development Bias (ID Sensor Pattern)
Transfer Current
Exhaust Fan - Low Speed
Exhaust Fan - High Speed
Toner Collection Motor
Toner Recycle Clutch
Optics Board Cooling Fan - High Speed
Optics Board Cooling Fan - Low Speed
Duplex Cooling Fan
Not Used
Drum Cooling Fan - High Speed
Drum Cooling Fan - Low Speed
LCT Feed Motor - High Speed
LCT Feed Motor - Low Speed
Drum Grounding Relay OFF (Float)
Not Used
4-49
Service
Tables
No.
A246/A247/A248

No.
80
81 ~ 100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114 ~ 130
131
132 ~ 153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163, 164
165
166
167
Main Switch OFF Solenoid
Not Used
Transport Motor - Proof Mode - S/S
Transport Motor - Sort Mode - S/S
Exit Motor - S/S
Turn Gate Solenoid - S/S
Bin Motor - S/S
Jogger Motor - S/S
Bin Rear Plate Motor - S/S
Grip Motor - S/S
Grip Unit Motor - S/S
Not Used
Stapler Unit Motor
Stapler Motor - S/S
Punch Motor - S/S
Not Used
Optics Cooling Fan
Not Used
READY LED - DJF
AUTO LED - DJF
Not Used
Feed-in Motor - DJF
Feed-out Motor - DJF
Not Used
Belt Drive Motor - DJF
Not Used
Friction Belt Motor - DJF
Not Used
Feed-in Clutch - DJF
Inverter Solenoid - DJF
Stopper Solenoid - DJF
A246/A247/A248
4-50
SM
USER PROGRAM
4.3 USER PROGRAM

The user program (UP) mode is accessed by users, and by sales and service staff.
UP mode is used to input the copiers default setting.
4.3.1 HOW TO ENTER AND EXIT UP MODE

Press the User Tool/Total Count button, then selects the UP mode program. After
finishing the UP mode program, touch Exit key to exit UP mode.
4.3.2 UP MODE TABLE

NOTE: The function of each user tool is explained in the operating instructions.
Service
Tables
Item 1
Page
Item 2
1 Set Operation Modes
Screen Saver
1/2
Default Setting
Touch Panel in Waiting Mode
2/2
Panel Beeper
Job End Call
2 Auto Reset/Auto Off
Auto reset
Low Power Timer
1/2
Auto off
User Code Mode Set
SADF Auto rest
2/2
AOF(keep it on)
3 Basic Function Setting
Auto Paper Select Priority
1/1
Auto Paper Select
Paper Tray Display in APS Mode
4 Reproduction Ratio Priority Setting
Reduce
1/2
Enlarge
Preset R/E key display
2/2
Create Margin ratio setting
5 Select Special Tray
Tray for Cover Sheet
1/2
Tray for Slip Sheet
Tray for recycled Paper
2/2
Tray for Special Paper
SM
4-51
A246/A247/A248
USER PROGRAM
Item 1
Page
Item 2
6 Versatile Features Setting
Display Key Setting
1/2
Priority Setting
Priority Setting in duplex mode
Default Setting for erase center width
2/2
Margin Auto Shift (Single Duplex)
Default Setting for erase border width
7 Image Reproduction Setting
Image Density Level
1/1
3 side Full Image
8 Tray Setting
1/1
Paper Tray Priority

Auto Tray Switching
9 Management Setting
9-1 Set User Code
9-2 Check/Reset copy count
1/1
9-3 Reset Data for user Codes
9-4 Reset User Code Counters
10 Peripherals attachment Setting
Priority setting in Special Original Mode
Change Staple Numbers
1/1
Auto sort
11 Set date/time
1/1
Set date/time
12 Weekly Timer
1/1
Auto power ON/OFF
A246/A247/A248
4-52
SM
TEST POINTS/DIP SWITCHES/LEDS
4.4 TEST POINTS/DIP SWITCHES/LEDS

4.4.1 DIP SWITCHES
Main Board
4
0
0
SW102
3
2
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
Others
Description
Normal operating mode
Not Used
Forced Ready Condition (Factory use).
Do not use in the field.
Not Used

SW101
3
2
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
Others
1
0
1
0
Description
Normal operating mode
Not Used
APS size detection is canceled in the low power mode
(Note1).
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Scanner Free Run by short circuiting TP516 and TP510
Not Used
1: ON 0: OFF
Note1: The rotation of the motor can be stopped in the low power mode. In this
case, 2 seconds are required to stabilize the motor rotation after canceling
the low power mode. Note that within 2 seconds, the correct original size
may not be detected.
4.4.2 TEST POINTS

Part Number
TP507
TP510
TP516
SM
Monitored Signal
+5V
Ground
Free Run
4-53
A246/A247/A248
Service
Tables
4
0
0
SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS
4.4.3 FUSES
PSU
Number
FU801
FU802
FU803
FU804
FU805
Description
Protects the ac input line.
Protects +24V
Protects +24V
Protects +24V
Protects +24V
4.4.4 LEDS
Main
Number
LED101
Monitored Signal
Blinking: Normal, Not lit: No 5 V line on the Main
Control PCB, lit: IC107 does not work.
4.5 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS

4.5.1 SPECIAL TOOLS
Part Number
A0961337
54209516
A0299387
Description
Scanner Positioning Pin
Test Chart - OS-A3 (10 pcs/Set)
Digital Multimeter - FLUKE 87
Qty
2
1
1
4.5.2 LUBRICANTS
Part Number
A0289300
52039502
G0049668
A246/A247/A248
Description
Grease Barrierta JFE 55/2
Silicone Grease G-501
Grease: KS660: SHIN ETSU
4-54
Qty
1
1
1
SM
TOUCH PANEL DISPLAY POSITION ADJUSTMENT
4.6 TOUCH PANEL DISPLAY POSITION ADJUSTMENT

Due to inaccurate display position adjustment, it is possible that the touch panel
sometimes does not respond if the key is touched.
In this case, precisely adjust the touch panel display position as follows:
1. Press the Interrupt key then hold down the Clear/Stop key for more than
three seconds.
NF
Service
Tables
[A]
A246M566.PCX
[B]
A246M567.PCX
2. Follow the guidance on the LCD.

3. Touch the upper left corner [A].
4. Touch the lower right corner [B].
NOTE: When touching the corner, do not touch inaccurately with finger but
touch the corner precisely using a sharp object such as a pen (do not
press too hard to avoid any damage).
SM
4-55
A246/A247/A248
TOUCH PANEL DISPLAY POSITION ADJUSTMENT
A246M568.PCX
5. Touch a few positions to confirm that the touch panel is correctly adjusted.
NOTE: When a part of the touch panel display is touched, the responding
position indicates a + mark. If this + mark is more than 7 mm away
from the actually touched point, press the Clear/Stop key and start the
adjustment from the beginning.
6. If the adjustment is correct, press the enter key #.
NOTE: Do not skip this step, otherwise, the result of the latest adjustment is
ignored.
A246/A247/A248
4-56
SM
PM TABLE
5. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

5.1 PM TABLE
NOTE: The amounts mentioned as the PM interval indicate the number of prints.
Symbol key: C: Clean R: Replace L: Lubricate I: Inspect
EM
OPTICS
Mirrors, Lens, Reflectors
C
C
C
C
300
(k)
450
(k)
C
I
C
C
C
L
C
C
I
C
C
C
L
C
C
I
C
C
C
L
C
Expected life
(k)
Cotton pad with water, or

blower brush.
Alcohol or glass cleaner
Optics cloth
Blower Brush
Dry cloth or alcohol
Optics cloth
Launa oil
Water
8,000 hours
AROUND THE DRUM

Charge Corona Wire
Corona Wire Cleaner

Charge Corona Casing/
End Block
Charge Grid
Quenching Lamp
ID Sensor
Erase Lamp Unit
Pick off Pawl
Drum Potential Sensor
Cleaning Blade
Cleaning Entrance Seals

Cleaning Brush
Toner Collection Bottle
Cleaning Side Seals
DEVELOPMENT UNIT
Developer
Side Seals
Development Filter
Entrance Seal
SM
NOTE
300
300
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
I
R
C
R
I
R
C
I
R
C
5-1
300
400
400
Replace if necessary
Dry cloth
(SP9-4-1)
Dry cloth
Damp cloth
Dry cloth
(SP9-4-3)
Dry cloth
Dry cloth
Dry cloth
Dry cloth
Dry cloth
Dry cloth
(SP9-1-4)
Empty used toner
(SP9-1-4)
Dry cloth or blower brush

Dry cloth or blower brush
A246/A247/A248
Preventive
Maintenance
Exposure Glass
Scanner Guide Rails
ADS, Original Size Sensor
Exposure Lamp
Toner Shield Glass
Scanner/Lens Guide Rods
VD,VL, ADS Pattern
APS Sensor
150
(k)
PM TABLE
150
(k)
300
(k)
450
(k)
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
200
200
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
450
450
300
600
450
I
C
I
C
I
C
450
600
EM
Pressure release filter Large
Pressure release filter Small
Toner Bottle Holder Gear
Toner Receiver
Toner Bottle Holder
PAPER FEED
Registration Rollers
Relay Rollers
Paper Dust Cleaner
Paper Feed Rollers
(1st, 2nd, 3rd Tray)
Expected life
(k)
Vacuum Cleaner
Vacuum Cleaner
Lubricate with Mobil
Temp. 78
Blower brush
Dry cloth
Paper Feed Rollers

(By-pass)
Registration Sensor
Paper Feed Guide Plate
Vertical Transport Rollers
TRANSFER BELT UNIT
Transfer Belt
Transfer Belt Cleaning

Blade
Belt Drive/Guide/
Bias Rollers
FUSING/PAPER EXIT
Hot Roller
Hot Roller Bearings
Pressure Roller
Pressure Roller Bearings
Fusing Thermistor
Hot Roller Strippers
Oil Supply Roller

Oil Supply Roller Bushings
A246/A247/A248
5-2
NOTE
Water or alcohol
Water or alcohol
Dry cloth
Replace pick-up, feed,
and separation rollers as
a set.
SP9-2-1 (1st)
SP9-2-2 (2nd)
SP9-2-3 (3rd)
a set.
SP9-3-2
Blower brush
Dry cloth
Water
Dry cloth
SP9-4-2
SP9-4-4
Dry cloth
Replace if necessary.
SP9-5-1
SP9-5-2
Suitable solvent
Water or alcohol
SP9-5-3
Replace with oil supply
cleaning blade as a set.
SM
PM TABLE
150
(k)
300
(k)
450
(k)
100
100
Pick-up Roller
Reverse Roller
Duplex Drive Belt
C
C
Duplex Paper End Sensor
OTHERS
Dust Filter
Ozone Filter
R
R
EM
150
(k)
300
(k)
450
(k)
80
80
Oil Supply Cleaning Roller

Oil supply Cleaning Brush
Pressure Roller Cleaning
Roller and Bearings
Fusing Entrance and Exit
Guides
Fusing Lamp
DUPLEX
Feed Roller
Separation Belt
ADF
Transport Belt
Expected life
(k)

roller as a set.
cleaning roller as a set.
Replace as a set.
Suitable solvent
Check connection of
terminals
Expected Life
(k)
Separation Belt
Feed Roller
Sensors
Pick-up Roller
SM
5-3
NOTE
SP9-3-3
SP9-3-3
Alcohol
Check and adjust drive
belt tension
Blower brush
NOTE
Belt cleaner
Alcohol
SP9-3-4
Alcohol
SP9-3-4
Blower brush
Alcohol
A246/A247/A248
Preventive
Maintenance
EM
PM TABLE
EM
LCT
Paper Feed Roller
Pick-up Roller
Separation Roller
EM
SORTER STAPLER
Rollers
Bins
Bushings
Gears
Sensors
Punch Waste Hopper
A246/A247/A248
150
(k)
300
(k)
450
(k)
Expected Life
(k)
C
C
C
C
C
C
200
200
200
150
(k)
300
(k)
450
(k)
C
C
L
L
C
I
C
C
L
L
C
I
C
C
L
L
C
I
5-4
NOTE
a set.
SP9-3-1
NOTE
Water
Water
Use Launa Oil
Gease-501
Blower bursh
Empty the hopper.
SM
PM PROCEDURE
5.2 PM PROCEDURE
5.2.1 CLEARING PM COUNTER
After carrying out the PM, clear the PM counter (SP9-1-1).
Preventive
Maintenance
A246P500.PCX
SM
5-5
A246/A247/A248
PM PROCEDURE
5.2.2 PM PROCEDURE
Check the total counter each PM counter.
A246P500.PCX
A246P501.PCX
A246P502.PCX
A246P503.PCX
A246P504.PCX
1. Make a copy
Make a copy of an O-S-A3 test chart at

manual image density level 5.
2. PM
In accordance with the PM table carry

out PM.
1) Refer to the PM counter to determine
which PM items should be replaced.
2) Clear the appropriate PM counters in
SP mode.
3. Check after PM
Check the machine operation, and copy

quality.
4. Check the total counter

A246/A247/A248
5-6
SM
EXTERIOR AND INNER COVER REMOVAL
6. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

6.1 EXTERIOR AND INNER COVER REMOVAL
6.1.1 FRONT COVER
NOTE: Always support the front cover with one hand when removing it.
Otherwise, the bottom hinge pin might break.
[C]
[B]
[A]
[D]
A246R500.WMF
2. While supporting the front cover, lower the upper pin [B] to unhook the upper
hinge bracket [C].
3. Slightly lift the front cover and remove it from the hole [D].
SM
6-1
A246/A247/A248
Replacement
and
Adjustment
1. Open the front cover [A].
6.1.2 REAR SIDE

[B]
[C]
[A]
[D]
[E]
A246R501.WMF
Upper Rear Cover

2. If the document feeder is installed, disconnect the fiber optics connectors [A,
B].
NOTE: After the upper rear cover is re-installed, set the fiber optics connectors
so that the fiber optics cable [A] is over the electrical cable [B]. Also,
make sure the fiber optics cable does not bend while opening and
closing the document feeder.
3. Remove the upper rear cover [C] (4 screws).
Lower Rear Cover

1. Remove the lower cover [D], as shown (2 screws).
NOTE: When reinstalling the lower cover, first set the lower cover guide [E].
A246/A247/A248
6-2
SM
6.1.3 INNER COVER
[C]
[D]
[A]
[E]
[G]
[B]
A246R506.WMF
A246R509.WMF
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[F]
Right Inner Cover

2. Remove the knobs [A] (1 screw each).
3. Pull out the duplex tray.
4. Remove the right inner cover [B] (2 screws).
Shutter Inner Cover

2. Remove the shutter inner cover [C] (1 screw).
NOTE: 1) When re-installing the shutter cover, use care to position the shutter
lever [D] properly behind the hook [E].
2) When re-installing the projection [F] of the toner bottle holder, set it
on the right side of bracket [G]. Otherwise, toner is not supplied.
SM
6-3
A246/A247/A248
[B]
[A]
A246R507.WMF
Left Inner Cover

2. Remove the left inner cover [A] (3 screws).
Upper Inner Cover

2. Remove the upper inner cover [B] (1 screw).
A246/A247/A248
6-4
SM
[A]
[B]
A246R508.WMF
Duplex Inner Cover

2. Draw out the duplex unit [A].
Replacement
and
Adjustment
3. Remove the duplex inner cover [B] (3 screws).
SM
6-5
A246/A247/A248
6.1.4 RIGHT SIDE
[B]
[A]
[C]
A246R720.WMF
[E]
[D]
A246R502.WMF
Feed Unit Cover

1. Remove the feed unit cover [A] (2 screws).
Upper Right Cover

1. Remove the feed unit cover.
2. Open the by-pass table.
3. Slightly shift the upper right cover [B] downward and remove it (2 screws).
NOTE: When re-installing the upper right cover, make sure that the hook
meets the stepped screw.
Lower Right Cover

1. Slightly shift the lower right cover [C] to the right and remove it (2 screws).
NOTE: 1) When re-installing the lower right cover, set the hooks in the holes
on the frame.
2) When re-installing the lower right cover, make sure that the hook [D]
does not pinch the toner recycling tube [E].
A246/A247/A248
6-6
SM
6.1.5 LEFT SIDE
[C]
[B]
[A]
[D]
A246R503.WMF
Upper Left Cover
Lower Left Cover

1. Slightly shift the lower left cover [D] to the left and remove it (2 screws).
NOTE: When re-installing the lower left cover, set the hooks in the holes on the
frame.
SM
6-7
A246/A247/A248
Replacement
and
Adjustment
1. Slightly shift the upper left cover [A] downward and remove it (2 M4 x 8 screws:
upper, 2 M4 x 12 screws: lower).
NOTE: When re-installing the upper left cover, make sure the hook [B] meets
the stepped screw [C].
6.1.6 OPERATION PANEL

[A]
[C]
[A]
[B]
A246R504.WMF

3. Remove the four screws [A].
4. Disconnect the connector [B].
5. Remove the operation panel [C].
A246/A247/A248
6-8
SM
6.1.7 UPPER COVER
[A]
A246R505.WMF
1. Remove the document feeder or platen cover.

2. Remove the operation panel. (Refer to Operation Panel Removal, section
6.1.6.)
Replacement
and
Adjustment
3. Remove the upper cover [A] (4 screws).
SM
6-9
A246/A247/A248
PAPER FEED
6.2 PAPER FEED

6.2.1 PAPER TRAY UNIT REMOVAL
[A]
[B]
A246R510.WMF
[C]
A246R511.WMF
To facilitate transportation, the upper part of the copier (copier main frame) [A] and
the lower part of the copier (paper tray unit) [B] can be separated in the following
manner:
2. Remove the document feeder or the platen cover.
3. Remove the front cover. (Refer to Front Cover Removal, section 6.1.1.)
4. Remove the upper rear cover. (Refer to Upper Rear Cover Removal, section
6.1.2.)
5. Remove the lower rear cover. (Refer to Lower Rear Cover Removal, section
6.1.2.)
6. Disconnect the four connectors [C].
A246/A247/A248
6-10
SM
PAPER FEED
[A]
[K]
[J]
[B]
[C]
[H]
A246R705.WMF
[D]
[I]
[F]
[G]
[E]
A246R513.WMF
7. Remove the shutter inner cover [A]. (Refer to Shutter Inner Cover Removal,
section 6.1.3.)
9. Swing out the toner bottle holder (1 screw).
10. Remove the lower right inner cover [C]. (Refer to Lower Right Inner Cover,
section 6.1.3.)
11. Remove the screw [D] securing the drum stay [E].
12. Remove the drum stay knob [F] then take out the drum stay.
13. Disconnect the two connectors [G].
14. Pull out the development unit [H].
NOTE: 1) To prevent drum scratches, push the development unit to the right while
pulling it out.
2) When re-installing the drum stay, be careful not to pinch the harness.
Also, keep the harness away from the gears.
3) When pulling out the development unit, do not pull the knob [I].
4) When re-installing the development unit, install the harness [J] to the
right of the pin [K], as shown.
SM
6-11
A246/A247/A248
Replacement
and
Adjustment
PAPER FEED
[A]
[B]
[C]
A246R514.WMF
[D]
[E]
[D]
A246R510.WMF
15. Remove the two screws [A] securing the tube [B] of toner recycle.
16. Put the whole tube into the paper tray unit through the opening [C].
NOTE: Refer to Transportation Remarks, section 3.10, if the machine has
already copied over 1,000 sheets, there may be toner in the tube.
17. Remove the four screws [D].
18. Remove the copier main frame [E] from the paper tray unit.
NOTE: When re-installing the main frame, be careful not to pinch the harness
and a tube.
A246/A247/A248
6-12
SM
PAPER FEED
6.2.2 PAPER TRAY REMOVAL

Tandem Tray Removal
[B]
[A]
A246R515.WMF
[C]

2. Draw out the tandem feed tray [A] fully to separate the right tandem tray [B]
from the left one.
3. Remove the left tandem tray [C] (5 screws).
SM
6-13
A246/A247/A248
Replacement
and
Adjustment
A246R516.WMF
PAPER FEED
[A]
[B]
A246R517.WMF
[D]
[C]
[E]
A246R518.WMF
4. Remove the right tandem tray [A] (2 screws).

NOTE: 1) When re-installing the right tandem tray, make sure that the wheels [B]
ride on the slide rail [C].
2) When re-installing the right tandem tray, make sure that the tandem tray
stopper [D] is set behind the stopper [E] of the copier frame.
A246/A247/A248
6-14
SM
PAPER FEED
Universal Tray/550 Sheet Tray Removal
[A]
A246R554.WMF
1. Draw out the tray.
Replacement
and
Adjustment
2. Remove the tray [A] from both guide Accurides, as shown.
SM
6-15
A246/A247/A248
PAPER FEED
6.2.3 PAPER FEED ROLLERS REPLACEMENT
[B]
[A]
[D]
[C]
A246R544.WMF

2. Remove the paper tray where the feed rollers belong to. (Refer to Paper Tray
Removal, section 6.2.2.)
3. Remove the pick-up roller [A] (1 snap ring).
4. Remove the feed roller [B] (1 snap ring).
5. Remove the separation roller [C] from the torque limiter [D] (1 snap ring).
NOTE: 1) The paper feed (pick-up, feed, separation) rollers used in the 1st ~ 3rd
feed units in the paper tray unit are different from the feed rollers used in
the by-pass feed table and 3.5 k LCT. They are not interchangeable.
2) Do not touch the surface of the rollers with your hand.
A246/A247/A248
6-16
SM
PAPER FEED
6.2.4 PAPER FEED TIMING ADJUSTMENT
[A]
[B]
[D]
10 mm
10 5 mm
A246R545.WMF
[C]
1) Paper feed timing adjustment for the 1st feed station

1. Place a white paper on the exposure glass so that there is a gap of 10 mm
between the white paper [A] and the left scale [B].
2. Enter SP mode (refer to Service Program Access Procedure) and access the
SP1-6-1 (Paper Feed Timing).
3. Touch the Copy in SP key [C] then select the 1st feed station.
4. Enter a copy quantity of 2 using the number keys.
5. Touch the SP Mode key.
6. Press the Start key and evaluate the width of the white area [D] on the copy.
The adjustment standard is 10 5 mm.
NOTE: In this mode, the registration roller does not stop for registration. Do not
make copies in Copy in SP mode for this adjustment. In Copy in SP
mode, the registration motor stops normally.
SM
6-17
A246/A247/A248
Replacement
and
Adjustment
A246R701.PCX
PAPER FEED
[A]
[B]
[C]
A246R701.PCX
[D]
7. For the first copy, touch the key [A] or the + key [B] to adjust the white area
width.
8. For the second copy, touch the key [C] or the + key [D] to adjust the white
area width.
9. Repeat steps 6 to 8.
NOTE: 1) The A246 copier requires steps 7 and 8.
2) A247/A248 copiers, however, do not require step 7.
2) Paper feed timing adjustment for the 2nd, and 3rd feed stations, and the
LCT and the duplex unit.
Refer to Paper Feed Timing Adjustment for the 1st feed station.
NOTE: For the 1st feed station, it is necessary to adjust the feed timing for the 1st
and 2nd papers individually. However, for the other feed stations, it is
necessary to adjust the feed timing only for the 1st paper fed.
Therefore, you can skip steps 4 and 7 of the paper feed timing adjustment
for the 1st feed station.
A246/A247/A248
6-18
SM
PAPER FEED
[A]
[E]
[C]
[F]
[D]
A246R546.WMF
[G]
[H]
[B]
A246R701.PCX
3) Paper feed timing adjustment for the by-pass feed station

2. Enter SP mode (refer to Service Program Access Procedure) and access SP16-1 (Paper Feed Timing).
3. Touch the Copy in SP key [B].
4. Select the by-pass feed station.
5. Press the Start key then when the paper stops for registration, mark the
trailing edge [C] of the paper on the next paper as shown.
6. Measure the distance [D] between the leading edge of the mark [E] and the
trailing edge of the paper [F] as shown. The adjustment standard is 106 ~ 115
mm.
7. Touch the SP Mode key.
8. Touch the key [G] or the + key [H] to adjust the distance [D].
9. Touch the Copy in SP [B].
10. Repeat steps 5 to 9.
SM
6-19
A246/A247/A248
Replacement
and
Adjustment
1. Set two sheets of paper on the by-pass feed table [A].
PAPER FEED
6.2.5 PAPER FEED CLUTCH REMOVAL (1ST TRAY PAPER FEED

CLUTCH)
[A]
A246R519.WMF
[B]
A246R520.WMF

2. Remove the front cover. (Refer to Front Cover Removal, section 6.1.1.)
6.1.4.)
NOTE: If the LCT is installed, remove it from the copier.
4. Remove the feed unit cover. (Refer to Feed Unit Cover Removal, section
6.1.4.)
5. Slightly shift the toner collection bottle [A] upward and remove it.
6. Slightly lift the vertical transport guide [B] and remove it.
A246/A247/A248
6-20
SM
PAPER FEED
[A]
[D]
[B]
[C]
A246R521.WMF
7. While holding the shaft [A] with an Allen wrench, remove the securing screw
[B], then remove the knob [C].
Replacement
and
Adjustment
8. Pull out the paper trays and then remove the paper tray unit inner cover [D] (2
screws).
SM
6-21
A246/A247/A248
PAPER FEED
[D]
[A]
[C]
A246R522.WMF
[B]
[E]
A246R523.WMF
9. Hold the inner vertical transport guide [A] and pull out it (3 screws).
NOTE: When re-installing the inner vertical transport guide, make sure to set
the pin [B] of the inner vertical transport guide into the slot [C] on the
main body.
10. Disconnect the two connectors [D].
11. Grasp the 1st paper feed unit [E] and pull it out (2 screws).
NOTE: Before removing the 1st paper feed unit, remove the inner vertical
transport guide [A]. Otherwise, the 1st paper feed unit may be
damaged.
A246/A247/A248
6-22
SM
PAPER FEED
[B]
[C]
[D]
[A]
A246R524.WMF
Replacement
and
Adjustment
12. Remove the paper feed clutch [A] (1 Allen screw [B]).
NOTE: When re-installing the paper feed clutch, set the stopper [C] on the
edge of the bracket [D], then push the clutch on the feed roller shaft in
fully and secure the Allen screw.
SM
6-23
A246/A247/A248
PAPER FEED
6.2.6 REAR FENCE RETURN SENSOR REPLACEMENT

[A]
[B]
A246R525.WMF

2. Draw out the tandem feed tray.
4. Replace the return sensor [B] (1 connector).
A246/A247/A248
6-24
SM
PAPER FEED
6.2.7 REAR FENCE HP SENSOR REPLACEMENT
[A]
[D]
[C]
[B]
A246R525.WMF

2. Draw out the tandem feed tray.
4. Remove the back fence transport gear [B] (1 screw).
Replacement
and
Adjustment
5. Move the back fence [C] to the right.

6. Remove the rear HP sensor [D] (1 connector).
SM
6-25
A246/A247/A248
PAPER FEED
6.2.8 BOTTOM PAPER SENSOR REPLACEMENT

[B]
[A]
[C]
A246R543.WMF
[D]
[E]
A246R526.WMF

2. Remove the right tandem tray. (Refer to Paper Tray Removal, section 6.2.2.)
3. Remove the inner cover [A] (2 screws).
4. Remove the side fences [B] (1 screw each).
5. Remove the bottom plate [C] (4 screws).
6. Disconnect the connector [D].
7. Replace the bottom paper sensor [E] (1 screw).
A246/A247/A248
6-26
SM
PAPER FEED
6.2.9 BY-PASS FEED TABLE REMOVAL
[A]
[B]
[C]
[B]
[E]
A246R547.WMF

2. Remove the right inner cover. (Refer to Right Inner Cover Removal, section
6.1.3.)
3. Remove the total counter with bracket [A] (1 screw, 1 connector).
4. Loosen the Allen screw [C] on the hinge.
5. Remove the hinge pin [B] (1 screw).
SM
6-27
Replacement
and
Adjustment
6. Remove the by-pass feed table [E] (1 screw, 1 connector).
A246/A247/A248
PAPER FEED
6.2.10 BY-PASS FEED ROLLERS REPLACEMENT

[C]
[B]
[A]
A246R548.WMF
[D]
A246R549.WMF
1. Open the by-pass feed table then remove the cover [A] (3 screws).
2. Replace the pick-up roller [B] (1 snap ring) and the feed roller [C] (1 snap ring).
NOTE: The paper feed (pick-up, feed, separation) rollers used in the by-pass feed
table and LCT are different from the paper feed rollers used in the 1st ~ 3rd
feed units in the paper tray unit. They are not interchangeable.
3. Remove the feed unit cover. (Refer to Feed Unit Cover Removal, section
6.1.4.)
4. Replace the separation roller [D] (1 snap ring).
A246/A247/A248
6-28
SM
PAPER FEED
6.2.11 BY-PASS PAPER SIZE SENSOR REPLACEMENT

[B]
A246R550.WMF
[C]
[D]
[A]

2. Open the by-pass table and remove the feed unit cover. (Refer to Feed Unit
Cover Removal, section 6.1.4.)
3. While pushing the hook [A] with the head of the flat head screw driver as
shown, remove the table assembly [B] (2 screws, 1 connector [C]).
4. Remove the by-pass paper size sensor [D] (2 screws).
SM
6-29
A246/A247/A248
Replacement
and
Adjustment
A246R551.WMF
PAPER FEED
[B]
[A]
[C]
[B]
A246R552.WMF
5. Re-install the by-pass paper size sensor then reassemble the by-pass feed
table.
NOTE: When installing the table assembly, be sure to route the wires [A]
correctly as shown in the above diagram. The paper guides [B] must be
in the lower position as shown.
6. Perform the by-pass feed sensor paper size correction (SP1-9-1) as follows:
1) Enter SP mode (refer to Service Program Access Procedure) then access
SP1-9-1.
2) Place the side fence [C] at the A4 or 81/2 x 11 sideways position according to
the paper size decal on the table.
3) Place the side fence [C] at the A6 or 41/2 x 51/2 lengthwise position
according to the paper size decal on the table.
A246/A247/A248
6-30
SM
PAPER FEED
6.2.12 BY-PASS FEED CLUTCH AND GUIDE PLATE SOLENOID

REMOVAL
[D]
[C]
[B]
[A]
A246R553.WMF

6.1.2.)
3. Lower the main control board [A] (5 screws).
4. Unhook the main control board bracket hinge [B].
Replacement
and
Adjustment
5. Disconnect the connector [C].

6. Remove the by-pass feed motor [D] (2 screws).
SM
6-31
A246/A247/A248
PAPER FEED
[E]
[A]
[C]
[D]
[B]
A246R555.WMF
7. Remove the clutch stopper [A] (1 screw).

NOTE: When re-installing the by-pass feed clutch [B], set the clutch pin [C] in
the cutout [D] of the stopper.
8. Remove the by-pass feed clutch (1 E-ring, 1 connector).
9. Remove the guide plate solenoid [E] (1 screw, 1 connector).
A246/A247/A248
6-32
SM
PAPER FEED
6.2.13 REGISTRATION MOTOR REMOVAL
[D]
[C]
[A]
[B]
A246R532.WMF
6.1.2.)
2. Lower the main control board [A] (5 screws).
3. Unhook the main control board bracket hinge [B].
Replacement
and
Adjustment

5. Remove the registration motor [D] (4 screws).
SM
6-33
A246/A247/A248
PAPER FEED
6.2.14 PAPER DUST CLEANER CLEANING
[B]
[A]
A246R556.WMF
1. Remove the development unit. (Refer to Development Unit Removal, section

6.5.1.)
2. While pushing down the hook lever [A], remove the paper dust cleaner [B].
3. Remove the paper dust inside the paper dust cleaner and clean the inside of
the cleaner with a dry cloth or a blower-brush.
A246/A247/A248
6-34
SM
PAPER FEED
6.2.15 REGISTRATION SENSOR CLEANING
[C]
[B]
[A]
[D]
A246R557.WMF

2. Remove the right inner cover [A]. (Refer to Right Inner Cover Removal, section
6.1.3.)
4. Pull out the registration sensor assembly [C].
Replacement
and
Adjustment
5. Clean the photo sensor [D] with a blower-brush.
SM
6-35
A246/A247/A248
PAPER FEED
6.2.16 UNIVERSAL TRAY SIZE SWITCH REPLACEMENT

[D]
[B]
[C]
[A]
A246R527.WMF

6.1.2.)
3. Remove the DC power supply unit (4 screws, all connectors).
4. Disconnect the connector [A].
5. Remove the tray size switch bracket [B] (2 screws).
7. Replace the universal tray size switch [D].
A246/A247/A248
6-36
SM
PAPER FEED
6.2.17 550-SHEET TRAY SET SWITCH REPLACEMENT
[C]
[A]
[B]
[D]
A246R527.WMF

6.1.2.)
Replacement
and
Adjustment
5. Remove the tray set switch bracket [B] (2 screws).

7. Replace the 550-sheet tray set switch [D].
SM
6-37
A246/A247/A248
PAPER FEED
6.2.18 LIFT MOTOR REMOVAL

[A]
[C]
[E]
A246R528.WMF
[B]
[D]
[F]
[E]
[D]
[F]
[E]
[D]
[F]
A246R529.WMF

6.1.2.)
4. Remove the tension spring [A].
5. Remove the screw [B].
6. Remove the upper timing belt [C].
7. Remove the tension spring (lower timing belt).
8. Remove the screw (lower timing belt).
9. Remove the lower timing belt.
10. Disconnect the connectors [D].
11. Remove the lift motor brackets [E] (2 screws each).
12. Remove the lift motors [F] (3 screws each).
A246/A247/A248
6-38
SM
PAPER FEED
6.2.19 PAPER FEED MOTOR REMOVAL

[A]
A246R530.WMF
[A]
A246R531.WMF
Replacement
and
Adjustment
1. Perform steps 1 to 9 of Lift Motor Removal, section 6.2.18.

2. Remove the paper feed motor [A], as shown above.
SM
6-39
A246/A247/A248
PAPER FEED
6.2.20 COPIER FEED UNIT REMOVAL
[A]
A246R533.WMF

6.5.1.)
3. Remove the lower right inner cover. (Refer to Lower Right Inner Cover
4. Draw out the duplex unit about 10 cm.
5. Remove the registration motor. (Refer to Registration Motor Removal, section
6.2.11.)
6. Remove the by-pass feed clutch. (Refer to By-pass Feed Clutch Removal,
section 6.2.12.)
7. Disconnect the two connectors [A].
A246/A247/A248
6-40
SM
PAPER FEED
[D]
[C]
[A]
[B]
A246R534.WMF
8. Disconnect the three connectors [A].
Replacement
and
Adjustment
9. Remove the copier feed unit [B].

NOTE: When the installing the copier feed unit in the copier:
1) Do not pinch the harness.
2) Keep the duplex unit drawn out.
3) Fit the cut out [C] to the pin [D].
SM
6-41
A246/A247/A248
PAPER FEED
6.2.21 BOTTOM PLATE LIFT WIRE REPLACEMENT

NOTE: Before replacing the rear bottom plate lift wire, remove the front bottom
plate lift wire. It is necessary to remove the shaft for replacing then the rear
bottom plate lift wire.
[A]
[C]
A246R559.WMF
[F]
[E]
[D]
[B]
A246R560.WMF
1. Remove the right tandem tray. (Refer to Paper Tray Removal, section 6.2.2.)
2. Remove the inner cover [A] (2 screws).
3. Slightly lift the front bottom plate and unhook the wire stoppers [B].
4. Remove the wire covers [C] (1 E-ring each).
5. Remove the bracket [D] (1 screw, 1 E-ring, 1 bushing).
6. Remove the gear [E].
7. Replace the bottom plate lift wire [F].
A246/A247/A248
6-42
SM
PAPER FEED
[E]
[D]
[B]
[A]
[C]
A246R561.WMF
Replacement
and
Adjustment
NOTE: When re-installing the bottom plate lift wire:

1) Set the positioning pin [A] in the hole [B] and set the projection [C] in the
hole [D].
2) Position the wire as shown [E].
3) Do not cross the wires.
SM
6-43
A246/A247/A248
PAPER FEED
6.2.22 550 SHEETS PAPER TRAY (TRAY 3)

[B]
[B]
[C]
[A]
A246R562.WMF
At the factory, the 3rd paper cassette is set for A3 or DLT. Change the paper size
as follows.
1. Draw out the paper feed tray [A].
2. Change the position of the front and the rear side fences [B] (2 screws each)
and end fence [C] (one screw) according to the paper size.
A246/A247/A248
6-44
SM
PAPER FEED

1) Press the mode clear key.
2) Enter 107.
3) Press the clear/stop key more than 3 seconds.
$ F
[C]
[A]
A246I508.PCX
A246R703.PCX
4. Touch the SP Special Feature key [A].

5. Enter SP4-3-2 (Tray Paper Size 3rd) then touch the paper size key of the 3rd
feed station.
6. Touch the Index key [B].
7. Touch the Exit key [C] to exit SP mode.
SM
6-45
A246/A247/A248
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[B]
PAPER FEED
6.2.23 TANDEM FEED TRAY PAPER SIZE CHANGE

NOTE: At the factory, this tray is set up for A4 or LT sideways. Only A4 or LT
sideways paper can be used for tandem feed.
[B]
[D]
A246R564.WMF
[A]
[C]
A246R565.WMF

2. Completely pull out the tandem feed tray [A] to separate right tandem tray [B]
from the left tandem tray.
3. Remove the right tandem inner cover [C].
4. Re-position the side fences [D] (1 screw each). The outer slot position is used
5. Re-install the right tandem inner cover [C].
A246/A247/A248
6-46
SM
PAPER FEED
[B]
[A]
[C]
A246R566.WMF
Replacement
and
Adjustment
A246I523.WMF
6. Remove the tray cover [A] (2 screws).

7. Remove the DC motor cover [B] (4 screws).
8. Re-position the side fences [C] (4 screws each). The outer slot position is used
9. Re-install the DC motor cover and the tray cover.
SM
6-47
A246/A247/A248
PAPER FEED
[A]
[B]
A246I524.WMF

11. Re-position the return position sensor bracket [B] (1 screw). To use the paper
tray for A4 size, set the screw on the left hole as shown. (For LT size, the screw
should be placed on the right.)
12. Re-install the rear bottom plate.
13. Perform steps 3 to 8 from the 550 Sheet Paper Tray Size Change procedure.
A246/A247/A248
6-48
SM
OPTICS
6.3 OPTICS
6.3.1 EXPOSURE GLASS REMOVAL
[A]
[B]
[E]
[C]
[D]
A246R568.WMF

2. Remove the left scale [A] (2 shoulder screws).
4. Grasp the left edge of the exposure glass [C] and lift slightly. Slide the other
edge out from under the right glass holder [D]. Remove the exposure glass.
NOTE: When re-installing the exposure glass:
1) Make sure that the mark [E] on the edge of the glass is located at
the rear right corner. This side is smoother and it generates less
static electricity when the ARDF is used.
2) Set it to right fully.
SM
6-49
A246/A247/A248
Replacement
and
Adjustment
3. Remove the rear scale [B] (3 screws).
OPTICS
6.3.2 EXPOSURE LAMP REPLACEMENT

[E]
[C]
[D]
[B]
[A]
A246R569.WMF
NOTE: Do not touch the reflector or the new exposure lamp with your bare hands.
Use a strip of paper as shown. (Oil marks from fingers on the lamp or
reflectors will be affected by heat from the lamp.)
1. Remove the exposure glass. (Refer to Exposure Glass Removal, section 6.3.1)
2. Move the first scanner [A] to the cutout position at the rear frame [B]. (See
illustration.)
3. Remove the reflector cover [C] (2 screws).
4. While holding the lamp with a paper strip, release the lamp terminal [D] as
shown; then, take out the lamp.
5. Install a new lamp. Use a strip of paper to hold the lamp. Confirm that the lamp
is properly set by both terminals and that the clip [E] is set properly.
A246/A247/A248
6-50
SM
OPTICS
[A]
A246R570.PCX
NOTE: Make sure that the blister [A] on the lamp points towards the reflector
opening (left side of the copier) as shown.
6. Reassemble the copier.
Replacement
and
Adjustment
7. Turn on the main switch and enter SP mode, then perform the Process Control
Initial Setting (SP1-2-2).
SM
6-51
A246/A247/A248
OPTICS
6.3.3 OPTICS THERMOSWITCH REPLACEMENT
[B]
[D]
[A]
[C]
[E]
A246R571.PCX
NOTE: The thermoswitch can be reset manually by pushing the red button [A]
when the exposure lamp area cools.
1. Remove the exposure glass. (Refer to Exposure Glass Removal, section
6.3.1.)
2. Move the first scanner to the cutout position at the rear frame.
3. Remove the reflector cover [B] (2 screws).
4. Remove the exposure lamp leads [C] from the terminals on both sides of the
thermoswitch [D].
5. Remove the thermoswitch bracket [E] (1 screw).
6. Remove the thermoswitch from the bracket (2 screws), and replace it.
A246/A247/A248
6-52
SM
OPTICS
6.3.4 SCANNER HP SENSOR REPLACEMENT
[E]
[C]
[D]
[A]
A246R572.WMF
A246R573.WMF
6.1.2.)
2. Remove the exhaust fan [A] (3 screws, 1 connector).
3. Remove the upper cover. (Refer to Upper Cover Removal, section 6.1.7.)
4. Manually turn the scanner drive pulley [B] counterclockwise to move the
scanners about 10 mm to the left (rear view).
5. Remove the scanner HP sensor bracket [C] (1 screw).
7. Replace the scanner HP sensor [E] (1 screw).
SM
6-53
A246/A247/A248
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[B]
OPTICS
6.3.5 ADS SENSOR REMOVAL

[A]
[C]
[B]
A246R574.WMF
1. Remove the exhaust fan. (Refer to Scanner HP Sensor Replacement, section

6.3.4.)
2. Remove the ARDF connector bracket [A] (2 screws).
3. Remove the ADS sensor [B] with the cover [C] (1 screw).
4. Replace the ADS sensor (2 screws).
5. Re-assemble the copier.
6. Turn on the main switch and enter SP mode, then perform the Auto ADS Initial
Setting (SP1-15-4).
A246/A247/A248
6-54
SM
OPTICS
6.3.6 SCANNER DRIVE MOTOR
[B]
[A]
[D]
[F]
A246R575.WMF
[G]
[C]
0.5 mm
[E]
1. Remove the exhaust fan. (Refer to Scanner HP Sensor Replacement, section

6.3.4.)
2. Remove the tension spring [A].
3. Remove the tension tightener [B] (2 screws).
4. Disconnect the two connectors [C] from the Optic Control Board.
5. Remove the scanner motor [D] (4 screws).
NOTE: While replacing the drive pulley, the gap [E] should be 0.5 mm so that
the upper edge [F] of the pulley is lower than the upper surface [G] of
the bracket, as shown above.
SM
6-55
A246/A247/A248
Replacement
and
Adjustment
A246R575.WMF
OPTICS
6.3.7 SCANNER DRIVE WIRES REPLACEMENT

Removal
[A]
[B]
A246R636.WMF

6.3.1.)
2. Remove the scanner drive motor. (Refer to Scanner Drive Motor Removal,
section 6.3.6.)
- Step 3 through 4 for EU and Asia copiers 3. Remove the lens unit cover [A] (2 screws).
4. Remove the light shielding plate [B] (2 screws).
A246/A247/A248
6-56
SM
OPTICS
[A]
[C]
[B]
[E]
A246R706.WMF
[D]
[F]
[G]
A246R707.WMF
5. Remove the lens unit cover [A] (2 screws).

6. Unhook the tension spring [B].
7. Remove the lens shield plate [C].
NOTE: When re-installing the lens shield plate, set the rear part [D] of the lens
shield plate between the guides [E], as shown. Then set the grooves on
the guide pins [F] in the rail [G]. After re-installing the tension spring,
confirm that movement of the lens shield plate is smooth.
SM
6-57
A246/A247/A248
Replacement
and
Adjustment
- Step 5 through 7 for NA copiers -
OPTICS
[F]
[G]
[E]
[C]
[D]
A246R638.WMF
[H]
[A]
[B]
A246R637.WMF
A246R708.WMF
9. Remove the left and upper inner covers [A, B]. (Refer to Inner Cover Removal,
section 6.1.3.)
10. Remove the operation panel bracket [C] (4 screws).
11. Remove the harness cover bracket [D] (2 screws).
12. Remove the harness guide bracket [E] (4 screws).
13. Remove the screw [F] securing the grounding wire.
14. Unhook the harness from the four harness clamps on the upper optics frame
[G].
15. Remove the upper optics frame [G] (9 screws).
- Step 16 for NA copiers 16. Remove the front bracket [H] (2 screws).
A246/A247/A248
6-58
SM
OPTICS
[D]
[E]
[C]
[A]
A246R639.WMF
[B]
[F]
17. Remove the screw [A] securing the scanner flat cable.
18. Unhook the four harness [B] clamps shown above.
19. Disconnect the connector [C] outside the optic side frame.
20. Remove the scanner clamps [D] securing both sides of the first scanner unit to
the scanner wires (2 screws each).
21. Remove the first scanner [E].
22. Move the lens unit to the left.
- Step 23 for EU and Asia copiers 23. Remove the scanner rails [F] (2 screws each).
SM
6-59
A246/A247/A248
Replacement
and
Adjustment
A246R640.WMF
OPTICS
[A]
[C]
[D]
[B]
A246R709.WMF
- Step 24 through 26 for NA copiers 24. Remove the harness cover [A] (2 screws).
25. Remove the light shield mylar bracket [B] (1 screw).
26. Disconnect the paper length size sensor connector [C] and move the lens unit
to the left, then remove the rear bracket [D] (2 screws).
A246/A247/A248
6-60
SM
OPTICS
[B]
[A]
[C]
[H]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[G]
27. Unhook the tension spring [A] and remove the scanner wires [B].
28. Remove the second scanner [C].
29. Remove the scanner drive shaft E-ring [D] and the front ball bearing [E].
30. Remove the rear drive pulley [F] (1 Allen screw) and the rear ball rearing [G].
31. Loosen the two Allen screws of the front drive pulley [H] and slide the pulley
about 10 cm to the rear, then take out the drive shaft.
SM
6-61
A246/A247/A248
Replacement
and
Adjustment
A246R642.WMF
OPTICS
Installation
[B]
[E]
[A]
[C]
[F]
[D]
A246R577.WMF
1. Wind the rear scanner drive wire on the rear pulley as follows:
1) Align the cut out [A] on the edge of the rear drive pulley and the blue mark
[B] on the wire as illustration above.
2) Wind the wire counter-clockwise 5 times as shown in the illustration, the
D-cut [C] on the shaft is at the front side, then set the bead [D] on the wire in
the hole [E] on the pulley. Here, the bead just reaches the hole on the pulley.
3) After setting the bead in the hole, wind the wire two more times (in total 7
times).
4) Fix the wire with tape [F] as shown.
A246/A247/A248
6-62
SM
OPTICS
[B]
[A]
[D]
[E]
[C]
2. Wind the front scanner drive wire on the front pulley as shown:
1) Align the cut out [A] on the edge of the front drive pulley and the red mark [B]
on the wire.
2) Wind the wire clockwise 5 times as shown (in the illustration, the Allen screw
holes are at the rear side) then set the bead [C] on the wire in the hole [D] on
the pulley. Here, the bead just reaches to the hole on the pulley.
3) After setting the bead in the hole, wind the wire twice more (in total 7 times).
4) Fix the wire with tape [E] as shown.
SM
6-63
A246/A247/A248
Replacement
and
Adjustment
A246R578.WMF
OPTICS
[D]
[C]
[A]
[B]
[C]
[F]
[E]
[H]
A246R579.WMF
[G]
A246R704.WMF
3. Set the front drive pulley [A] on the drive shaft. (Leave the Allen screws
loosened.)
4. Place the scanner drive shaft [B] in the holes on the optics front and rear side
frames.
5. Set ball bearings [C] on both sides of the scanner drive shaft.
6. Set the E-ring [D] on the front end of the scanner drive shaft.
7. Set and fully push in the scanner drive pulley [E] on the end of the scanner
drive shaft, then tighten the Allen screw [F].
8. Install the scanner drive motor. (Refer to Scanner Drive Motor Replacement,
section 6.3.6.)
9. Place the second scanner [G] on the guide rail and fix it there by using two jig
pins [H].
NOTE: This jig pins are not used on the copier, so it is necessary to prepare
them.
A246/A247/A248
6-64
SM
OPTICS
[B]
[A]
10. Route the shorter end [A] of the rear scanner drive wire in the following order:
Replacement
and
Adjustment
Rear track counter-clockwise.

Clockwise.
Lower track clockwise.
Fix the end of the wire on the frame with tape [B].
SM
6-65
A246/A247/A248
OPTICS
[B]
[A]
A246R582.WMF
11. Route the longer end [A] of the rear scanner drive wire in the following order:
Through the front track, upper side.
Counter-clockwise.
Upper track counter-clockwise.
Hook the end [B] of the wire on the cutout on the right optics side frame.
A246/A247/A248
6-66
SM
OPTICS
[B]
[A]
A246R583.WMF
12. Route the shorter end [A] of the front scanner drive wire in the following order:
Replacement
and
Adjustment
Front track counter-clockwise.

Clockwise.
Lower track counter-clockwise.
Fix the end of the wire on the frame with tape [B].
SM
6-67
A246/A247/A248
OPTICS
[C]
[B]
[D]
[A]
A246R584.WMF
13. Route the longer end [A] of the front scanner drive wire in the following order:
Through the rear track, upper side.
Counter-clockwise.
Upper track clockwise.
Hook the end [A] of the wire on the cut out on the right optics side frame.
14. Slightly push the front drive pulley [B] against the front optics side frame and
tighten the two Allen screws.
15. Remove the jig pins securing the second scanner.
16. Remove the tapes [C] securing the ends of the scanner drive wires and hook
the ends of the scanner drive wires with the tension spring.
17. Remove the tapes [D] securing the wire to the front and rear drive pulleys.
A246/A247/A248
6-68
SM
OPTICS
[C]
[A]
[D]
[E]
[B]
A246R710.WMF
[G]
[F]
A246R585.WMF
18. Install the bracket [A] (2 screws, 1 connector), shielding mylar bracket [B] (1
screw) and harness cover [C] (2 screws).
19. Adjust the second scanner alignment as follows:
- Second Scanner Alignment 1) Move the second scanner [D] to the left end position. Fix the rear side of the
second scanner by inserting the jig pin [E] in the holes on the rear side of the
second scanner and the rear guide rail.
2) Turn the adjusting nut [F] to adjust the second scanner alignment so that the
jig pins [E, G] can be smoothly set in the holes on the front side of the
second scanner and the front guide rail.
SM
6-69
A246/A247/A248
Replacement
and
Adjustment
- Step 18 for NA copiers -
OPTICS
[E]
[D]
[B]
[C]
[A]
[D]
A246R586.WMF
[F]
A246R587.WMF
20. Place the first scanner unit on the guide rail then adjust the first scanner
alignment as follows:
- First Scanner Alignment 1) Move the first scanner [A] to the left end position. Fix the rear end of the first
scanner by inserting the jig pin [B] in the holes on the first scanner and the
guide rail.
2) Position the first scanner so that the jig pins [B, C] can be smoothly set in the
holes on the first scanner and the guide rail, then tighten the wire clamp
brackets [D] (2 screws each).
- Step 21 for EU and Asia copiers 21. Install the scanner rails.
- Step 22 for NA copiers 22. Install the front bracket.
23. Secure the scanner flat cable (1 screw).
24. Install the upper optics frame [F] (9 screws).
25. Connect the scanner HP sensor connector.
26. Install the screw securing the granding wire.
A246/A247/A248
6-70
SM
OPTICS
A246R588.WMF
27. Turn on the main switch and perform the scanner free run for about 5 minutes
to break in the wires and to confirm correct scanner movement as follows:
1) Remove the upper rear cover. (Refer to the Upper Cover Removal, section
6.1.2.)
2) Turn on No.3 and No.4 of DIP SW 101 on the optics control board.
3) Turn on the main switch.
4) Short-circuit TP516 and TP510 (GND), then the machine automatically starts
the scanner free run.
5) Turn off the main switch.
28. After performing the scanner free run, check the second scanner alignment
then the first scanner alignments.
29. Re-assemble the parts.
30. Check the copy image.
SM
6-71
A246/A247/A248
Replacement
and
Adjustment
- Scanner Free Run -
OPTICS
6.3.8 THIRD SCANNER REMOVAL
[A]
A246R589.WMF
[C]
[B]
[C]
A246R590.WMF

6.3.1.)
4. Remove the two screws [B] securing the front third scanner bracket.
5. Remove the third scanner [C], as shown.
A246/A247/A248
6-72
SM
OPTICS
6.3.9 THIRD SCANNER DRIVE MOTOR/HP SENSOR

REPLACEMENT
[E]
[A]
[C]
[B]
A246R512.WMF
[D]
1. Remove the third scanner unit. (Refer to the Third Scanner Removal, section
6.3.8.)
2. Remove the shutter inner cover [A]. (Refer to the Shutter Inner Cover Removal,
section 6.1.3.)
5. Swing out the toner bottle holder (1 screw).
6. Remove the toner opening bracket [D] (2 screws).
7. Remove the harness cover bracket [E] (2 screws).
SM
6-73
A246/A247/A248
Replacement
and
Adjustment
A246R538.WMF
OPTICS
[A]
[D]
[B]
[F]
[C]
[G]
[E]
8. Disconnect the two connectors [A].

9. Remove the third scanner drive unit [B] (2 screws [C, D]).
10. Replace the third scanner drive motor [E] (1 connector, 2 screws).
11. Remove the third scanner HP sensor bracket [F] (1 connector, 1 screws).
12. Replace the third scanner HP sensor [G] (1 screw).
A246/A247/A248
6-74
SM
OPTICS
6.3.10 LENS HORIZONTAL DRIVE HP SENSOR REPLACEMENT

- EU and Asia copiers [A]
[B]
[C]
[E]
[D]
A246R535.WMF
[F]
A246R536.WMF
[G]

6.3.1.)
3. Remove the light shielding plate [B] (2 screws).
4. Move the lens unit [C] to the rear side of the machine, as shown.
NOTE: Do not touch the lens with bare hands.
6. Replace the lens horizontal drive HP sensor [E] (1 screw).
NOTE: When re-installing the lens unit cover, set the scanner wires [F] on the
lens unit cover [G], as shown.
SM
6-75
A246/A247/A248
Replacement
and
Adjustment
A246R537.WMF
OPTICS
- NA copiers [A]
[B]
[C]
A246R712.WMF
[D]
[E]
A246R711.WMF
[F]
A246R537.WMF

6.3.1.)
2. Remove the lens unit cover [A] and light shielding plate [B]. (Refer to Scanner
Drive Wires Replacement, section 6.3.7.)
3. Remove the light shielding mylar bracket [C] (1 screw).
NOTE: When re-installing the mylar bracket, be sure not to create any gap
between the bracket and the lens cover.
4. Replace the lens horizontal drive HP sensor [D] (1 screw, 1 connector).
NOTE: When re-installing the lens unit cover, set the scanner wires [E] on the
lens unit cover [F], as shown.
A246/A247/A248
6-76
SM
OPTICS
6.3.11 LENS HORIZONTAL DRIVE MOTOR REPLACEMENT

- EU and Asia copiers -
[D]
[C]
[B]
[E]
[F]
A246R536.WMF
[A]
[G]
A246R537.WMF
2. Remove the two screws [A] securing the clumps.

3. Disconnect the two connectors [B]
NOTE: When disconnecting the connector, be careful not to damage the
connector on the flat cable bracket [C]. When re-connecting the
connector, hold the flat cable bracket, then connect it.
4. Remove the lens horizontal drive HP sensor bracket [D] (1 screw).
5. Replace the lens horizontal drive motor [E] (2 screws).
NOTE: When re-installing the lens unit cover, set the scanner wires [F] on the
lens unit cover [G], as shown.
SM
6-77
A246/A247/A248
Replacement
and
Adjustment
1. Perform steps 1 to 5 of Lens Horizontal Drive Motor Replacement (section

6.3.10 for EU and Asia copiers).
OPTICS
- NA copiers -
[C]
[E]
[A]
[G]
[D]
[B]
[F]
A246R711.WMF
[H]
A246R537.WMF
1. Perform steps 1 to 3 of Lens Horizontal Drive Motor Replacement (section

6.3.10 for NA copiers).
2. Remove the flat cable bracket [A] (1screw, 2 connectors).
3. Remove the two screws securing the clumps [B].
4. Position the roller [C] underneath the bracket [D].
5. Remove the lens horizontal drive HP sensor bracket [E] (1 screw).
6. Replace the lens horizontal drive motor [F] (2 screws).
NOTE: When re-installing the lens unit cover, set the scanner wires [G] on the
lens unit cover [H], as shown.
A246/A247/A248
6-78
SM
OPTICS
6.3.12 APS SENSOR ADJUSTMENT (SENSITIVITY DOWN)

NOTE: Perform this adjustment, if original size miss detection occurs frequently.
[B]
[A]
[C]
[E]
A246R541.WMF

6.3.1.)
2. Move the first scanner [A] to the cutout position at the rear frame.
3. Remove the APS sensor [B].
4. Open the cover [C].
5. Cut the jumper line (JP01) [D].
NOTE: Do not touch the PCB [E].
6. Close the cover and re-install the APS sensor.
7. Perform APS Size Calibration. (Refer to APS Size Calibration, section 6.10.6.)
SM
6-79
A246/A247/A248
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[D]
OPTICS
6.3.13 ARS SENSOR ADJUSTMENT
[B]
[A]
A246R591.WMF

2. Remove the upper left inner cover [A]. (Refer to Upper Left Inner Cover
3. Adjust the ARS sensor [B].
black allow: sensitivity down
white allow: sensitivity up
A246/A247/A248
6-80
SM
TONER RECYCLING
6.4 TONER RECYCLING

6.4.1 TONER RECYCLING UNIT REMOVAL
[A]
A246R592.WMF
[C]
[D]
[B]
Replacement
and
Adjustment
A246R593.WMF

3. Shift the toner collection bottle [A] upward and remove it.
6.1.4.)
6.1.2.)
6. Disconnect the two connectors [B].
7. Remove the toner recycling unit [C] (2 screws).
NOTE: 1) When disconnecting the tube [D] from the toner recycling unit, be
careful not to spill the toner.
2) Do not lose the ball in the toner recycling unit.
SM
6-81
A246/A247/A248
TONER RECYCLING
6.4.2 TONER RECYCLING CLUTCH REPLACEMENT

[C]
[A]
[B]
A246R594.WMF
1. Remove the toner recycling unit. (Refer to Toner Recycling Unit Removal,
section 6.4.1.)
2. Remove the upper cover [A] (1 screw).
4. Replace the toner recycling clutch [C] (2 E-rings and 2 bushings.)
A246/A247/A248
6-82
SM
DEVELOPMENT AND TONER SUPPLY
6.5 DEVELOPMENT AND TONER SUPPLY

6.5.1 DEVELOPMENT UNIT REMOVAL
[B]
[C]
[D]
[A]
A246R595.WMF

3. Remove the shutter inner cover [A]. (Refer to Shutter Inner Cover Removal,
section 6.1.3.)
6. Swing out the toner bottle holder [D].
SM
6-83
A246/A247/A248
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[A]
[D]
[C]
[E]
[F]
[B]
A246R597.WMF
7. Remove the screw [A] securing the drum stay [B].

8. Remove the drum stay knob [C] then take out the drum stay. (Turn the knob
clockwise to remove it.)
9. Disconnect the two connectors [D].
10. Pull out the development unit [E].
NOTE: 1) To prevent drum scratches, push the development unit to the right
while pulling it out.
2) When installing the development unit, do not forget to set the two
connectors [D].
3) When installing the drum stay, be careful not to pinch the harness.
Also, keep the harness away from gears.
4) When pulling out the development unit, do not pull on the knob [F].
5) Keep the development unit connector as far as possible away from
the development unit when the unit is cleaned using a vacuum
cleaner.
6) Do not touch the pins of the development unit connector when the
development unit is carried away from the main frame or cleaned.
A246/A247/A248
6-84
SM
6.5.2 DEVELOPER REPLACEMENT

[A]
[B]
[D]
[C]
A246R599.WMF
1. Pull out the development unit. (Refer to Development Unit Removal, section
6.5.1.)
2. Place the development unit on the sheet [A].
3. Remove the two screws [B] securing the toner hopper [C].
4. Remove the toner hopper from the development unit, as shown.
NOTE: Do not turn the toner hopper 90 degrees. Otherwise toner may spill.
5. Turn over the development unit then turn the paddle roller knob [D] to empty
developer onto the sheet.
NOTE: 1) Dispose of used developer according to local regulations.
2) Make sure that no developer remains on the development rollers or
in the development unit.
SM
6-85
A246/A247/A248
Replacement
and
Adjustment
A246R598.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[B]
[A]
[D]
[C]
A246R600.WMF
[E]
A246R601.WMF
6. Clean the side seals [A] and entrance seal [B].

NOTE: Cover the sleeve rollers with a sheet of paper [C] to prevent the used
developer from being attracted to the sleeve rollers.
7. Evenly pour in one pack of developer [D] while turning the knob [E].
NOTE: Turn the knob in the direction of the arrow.
8. Re-install the toner hopper, then re-assemble the machine.
NOTE: 1) Be sure to set to connectors after installing the development unit in
the machine.
2) Tilt the toner hopper so that there is toner near the toner end sensor.
9. Turn on the main switch, then perform Developer Initial Setting (SP1-2-1).
NOTE: 1) Do not make a copy with the new developer before completing the
developer initial setting, otherwise the toner density control will be
abnormal.
2) If the developer initial setting is not completed, you cannot exit the SP
mode by pressing the Exit key. If this occurs, turn the main switch off
and on, then perform the initial setting again. If the result is the same,
see the troubleshooting section SC352.
A246/A247/A248
6-86
SM
6.5.3 DEVELOPMENT ROLLERS REPLACEMENT
[B]
[A]
[D]
A246R602.WMF
[C]
A246R603.WMF
2. Remove the developer entrance seal [A] (2 screws, 2 hooks).

3. Remove the front and rear side seals [B].
NOTE: When re-assembling the development unit, use new side seals and
align the edge of the side seals to the corner [C] and the edge [D] as
shown.
SM
6-87
A246/A247/A248
Replacement
and
Adjustment
1. Remove the developer. (Refer to Developer Replacement, section 6.5.2.)
[B]
[G]
[A]
[H]
[E]
[I]
[D]
[F]
[C]
A246R604.WMF
A246R605.PCX
4. Remove the coupling gear [A] (1 screw).

NOTE: Be careful not to lose the pin [B].
5. Remove the gear [C] (1 E-ring), gear [D] (1 E-ring) and gear [E].
CAUTION: Do not touch the screws at [F] and [G].
If the screws at [F] are loosened, the doctor gap will be improper.
If the screws at [G] are loosened, the photoconductor gap and
magnetic field angle will be improper.
If either of them become abnormal, toner density control will be
abnormal.
6. Remove the front roller holder [H] (1 screw, 2 E-rings) and rear roller holder [I]
(1 screw).
7. Replace the sleeve rollers.
8. Re-assemble the development unit and set the developer, then re-assemble
the copier.
NOTE: 1) If the original developer (already used) is returned to the
development unit, do not perform the Developer Initial Setting (SP12-1).
2) If the new developer is set, complete the Developer Initial Setting
(SP1-2-1) before making a copy.
A246/A247/A248
6-88
SM
6.5.4 TONER DENSITY SENSOR REPLACEMENT
[A]
A246R606.WMF
1. Remove the developer. (Refer to Developer Replacement, section 6.5.2.)

2. Replace the toner density sensor [A] (2 screws).
NOTE: Before installing the toner density sensor, clean the development unit
well so that no carrier particles remains in the gap between the toner
density sensor and the development unit casing.
3. Install the new developer and perform the Developer Initial Setting (SP1-2-1).
Replacement
and
Adjustment
NOTE: Complete the Developer Initial Setting before making a copy.
SM
6-89
A246/A247/A248
6.5.5 TONER BOTTLE DRIVE MOTOR REPLACEMENT
[A]
A246R596.PCX
[B]
[D]
[F]
[C]
A246R713.WMF
[E]
A246R714.WMF
1. Swing out the toner bottle holder [A] with the bracket [B]. (Refer to
Development Unit Removal, section 6.5.1.)
2. Remove the toner bottle.
4. Remove the toner bottle holder [D] (3 screws).
5. Remove the toner bottle drive motor assembly [E] (2 screws).
6. Replace the toner bottle drive motor [F] (2 screws - M x 4).
A246/A247/A248
6-90
SM
6.5.6 DEVELOPMENT FILTER AND PRESSURE RELEASE FILTER

REPLACEMENT
[A]
[C]
[D]
[C]
[B]
[D]
A246R607.WMF

6.5.1.)
2. Remove the development guide rail [A] (2 screws).
3. Replace the development filter [B].
4. Remove the filter covers [C].
SM
6-91
Replacement
and
Adjustment
5. Replace the pressure release filters [D].
A246/A247/A248
6.5.7 DEVELOPMENT ROLLER SHAFT CLEANING
[A]
A246R608.WMF
1. Remove the development unit. (Refer to Development Unit Removal,

section6.5.1.)
2. Clean the development roller shaft [A] with Teflon tape.
A246/A247/A248
6-92
SM
DRUM UNIT
6.6 DRUM UNIT

6.6.1 DRUM UNIT REMOVAL AND OPC DRUM REPLACEMENT
[B]
[D]
[E]
[A]
A246R610.WMF
[C]
1. Pull out the development unit. (Refer to Development Unit Removal, section
6.5.1.)
2. Lower the transfer belt unit.
3. Pull out the drum unit by holding the knob [A].
NOTE: Close the protective shutter [B] to protect the OPC drum from light
when the drum unit is left outside the machine for servicing.
4. Open the upper drum unit (2 screws [C]).
5. Replace the OPC drum [D]. Then remove the drum protective sheet from the
new drum.
NOTE: When returning the drum unit to the copier, do not forget to open the
protective shutter [B].If it is hard to completely set the drum unit in the
machine because the gear is disengaged, then push in the drum unit
while holding down the cleaning blade release knob [E].
SM
6-93
A246/A247/A248
Replacement
and
Adjustment
A246R611.WMF
DRUM UNIT
6.6.2 QUENCHING LAMP REPLACEMENT
[B]
[A]
A246R612.PCX
[D]
[C]
CN663
A246R613.WMF
1. Remove the OPC drum. (Refer to OPC Drum Replacement, section 6.6.1.)
NOTE: Wrap a protective sheet or a few sheets of paper around the drum to
protect it from light.
2. Slightly pull up the wires [A] on the quenching lamp, then insert the head of the
small flat head screw driver [B] between the quenching lamp and the drum unit
casing to release the hook [C] at the center of the quenching lamp.
NOTE: Do not pull the wire too strongly.
4. Replace the quenching lamp.
A246/A247/A248
6-94
SM
DRUM UNIT
6.6.3 GRID PLATE/CHARGE WIRE/WIRE CLEANER

REPLACEMENT
[E]
[B]
[A]
[C]
A246R614.WMF
[G]
[D]
[F]
A246R615.WMF
A246R616.WMF
1. Pull out the main charge corona [A] (1 screw, 1 connector).

2. Remove the grid plate [B] (1 plastic screw, 4 hooks).
NOTE: When installing the grid plate, do not tighten the plastic screw [C] too
strongly.
3. Remove the front grid terminal [D], then the rear grid terminal [E], as shown.
NOTE: When re-installing the rear grid terminal, make sure that the springs [F]
are not out of shape.
4. Remove the front and rear end block covers [G].
5. Remove the charge corona wire [H].
SM
6-95
A246/A247/A248
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[H]
DRUM UNIT
[A]
[B]
A246R617.WMF
[B]
[C]
A246R618.WMF
A246R619.WMF
6. Remove the wire cleaner [A] (1 snap ring).

7. Install the wire cleaner and the charge corona wire.
NOTE: Locate the joint part [B] of the wire in the rear end block as shown.
Correctly set the wire between the wire cleaner pads.
Do not loosen the screw [C], otherwise the charge corona height will
change.
A246/A247/A248
6-96
SM
DRUM UNIT
6.6.4 ERASE LAMP AND DRUM POTENTIAL SENSOR

REPLACEMENT
[D]
[B]
[C]
[A]
[F]
[E]
A246R620.WMF
1. Pull out the drum unit. (Refer to the OPC Drum Replacement, section 6.6.1.)
2. Open the drum shutter [A].
4. Slide the erase lamp to the front to release the rear side of the erase lamp from
the drum unit casing.
5. Disconnect the connector [E].
NOTE: Before removing the drum potential sensor, set a few sheets of paper
between the sensor and the OPC drum to protect the drum surface.
6. Replace the drum potential sensor [F] (2 screws).
NOTE: After replacing the drum potential sensor, perform the Process Control
Initial Setting (SP1-2-2).
SM
6-97
A246/A247/A248
Replacement
and
Adjustment
3. While pushing the hook [B] to the front by using a small flat head screw driver
[C], move up the front side of the erase lamp [D] as shown.
DRUM UNIT
6.6.5 CLEANING BLADE REPLACEMENT

[A]
[F]
[C]
[B]
[C]
[H]
A246R621.WMF
[E]
[D]
[G]
A246R622.WMF
1. Remove the OPC drum. (Refer to Drum Unit Removal and OPC Drum
Replacement, section6.6.1.)
2. Remove the cleaning blade [A] (2 screws).
3. Clean the entrance seal [B] and side seals [C].
NOTE: When a vacuum cleaner is used, to protect the electrical parts from
static electricity, disconnect the connector on the charge power pack
and remove the ID sensor as follows:
1) Disconnect the 12 P connector on the charge power pack [D].
2) Remove the screw [E] and separate the upper and the lower drum
units.
3) Remove the spur bracket [F] (60/70 CPM machine only) and pick-off
pawl bracket [G] (2 screws).
4) Disconnect the connector [H].
5) While turning the bracket counter-clockwise (front view), slide the
pick-off pawl bracket to the rear.
4. Install the new cleaning blade.
NOTE: 1) Do not clean the edge of the cleaning blade with cloth, otherwise it
damages the edge and causes black lines on copy images.
2) Do not touch the edge of the new cleaning blade, if some setting
powder or toner on the blade edge is removed, apply toner there.
3) When installing the cleaning blade, do not pinch the side seals.
A246/A247/A248
6-98
SM
DRUM UNIT
6.6.6 CLEANING BRUSH REPLACEMENT
[B]
[C]
[A]
A246R623.WMF
1. Remove the cleaning blade. (Refer to Cleaning Blade Replacement, section

6.6.5.)
2. Remove the coupling gear [A] (1 screw).
3. Remove the bushing [B] (1 screw).
Replacement
and
Adjustment
4. Pull the cleaning brush shaft to the rear to release the cleaning brush [C], then
remove the cleaning brush.
NOTE: 1) Do not touch the cleaning brush with oily hands.
2) After replacement, clean the ID sensor surface.
SM
6-99
A246/A247/A248
DRUM UNIT
6.6.7 PICK-OFF PAWL REPLACEMENT
[B]
[E]
[C]
[A]
[H]
A246R622.WMF
[D]
[G]
[F]
A246R625.WMF
1. Pull out the drum unit. (Refer to the OPC Drum Replacement, section 6.6.1.)
2. Disconnect the 12 P connector [A] on the charge power pack.
3. Remove the spur bracket [B] (60/70 CPM machine only) and pick-off pawl
bracket [C] (2 screws).
4. Remove the bushing [D] (1 screw, 1 E-ring).
5. Disconnect the connector [E].
6. While pulling the shaft [F] to the rear, turn the pick-off pawl [G] about 45 degree
clockwise (front view) and move up the pick-off pawl.
7. Replace the pick-off pawl.
NOTE: 1) When re-installing, hook the tension spring [H], as shown.
2) After replacement, check the smooth movement of the pick-off pawl.
A246/A247/A248
6-100
SM
DRUM UNIT
6.6.8 OZONE FILTER REPLACEMENT
[E]
[B]
[A]
[D]
[C]
[C]
A246R626.WMF
1. Open the front door and open the toner bottle holder.
2. Remove the transfer belt unit prop [A] (3 screws).
Replacement
and
Adjustment
3. Replace the ozone filter [B].

NOTE: To install the transfer belt unit prop smoothly, set it order the lower pins
[C], drive shaft [D], and the upper pins [E].
SM
6-101
A246/A247/A248
DRUM UNIT
6.6.9 PRE-TRANSFER LAMP REMOVAL
[A]
[B]
[C]
A246R624.WMF
1. Pull out the drum unit. (Refer to OPC Drum Replacement, section 6.6.1.)
2. Remove the supporting plate [A].
4. Remove the pre-transfer lamp [C] in the direction, as shown.
NOTE: If it is removed from the opposite way, the pre-transfer lamp may be
damaged.
A246/A247/A248
6-102
SM
TRANSFER BELT UNIT
6.7 TRANSFER BELT UNIT

6.7.1 TRANSFER BELT UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
[A]
[D]
[E]
A246R627.WMF
[B]
[C]
Replacement
and
Adjustment
A246R628.WMF
Removal
2. Open the front cover and swing out the toner bottle holder.
3. Remove the transfer belt unit prop [A] (3 screws).
5. While turning the lever [C] counter-clockwise, take out the transfer belt unit.
NOTE: 1) Do not touch the transfer belt with oily hands.
2) Take care not to scratch the OPC drum with part of the transfer belt
unit when removing and installing the transfer belt unit.
Installation
1. While turning the lever [C] counter-clockwise, install the transfer belt unit.
NOTE: Insert the gear [D] in the hole [E] on the rear frame.
SM
6-103
A246/A247/A248
TRANSFER BELT UNIT
[C]
[B]
[A]
A246R629.WMF
[E]
[D]
A246R630.WMF
2. Install the transfer belt unit prop (3 screws).

NOTE: To install the transfer belt unit prop smoothly, set in order the lower pins
[A], drive roller shaft [B], and the upper pins [C].
3. After installation, confirm the following points:
1) Smooth up-down movement of the transfer belt unit,
2) Part [D] of the transfer belt unit is inside the drum stay,
3) Part [D] of the transfer belt unit is set in the dent [E] on the drum unit casing.
A246/A247/A248
6-104
SM
TRANSFER BELT UNIT
6.7.2 TRANSFER BELT REPLACEMENT
[C]
[A]
[B]
[D]
A246R631.WMF
[B]
NOTE: Place the transfer belt unit on the sheet to prevent spilling toner, when
replacing the transfer belt.
1. Take out the transfer belt unit. (Refer to Transfer Belt Unit Removal.)
2. While raising the knob [A], disconnect the two connectors [B].
3. Turn the transfer belt upper unit [C] 90 degrees counterclockwise, then raise
and remove it.
NOTE: Do not turn the transfer belt upper unit over 90 degrees counterclockwise. Otherwise the transfer belt maybe damaged.
4. Remove the screws [D].
SM
6-105
A246/A247/A248
Replacement
and
Adjustment
A246R700.WMF
TRANSFER BELT UNIT
[A] [D]
[E]
[G]
[C]
[B]
[B]
A246R632.WMF
[F]
A246R633.WMF
[G]
[I]
A246R634.WMF
5. Turn the belt drive roller holder [A] clockwise (front view) and remove the bias
terminal [B] (1 screw).
6. Replace the transfer belt [C].
NOTE: 1) Before installing the transfer belt, clean both sides of the transfer belt
with a dry cloth (do not use alcohol).
2) Before installing the transfer belt, clean the following items with alcohol.
Belt drive roller [D]
Belt roller [E]
Bias roller [F]
3) Position the transfer belt at the center of the belt roller [E]. (Both marks
[G] should be visible.)
4) Set the transfer belts inside the bias terminals [B] and [I].
5) When re-connecting the connectors, make sure that the harness do not
meet the transfer belt lift lever.
A246/A247/A248
6-106
SM
TRANSFER BELT UNIT
6.7.3 CLEANING BLADE REPLACEMENT
[A]
[B]
A246R635.WMF
1. Remove the transfer belt upper unit. (Refer to Transfer Belt Replacement,
section 6.7.2.)
3. Install the new cleaning blade.
NOTE: 1) Do not touch the edge of the cleaning blade. If some of the setting
powder on the blade edge is removed, apply setting powder or toner
there.
2) When using a vacuum cleaner, to protect the transfer power pack
from static electricity, remove the power pack.
3) Set the harnesses [B], as shown.
SM
6-107
A246/A247/A248
Replacement
and
Adjustment
2. Remove the cleaning blade [A] (2 screws).
FUSING UNIT
6.8 FUSING UNIT

6.8.1 FUSING UNIT REMOVAL
[A]
[B]
[C]
A246R643.WMF

2. Remove the upper inner cover [A]. (Refer to Upper Inner Cover Removal,
section 6.1.3.)
3. Remove the stopper [B] (1 screw).
4. While releasing the lever [C], pull out the fusing unit, as shown.
NOTE: Hold the bottom of the fusing unit, as shown.
A246/A247/A248
6-108
SM
FUSING UNIT
6.8.2 FUSING THERMISTOR REPLACEMENT
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[A]
A246R644.WMF
A246R645.WMF
2. Remove the knob [A] (1 screw).

3. Remove the two screws securing the fusing front cover [B].
4. Pull the lever [C] then lower the fusing front cover to unhook the fusing unit.
5. Remove the fusing unit upper cover [D] (1 screw).
6. Replace the thermistor [E] (1 screw, 1 connector).
NOTE: When re-assembling the fusing unit, secure the harness in the clamps
correctly.
SM
6-109
A246/A247/A248
Replacement
and
Adjustment
1. Remove the fusing unit. (Refer to Fusing Unit Removal, section 6.8.1.)
FUSING UNIT
6.8.3 FUSING THERMOFUSE REPLACEMENT
[B]
[C]
[B]
[A]
A246R646.WMF
1. Remove the fusing unit upper cover. (Refer to Fusing Thermistor Replacement,
section 6.8.2.)
2. Remove the terminal bracket [A] (2 screws, 1 hook).
4. Replace the fusing thermofuse [C] (1 screw).
NOTE: When re-assembling the fusing unit, secure the harness in the clamps
correctly.
A246/A247/A248
6-110
SM
FUSING UNIT
6.8.4 FUSING LAMP REPLACEMENT

[C]
[E]
[A]
[D]
[C]
[B]
A246R715.WMF
[F]
[H]
[A]
[G]
1. Remove the fusing unit upper cover. (Refer to Fusing Unit Removal, section
6.8.2.)
2. Remove the terminal bracket [A] (2 screws).
3. Disconnect the front connectors [B] and the rear connectors [C].
4. Remove the front fusing lamp holder [D] (1 screw) and the rear fusing lamp
holder [E] (1 screw).
5. Replace the fusing lamps [F].
NOTE: At the rear terminal, make sure to connect the green connectors [G]
and white connector (from the thermofuse) [H] in the correct positions
on the terminal.
SM
6-111
A246/A247/A248
Replacement
and
Adjustment
A246R716.WMF
FUSING UNIT
[B]
[A]
[NG]
[C]
[D]
A246R717.WMF
A246R718.WMF
NOTE: 1) When re-installing the thermistor, thermofuse, and lamps, secure all
harnesses in the clamps [A] correctly and do not locate them in the
area indicated as NG [B].
2) When re-installing the lamps, check that the grounding brush [C]
contacts the hot roller [D].
3) When re-installing the lamps, check that they are installed correctly,
and that they can move slightly from front to rear.
A246/A247/A248
6-112
SM
FUSING UNIT
6.8.5 OIL SUPPLY/CLEANING ROLLER REPLACEMENT

[A]
[E]
[B]
A246R649.PCX
[F]
[D]
[G]
[C]
[E]
[H]
[I]
A246R650.WMF
[F]
Replacement
and
Adjustment
A246R651.WMF
1. Pull out the fusing unit.

2. Lower the lever [A].
3. Remove the oil supply unit [B].
4. Remove the upper entrance guide [C] (1 screw).
5. Remove the mylar bracket [D] (2 screws).
6. Remove the springs [E].
7. Remove the bushings [F].
8. Replace the oil supply roller [G] and the cleaning roller [H].
NOTE: Install the cleaning roller [H], oil supply roller [G] and bushing [F]. Then,
install the assembled parts to the bracket [I].
SM
6-113
A246/A247/A248
FUSING UNIT
6.8.6 OIL SUPPLY CLEANING BRUSH REPLACEMENT
[A]
[B]
A246R719.WMF
1. Perform steps 1 to 4 of Oil Supply/Cleaning Roller Replacement, section 6.8.5.

2. Remove the spring plate holder [A] (3 screws) from the oil supply roller
assembly.
3. Replace the oil supply cleaning brush [B] (5 hooks).
A246/A247/A248
6-114
SM
FUSING UNIT
6.8.7 HOT ROLLER REPLACEMENT

[B]
[C]
[A]
A246R652.WMF
1. Remove the fusing lamps. (Refer to Fusing Lamp Replacement, section 6.8.4.)
2. Lower the fusing exit assembly [A].
4. Remove the oil supply unit [C]. (Refer to Oil Supply Roller Replacement,
section 6.8.5.)
SM
6-115
A246/A247/A248
Replacement
and
Adjustment
3. Remove the upper stay [B] (4 screws).
FUSING UNIT
[G]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[C]
[B]
[E]
[F]
[G]
[A]
A246R653.WMF
5. Lower both side pressure spring holders [A] by using the screw driver [B] as a
lever.
6. Remove the front and rear C-rings [C], gear [D], antistatic spacers [E], isolating
bushings [F] and bearings [G].
NOTE: When installing a new fusing roller:
1) Lubricate the inner and the outer surface of the isolating bushings
[F] with BARRIERTA L55/2 grease.
2) Lubricate the fusing drive gears and their shafts with grease G501.
3) Peel off 3 cm (1 inch) form both ends of the protective sheet, and
install the hot roller.
Before applying fusing pressure, remove the rest of the protective
sheet.
A246/A247/A248
6-116
SM
FUSING UNIT
6.8.8 PRESSURE ROLLER AND BEARING REPLACEMENT
[B]
[C]
[C]
[A]
A246R654.WMF
1. Remove the hot roller. (Refer to Hot Roller Replacement, section 6.8.7.)
2. Remove the lower fusing entrance guide [A] (2 screws).
3. Lift the pressure roller [B] and remove it.
Replacement
and
Adjustment
4. Replace pressure roller and bearings [C].
SM
6-117
A246/A247/A248
FUSING UNIT
If replacing only pressure roller, replace the pressure roller by following

procedure.
[A]
[C]
[E]
[B]
A246R655.WMF
[C]
[D]
[D]
A246R656.WMF
1. Remove the fusing front cover. (Refer to Fusing Thermistor Replacement,

section 6.8.2.)
2. Remove the oil supply unit. (Refer to Oil Supply Roller Replacement, section
6.8.5.)
3. Reverse the fusing unit up side down.
4. Remove the lower cover [A] (1 screw).
5. Remove the pressure roller cleaning roller unit [B] (2 screws).
6. Release the pressure levers [C] and remove them (2 E-rings).
7. Remove the bearings [D].
NOTE: When reinstalling the bearings, meet their ditches to the bracket, as
shown.
8. Replace the pressure roller [E].
NOTE: When re-assembling, be careful not to be damaged the pressure roller
by the bracket.
A246/A247/A248
6-118
SM
FUSING UNIT
6.8.9 FUSING STRIPPER PAWL REPLACEMENT

[I]
[H]
[E]
[F]
[B]
[G]
A246R657.WMF
[C]
[A]
[D]
1. Turn off the main switch and pull out the fusing unit.
2. Lower the fusing exit assembly [A].
3. Remove the fusing stripper pawl unit [B] (2 screws).
NOTE: When re-installing the fusing stripper pawl unit, set the projections
[C, D] to the holes, as shown.
4. Remove the two screws (the front screw [E] is a stepped screw) securing the
upper exit guide [F].
5. Remove the upper exit guide.
6. Unhook the springs [G] then replace the strippers [H].
NOTE: After setting the fusing stripper pawls, confirm that the strippers are
correctly held by the stripper holders [I], as shown.
SM
6-119
A246/A247/A248
Replacement
and
Adjustment
A246R658.WMF
FUSING UNIT
6.8.10 FUSING PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT
[A]
[B]
A246R660.WMF
NIP BAND WIDTH ADJUSTMENT STANDARD: 8.1 0.8 mm (A246),

10.0 0.5 (A247/A248)
1. Make a black copy (sky shot, A3/Double Letter paper).
2. As soon as the paper starts to exit, open the front door to stop the paper in the
fusing unit.
3. Wait about 20 seconds, then turn the fusing knob quickly to deliver the paper.
4. Measure the nip band width [A] at the center.
5. If the nip band width is not within 8.1 0.8 mm or 10.0 0.5 mm, change the
spring hook position [B].
NOTE: Changing the spring position to the lower hole for the A247/A248 copier
may deform the fusing unit side plate. Normally, do not change the
position.
A246/A247/A248
6-120
SM
FUSING UNIT
6.8.11 PAPER EXIT UNIT REMOVAL
[D]
[C]
[A]
[B]
[E]
A246R661.WMF
[F]
1. Remove the upper left cover. (Refer to Upper Left Cover Removal, section
6.1.5.)
2. Remove the left inner cover [A]. (Refer to Left Inner Cover Removal, section
6.1.3.)
3. Remove the lever bracket [B] (3 screws).
NOTE: When reinstalling the lever bracket, install the lever [C] of the lever
bracket to the right of the lever [D]. And check that the lever [D] is
moved by opening the front cover.
4. While releasing the lever [D], pull out the duplex unit.
5. Disconnect the connectors [E].
6. Remove the paper exit unit [F] (4 screws).
NOTE: Place the paper exit unit so that the paper exit roller comes to the
bottom to prevent the brush roller from being pressed and damaged.
SM
6-121
A246/A247/A248
Replacement
and
Adjustment
A246R662.WMF
FUSING UNIT
Installation
[B]
[D]
[A]
[F]
[C]
[E]
A246R663.WMF
1. Set the paper exit unit in the following order:

1) Set the drive shaft [A] on the left rail [B].
2) Set the plate [C] on the right rail [D].
3) Set the positioning pin [E] in the hole [F].
2. Install the paper exit unit (2 connectors, 4 screws).
3. Re-assemble the copier.
A246/A247/A248
6-122
SM
FUSING UNIT
6.8.12 EXIT SENSOR AND FUSING EXIT SENSOR REPLACEMENT
[A]
[B]
[C]
A246R664.WMF
1. Remove the paper exit unit. (Refer to Paper Exit Unit Removal, section 6.8.11.)
Replacement
and
Adjustment
2. Remove the exit sensor bracket [A] with the exit sensor [B] (1 screw, 1
connector).
3. Replace the exit sensor.
4. Replace the fusing exit sensor [C] (1 connector).
SM
6-123
A246/A247/A248
FUSING UNIT
6.8.13 DUPLEX PAPER GUIDE SENSOR AND DUPLEX

TRANSPORT SENSOR REPLACEMENT
[B]
[A]
[D]
[C]
A246R665.WMF
1. Remove the paper exit unit. (Refer to Paper Exit Unit Removal, section 6.8.11.)
2. Remove the duplex paper guide sensor bracket [A] with the duplex paper guide
sensor [B] (1 screw, 1 connector).
3. Replace the duplex paper guide sensor.
4. Remove the duplex transport sensor bracket [C] with the duplex transport
sensor [D] (2 screws, 1 connector).
5. Replace the duplex transport sensor.
A246/A247/A248
6-124
SM
FUSING UNIT
6.8.14 PRESSURE ROLLER CLEANING ROLLER REPLACEMENT
[A]
[B]
A246R666.WMF
[D]
[C]
[E]
[D]
[C]
A246R667.WMF
Replacement
and
Adjustment
1. Pull out the fusing unit.

2. Remove the bottom plate [A] (1 screw).
3. Remove the cleaning roller unit [B] (2 screws).
4. Remove the brackets [C] (1 screw each).
5. Remove the bushings [D].
6. Replace the cleaning roller [E].
7. Re-assemble the unit.
SM
6-125
A246/A247/A248
DUPLEX UNIT
6.9 DUPLEX UNIT

6.9.1 FEED ROLLER REPLACEMENT
[A]
[D]
[C]
[B]
A246R668.WMF
[E]
A246R669.WMF
1. Remove the duplex inner cover [A]. (Refer to Duplex Inner Cover Removal,
section 6.1.3.)
2. Slide the lever [B] to the rear then open the duplex reverse assembly [C].
3. Remove the lower separation guide plate [D] (2 screws).
4. Remove the snap ring [E].
A246/A247/A248
6-126
SM
DUPLEX UNIT
[A]
[C]
[B]
A246R670.WMF
[C]
[G]
[H]
[F]
[E]
[D]
Replacement
and
Adjustment
A246R671.WMF
5. Remove the bracket [A] (1 screw).

6. Remove the E-rings [B] and remove the gears [C].
7. Remove the bushing [D] (1 E-ring).
8. Remove the gear [E] (1 E-ring).
9. Remove the bracket [F] (2 screws).
10. Slide the feed roller [G] to the front and replace it.
NOTE: Set the one-way clutch [H] to the machine front side when assembling.
SM
6-127
A246/A247/A248
DUPLEX UNIT
6.9.2 SEPARATION BELT REPLACEMENT
A246R668.WMF
[A]
[C]
[B]
A246R670.WMF
[C]
1. Follow step 1 to 3 of the duplex feed roller replacement.

2. Remove the bracket [A] (1 screw).
3. Remove the E-rings [B] and remove the gears [C].
A246/A247/A248
6-128
SM
DUPLEX UNIT
[A]
[B]
A246R674.WMF
[D]
[C]
A246R675.WMF
Replacement
and
Adjustment
4. Remove the bushing [A].

5. Remove the separation belt unit [B].
6. Remove the guide mylar [C] (2 snap rings).
7. Remove the belt assembly [D] (1 screw).
SM
6-129
A246/A247/A248
DUPLEX UNIT
[A]
[G]
[C]
[D]
[B]
[F]
A246R676.WMF
[E]
[H]
A246R677.WMF
8. Remove the bushing [A] (1 snap ring).

9. Remove the drive roller shaft [B].
10. Remove the drive roller [C] (1 snap ring).
11. Replace the separation belt [D].
NOTE: When setting the tension spring [E], set it on the hook [F] normally. The
hook [G] applies higher separation pressure. Confirm that the
separation belt is correctly set between the guides [H].
A246/A247/A248
6-130
SM
DUPLEX UNIT
6.9.3 DUPLEX UNIT REMOVAL
[A]
[B]
A246R678.WMF

2. Pull out the duplex unit [A] until the stop position.
3. Remove the right and left stopper pulleys [B] (1 snap ring each).
Replacement
and
Adjustment
4. Remove the duplex unit.
SM
6-131
A246/A247/A248
DUPLEX UNIT
6.9.4 SEPARATION CLUTCH/TRANSPORT CLUTCH REMOVAL
[A]
[B]
[G]
[F]
[B]
[E]
[D]
[A]
[C]
A246R679.WMF
Before replacing both clutches, take out the duplex unit. (Refer to Duplex Unit
Removal.)
NOTE: When installing both clutches, be sure to set the stopper [A] to the
projection [B].
Separation Clutch
1. Remove the harness bracket [C] (1 screw).
2. Remove the E-ring [D].
3. Replace the separation clutch [E].
Transport Clutch
1. Remove the E-ring [F].
2. Replace the transport clutch [G].
NOTE: When reinstalling the clutches, secure the harnesses in the clump.
A246/A247/A248
6-132
SM
DUPLEX UNIT
6.9.5 JOGGER MOTOR REPLACEMENT
[E]
[G]
[D]
[C]
[F]
[B]
[A]
A246R680.WMF
1. Pull out the duplex unit. (Refer to the duplex unit removal, section 6.9.3.)
2. Remove the duplex inner cover (3 screws).
3. Slide the lever [A] to the rear then open the separation belt unit [B].
4. Remove the lower separation guide plate [C] (2 screws).
5. Remove the pressure arm [D] (1 snap-ring).
6. Remove the harness cover [E] (1 screw).
Replacement
and
Adjustment
7. Disconnect the two connectors [F].

8. Remove the upper stay [G] (4 screws).
SM
6-133
A246/A247/A248
DUPLEX UNIT
[A]
[B]
[E]
[D]
[C]
A246R681.WMF
[F]
[G]
A246R682.WMF
9. Remove the positioning roller drive gear [A] (1 E-ring).

10. Remove the bushing [B] (1 E-ring).
11. Remove the positioning roller assembly [C].
12. Remove the front jogger fence [D] and the rear jogger fence [E] (1 screw each).
13. Remove the duplex tray [F] (3 screws, 1 connector).
NOTE: To release the hooks [G], slide the duplex tray to the upper left as
shown.
A246/A247/A248
6-134
SM
DUPLEX UNIT
[A]
[B]
[C]
[H]
[F]
A246R683.WMF
[G]
[D]
[E]
A246R684.WMF
[I]
[H]
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[J]
A246R685.WMF
14. Remove the screws [A] securing the drive wire stoppers.
15. Unhook the tension spring [B] and remove the drive wire [C].
16. Remove the E-ring [D] and slide the shaft [E] to the left.
17. Remove the jogger motor bracket [F] (1 screw).
18. Remove the pressure arm solenoid [G] (1 screw, 1 connector).
19. Replace the jogger motor [H] (2 screws).
NOTE: When installing the drive pulley [I] to the jogger motor shaft, align the
shaft head [J] with the pulley head [H].
20. Re-assemble the duplex unit.
SM
6-135
A246/A247/A248
DUPLEX UNIT
[A]
[C]
[D]
[B]
A246R686.WMF
[E]
[I]
A246R687.WMF
[G]
[F]
[H]
A246R688.WMF
Jogger Drive Wire Installation

1. Set the bead [A] which is closer to the red colored hook [B] in the hole [C] and
install the stopper [D] (1 screw).
2. Round the drive wire twice around the drive motor pulley [E] as shown.
3. Move the rear jogger fence bracket [F] to the rear end position (until the bracket
[F] touches the screw [G]) and keep this condition.
4. Under the above condition, place the front jogger fence bracket [H] to the front
end position (until the bracket [H] touches the front screw).
5. Install the stopper [I] to fix the front jogger fence bracket with the wire.
A246/A247/A248
6-136
SM
DUPLEX UNIT
[E]
[F]
[D]
[G]
A246R689.WMF
[A]
[C]
[B]
A246R690.WMF
[H]
[I]
NOTE: 1) Adjust the position of the stopper [A] so that the jogger fences [B] and
side plate [C] are parrallel.
2) When installing the jogger fences, confirm if the two positioning pins [D]
are correctly set in the two holes on the side fences after the screw is
set.
3) When installing the positioning roller assembly, insert the plate [E] in the
hole [F] on the rear frame, then set the plate on the lever [G].
4) When installing the rear paper press mylar, set the hook [H] to the rear
jogger fence [I] as shown so that the mylar moves together with the
jogger fence [I].
5) After installing the jogger fences, manually move the jogger fences [I] to
confirm that they move smoothly.
6) After re-assembling the duplex unit, manually pull the plungers of the
positioning roller solenoid and the pressure arm solenoid to confirm that
the positioning roller assembly and the pressure arm move up and down
correctly.
7) After re-assembling the duplex unit, adjust the jogger fence width so that
the distance between both side fences become 1 mm wider than the
paper size, when paper is set on the duplex tray (SP1-7-1 Jogger Span
Adjustment).
SM
6-137
A246/A247/A248
Replacement
and
Adjustment
A246R691.WMF
COPY QUALITY ADJUSTMENT
6.10 COPY QUALITY ADJUSTMENT

6.10.1 SP ADJUSTMENT MODE
The copy quality adjustments in the table below can be performed by using the
appropriate SP Adjustment mode.
Change
Default
Amount/1 step
0.1 mm
00
0.5 mm
00
0.5 mm
00
0.1%
00
0.1%
00
Item
SP Mode No.
Standard
Side to side registration

Leading edge registration
Leading edge erase margin
Vertical magnification
Horizontal magnification
Focus in enlarge/reduce
(Lens error correction)
Focus in full size
1-1-1
1-2-3
1-2-4
1-3-1
1-3-2
0 2 mm
0 2 mm
3.5 2.5 mm
100 1%
100 0.5%
1-3-3
0.1%
00
1-3-4
0.1%
00
NOTE: When performing multiple adjustments, perform the items in order from top
to bottom.
Perform each adjustment as explained in the next pages.
A246/A247/A248
6-138
SM
[E]
[D]
[C]
[B]
[A]
A246R705.PCX
1. Enter SP mode (refer to Service Program Access Procedure) and access SP

Adjustment mode.
2. Access the appropriate page by touching the Prev. [A] or Next [B] key.
3. Touch the Copy in SP key [C] then select the proper copy mode.
4. Make a copy of the OS-A3 chart.
5. Confirm if copy quality is within the adjustment standard.
6. If the copy quality is not correct, touch the SP Mode key at the left upper
corner of the LCD panel.
7. Touch the key [D] or the + key [E] to change the data, then repeat steps 3
to 6 until the copy quality becomes within the adjustment standard.
Replacement
and
Adjustment
8. Exit the SP mode.
SM
6-139
A246/A247/A248
6.10.2 SIDE-TO-SIDE REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT

If the side-to-side image registration for paper fed from the duplex tray should be
adjusted, follow the entire procedure below.
If the side-to-side registration for duplex tray feed does not need to be adjusted but
side-to-side registration for the paper feed tray should be adjusted, follow only
steps 4 and 5 of the procedure below.
[D]
[A]
A246R692.WMF
[C]
[E]
[F]
[B]
A246R693.WMF
A246R694.WMF
1. Enter SP mode (refer to the service program access procedure) and access the
side-to-side registration adjustment mode (SP1-1-1).
2. Adjust side-to-side registration for the duplex tray by changing the SP mode
data.
NOTE: Copies can be made in SP mode. Touch Copy in SP key to select the
paper feed station.
Adjustment standard: Less than 2 mm difference between original
and copy.
3. Change the SP data of each paper feed tray so that it is the same as the SP
data of the duplex tray.
4. Loosen the screws [A] for the tandem LCT tray [B] for 550-sheets fixed tray or
for universal tray, or [C] for by-pass feed tray.
5. Reposition the tray by moving parts [D, E] and [F] of the trays.
A246/A247/A248
6-140
SM
6.10.3 UNEVEN EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT

When:
If the exposure is uneven.
Purpose:
To maintain even exposure.
Adjustment standard:
The side-to-side variation of the gray scales on the test

chart should be less than one level.
How:
Change the position of the exposure lamp or exposure

adjustment wings to make light intensity from the exposure
lamp even across its length.
[A]
A246R695.WMF
Wing positioning:
Image turns darker.
1. Remove the exposure glass. (Refer to Exposure Glass Removal, section 6.3.1.)
2. Position the adjustment wings [A] so that the side-to-side copy image density
variation is within the adjustment standard.
Data Initial Setting (SP1-2-2).
NOTE: If uneven density is not solved by this adjustment, proceed to the steps
4 and 5 in the next page.
SM
6-141
A246/A247/A248
Replacement
and
Adjustment
Image turns lighter.
[B]
[C]
[A]
[C]
[D]
[B]
A246R697.WMF
A246R696.PCX
4. Turn the screw [A] to correct the position of the filament. The left edge of the
exposure lamp [B] should be directly beneath the center of the sight hole [C] in
the reflector cover.
CAUTION: Do not touch the screw [D].
Data Initial Setting (SP1-2-2).
A246/A247/A248
6-142
SM
6.10.4 IMAGE DENSITY ADJUSTMENT

When:
The copy image density is already adjusted to the standard level at

the factory, and process control maintains copy image density until
the next PM. If the customer asks you to adjust the image density, it
can be done by using the User Tool mode.
Purpose:
To adjust the copy image density.
How:
The User Tool image density level mode changes the development
bias voltage.
1. Enter User Tool mode and access 7 Image reproduction setting modes.
2. Select the appropriate image density level (7 steps).
Adjustment: Press the appropriate ID level key.
3. Press the Exit key to exit User Tool mode.
Replacement
and
Adjustment
4. Check copy quality.
SM
6-143
A246/A247/A248
6.10.5 SCANNER HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT

When:
If optically skewed images appear after adjusting the 1st and 2nd
scanner positions.
Purpose:
To maintain a proper copy image.
How:
Turn the 3rd scanner height adjusting cam.

This changes the 3rd scanners height.
[C]
[B]
[A]
A246R672.WMF
Leading edge
Front advanced against leading and
trailing erase edge:
Raise adjustment screw
Rear advanced against leading and

trailing erase edge:
Lower adjustment screw
Copy
Original
Edge erase
1. Remove the exposure glass.

3. Adjust the 3rd scanner [B] height by the adjustment screw [C].
A246/A247/A248
6-144
SM
6.10.6 APS SIZE CALIBRATION

When:
When replacing the APS sensor.

When removing the APS sensor.
If proper paper size can not be detected.
Purpose:
To function the APS sensor accurately.
How:
Perform SP1-10-1 (APS Size Calibration).
[A]
A246R706.PCX
1. Enter SP1-10-1.
2. Open the ADF or the platen cover.
Replacement
and
Adjustment
3. Set the A4 or LT size paper (lengthwise) and touch the Start key [A].
NOTE: When touching the Start key, keep the ADF or platen cover open. If
closing the ADF or the platen cover, APS sensor stops.
SM
6-145
A246/A247/A248

ADJUSTMENT
When:
If paper jam occur in the fusing unit.
Purpose:
This adjustment is required so that the fusing stripper contact with the
hot roller correctly.
How:
Change the position of the fusing exit cover magnet.
[C]
[A]
[B]
A246R698.WMF
1. Remove the fusing unit upper cover (1 screw).

2. Loosen the screws [A] securing the magnet [B].
3. Push the fusing exit cover [C] and tighten the screws [A].
NOTE: Do not push the fusing exit assembly too strong.
4. Confirm that the fusing exit assembly close firmly when pushing it. Also confirm
that the fusing exit assembly easily close.
A246/A247/A248
6-146
SM
TROUBLESHOOTING
SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
7. TROUBLESHOOTING
7.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
7.1.1 SUMMARY
There are 4 levels of service call conditions.
Level
Definition & Display

The SC can only be reset by a service representative (see the note on the next
page) to prevent the machine from being damaged. The copier cannot be
operated at all.
A246T501.PCX
The SC display will not be canceled.

The copier can be operated as usual except for the unit related to the service
call.
Only the SC counter is incremented. The copier can be operated as usual.

C
SM
The SC will not be displayed.
7-1
A246/A247/A248
Troubleshooting
A246T502.PCX
If the related function is selected, this display appears.

Level
Definition & Display

The SC can be reset by turning main switch off and on if the SC is caused by
misdetection.
A246T503.PCX
NOTE: 1) If the problem is related to electrical circuit boards, first disconnect then
reconnect the connectors before replacing the PCBs.
2) If the problem is related to motor lock, first check the mechanical load
before replacing motors or sensors.
3) To reset a Level A SC, enter SP mode then turn the main switch off and
on.
4) When an SC condition occurs while in SP mode, the display does not
indicate the SC number. You can recognize the SC condition because in
this condition, you cannot exit the SP mode by touching the Quit key.
If this occurs, check the SC number as follows:
a) Perform the same procedure to duplicate the SC condition.
b) Enter Copy in SP mode. You can see the SC number on the
display.
A245/A247/A248
7-2
SM
7.1.2 EXPOSURE
SC101 - Exposure lamp malfunction - abnormal on/off
Definition: [level: A]
1) An A/D conversion level higher than 21 is detected more than 50 times while
the relay trigger is on and the lamp trigger is off.
2) An A/D conversion level lower than 6 is detected more than 50 times while
the exposure lamp is on.
Possible causes
Exposure lamp open
Exposure lamp thermoswitch open
Optics control board defective
AC drive board defective
SC102 - Exposure lamp malfunction - abnormal process control

1) VL/VR correction not finished within 50 seconds.
2) ADS adjustment not finished within 15 seconds.
Possible cause:
ADS sensor defective
Drum potential sensor defective
Main control board defective
SC103 - Power source frequency detection error

Definition: [level: D]
Frequencies detected out of the 45Hz to 65Hz range.
SM
Troubleshooting
Possible causes:
Abnormal power source
Electrical noise
7-3
A246/A247/A248
SC104 - Exposure lamp malfunction - abnormal off

The scanner start signal is received even if the main relay off condition is
detected.
Possible causes:
Main relay defective
Communication error between the main control board and the optics control
board because of a poor harness connection.
Electrical noise
SC105 - Zero-cross abnormal

1) The optics control board does not detect a zero-cross signal for more than 1
second when the main relay trigger on the optics control board is on.
2) The optics control board does not detect a zero-cross signal for more than
10 seconds when the main switch is turned on.
Possible causes:
Main relay defective
A245/A247/A248
7-4
SM
7.1.3 SCANNER
SC120 - Scanner home position sensor abnormal - stays off
The scanner home position sensor does not detect the on condition even if the
scanner returns home.
Possible causes:
Scanner home position sensor defective
Scanner HP sensor short
SC121 - Scanner home position sensor abnormal - stays on

The scanner home position sensor does not detect the off condition even if the
scanner has moved 40 mm away from the scanner home position sensor.
Possible causes:
Scanner home position sensor defective
Scanner motor defective
Scanner HP sensor open
SC124 - Scanner motor encoder abnormal

Definition: [level D]
1) The scanner motor encoder connector is disconnected.
2) The optics control board does not receive the encoder signal within 200 ms
after the scanner motor starts rotating.
Troubleshooting
Possible cause:
Scanner motor encoder defective
Connector disconnected (CN514, 515, 516)
SM
7-5
A246/A247/A248
SC125 - Low scanner speed

1) The scanner speed, detected by the optics control board through the
encoder, is lower than the specified speed.
2) When the scanner returns to the home position, it stops before reaching the
home position sensor.
Possible causes:
Scanner drive motor defective
Abnormal load of the scanner drive
SC126 - High scanner speed

The scanner overruns by more than 12 mm after passing the scanner home
position.
Possible causes:
The scanner drive motor defective
SC127 - Scanner drive motor encoder failure

The scanner rotating direction detected by the optics control board through the
encoder is opposite to the specified direction.
Possible causes:
Scanner drive motor defective
SC128 - Scanning start speed abnormal

Definition: [level: C]
The scanner motor speed does not reach the standard value before the
scanner reaches the original leading edge position.
Possible cause:
Scanner drive section defective
A245/A247/A248
7-6
SM
SC129 - Scanner motor speed abnormal

The scanner motor speed is out of the 10% tolerance limit while scanning the
original.
Troubleshooting
Possible cause:
PSU (38V output) defective
SM
7-7
A246/A247/A248
7.1.4 LENS MAGNIFICATION

SC140 - Lens vertical home position sensor abnormal - stays off
When the lens returns to the home position, the lens vertical home position
sensor does not detect the on condition within 2,100 pulses.
Possible causes:
Lens vertical home position sensor shorted
Lens vertical drive motor defective
SC141 - Lens vertical home position sensor abnormal - stays on

When the lens leaves the home position, the lens vertical home position sensor
does not detect the off condition within 1,200 pulses.
Possible causes:
Lens vertical home position sensor open
SC142 - Lens horizontal home position sensor abnormal - stays off

When the lens returns to the home position, the lens horizontal home position
sensor does not detect the on condition within 1,400 pulses.
Possible causes:
Lens horizontal home position sensor short
Lens horizontal drive motor defective
SC143 - Lens horizontal home position sensor abnormal - stays on

When the lens leaves the home position, the lens horizontal home position
sensor does not detect the off condition within 1,000 pulses.
Possible causes:
Lens horizontal home position sensor open
A245/A247/A248
7-8
SM
SC144 - 3rd scanner home position sensor abnormal - stays off

When the 3rd scanner returns to the home position, the 3rd scanner home
position sensor does not detect the on condition within 1,400 pulses.
Possible causes:
3rd scanner home position sensor shorted
3rd scanner drive motor defective
SC145 - 3rd scanner home position sensor abnormal - stays on

When the 3rd scanner leaves the home position, the 3rd scanner home
position sensor does not detect the off condition within 700 pulses.
Possible causes:
3rd scanner home position sensor open
SC146 - Abnormal magnification operation

The lens vertical drive motor, the lens horizontal drive motor, or 3rd scanner
motor moves for no apparent reason in the ready condition.
Troubleshooting
Possible causes:
SM
7-9
A246/A247/A248
7.1.5 OPTICS THERMISTOR

SC190 - Optics thermistor open
The optics thermistor is open.
Possible causes:
Optics thermistor open
SC193 - APS abnormal

Definition: [level B]
1) Abnormal rotation of the APS sensor motor is detected 4 times consecutively
or 10 times totally after the main switch is turned on.
2) The value of APS correction is more than 500 or less than 500.
Possible cause:
APS sensor defective
7.1.6 CHARGE CORONA UNIT

SC302 - Charge corona leakage
1) When charge corona leakage is detected.
2) Charge corona output is not detected for 200 ms.
3) Grid voltage is more than 1295 V or no output for 100 ms.
Possible causes:
Main charge corona unit defective
Main charge power pack defective
High voltage control board defective
SC303 - Charge corona wire cleaner failure

The charge corona wire cleaner does not move back to the end block within 90
seconds.
Possible causes:
Charge corona wire cleaner drive motor defective
A245/A247/A248
7-10
SM
7.1.7 DEVELOPMENT
SC341 - Development motor locked
The development motor lock signal stays low for more than 1 second in the
development motor on condition.
Possible causes:
Extra load in the development unit
Development motor defective
SC345 - Toner collection motor locked

The toner collection motor lock signal stays low for more than 2.5 seconds in
the toner collection motor on condition.
Possible cause:
Toner collection motor defective
Extra load of the toner collection mechanism
SC346 - Toner recycle motor disconnected

The toner recycle motor is disconnected for more than 1 second.
Troubleshooting
Possible cause:
The toner recycle motor connector is disconnected.
SM
7-11
A246/A247/A248
7.1.8 PROCESS CONTROL SENSORS

SC351 - Abnormal VSG detection (VSG > 4.2V)
The detected VSG value is not 4 0.2 V.
Possible causes:
ID sensor defective
Drum defective
SC352 - Incomplete TD sensor initial setting

The output voltage of the TD sensor is higher than 2.1 V or lower than 1.75 V
during the developer initial setting mode.
VOUT to get 2.0 V for the TD sensor output is lower than 1.9 V.
Possible causes:
Connector [A] not connected
correctly
Toner density sensor defective
Abnormal toner concentration
[A]
A246T500.WMF
SC353 - Abnormal VSP detection (VSP 2.5 V: lighter pattern)

VSP is 2.5 V or higher.
Possible causes:
ID sensor defective
Drum
Poor development bias terminal contact
A245/A247/A248
7-12
SM
SC354 - Abnormal VSG detection (VSG 2.5 V)

1) VSG is 2.5 V or less.
2) VSGP is 2.5 V or less.
Possible causes:
ID sensor defective
Drum
Dirty charge corona casing
Quenching lamp defective
Erase lamp defective
Cleaning blade defective
Dirty ID sensor
SC355 - Abnormal VTD detection (VTD 4.7 V)

VTD is 4.7 V or higher.
Possible causes:
Toner concentration too low
SC356 - Abnormal VTD detection (VTD < 0.5 V)

VTD is less than 0.5 V.
Possible causes:
Toner concentration is too high
SC358 - Abnormal VSP detection (VSP/VSG < 2.5%)
Troubleshooting
VSP/VSG is less than 2.5%.
Possible causes:
ID sensor defective
Drum
Toner scattering
SM
7-13
A246/A247/A248
SC361 - Incomplete drum potential sensor calibration

When the process control initial setting is performed and a development bias of
100 V or 800 V is applied to the drum shaft, the drum potential voltage is out
of these ranges:
0.1 V100 1.6 [V] or 2.3 V800 5.0 [V].
Possible causes:
Drum shaft terminal not grounded
Drum
Charge corona unit defective
Development power pack defective
SC364 - Abnormal VD detection

VD is out of specification (VR + 770 20 V).
Possible causes:
Drum
SC365 - Abnormal VL detection

VL is out of specification (VR + 140 20 V).
Possible causes:
Drum
Optics too dirty
SC366 - Abnormal VR
VR is larger than 360 V during the process control initialization.
Possible causes
Drum
Drum shaft terminal not ground
A245/A247/A248
7-14
SM
7.1.9 TRANSFER CURRENT

SC402 - Transfer current leakage
1) The transfer power pack output voltage exceeds 360 A for 80 ms or more.
2) No transfer current is detected.
Possible causes:
Transfer belt defective
Transfer power pack defective
Poor contact at the transfer bias roller or discharge plate terminals
7.1.10 DRUM
SC440 - Abnormal main motor speed
The lock signal stays low for 1.0 second or more when the main motor is on.
Troubleshooting
Possible causes:
Main motor defective
SM
7-15
A246/A247/A248
7.1.11 PAPER FEED

SC500 - Abnormal manual feed drive motor speed
The lock signal stays low for 1.0 second or more when the manual feed motor
is on.
Possible causes:
Manual feed motor defective
SC501 - Abnormal paper feed drive motor speed

The lock signal stays low for 1.0 second or more when the paper feed motor is
on.
Possible causes:
Paper feed motor defective
Paper feed control board defective
SC502 - Abnormal 1st lift motor movement

Definition: [level: B]
1) The 1st lift sensor detects a high condition for 10 seconds or more after the
1st lift motor starts. The first time, after the paper tray is opened and closed,
the 1st lift motor starts again.
2) The right tray down sensor does not turn on within 10 seconds after the 1st
lift motor starts lowering the tray.
If any of these conditions occur twice, this SC is displayed.
Possible causes:
1st lift sensor shorted
1st lift motor defective
Right tray down sensor defective
A245/A247/A248
7-16
SM
SC503 - Abnormal 2nd lift motor movement

The 2nd lift sensor detects a high condition for 10 seconds or more after the
2nd lift motor starts. The first time, after the paper tray is opened and closed,
the 2nd lift motor starts again. If the above condition occurs twice, this SC is
displayed.
Possible causes:
2nd lift sensor shorted
2nd lift motor defective
SC504 - Abnormal 3rd lift motor movement

The 3rd lift sensor detects a high condition for 10 seconds or more after the 3rd
lift motor starts. The first time, after the paper tray is opened and closed, the
3rd lift motor starts again. If the above condition occurs twice, this SC is
displayed.
Possible causes:
3rd lift sensor shorted
3rd lift motor defective
SC506 - Abnormal 3.5 k LCT motor movement

1) The LCT lift sensor detects a low condition for 30 seconds or more after the
LCT motor starts.
2) The LCT tray down sensor does not turn on within 30 seconds after the LCT
motor starts lowering the tray.
3) If the above condition occurs twice, this SC is displayed.
SM
Troubleshooting
Possible causes:
LCT motor defective
LCT lift sensor shorted
LCT tray down sensor defective
7-17
A246/A247/A248
SC507 - Abnormal 3.5 k LCT feed motor movement

The LCT feed motor is locked for 1 second or more after this motor starts.
Possible causes:
LCT feed motor defective
SC508 - Abnormal tandem rear fence drive motor movement

1) It takes 10 seconds or more for the rear fence return sensor to detect the on
condition after the rear fence drive motor starts.
2) It takes 10 seconds or more for the rear fence home position sensor to
detect the on condition after this fence starts moving to the home position.
3) When the tray is set, the rear fence return sensor and the rear fence home
position sensor are both on.
Possible causes:
Rear fence drive motor defective
Rear fence HP sensor defective
Rear fence return sensor defective
SC510 - Abnormal tandem side fence home position detection

1) Both the rear side fence open sensor and the rear side fence close sensor
are on.
2) Both the front side fence open sensor and the front side fence close sensor
are on.
Possible cause:
Rear side fence open sensor defective
Rear side fence close sensor defective
Front side fence open sensor defective
Front side fence close sensor defective
SC511 - Abnormal tandem side fence home position detection - stays on

When the side fence goes back to the home position or the side fence drive
motor is closing the fence, the side fence positioning sensor stays on.
Possible causes:
Side fence drive motor defective
Side fence positioning sensor shorted
A245/A247/A248
7-18
SM
7.1.12 DUPLEX
SC520 - Abnormal fusing/duplex drive motor movement
The lock signal stays low for 1.0 second after the fusing/duplex drive motor
starts.
Possible causes:
Fusing/duplex drive motor defective
The cleaning roller is too dirty and applies an excessive load to the
fusing/duplex drive motor.
SC522 - Abnormal jogger home position sensor detection - stays off

When the jogger returns to the home position, the jogger home position sensor
does not detect the on condition within 600 pulses.
Possible causes:
Jogger motor defective
Jogger HP sensor open
SC523 - Abnormal jogger home position sensor detection - stays on

The jogger home position sensor does not detect the off condition within 50
pulses after its sensor detects the on condition in the initializing mode.
Troubleshooting
Possible causes:
Jogger drive motor defective
Jogger HP sensor shorted
SM
7-19
A246/A247/A248
7.1.13 FUSING
SC541 Fusing thermistor open
The A/D conversion value of the fusing themistor voltage stays over 252
(detected temperature is lower than 3C) for 10 seconds.
Possible cause:
Fusing thermistor open
SC542 Start key stays red

Before reaching the specified temperature for the ready condition, the fusing
temperature does not increase 5C or more within 30 seconds.
Possible cause:
Fusing lamp defective
Fusing thermistor defective
SC543 - Fusing overheat (detected by the main control board)

A fusing temperature higher than 230C is detected for 5 seconds.
Possible cause:
SC544 - Fusing overheat (detected by the optics control board)

A fusing temperature higher than 225C is detected for 5 seconds.
Possible cause:
Poor cable connection
A245/A247/A248
7-20
SM
SC546 - Low fusing temperature (detected by the optics control board)

The fusing temperature stays lower than 100C for 5 seconds after the
machine becomes ready.
Possible causes:
Fusing lamp open
SC547 - Fusing lamp continuously lit

After the machine becomes ready, the fusing temperature does not increase
5C or more even though the fusing lamp fully lights for more than 30 seconds.
Possible cause:
Fusing lamp defective
SC548 - Unstable fusing temperature

If the fusing temperature changes by 20C/second three times in 1 minute, this
SC is displayed.
Troubleshooting
Possible causes:
Thermistor defective
SM
7-21
A246/A247/A248
7.1.14 SYSTEM CONTROL

SC600 - Communication error (main control board and operation panel)
The main control board does not communicate with the operation panel.
Possible causes:
Operation panel defective
Cable defective
SC601 - Communication error (main control board and optics control

board)
The main control board does not communicate with the optics control board.
Possible causes:
Cable defective
SC620 - Communication error (main control board and DJF main board)
The main board does not communicate with the DJF main board.
Possible causes:
DJF main board defective
Cable defective
Fiber optics defective
SC621 - Communication error (main control board and sorter staplers

main board)
The main control board does not communicate with the sorter stapler main
board.
Possible causes:
Sorter stapler main board defective
Cable defective
Fiber optics defective
A245/A247/A248
7-22
SM
Rev. 10/99
7.1.15 DUAL JOB FEEDER

SC700 - Abnormal DJF feed-in motor movement
SC701 - Abnormal DJF transport belt motor movement
SC702 - Abnormal DJF feed out motor movement
Encoder pulses are not detected by the DJF main board when the main motor
is on. The first time, a jam occurs. The second time, the SC counter is
increased.
Possible causes:
DJF feed motor defective
DJF transport motor defective
DJF feed out motor defective
DJF inverter motor defective
SC703 - Size detection encoder pulse defective

Pull-out roller in the registration section encoder pulses are not detected by the
DJF main board. The first time, a jam occurs. The second time, the SC counter
is incremented.
Possible causes:
DJF feed-in motor defective

DJF pulse generator sensor defective
DJF feed-in clutch defective
SC704 - Friction belt drive motor encoder pulse defective

Friction belt drive motor encoder pulses are not detected by the DJF main
board. The first time, a jam occurs. The second time, the SC counter is
incremented.
SM
Troubleshooting
Possible cause:
Encoder defective
7-23
A246/A247/A248
Rev. 10/99
7.1.15 DUAL JOB FEEDER

SC700 - Abnormal DJF feed-in motor movement
SC701 - Abnormal DJF transport belt motor movement
SC702 - Abnormal DJF feed out motor movement
Encoder pulses are not detected by the DJF main board when the main motor
is on. The first time, a jam occurs. The second time, the SC counter is
increased.
Possible causes:
DJF feed motor defective
DJF transport motor defective
DJF feed out motor defective
DJF inverter motor defective
SC703 - Size detection encoder pulse defective

Pull-out roller in the registration section encoder pulses are not detected by the
DJF main board. The first time, a jam occurs. The second time, the SC counter
is incremented.
Possible causes:
DJF feed-in motor defective

DJF pulse generator sensor defective
DJF feed-in clutch defective
SC704 - Friction belt drive motor encoder pulse defective

Friction belt drive motor encoder pulses are not detected by the DJF main
board. The first time, a jam occurs. The second time, the SC counter is
incremented.
SM
Troubleshooting
Possible cause:
Encoder defective
7-23
A246/A247/A248
7.1.16 SORTER STAPLER

SC730 - Abnormal main motor sorter stapler movement (sorter staplers)
When the encoder pulse is not detected by the SS main board for 200 ms after
the main motor starts, a jam is indicated. If this occurs twice, an SC is
displayed.
Possible causes:
SS main motor defective
SC731 - Abnormal bin drive (lift) motor movement (sorter staplers)

Definition: [level: B (A821), D (A658)]
1) If the wheel sensor (bin lift timing sensors) is not off 200 ms after the bin
drive (lift) motor starts, jam R2 is indicated.
2) If the wheel sensor (bin lift timing sensors) is not on 200 ms after it turned
off, jam R2 is indicated.
If any of these conditions occur twice, an SC occurs.
Possible causes:
Wheel sensor (bin lift timing sensors) defective
Bin drive (Lift) motor defective
SC735 - Abnormal jogger motor movement (sorter staplers)

1) When the jogger moves back to the home position, the jogger home position
sensor does not detect the on condition within 650 pulses. Then, a jam is
indicated.
2) When the jogger moves from the home position forward, and moves back to
the home position, the jogger home position sensor does not detect the off
condition within 40 pulses or the sensor does not detect the on condition
within 60 pulses when it moves back. Then, a jam is indicated.
Possible causes:
Jogger motor defective
Jogger home position sensor defective
A245/A247/A248
7-24
SM
SC737 - Abnormal gripper motor movement (sorter staplers)

1) When the gripper moves to the staple position, the gripper home position
sensor does not detect the on condition. Then a jam is indicated.
2) When the gripper moves from the staple position to the bin position, the
gripper home position sensor does not detect the on condition within 1,045
pulses. Then a jam is indicated.
3) When the gripper moves to the home position, the gripper home position
sensor does not detect the on condition within 1,250 pulses. Then a jam is
indicated.
4) When the gripper moves from the home position forward, and moves back to
the home position, the gripper home position sensor does not detect the off
condition within 200 pulses or the sensor does not detect the on condition
within 220 pulses when the gripper moves back. Then a jam is indicated.
Possible causes:
Gripper motor defective
Gripper home position sensor defective
SC738 - Abnormal staple motor movement (sorter staplers)

The staple home position sensor does not detect the off condition within 150
ms after the motor starts, or does not detect the on condition within 600 ms.
Then a jam is indicated. If this occurs twice, this SC is displayed.
Troubleshooting
Possible causes:
Staple unit (staple motor) defective
A staple is jammed in the staple unit.
SM
7-25
A246/A247/A248
SC740 - Abnormal staple unit drive motor movement (sorter stapler)

1) When the staple unit has moved from the home position to the staple
position, the stapler unit home position sensor is on. A jam is indicated.
2) The staple unit home position sensor does not detect the off condition (within
1640 pulses) when the staple unit moves to the home position. A jam is
indicated.
3) The staple unit home position sensor does not detect the off condition (within
120 pulses) when the staple unit moves forward from the home position or
does not detect the on condition within 160 pulses when it moves back to the
home position. A jam is indicated.
Possible causes:
Staple unit drive motor defective
Staple unit home position sensor defective
SC741 - Abnormal bin rear plate motor movement (A821 sorter stapler
only)
1) When the rear bin plate is open, the bin rear plate open sensor does not
detect the on condition for 750 ms or more after the motor starts. Then a jam
is indicated.
2) When the rear bin plate is closed, the bin rear plate home position sensor
does not detect the on condition for 750 ms or more after the motor starts.
Then a jam is indicated.
3) In the initial condition, the bin rear plate open sensor does not detect the on
condition for 1.25 seconds or more after the motor starts. Then a jam is
indicated.
Possible causes:
Bin rear plate drive motor defective
Bin rear plate open sensor defective
Bin rear plate home position sensor defective
A245/A247/A248
7-26
SM
SC743 - Punch motor abnormal (sorter stapler with punch)

1) After turning on the main switch, the punch home position sensor is not
activated within 1,100 pulses. Then an R2 jam is indicated.
2) In punch mode, the punch home position sensor is not activated within 950
pulses after starting the punch motor. Then an R2 jam is indicated.
Possible causes:
Punch motor
Punch home position sensor
SC744 - Staple jam release abnormal (A821 sorter stapler only)

Definition: [level B]
In the initial condition, the paper sensor is activated and the staple home position
sensor is de-activated. Then, an R3 (staple) jam is indicated. If this condition
occurs 4 times in a row, this SC is displayed.
Possible causes:
Stapler
SC745 - Grip unit motor abnormal (A821 sorter stapler)

1) When the grip unit has moved to the staple position, the grip unit home
position sensor is on. Then an R2 jam is indicated.
2) When the grip unit returns from the staple position to the home position, the
grip unit home position sensor does not turn on within 1070 pulses. Then an
R2 jam is indicated.
3) When the grip unit moves from the home position forward, and moves back
to the home position, the grip unit home position sensor does not turn off
within 350 pulses. Then an R2 jam is indicated.
SM
7-27
Troubleshooting
Possible cause:
Grip unit home position sensor defective
Grip unit motor defective
A246/A247/A248
7.1.17 OTHERS
SC900 - Total counter failure (staying in the on condition)
The mechanical total counter stays in the on condition.
Possible causes:
Total counter defective
SC901 - Total counter failure (staying in the off condition)

The mechanical total counter stays in the off condition.
Possible causes:
Total counter defective
SC902 - Electrical counter abnormal

The contents of the electrical counter are abnormal.
Possible cause:
RAM board defective
SC - Full used toner bottle

The toner overflow switch is activated.
Possible causes:
Toner collection bottle full
Toner overflow switch defective
NOTE: Clear this SC as follows:
1) While the main switch is on, open the front door then take out the
used toner collection bottle.
2) Remove the toner collection bottle then empty and clean the bottle.
3) Install the empty toner collection bottle.
4) Close the front door.
A245/A247/A248
7-28
SM
SC940 - Main switch abnormal

DC5V does not drop under 4.2 V within 3 seconds after the main switch is
turned off.
Troubleshooting
Possible causes:
Main switch defective
SM
7-29
A246/A247/A248
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS
7.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS

7.2.1 SENSORS
NOTE: All photo-interrupters go high (GND) when the actuator interrupts the gap
between the LED and the photo transistor.
Component
Scanner HP
(S-1)
3rd Scanner HP
(S-2)
Lens Vertical HP
(S-3)
Lens Horizontal HP
(S-4)
APS Sensor
(S-5)
Auto Image Density
(S-6)
Drum Potential
(S-7)
Toner Density
(S-8)
Image Density
(S-9)
Toner Near End
(S-10)
CN No.
512-1
512-12
512-5
511-3
520-8
507-1
110-4
114-3
114-8
Condition
Open
Shorted
Open
Shorted
Open
Shorted
Open
Shorted
Open
Shorted
Open
Shorted
Open
Shorted
Open
Shorted
Open
Shorted
Open
108-B14
Shorted
1st Paper Feed

(S-11)
402-A1
2nd Paper feed

(S-12)
402-A8
3rd Paper feed

(S-13)
402-B8
1st Lift
(S-14)
Open
Shorted
Open
Shorted
Open
Shorted
Open
401-2
Shorted
2nd Lift
(S-15)
Open
403-A2
Shorted
A245/A247/A248
7-30
Symptom
SC121 is displayed.
SC120 is displayed.
SC145 is displayed.
SC144 is displayed.
SC141 is displayed.
SC140 is displayed.
SC143 is displayed.
SC142 is displayed.
SC193 is displayed.
Image density will be abnormal.
The machine quits auto process control
and enters detect supply mode.
The machine quits auto toner supply
mode and enters fixed supply mode.
The machine quits auto toner supply
mode and enters detect mode.
Toner is added even if there is too
much toner in the toner hopper.
Toner is not supplied even if there is no
toner in the toner hopper.
Whenever paper is fed, it is folded.
Paper jam A is displayed even if there
is no paper.
is no paper.
is no paper.
Add paper is displayed even if there
is paper on the paper tray.
The tray bottom plate locks at the
upper position.
upper position.
SM
Component
3rd Lift
(S-16)
CN No.
Condition
Open
403-A10
Shorted
1st Paper End

(S-17)
Open
401-5
Shorted
2nd Paper End

(S-18)
Open
403-A5
Shorted
3rd Paper End

(S-19)
Open
403-B5
Shorted
By-pass Paper End

(S-20)
Open
108-A5
Shorted
1st paper Near End

(S-21)
Open
410-B6
Shorted
2nd paper Near End

(S-22)
Open
412-A8
Shorted
3rd paper Near End

(S-23)
Open
412-A11
Shorted
Right Tray Down

(S-24)
Open
410-B3
Shorted
Right Tray Paper

(S-25)
Open
410-B9
Shorted
Front Side Fence Open

(S-26)
SM
410-A3
Open
Shorted
7-31
Symptom
upper position.
Paper End is not displayed even if
there is no paper on the paper tray.
Paper End is displayed even if there
is paper is the tray.
is paper is the tray.
is paper is tray.
By-pass paper end is not displayed
even if there is no paper on the bypass feed table.
By-pass paper end is displayed even
if paper is set on the by-pass feed
table.
Paper near end is not displayed even
if the tray is almost empty.
Paper near end is displayed even if
there is enough paper on the paper
tray.
tray.
tray.
The bottom plate lift lever locks at the
lowest position.
The bottom plate is not lowered when
paper on the left tray shift to the right
tray, and paper is set in the improper
position.
The bottom plate rises and falls even if
there is no paper.
The bottom plate does not rise even if
there is paper on the tray.
SC510 is displayed.
SC511 is displayed.
A246/A247/A248
Troubleshooting

Component
Front Side Fence Close
(S-27)
Rear Side Fence Open
(S-28)
Rear Side Fence Close
(S-29)
Rear Fence HP
(S-30)
Rear Fence Return
(S-31)
CN No.
410-A6
410-A9
410-A12
414-6
414-10
Condition
Open
Shorted
Open
Shorted
Open
Shorted
Open
Shorted
Open
Shorted
Left Tandem Paper End

(S-32)
Open
414-13
Shorted
Paper Guide
(S-33)
Duplex Entrance
(S-34)
Open
109-B4
Shorted
Open
112-A13
Shorted
Duplex Transport
(S-35)
Open
112-A8
Shorted
Duplex Exit
(S-36)
Open
112-A2
Shorted
Duplex Paper End

(S-37)
Open
112-A9
Shorted
Jogger HP
(S-38)
Vertical Transport
(S-39)
Guide Plate Position
(S-40)
112-A10
108-A2
Open
Shorted
Open
Shorted
Open
108-B9
Shorted
A245/A247/A248
7-32
Symptom
SC510 is displayed.
SC511 is displayed.
SC510 is displayed.
SC511 is displayed.
SC510 is displayed.
SC511 is displayed.
SC508 is displayed.
When the rear fence returns to the
home position, SC508 is displayed.
When the rear fence reaches the return
position, the rear plate locks there then
SC508 is displayed.
SC508 is displayed.
The rear fence moves back and forth
continuously.
The paper on the left tray is not moved
to the right tray.
Whenever a duplex copy is made,

Paper Jam T occurs.
Paper Jam T is displayed even if
there is no paper.
Paper Jam T occurs.
there is no paper.
Paper Jam T occurs.
there is no paper.
Paper Jam T occurs.
There are copies in duplex tray is
displayed even if there is no paper in
the duplex tray.
Only one rear side copy is made
regardless of the quantity of copies.
Jogger motor locks (SC522 counts up)
Jogger motor locks (SC523 counts up)
Guide Plate Open is not displayed

even if the guide plate is open.
Guide Plate Open is displayed even if
the guide plate is closed.
SM

Component
Registration
(S-41)
CN No.
Condition
Open
108-A7
Shorted
Fusing Unit
(S-42)
Open
109-B7
Shorted
Exit
(S-43)
Open
109-A2
Shorted
Auto-Response
(S-44)
101-7
Open
Shorted
Toner Overflow (S-45)

Open
412-B3
Shorted
Original Length sensor
(S-46)
Platen Cover Position-1
(S-47)
Platen Cover Position-2
(S-48)
507-5
512-7
511-3
Open
Shorted
Open
Shorted
Open
Troubleshooting
Shorted
Symptom
Paper Jam C is displayed even if
there is no paper.
Whenever a copy is made, Paper Jam
C occurs.
Paper Jam D is displayed even if
there is no paper.
C and D occurs.
Paper Jam E is displayed even if
there is no paper.
D occurs.
The machine does not exit Screen
Saver mode even if an operator
approaches the machine.
Screen Saver mode does not work.
The Full Used Toner Bottle indicator
does not light even if the toner
collection bottle becomes full.
The Full Used Toner Bottle indicator
lights even if the toner collection bottle
is not full.
LT size is misdetected as LG size.
LG size is misdetected as LT size.
APS and AMS do not function
correctly.
Original is on platen glass is
displayed even if the original on the
glass has already been removed.
The ADF cannot be used.
SM
7-33
A246/A247/A248
7.2.2 SWITCHES
Component
Main
(SW-1)
Front Door Safety
(SW-2)
CN No.
Toner Collection Bottle

(SW-3)
412-B7
2nd Paper Size

(SW-4)
3rd Tray Set
(SW-5)
By-pass Table
(SW-6)
A245/A247/A248
407A2 ~ A6
407-B3
108-B11
Condition
Sympton
Open
The copier does not turn on.
Shorted The copier does not turn off.
Doors/Covers Open is displayed even
Open
if the front door is closed.
Copier does not turn off when the front
Shorted
doors are open.
No caution is displayed on the LCD
Open
even if the toner collection bottle is set
incorrectly.
Set used toner bottle correctly is
Shorted
displayed.
The CPU cannot detect proper paper
Open
size, and misfeeds may occur when a
Shorted
copy is made.
When the 3rd tray is selected, SC504
Open
is displayed.
The 3rd tray cannot be selected even if
Shorted
the 3rd tray is set in the machine.
Open the by-pass tray is displayed
Open
even if the by-pass tray is opened.
Shorted
7-34
SM
7.2.3 FUSES
DC Power Supply Board
Condition
FU801
Open
FU802
Open
FU803
FU804
FU805
Open
Open
Open
Symptom
Power is not provided when the main switch is on
(Nothing is displayed on the operation panel).
Power is not provided when the main switch is on
(Nothing is displayed on the operation panel).
Paper jam A occurs after the Start key is pressed.
SC105 is displayed after the main switch is turned on.
The ADF and sorter do not work.
Troubleshooting
Component
SM
7-35
A246/A247/A248
Rev. 10/2000
FIRMWARE HISTORY
7.3
FIRMWARE HISTORY
7.3.1 A246/A247/A248 FIRMWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY

A246/A247/A248 FIRMWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY
FIRMWARE
LEVEL
SERIAL
NUMBER
FIRMWARE
VERSION
Initial Production
A2475151 D
From 1st
Production
Corrects the following:
A2475151 E
July 00
Production
DESCRIPTION OF MODIFICATION
Correct the remaining time calculation

<Symptom>
If small paper (A4) is fed in APS mode, a
longer remaining time is displayed on the
operation panel. This is because the
machine calculates the remaining time in
APS mode for A3 paper.
Example: After an original is set in the
DF, 220 copies is selected and
the Start key is pressed, the
machine displays 7 minutes as
the remaining time.
The correct value is 3.7 min
(220 / 60 = 3.7 min.) .
No paper jam indication
<Symptom>
Even if the sensor is stuck in the ON
position (hook loose, separated), copies
are exited from the copier and a jam is
not indicated. When the front door is
opened and closed, a jam is indicated
(even though there is no jammed paper in
the machine).
<Countermeasure>
The new software contains a sensor Offcheck, which will cause the sensor to
turn off after a certain time has expired
(even if it is physically stuck in the ON
position).
A246/A247/A248
7-36
SM
SPECIFICATIONS

1.1 SPECIFICATIONS
Original Feed Mode:
Automatic document feed mode

Automatic reverse document feed mode
Semi-automatic document feed mode
Combine 2 originals mode
Mixed sized mode
Preset mode
Original Size and Weight:
Thick original mode (default mode)

Use this setting for normal paper types
Maximum: A3, 11" x 17"
Minimum: B6, 51/2" x 81/2"
Weight: 52 ~ 128 g/m2 (14 ~ 34 lb)
Thin original mode
Minimum: B6, 51/2" x 81/2"
Weight: 40 ~ 128 g/m2 (11 ~ 34 lb)
Auto reverse mode
Minimum: B6 (lengthwise)
Weight: 52 ~ 105 g/m2 (14 ~ 28 lb)
Combine two originals mode
Maximum: A4 (sideways), 81/2" x 11" (sideways)
Minimum: B5 (sideways), 51/2" x 81/2" (sideways)
Weight: 52 ~ 128 g/m2 (14 ~ 34 lb)
Original Table Capacity:
50 sheets at 80 g/m2 (21 lb)

(or stack height of less than 5 mm)
Original Standard Position:
Rear left
Original Separation:
Feed and friction belt
Original Transport:
One flat belt
Power Source:
DC 24 V from the copier, 2.5 A (average)
Power Consumption:
70 W
Dimensions (W x D x H):
680 x 522 x 133 mm (26.8" x 20.0" x 4.6")
Weight:
14.5 kg (32.0 lb)
SM
8-1
A246/A247/A248
Dual Job
Feeder A610
Mixed size Mode

Minimum: B5, 81/2" x 11"
Weight: 52 ~ 80 g/m2 (14 ~ 21 lb)
COMPONENT LAYOUT
1.2 COMPONENT LAYOUT

1.2.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
1
12
11
10
9
7
A610V500.WMF
1. Original Stopper
7. Inverter Roller
2. Press Roller
8. Transport Belt
3. Side Fence
9. Pick-up Rollers
4. Original Table
10. Pull-out Rollers
5. Exit Roller
11. Feed Roller
6. Inverter Pawl
12. Friction Belt
A246/A247/A248
8-2
SM
COMPONENT LAYOUT
1.2.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
22
1
2
21
3
4
20
5
6
19
7
8
9
18
17
16
10
15
11
14
13
12
A610V501.WMF
12. Pulse Count Sensor
2. Friction Belt Motor
13. Registration-2 Sensor
3. Feed-in Motor
14. Original Width-1 Sensor
4. Indicator Panel Lamps
5. Belt Drive Motor
6. DF Main Board
17. Registration-1 Sensor
7. DF Position Sensor
18. Original Set Sensor
8. APS Start Sensor
19. Original Feed Sensor
9. Inverter Solenoid
20. Friction Belt Turn Sensor
10. Feed-out Motor
21. Feed-in Clutch
11. Feed-out Sensor
22. Stopper Solenoid

Dual Job
Feeder A610
1. Feed-in Cover Open Sensor
SM
8-3
A246/A247/A248

diagram for symbols and index numbers.
Symbol
Motors
M1
M2
M3
M4
Name
Friction Belt
Feed-in
Belt Drive
Feed-out
Function
Index No.
Drives the friction belt.

Drives the feed-in system (pick-up, feed,
pull-out rollers)
Drives the transport belt.
Drives the feed-out and the inverter system.
2
3
5
10
Sensors
S1
S2
Feed-in Cover
Open
DF Position
APS Start
S3
Feed-out
S4
Pulse Count
S5
Registration-2
S6
S7
S8
S9
S10
S11
S12
S13
Original Width-1
Original Width-2
Original Width-3
Registration-1
Original Set
Original Feed
Friction Belt
Turn
A246/A247/A248
Detects whether or not the feed-in cover is

open.
Informs the CPU whether the DJF is in the
up or down position.
Informs the CPU when the DJF is being
closed so that the original size sensors in the
main body can check the original size (in
platen mode).
Checks for original misfeeds and sets
original stop timing when in auto-reverse
mode.
Counts the pulses generated by the pulse
generator disc to determine the original
length.
Detects the leading edge of the original to
turn off the feed-in clutch and to change the
feed-in motor speed. Also detects the
original length.
Detects the original width.
Detects the original length and original jam
by detecting the trailing edge of the original.
Detects if originals have been placed on the
feed table.
Detects if the originals have reached the
feed roller or not.
Counts the pulses generated by the pulse
generator disk to monitor the friction belt
motor.
8-4
1
7
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
SM

Symbol
Solenoids
SOL1
Name
Inverter
Stopper
SOL2
PCBs
PCB1
DF Main Board
Magnetic Clutch
Feed-in
CL1
Indicator Lamps
Ready
Auto
Index No.
Inverts the original when copying two-sided

originals.
Lifts the original stopper and lowers the
press roller to feed the set of originals to the
feed roller.
9
22
Controls all DJF functions.
Transmits the feed-in motor drive to the pickup, feed, and pull-out rollers.
21
Informs the operator that the DJF is in the

down position.
Informs the operator that the auto feed mode
is available.
Dual Job
Feeder A610
L1
Function
SM
8-5
A246/A247/A248
ORIGINAL PICK-UP MECHANISM
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTION
2.1 ORIGINAL PICK-UP MECHANISM
[D]
[C]
[E]
[C]
[A]
[B]
A610D500.WMF
[J]
[F]
A610D501.WMF
[I]
[G]
[H]
A610D502.WMF
When an original [A] is placed on the original table [B], the leading edge is stopped
by the stopper [C], and the feeler [D] is pushed out of the original set sensor. The
Insert Original indicator light goes out and the DJF informs the copier's CPU that
the originals have been placed on the original table.
When the Start key is pressed, the copier's CPU sends the feed-in signal to the
DJF. On receipt of this signal, the stopper solenoid [E] activates to raise the
stopper, which allows the originals to be fed in, and to lower the press rollers [F] to
press the originals against the pick-up rollers, as shown.
The feed-in clutch [G] also activates when the DJF receives the feed-in signal. 200
ms after the feed-in clutch activates, the feed-in motor feeds all originals to the feed
roller [H].
When the originals reach the feed roller, the stopper solenoid de-activates to lower
the original stopper [I] and to lift up the press rollers [J].
A246/A247/A248
8-6
SM
SEPARATION AND FEED MECHANISM
2.2 SEPARATION AND FEED MECHANISM

[A]
[B]
[D]
[E]
[F]
A610D505.WMF
[F]
[C]
[G]
A610D504.WMF
Drive from the feed-in motor [A] is transmitted to the pick-up [B], feed [C], and pullout rollers [D], through the feed-in clutch [E], as shown. The feed roller and the
friction belts [F] are used to feed and separate the originals. Only the bottom
original is fed because the friction belt prevents any other original from feeding.
Original feed starts when the feed roller starts turning to advance the bottom
original of the stack. The feed roller moves the original past the separation belt
because the driving force of the feed roller is greater than the resistance of the
friction belt. The friction belt prevents multiple feeds because the resistance of the
friction belt is greater than the friction between original sheets. At this time, the
feed-in motor rotates slowly to ensure proper feed and separation of the original.
To prepare the next original, it is separated in the same manner as explained

above, and stopped when the leading edge is detected by the registration sensor-2
[G]. When it is time to feed this sheet to the exposure glass, the feed-in motor
rotates at high speed.
SM
8-7
A246/A247/A248
Dual Job
Feeder A610
When the leading edge of the original activates registration sensor-2 [G], the feedin clutch turns off and the motor rotates more quickly. To reduce mechanical load,
only the pull-out rollers are driven to feed the original to the exposure glass.
FRICTION BELT DRIVE MECHANISM
2.3 FRICTION BELT DRIVE MECHANISM
[B]
[A]
[D]
[C]
A610D506.WMF
The friction belts [A] are driven by the friction belt drive motor [B] through timing
belts, as shown.
When the Start key is pressed, the friction belts are not rotated (the motor is
electrically ON but the motor does not turn as the voltage is too low; see the timing
chart in section 2.10.1). As the leading edge of the original activates the
registration sensor-2, the friction belts rotate in the reverse direction to reverse out
the next original from in between the friction belts and feed rollers. This results in
less of a chance for originals to be damaged or become dirty. Also, the area of the
friction belt that contacts the feed roller or the original changes, to prevent multiple
feeding.
The friction belt turn sensor [C] counts the pulses generated by the pulse generator
disk [D] on the friction belt shaft. The sensor detects friction belt motor error
conditions.
A246/A247/A248
8-8
SM
ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION
2.4 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION
[D]
[E]
[A]
[C]
[F]
[B]
[G]
A610D507.WMF
The DJF detects original width through the on/off combination of the three original
width sensors-1 [A], -2 [B], -3 [C]. It also detects the original length with the
registration sensors-1 [D], -2 [E] and the pulse count sensor [F].
The DJF CPU counts the pulses between registration sensor-2 [E] on timing, and
registration sensor-1 [D] off timing. Based on this pulse count, the CPU determines
the original length.
(The diagram at the start of section 2.5.1 shows the position of the sensors
with respect to the rollers.)
SM
8-9
A246/A247/A248
Dual Job
Feeder A610
The reasons for using two registration sensors are:

1) Registration sensor-2 [E] is used to stop the pre-fed original, which waits
until the previous original is fed out. For precise control, the original stop
position must be after the pull-out rollers [G]. Therefore, registration sensor-2
is placed after the pull-out rollers.
2) Registration sensor-1 [D] checks the trailing edge of the original. This check
is used to place the original in the correct position on the exposure glass.
Because this is a fast feeding mechanism, some distance is required
between the sensor and the original scale. If sensor-2 was used to detect
the stop timing, there would not be enough time to stop the original at the
correct place. Therefore, registration sensor-1 is used for this; it is placed
34.9 mm before sensor-2.
ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION
Width Sensor
1
2
3
Upper: Original Size

Lower: Threshold Level for Each Size (Pulse Count)
A4S
A3
231 mm
(78)
B5S
LTS
201 mm
(68)
or
B6S
A5S
143 mm
(44)
:
:
S:
L :
B4
236 mm
(80)
11" x 15"
377 mm
(136)
B6 L
166 mm
(54)
A3
399 mm
(145)
A5 L
201 mm
(68)
231 mm
(78)
LT L
B5 L
271 mm
(95)
A4 L
294 mm
(103)
316 mm
(115)
B4
A3
387 mm
(140)
Paper Present
No Paper
Sideways
Lengthwise
A610D508.WMF
Width Sensor Position

Original Alignment
C B A
Width Sensor 1: A = 210 mm
Width Sensor 2: B = 235 mm
Width Sensor 3: C = 284 mm
A610D509.WMF
The original size is determined by the combination of the detected original width
and length as shown above. Note that when only width sensor 1 detect that paper
is preset, or if all width sensors are off, the original size is detected only by the
pulse count sensor data.
A246/A247/A248
8-10
SM
TRANSPORT MECHANISM
2.5 TRANSPORT MECHANISM

2.5.1 BASIC OPERATION
[D]
[E]
[A]
A610D511.WMF
[B]
[C]
A610D512.WMF
The transport belt [A] is driven by an independent motor called the belt drive motor
[B]. The belt drive motor starts rotating soon after the copier sends an original feedin signal. Inside the transport belt are five pressure roller shafts [C], which achieve
the proper amount of pressure between the belt and the original.
When the scanner reaches the return position, the copier's CPU sends the feed-out
and feed-in signals to the DJF CPU, and the feed-in motor is activated again to
change the original.
If the original is smaller than A4 sideways, the original just copied is transported to
the right side of the exposure glass then waits until the next original copy job is
completed. Then the previous original is delivered. This operation also reduces the
original feed-in time.
SM
8-11
A246/A247/A248
Dual Job
Feeder A610
When the leading edge of the original reaches the exposure glass, the original is
transported by the transport belt (the belt drive motor turns on 200 ms after the
start key is pressed).
When the trailing edge of the original passes through registration sensor-1 [D], the
feed-in motor turns off. When the trailing edge of the original passes through
registration sensor-2 [E], the belt drive motor gradually decreases its speed to stop
the original at the proper place on the exposure glass.100 ms after the belt drive
motor turns off, the feed-in motor turns on until the next original activates
registration sensor-2 [E], the next original waits until the first original copy job is
complete. This operation reduces the original feed in time.
TRANSPORT MECHANISM
Rear Scale
5.0 mm
Left Scale
Original
A610D513.WMF
Since the copier's original alignment position is at the left rear corner (not in the
center), the originals fed from the DJF must also be at this position. But if the
original was to be fed along the rear scale, original skews, jams or wrinkling, may
occur.
To prevent such problems, the original transfer position is set to 5.0 mm away from
the rear scale as shown. The correction for this 5.0 mm gap is compensated for by
the base copier's optics unit.
A246/A247/A248
8-12
SM
TRANSPORT MECHANISM
2.5.2 THIN/THICK ORIGINAL MODES
Fig. 1
102mm
Fig. 2
25 mm
Fig. 3
A610D514.WMF
This document feeder has two different ways of stopping originals on the exposure
glass at the correct position. They are thin original mode and thick original mode.
The user can select the desired settings to match the type of original being used.
1. Thick Original Mode
When thick original mode is selected, the belt drive motor remains energized to
carry the original approximately 10 mm past the left scale (Figures 1 and 2).
Then, the belt drive motor pauses and reverses to feed the original back
against the original scale for about 25 mm (Fig. 3). This forces the original
against the left scale and thus aligns the trailing edge of the original with the
scale.
Thick original mode is selected at the factory.
2. Thin Original Mode
To protect originals from being damaged by the movements of the transfer belt,
thin original mode can be selected. The original is stopped at the correct
position on the exposure glass based on an encoder pulse count. The belt drive
motor stops shortly after the original trailing edge passes registration sensor-2.
(Exact timing depends on registration adjustment.)
Dual Job
Feeder A610
The feed amount for both modes can be adjusted.

For more details, refer to the Replacement and Adjustment section.
SM
8-13
A246/A247/A248
ORIGINAL FEED-OUT MECHANISM
2.6 ORIGINAL FEED-OUT MECHANISM

[A]
A610D516.WMF
[B]
A610D515.WMF
When the scanner reaches the return position, the copier's CPU sends the feed-out
signal to the DJF CPU.
When the DJF receives the feed-out signal, the belt drive motor and feed-out motor
[A] turn on.
The feed-out sensor [B] installed in the feed-out section counts the number of
pulses to calculate how long the feed-out motor must stay on to feed the original
out of the machine properly. Also, the motor rotates at low speed for the last 50
mm of the detected trailing edge to improve stacking efficiency.
A246/A247/A248
8-14
SM
TRANSPORT BELT LEVELING MECHANISM
2.7 TRANSPORT BELT LEVELING MECHANISM

[B]
[C]
[D]
[A]
A610D525.WMF
[F]
[F]
[E]
[C]
A610D526.WMF
The transport belt [A] and the two support arms [B] are formed as one unit, (made
of aluminum). This results in a more flexible structure than the monocoque type (in
which the cover carries all of the stress), and the gap between the transport belt
and the original can easily be kept precise during belt transport.
Dual Job
Feeder A610
On the support arm linked with the DJF hinge [C], there is a fulcrum [D] to support
the DJF. When the DJF is being closed and the rear stopper [E] contacts the base
copier first, the DJF rotates about the fulcrum, rotates and the front stopper [F] will
also contact the base copier to level the belt with the exposure glass.
SM
8-15
A246/A247/A248
LIFT MECHANISM
2.8 LIFT MECHANISM
[A]
[E]
A610D527.PCX
A610D528.PCX
[B]
[C]
[D]
A610D529.PCX
A610D533.WMF
When the DJF is opened, the lift springs [A] provide enough force to ensure that
the DJF does not fall onto the exposure glass. When the DJF is closed, points ,
, and are positioned as shown and no upward force is provided to the DJF.
The position sensor [B] is actuated when the DJF is closed. The copier then shifts
to the document feeder mode. The position sensor also serves as the reset switch
for DJF misfeeds.
After the cover is closed, the APS start sensor [C], which is below the DF position
sensor, informs the base copier CPU that original size sensors in the main body
can check the original size for the platen mode.
When a book or thick original (maximum thickness 60 mm) is copied, the DJF acts
as a cover for the original as shown in the diagram [D]. The position sensor is
turned off during this condition, so the DJF does not function. The tension of spring
[E] returns the DJF to the normal condition after copying a thick original.
A246/A247/A248
8-16
SM
SPECIAL FEATURES
2.9 SPECIAL FEATURES

2.9.1 PRESET MODE
[C]
[E]
[B]
[D]
[F]
[A]
A610D510.WMF
Two sets of originals for independent copy jobs can be set on the original tray at
the same time.
While the first set of originals [A] remains on the original tray, both the original set
sensor feeler [B] and original feed sensor feeler [C] are lifted out of their sensors. A
second set of originals [D] can be placed in the feeder on top of the first set, as far
as the original stopper [E]. In this case, when the first set of originals are all fed-in,
the original set sensor feeler is still lifted out of the sensor, but the original feed
sensor has dropped into the sensor. Therefore, the copier's CPU recognizes that
the first job is completed.
Dual Job
Feeder A610
If the second job is already preset, the second set of originals is automatically fed
to the feed roller [F] and fed one-by-one into the machine in the same manner as
the first set of originals.
SM
8-17
A246/A247/A248
SPECIAL FEATURES
2.9.2 TWO-SIDED ORIGINAL FEED (AUTO REVERSE) MODE

[B]
[A]
[C]
[B]
A610D517.WMF
Unlike for one-sided original feed, the back side of the original must be copied first
to keep the originals and copies in the correct order.
During original feed-in, the sequence is the same as for one-sided feed; however,
the belt drive motor continues rotating until the original reaches the inverter section.
The DJF CPU also energizes the feed-out motor and the inverter solenoid [A] for a
short time to lift the inverter pawls [B].
After the inverter mechanism inverts the original (10 pulses after the feed-out
sensor [C] activates), the belt drive motor reverses and the original is fed towards
the original scale. It is stopped at the correct position on the exposure glass, and
the DJF CPU sends the copy start signal.
When the scanner reaches the return position, the copier's CPU sends the invert
original signal to the DJF CPU in order to make a copy of the front side. The
original is inverted in the same way as for the back side, as explained above.
A246/A247/A248
8-18
SM
SPECIAL FEATURES
2.9.3 COMBINE TWO ORIGINALS MODE

Overview
Fig. 1
A610D518.PCX
Fig. 2
A610D519.PCX
Two originals are fed onto the exposure glass at once in the combine two originals
mode as shown in figure 1. This allows copying two originals onto one sheet of
paper automatically either in the full size mode or in reduction mode.
If an odd number of originals is placed on the original table, the first original is
placed on the exposure glass as shown in figure 2.
Dual Job
Feeder A610
In this mode, only one-sided originals can be used, and Auto Paper Select (APS)
and Auto Reduce/Enlarge modes cannot be used.
SM
8-19
A246/A247/A248
SPECIAL FEATURES
Operation
Figure 1
A610D520.WMF
Figure 2
A610D521.WMF
Figure 3
A610D522.WMF
The DF operates in the combine two originals mode as follows:

Figure 1
The first original is fed in the same manner as in one-sided original mode. When
registration sensor-2 detects the trailing edge of the first original, the feed-in and
the belt drive motors stop once and the feed-in clutch turns on again to prepare
to feed in the second original.
Figure 2
As soon as the feed-in and the belt drive motor turn off, the belt drive motor
starts rotating in reverse to align the first original against the original scale. Then
the belt drive motor turns off.
Figure 3
50 ms after the feed-in motor turns off, the feed-in motor turns on again at a
lower speed (372 mm/) to feed the second original. A few pulses (0 ~ 14 pulses:
depending on the settings of DIP switches 102-1 to 4) after the registration
sensor-2 is activated by the leading edge of the second original, the feed-in
motor and the feed-in clutch turn off.
A246/A247/A248
8-20
SM
SPECIAL FEATURES
Figure 4
Figure 5
A610D523.WMF
A610D524.WMF
Figure 4
Soon after the feed-in motor turns off, both the feed-in and the belt drive motors
turn on again at the lower speed (372 mm/s).
After registration sensor-2 detects the trailing edge of the second original, the
feed-in and the belt drive motors turn off and gradually the belt drive speed
reduces to stop the original at the proper place on the exposure glass.
Dual Job
Feeder A610
Figure 5
After these originals have been copied, the belt drive motor and the feed-out
motor turn on to feed out the originals. 50 mm before the trailing edge of the first
original de-activates the feed-out sensor, both the belt drive and the feed-out
motor rotate at the lower speed to improve original stacking.
48 pulses later, the belt drive motor turns off and 60 pulses after the feed-out
sensor detects the trailing edge of the second original, the feed-out motor turns
off.
SM
8-21
A246/A247/A248
TIMING CHARTS WITH ORIGINAL MISFEED DETECTION
2.10 TIMING CHARTS WITH ORIGINAL MISFEED

DETECTION
2.10.1 A4 SIDEWAYS: ONE-SIDED, TWO ORIGINALS
A610D530.WMF
A246/A247/A248
8-22
SM
2.10.2 COMBINE TWO ORIGINALS MODE
Dual Job
Feeder A610
A610D531.WMF
SM
8-23
A246/A247/A248
2.10.3 A4 SIDEWAYS: TWO-SIDED, TWO ORIGINALS
A610D532.WMF
A246/A247/A248
8-24
SM
SERVICE TABLES
3. SP MODE
3.1 SERVICE TABLES
3.1.1 DIP SWITCHES AND SWITCH
0:OFF 1: ON : Push
Motor Test
(Speed Adj.)
Friction Belt
Free Run
MC, SOL
Tests
Original
Feed Tests
SM
DPS101
1 2 3 4
DPS102
SW
1 2 3 4 101
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
8-25
Function
Feed-in motor (M2) activates
(High Speed)
Feed-in motor (M2) activates
(Low Speed)
Belt drive motor (M3) activates
Feed-out motor (M4) activates
(High Speed)
Feed-out motor (M4) activates
(Low Speed)
Friction belt motor (M1) activates
(Reverse)
Friction belt motor (M1) activates
(Forward)
Push SW101 to feed the page in.
Push it again to feed the sheet out.
Stopper solenoid (SOL2) activates
Not used
Feed-in clutch (CL1) activates
Inverter solenoid (SOL1) activates
Feeds the original in and out
(thick/one-sided)
(thin/one-sided)
(thick/two-sided)
(thin/two-sided)
(low speed/thick/one-sided)
(low speed/thin/one-sided)
(low speed/thick/two-sided)
(low speed/thin/two-sided)
(pasted original mode)
(combine original mode)
A246/A247/A248
Dual Job
Feeder A610
Modes
SERVICE TABLES
Modes
Free Run
Mode
LED
Standard
Operation
DPS101
1 2 3 4
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
DPS102
2 3
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
1 0
1 0
0 1
0 1
0 1
0 1
1 1
0 0
0 0
0
4
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
SW
101
Function
Thick/one-sided original mode

Thin/one-sided original mode
Thick/two-sided original mode
Thin/two-sided original mode
Thick/mixed size original mode
Thin/mixed size original mode
Low speed/thick/one-sided
Low speed/thin/one-sided
Low speed/thick/two-sided
Low speed/thick/two-sided
Combine two originals mode
Turns on the indicator lamp (L1)
Standard setting for A172/A199
Standard setting for
A175/A176/A177/A191/A192/
A246/A247/A248
3.1.2 VARIABLE RESISTORS

VR No.
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
FUNCTION
Adjusts the registration in one-sided original mode
Adjusts the registration in two-sided original mode
Adjusts the feed-in motor (M2) speed (high speed)
Adjusts the feed-in motor (M2) speed (low speed)
Adjusts the belt drive motor (M3) speed
Adjusts the feed-out motor (M4) speed (low speed)
Adjusts the feed-out motor (M4) speed (high speed)
3.1.3 LEDs
These LEDs monitor motor speed. Use in conjunction with VRs 103 - 107.
LED 101
ON
ON
OFF
LED 102
ON
OFF
ON
FUNCTION
Correct speed, if they stay on for more than 10 s
The motor is too fast
The motor is too slow
3.1.4 FUSE
Fuse No.
101
FUNCTION
Protects all voltage lines (5 V, 12 V, 24 V)
A246/A247/A248
8-26
SM
UPPER COVER REMOVAL
4. REPLACEMENTS AND ADJUSTMENTS

4.1 UPPER COVER REMOVAL
[D]
[C]
[A]
[E]
[B]
[F]
A610R500.WMF
A610R501.WMF
1. Turn off the main switch and open the feed-in cover [A].
2. Remove the stopper screw [B].
3. Remove the 2 screws securing the table bracket [C].
5. Remove the small cover [E] at the rear side of the upper DJF cover (1 screw).
6. Remove the upper cover [F] (6 screws).
SM
8-27
A246/A247/A248
Dual Job
Feeder A610
4. Remove the original table [D] (3 screws).

NOTE: Do not loosen the 2 screws securing the original table to the table
bracket.
TRANSPORT BELT REPLACEMENT
4.2 TRANSPORT BELT REPLACEMENT

[A]
[B]
[C]
A610R502.WMF
[D]
A610R503.WMF
NOTE: Never use alcohol to clean the transport belt. The coating will be damaged.
1. Turn off the main switch and lift up the DJF.
2. Remove the front cover [A] (3 screws).
3. Remove the 4 screws securing the transport belt guide assembly [B].
4. Fold the stay [C] as shown.
5. Remove the transport belt [D].
A246/A247/A248
8-28
SM
TRANSPORT BELT REPLACEMENT
[A]
[B]
[C]
A610R504.WMF
A610R505.WMF
6. Install the new belt on the belt guide assembly [A].

NOTE: When installing the new belt, set the belt between the belt guides [B].
7. While opening the original guide [C], carefully install the belt guide assembly on
the DJF (4 screws), making sure that the mylars on the feed-in unit side are not
damaged.
Dual Job
Feeder A610
8. Reinstall the machine and check the machine operation.
SM
8-29
A246/A247/A248
FEED ROLLER REPLACEMENT
4.3 FEED ROLLER REPLACEMENT
[B]
[C]
[A]
A610R506.WMF
1. Turn off the main switch and open the feed cover [A].
2. Remove the snap ring [B].
3. Push the feed roller shaft to the front, then remove the roller assembly [C] as
shown.
4. Remove the 4 snap rings, then replace the feed rollers.
NOTE: When reinstalling the feed rollers, be sure that the one-way bearing (silver
color) is located at the front side (the roller must rotate only counterclockwise when the shaft is fixed).
Do not touch the rollers with bare hands.
A246/A247/A248
8-30
SM
FRICTION BELT REPLACEMENT
4.4 FRICTION BELT REPLACEMENT
[A]
[D]
[C]
[B]
A610R507.WMF
A610R508.WMF
1. Turn off the main switch and open the feed cover.
2. Remove the shaft receiving bracket [A] (1 screw).
3. Gently pull up the friction belt assembly [B] and remove it from the drive shaft
[C].
4. Replace the friction belts [D].
Dual Job
Feeder A610
NOTE: Use alcohol to clean the friction belts.

Do not touch the belts with bare hands.
SM
8-31
A246/A247/A248
SENSORS REPLACEMENT
4.5 SENSORS REPLACEMENT

4.5.1 ORIGINAL SET/FEED, REGISTRATION-1/-2, AND ORIGINAL
WIDTH-1/-2/-3 SENSOR REPLACEMENT
[B]
[C]
[A]
[D]
[F]
A610R509.WMF
[E]
A610R510.WMF
1. Turn off the main switch and open the feed cover [A].
2. Remove the stopper screw [B] and open the original stopper [C].
3. Remove the original table [D] (5 screws).
4. Remember the location of the original guide [E] against the guide plate [F] as
shown. This is to keep the same original side-to-side registration after reinstallation.
5. Remove the original guide (3 screws).
6. Replace the required sensor.
7. After this replacement, adjust the side-to side original registration if necessary.
A246/A247/A248
8-32
SM
FEED-OUT UNIT REMOVAL
4.6 FEED-OUT UNIT REMOVAL

[C]
[B]
[A]
[D]
[E]
A610R527.WMF
1. Turn off the main switch and remove the upper cover. (Refer to Upper Cover
Removal, section 4.1.)
2. Disconnect the 4P and 2P connectors [A] of the feed-out motor [B].
3. Disconnect all the connectors and remove the DJF main board [C].
4. Disconnect the APS start/DJF position sensor connector [D].
Dual Job
Feeder A610
5. Remove the feed-out unit [E] (4 screws and 1 grounding screw).
SM
8-33
A246/A247/A248
FEED-OUT MOTOR REPLACEMENT
4.7 FEED-OUT MOTOR REPLACEMENT
[B]
[A]
[F]
[D]
[E]
[C]
[G]
A610R528.WMF
1. Remove the feed-out unit. (Refer to Feed-out Unit Removal, section 4.6.)
2. Remove the spring [A].
3. Remove the bracket [B] with the feed-out motor from the feed-out unit (3
screws).
NOTE: When reinstalling the bracket, be sure to set the arm [C] on the plunger
pin [D].
4. Remove the pulley [E] (1 Allen screw [F]).
5. Remove the feed-out motor [G] (4 screws).
A246/A247/A248
8-34
SM
INVERTER SOLENOID REMOVAL AND ADJUSTMENT
4.8 INVERTER SOLENOID REMOVAL AND ADJUSTMENT

[B]
OFF
ON
[E]
[C]
[F]
[A]
[D]
A610R511.WMF
ON
OFF
A610R512.WMF
1. Remove the feed-out unit. (Refer to Feed-out Unit Removal, section 4.6.)
Dual Job
Feeder A610
2. Remove the inverter solenoid [A] (2 screws).

NOTE: When installing the inverter solenoid, check the following:
1) The arm [B] must be set on the plunger pin [C].
2) The inverter solenoid connector harness [D] should be facing the
outside of the unit as shown.
3) Manually push the plunger and check that it works smoothly.
4) When the inverter solenoid does not activate (OFF), the inverter
guide [E] must be inside the outer inverter guide [F], and when the
inverter solenoid activates (ON), the inverter guide must be outside
the outer inverter guide, as shown.
SM
8-35
A246/A247/A248
FEED-OUT SENSOR REPLACEMENT
4.9 FEED-OUT SENSOR REPLACEMENT
[A]
[B]
A610R513.WMF
1. Turn off the main switch and remove the feed-out unit. (Refer to Feed-out Unit
2. Remove the right cover [A] (1 screw).
3. Replace the feed-out sensor [B] (1 screw and 1 connector).
A246/A247/A248
8-36
SM
INVERTER ROLLER REPLACEMENT
4.10 INVERTER ROLLER REPLACEMENT
[B]
[A]
[C]
[E]
[D]
A610R514.WMF
1. Turn off the main switch and remove the feed-out unit. (Refer to Feed-out Unit
2. Remove the feed-out motor [A]. (Refer to Feed-out Motor Removal.)
3. Remove the exit guide [B] (3 screws).
4. Remove the inverter roller [C] with the inverter guide [D] (2 E-rings, 1 pulley, 1
pin [E], and 2 bushings).
Dual Job
Feeder A610
5. Replace the inverter roller.
SM
8-37
A246/A247/A248
DF POSITION/APS START SENSOR REPLACEMENT
4.11 DF POSITION/APS START SENSOR REPLACEMENT
[B]
[A]
[C]
[D]
A610R515.WMF
1. Turn off the main switch and lift up the DF.

2. Remove the sensor bracket [A] (1 screw).
3. Remove the harness clamp [B] and replace the DF position sensor [C] or the
APS start sensor [D] (1 connector each).
A246/A247/A248
8-38
SM
BELT DRIVE MOTOR REPLACEMENT
4.12 BELT DRIVE MOTOR REPLACEMENT

[A]
[G]
[I]
[D]
[H]
[B]
[E]
[C]
[F]
A610R516.WMF
[E]
A610R517.WMF
2. Disconnect the 2 connectors [A] of the belt drive motor [B].
3. Disconnect the connector [C] of the indicator panel [D] as shown.
4. Remove the tension spring [E] and loosen the tension bracket [F] as shown.
5. Remove the belt drive motor bracket [G] (3 screws), making sure not to
damage the 2 timing belts [H].
Dual Job
Feeder A610
6. Remove the drive pulley [I] (1 Allen screw) then replace the belt drive motor (4
screws).
SM
8-39
A246/A247/A248
FEED-IN UNIT REMOVAL
4.13 FEED-IN UNIT REMOVAL
[B]
[A]
[G]
[F]
A610R518.WMF
[C]
[D]
[E]
A610R519.WMF
2. Remove the screw [A], then remove the feed cover [B].
3. Disconnect the 2 connectors [C] of the feed-in motor [D].
4. Disconnect the connector [E] of the friction belt motor [F].
5. Disconnect CN104, 105, 108, 109, 110, and 111 on the DJF main board.
6. Disconnect the connector of the indicator panel as well.
7. Remove the feed-in unit [G] (5 screws).
A246/A247/A248
8-40
SM
FEED-IN MOTOR REPLACEMENT
4.14 FEED-IN MOTOR REPLACEMENT
[B]
[C]
[A]
A610R520.WMF
2. Remove the feed-in motor bracket [A] (3 screws), making sure not to damage
the timing belt.
Dual Job
Feeder A610
3. Remove the drive pulley [B] (1 Allen screw), then replace the feed-in motor [C]
(4 screws).
SM
8-41
A246/A247/A248
FRICTION BELT MOTOR REPLACEMENT
4.15 FRICTION BELT MOTOR REPLACEMENT
[A]
[B]
A610R521.WMF
2. Remove the friction belt motor bracket [A] (2 screws), making sure not to
damage the timing belt.
3. Replace the friction belt motor [B] (4 screws).
A246/A247/A248
8-42
SM
FEED-IN CLUTCH REPLACEMENT
4.16 FEED-IN CLUTCH REPLACEMENT
[B]
[A]
[C]
A610R522.WMF
2. Remove the friction belt motor. (Refer to Friction Belt Motor Replacement,
section 4.15.)
3. Replace the feed-in clutch [A] (2 Allen screws).
Dual Job
Feeder A610
NOTE: When reinstalling, make sure of the following.

1) The clutch stopper groove must engage the clutch stopper.
2) The end of the clutch stopper [C] must be flush with the head of the
shaft.
SM
8-43
A246/A247/A248
STOPPER SOLENOID REPLACEMENT
4.17 STOPPER SOLENOID REPLACEMENT

[B]
[A]
[C]
[D]
[E]
A610R523.WMF
[D]
[E]
A610R533.WMF
2. Disconnect the connector [A] of the stopper solenoid.
3. Open the feed-in cover and the original stopper.
4. Remove the bracket [B] with the stopper solenoid (2 screws and 1 E-ring.)
5. Remove the stopper solenoid [C] (2 screws).
NOTE: When installing the stopper solenoid, pay attention to the following points:
1) The spring [D] must be correctly hooked onto the stopper [E], as shown.
2) Manually pull the stopper solenoid plunger to confirm that the press
rollers firmly contact the pick-up rollers. When the pick-up rollers are
manually rotated, the press rollers also rotate. If not, adjust the stopper
solenoid position.
A246/A247/A248
8-44
SM
VERTICAL REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT
4.18 VERTICAL REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT

4.18.1 ONE-SIDED THIN ORIGINAL MODE
Perform this adjustment for machines having problems using the Thick Original
Mode as well.
The original stopping position in thick original mode depends on the setting of this
adjustment. (For details, refer to Detailed Descriptions.)
NOTE: 1) After replacing the DJF main board, always perform the adjustment
using VR101 on the DJF main board.
2) At other times, adjust with either the base copier SP mode or VR101.
Both procedures will move the original stopping position.
3) After finishing the adjustment, be sure to turn off the dip switches.
[C]
[E]
[A]
[D]
[B]
0 ~ 2 mm
A610R524.WMF
A610R525.WMF
Using VR101
1. Remove the small cover at the rear of the DJF upper cover (1 screw).
2. Turn on dip switch 101-2 and -4 [A].
3. Turn on dip switch 102-4 [B].
4. Place a sheet of A4/81/2" x 11" sideways paper [C] (64 g/m2, 17 lb) on the
original table.
5. Press switch 101 [D]. (Paper will be fed to the exposure glass.)
6. Raise the DJF carefully so that the original does not move.
8. If the gap is not within this specification, adjust registration with VR101.
(Looking from the front, turning VR101 counter-clockwise will decrease the
gap.)
9. Return the user settings to their defaults, if you have changed any.
SM
8-45
A246/A247/A248
Dual Job
Feeder A610
7. Check that the gap between the trailing edge of paper and the left original scale
[E] is 0 2.0 mm.
Using the Copier SP Mode

NOTE: 1) When performing this adjustment, always make test copies with the
Copy In SP mode. If you do not, the adjustment will not be performed
properly.
2) Make sure that the DJF dip switches are returned to the standard setting
of the base copier, if you have performed the adjustments using the DJF
main board.
3) Make sure that the Thin Mode is selected with the customer settings of
the base copier.
1. Turn the copier main switch off and on to initialize the machine.
2. Enter SP1-5-1 (DF Registration Adj. (1st, Thin))
3. Place a sheet of A4/81/2" x 11" sideways paper (64 g/m2, 17 lb) on the original
table, and press the Copy In SP key.
4. After the original stops on the exposure glass, raise the DJF carefully so that
the original does not move.
5. Check that the gap between the trailing edge of paper and the left original scale
is 0 2.0 mm.
6. If the gap is not within this specification, adjust registration by pressing the +
and keys of the thin mode inside the SP mode. The original paper stopping
position will change accordingly. (If you press , the gap will decrease.)
7. Return the user settings to their defaults, if you have changed any.
A246/A247/A248
8-46
SM
4.18.2 TWO-SIDED ORIGINAL MODE

[D]
[A]
[B]
[F]
[E]
[C]
A610R524.WMF
A610R530.PCX
0 ~ 5 mm
A610R529.WMF
NOTE: 1) After replacing the DJF main board, always perform the adjustment
using VR102 on the DJF main board.
2) At other times, adjust with either the base copier SP mode or VR102.
Both procedures will move the original stopping position.
3) After finishing the adjustment, be sure to turn off the dip switches.
Using VR102
1. Remove the copier's left original scale [A] (2 screws).
2. Remove the small cover at the rear of the DJF upper cover (1 screw).
3. Turn on dip switch 101-2 and -4 [B].
4. Turn on dip switch 102-1 and -4 [C].
5. Place a sheet of A4/81/2" x 11" sideways paper [D] (64 g/m2, 17 lb) on the
original table.
6. Press switch 101 [E]. (Paper will be fed to the exposure glass.)
8. Check that the distance between the trailing edge of the paper and the left
edge of the rear original scale [F] is between 0 ~ 5 mm.
9. If the distance is not within this specification, adjust the registration with VR102.
(Looking from the front, turning VR102 counter-clockwise will feed the paper
more towards the left.)
SM
8-47
A246/A247/A248
Dual Job
Feeder A610
7. Raise the DJF carefully so that the original does not move.
Using the Copier SP Mode

NOTE: 1) When performing this adjustment, always make test copies using the
Copy In SP mode. If you do not, the adjustment will not be performed
properly.
2) Make sure that the DJF dip switches are returned to the standard setting
of the base copier, if you have performed the adjustments using the DJF
main board.
1. Remove the copiers left original scale (2 screws).
2. Turn off and on the copier main switch to initialize the machine.
3. Enter SP1-5-2 (DF 2nd side Registration Adj.)
4. Place a sheet of A4/81/2" x 11" sideways paper (64 g/m2, 17 lb) on the original
table, and press the Copy In SP key.
Select the two-sided original mode to invert the original paper.
5. After the original stops on the exposure glass, raise the DJF carefully so that
6. Check that the distance between the trailing edge of the paper and the left
edge of the rear original scale is between 15 ~ 20 mm.
7. If the distance is not within this specification, adjust the registration by pressing
the + and keys of the two-sided mode inside the SP mode. The original
paper stopping position will change accordingly. (If you press , the original
will be fed more towards the left.)
A246/A247/A248
8-48
SM
SIDE-TO-SIDE REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT
4.19 SIDE-TO-SIDE REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT
5 2 mm
[C]
[A]
[E]
[D]
A610R531.WMF
[F]
A610R532.WMF
1. Place a sheet of A4/81/2" x 11" sideways paper [A] (64 g/m2, 17 lb) on the
original table and press the Start key.
2. Check the side-to-side registration comparing the original paper and the copied
paper.
4. If it is still out of specification, leave SP mode and perform the following original
table positioning adjustment:
1) Place a sheet of A4/81/2" x 11" sideways paper [A] (64 g/m2, 17 lb) on the
original table and press the Start key.
2) After the original stops on the exposure glass, gently raise the DJF so that
3) Check if the gap between the rear edge of the paper and the original rear
scale is 5 2 mm.
4) It the gap is not within specification, remove the stopper screw [C], loosen
the 8 screws securing the original table [D] and the original guide [E] and
shift the original table and the original guide position accordingly.
NOTE: Before putting an original on the original table again, open and close the
feed unit cover [F].
SM
8-49
A246/A247/A248
Dual Job
Feeder A610
3. If the side-to-side registration is not within 0 2 mm, enter the SP mode and
perform the following steps:
1) Open the DJF Side To Side Registration Adjustment page.
2) Change the setting with the + and keys to meet the above specification.
(The original stopping position will not change.)
Note that the direction of the image shift will differ for each base copier.
ADJUSTIN PLATE REMOVAL
4.20 ADJUSTING PLATE REMOVAL

4.20.1 PREVENTING THE REAR SIDE OF ORIGINALS FROM
BECOMING DIRTY
[A]
A610R534.WMF
NOTE: Perform the following adjustment only when needed (if the friction belt
needs to be changed but there is no spare friction belt available). However,
after this adjustment, thick originals are likely to be misfed, so it is best to
avoid this adjustment if the customer says that thick originals will be used.
1. Remove the friction belt assembly. (Refer to Friction Belt Replacement.)
2. Remove the adjusting plate [A] and re-install it as shown (the belt folds about 1
degree) or remove the adjusting plate (the belt folds about 2 degrees).
A246/A247/A248
8-50
SM
SORTER STAPLER A821
SPECIFICATIONS
Sorter Stapler
A821
1. OVERALL MAHCINE INFORMATION

1.1 SPECIFICATIONS
Configuration:
Console
Number of Bins:
20 + Proof Tray
Paper for Proof Tray:

Size:

Minimum: A6 lengthwise, 51/2" x 81/2"
Weight:
52 ~ 200 g/m2, 14 ~ 53 lb.
Capacity:
250 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb.)
Paper for Bins:
See the table below.
Sort
Maximum paper A3, 11" x 17"
size
Minimum paper Sideways:
A4, 81/2" x 11"
size
Lengthwise:
A5, 51/2" x 81/2"
Stack
A3, 11" x 17"
Staple
A3, 11" x 17"
Punch
A3, 11" x 17"
Sideways:
A4, 81/2" x 11"
Lengthwise:
A5, 51/2" x 81/2"
B5, 81/2" x 11"
Maximum paper 200 g/m2, 53 lb.

weight
200 g/m2, 53 lb.
163 g/m2, 43 lb.
Minimum paper 52 g/m2, 14 lb.

weight
Maximum
All sizes:
50 sheets/bin
capacity
2 sided copies:
40 sheets/bin
52 g/m2, 14 lb.
52 g/m2, 14 lb.
A5 (2 holes)
B5 sideways
81/2" x 11"
sideways (3
holes)
128 g/m2, 34 lb.
(2 holes)
104 g/m2, 28 lb.
(3 holes)
52 g/m2, 14 lb.
All sizes:
50 sheets/bin
2 sided copies:
40 sheets/bin
All sizes
50 sheets/bin
2 sided copies:
40 sheets/bin
All sizes:
40 sheets/bin
2 sided copies:
35 sheets/bin
SM
9-1
A246/A247/A248
SPECIFICATIONS
Staple Position:
a
c
d
e
a = 6 3 mm
b = 6 3 mm
c = 6 3 mm
d = 66 3 mm
A821V500.WMF
e = 132 2 mm
f = 6 3 mm
g = 116.5 2 mm
g
= 45 5
f
g
A821V501.WMF
Staple Replenishment:
Cartridge refill (5,000 pieces/cartridge)
Power Source:
DC24 V (from copier)
Power Consumption:
Average:
less than 60 W (without punch)
less than 70 W (with punch)
Maximum:
in sort/stack mode:
less than 60 W (without punch)
less than 70 W (with punch)
in staple mode:
less than 45 W
A246/A247/A248
9-2
SM
566 x 583 x 990
Weight:
Approximately 50 kg
Punch Position:
Sorter Stapler
A821
SPECIFICATIONS
a
2 Holes (European version)
a = 12 3 mm
b = 40 3 mm
c = 80 1 mm
d
3 Holes (U.S.A. version)
b
c
a = 9.5 (3/8") 3 mm
c = 216 (81/2") 1 mm
d = 108 (41/4") 1 mm
d = 3 mm
Punch Hole Size
2 Holes: = 6.5 0.5 mm
3 Holes: = 8.0 0.5 mm
A821V502.WMF
SM
9-3
A246/A247/A248
COMPONENT LAYOUT

2
1
3
15
14
5
6
13
8
12
9
10
11
A821V503.WMF
1. Proof Tray
9. Staple Unit
2. Proof Exit Rollers
10. Grip Assembly
3. Proof Transport Rollers
11. Helical Wheels
4. Upper Entrance Guide
12. Jogger Plate
5. Turn Gate
13. Bins
6. Lower Entrance Guide
14. Upper Guide Plate
7. Sorter Transport Rollers
15. Punch Unit (Punch version only)
8. Sorter Exit Rollers
A246/A247/A248
9-4
SM
COMPONENT LAYOUT
Sorter Stapler
A821
1.2.2 DRIVE LAYOUT

4
2
1
16
15
14
6
7
8
13
9
12
11
10
A821V504.WMF
1. Main Motor
9. Bin Drive Motor
2. Main Drive Belt
10. Wheel Drive Belts
3. Proof Drive Belt
11. Jogger Motor
4. Sorter Drive Belt
12. Staple Unit Drive Motor
5. Helical Wheels
13. Jogger Drive Belts
6. Staple Unit Drive Belt
14. Bin Rear Plate Drive Motor
7. Gripper Motor
15. Sorter Exit Drive Belt
8. Grip Drive Belt
16. Sorter Exit Motor
SM
9-5
A246/A247/A248

Symbol
Motors
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
M7
M8
M9
M10
Name
Transport
Exit
Bin
Jogger
Function
Index No.
Drives the paper transport rollers.

Delivers the Paper into the bin.
Drives the bins up and down.
Drives the jogger plate to jog the copies
against the front side plate.
Drives the bin rear plate up and down.
Grips the paper.
Drives the grip unit forward and backward
into the bin.
Feeds the staples and drive the stapler
hammer.
Drives the stapler unit according to the
staple position and angle.
Drives the punch shaft and roller.
32
26
19
Cuts the dc power when front door is open.

Detects installation of the staple cartridge.
Detects the staple end.
6
8
9
Turn Gate
Opens and closes the turn gate to direct the

copies into either the proof tray or bins.
Entrance
Bin Jam
Detects the paper miss-feeds.

Detects the miss-feeds and detects if there
is the paper in the bin.
Detects the paper miss-feeds.
Detects if the bins are in the home position.
Detects the bin position.
Detects if the jogger plate is in the home
position.
Detects if the grip is in the home position.
Detects if the grip unit is in the home
position.
Detects if the bin rear plate is in the closed
position.
Detects if the bin rear plate is in the open
position.
Detects if the stapler hammer is in the home
position.
Bin Rear Plate

Grip
Grip Shift
Stapler
Stapler Unit
Punch
Switches
SW1
Door Safety
SW2
Cartridge Set
SW3
Staple End
22
27
15
17
11
24
31
Solenoids
SOL1
Sensors
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
S9
S10
S11
Proof Exit
Bin HP
Wheel Sensor
Jogger HP
Grip HP
Grip Shift Motor
HP
Bin Rear Plate
Close
Bin Rear Plate
Open
Stapler HP
A246/A247/A248
9-6
5
21
4
23
20
25
16
14
28
29
10
SM
Symbol
S12
S13
S14
S15
S16
PCBs
PCB1
PCB2
PCB3
SM
Name
Stapler Unit HP
Paper
Stapler Unit
Pull-out Position
Punch HP
Punch waste
Overflow
Main
Bin Jam Sensor
LED
Punch Control
Function
Detects if the stapler unit is in the home
position.
Detects whether copies are under hammer.
Detects if the stapler unit is in the pullout
position.
Detects if the punch is in the home position.
Detects punch waste overflow and detects
whether the waste hopper is set or not.
Index No.
18
13
12
33
7
Controls all sorter stapler functions.

Provides the light to the bin jam sensor.
30
Controls the punch function.
9-7
A246/A247/A248
Sorter Stapler
A821
BASIC OPERATION
2.1 BASIC OPERATION
2.1.1 NORMAL (PROOF MODE) AND SORT/STACK MODE
[D]
[C]
[A]
[B]
A821D500.WMF
Copies exiting the copier pass through the entrance guide plates [A] to the turn
gate section. The turn gate [B] will send copies either to the proof tray or to the
bins, depending on the mode.
Normal (Proof) Mode - (From the Turn Gate Section to the Proof Tray)
The turn gate solenoid energizes to turn the turn gate clockwise after pressing the
Start key. The main motor turns counter-clockwise to rotate the vertical transport
rollers [C] and proof exit roller [D]. The turn gate directs copies through the proof
transport section to the proof tray.
A246/A247/A248
9-8
SM
BASIC OPERATION
Sorter Stapler
A821
Sort Mode (From the Turn Gate Section to the Bins)
[A]
[F]
[E]
[D]
[B]
[H]
[C]
[I]
[G]
A821D501.WMF
In this mode, the turn gate solenoid remains off to maintain the turn gate [A] in the
upper position. The main motor turns clockwise to rotate the sorter transport rollers
[B] and the exit motor rotates the exit rollers [C].
The turn gate directs copies to the sorter bins through the sorter transport section,
delivering the first copy between the top bin [D] and the upper guide plate [E]. The
jogger plate [F] then jogs to square the copies each time. Before the next copy
reaches the sorter exit roller, the bin drive motor [G] rotates and advances the bin
one step (the helical wheels [H] rotate once). When the cut out of the actuator
reaches below the wheel sensor [I], the bin drive motor turns off.
The bin advances with each delivered copy.
SM
9-9
A246/A247/A248
BASIC OPERATION
Stack Mode (From the Turn Gate Section to the Bins)
[A]
[F]
[E]
[D]
[B]
[H]
[C]
[I]
[G]
A821D502.WMF
As with sort mode, the turn gate solenoid stays off and the turn gate [A] stays up
after pressing the start key. The main motor turns clockwise to rotate the sorter
transport rollers [B] and the exit motor rotates the exit rollers [C].
The turn gate directs copies to the sorter bins through the sorter transport section,
delivering the copies between the top bin [D] and the upper guide plate [E]. The
jogger plate [F] then jogs back and forth to square the copies each time.
All copies from the copy run then feed into the first bin. When the final copy is
delivered, the wheel drive motor [G] turns and advances the bin one step (the
helical wheels [H] rotate once). When the cut out of the actuator reaches below the
wheel sensor [I], the bin drive motor turns off.
A246/A247/A248
9-10
SM
BASIC OPERATION
Sorter Stapler
A821
2.1.2 STAPLE MODE
[A]
A821D503.PCX
[B]
A821D504.PCX
After jogging the final set of copies, the staple unit staples the stacked copies as
follows: The grip arms move inside the front side plate and catch the paper. The
rear bin plate [A] is turned so it is flat with the sorter bin. The grip assembly brings
the copies down underneath the stapler [B]. The staple unit changes the position
(the position varies depending on the copy size and staple mode) and the stapler
staples the copies.
SM
9-11
A246/A247/A248
BASIC OPERATION
[A]
A821D505.PCX
The grip assembly brings the stapled copies back to the bin and the bin rear plate
[A] returns to the original position.
The grip assembly releases the copies and return to outside the front side plate so
as not to disturb the bin movement.
The bin advances one step.
After stapling the final set of copies, the staple unit returns to the home position.
There are two staple modes:
1) Automatic stapling:
In ADF mode, when the staple mode is selected before pressing the start
key, copies will be delivered to each bin and stapled automatically.
2) Manual stapling:
In sort mode, after sorting the copies in the bins, the stapling mechanism will
staple them after the user presses the manual staple key and selects the
staple position. In stack mode, manual stapling is impossible.
A246/A247/A248
9-12
SM
TURN GATE SECTION

Sorter Stapler
A821
2.2 TURN GATE SECTION
[I]
[A]
[D]
[G]
[C]
[H]
[B]
A821D506.WMF
[C]
[E]
[F]
A821D507.WMF
The turn gate [A] sends copies to the proof tray or the sorter bins depending on the
mode. In proof mode, the turn gate solenoid [B] turns on and the main motor [C]
turns clockwise after pressing the start key.
The turn gate [A] directs copies upward through the proof transport section to the
proof tray. In this mode, both the proof drive belt [D] and sorter drive belt [E]
transmit the main motor drive. However, the one-way clutches in the drive gears [F]
for each sorter transport roller do not transmit the drive to the sorter transport
rollers.
In the sort, stack and staple modes, the turn gate solenoid stays off to direct copies
downward to the sorter transport section. After the user presses the start key, the
main motor [C] turns counter-clockwise. In this mode, the one-way clutch in the
pulley [G] prevents the main motor drive from transmitting to the proof drive belt
[D].
The entrance [H] and the proof exit [I] sensors monitor the paper jam.
SM
9-13
A246/A247/A248
BIN DRIVE MECHANISM
2.3 BIN DRIVE MECHANISM
[E]
[E]
[D]
15
30
[G]
45
[A]
[F]
40
40
[B]
A821D508.WMF
15
15
[C]
A821D509.WMF
The bin drive mechanism moves the bins up and down to receive copies. The main
components in this mechanism are the bin drive motor [A], the two helical wheels
[B], the wheel sensor [C], and the bins [D] themselves. There are four pins on each
bin. Two of them fit in the slot on the helical wheels. Other two pins fit into the slots
[E] of the side frames. The pins slide up and down in these slots.
Two timing belts transmit the drive from the bin drive motor to the two helical
wheels. When it rotates clockwise, the bins lift (black arrow) and when it rotates
counter-clockwise, the bins lower (white arrow). There is a wheel sensor actuator
on the front helical wheel; the actuator has a slot, which detects when the helical
wheel has rotated 360 degrees.
When the bins advance, the helical wheels rotate once (360 degrees) for each
step.
The spiral pitch on the helical wheel is greater when bins are at the staple and
paper exit area than elsewhere. Consequently, the amount of bin shift is greater
when bins are at the staple and paper exit area. This leaves enough space to
staple [F] and stack paper [G] and reduces the total machine height.
A246/A247/A248
9-14
SM
BIN HOME POSITION

Sorter Stapler
A821
2.4 BIN HOME POSITION
[A]
[E]
A821D510.WMF
[B]
[D]
[C]
A821D511.WMF
The bin HP sensor [A] and the wheel sensor [B] ensure that the sorter exit roller is
between the upper guide plate [C] and the 1st bin [D] when all the bins are in their
home position.
After turning on the main switch, the bin lift motor [E] lowers the bins (turns
counter-clockwise) until the bottom bin actuates the bin HP sensor. Then, the bin
lift motor raises the bins (turns clockwise) until the wheel sensor activates.
Consequently, the bins are in the home position.
SM
9-15
A246/A247/A248
JOGGER SECTION
2.5 JOGGER SECTION
ON
[B]
Copier Main
Motor
[A]
Jam Sensor
300 ms
A821D512.WMF
Jogger Motor
A821D513.WMF
After pressing the start key in the sort, staple and stack modes, the copier sends
the paper size information to the sorter/stapler. In accordance with this data, the
jogger motor [A] drives the jogger plate [B] from the jogger HP to a width 10 mm
wider than the selected paper. 300 ms after the trailing edge of the copy passes
underneath the jam sensor, the jogger motor rotates forward and in reverse. This
makes the jogger plate push all the copies against the front side plate to square the
sheets. When the jogger plate pushes the paper, the plate shifts to a position 5 mm
wider than the paper size when the bins lift. It shifts to a position 1 mm narrower
than the paper size when the bins lowers.
The jogger plate returns to 10 mm away from the selected paper size for the next
copy.
When the bin sensor detects that all copies are no longer in the bins after jogging
finishes, the jogger plate returns to its home position.
A246/A247/A248
9-16
SM
Sorter Stapler
A821
JOGGER SECTION
[C]
[B]
[D]
[E]
[A]
[C]
A821D514.WMF
Normally, all rollers in the sorter/stapler transport the paper at a speed of 345 mm/s
(A246) or 450 mm/s (A247/A248). To have enough jogging time, the rotation speed
for the sorter exit motor [A] changes, to transport the paper quickly and stack it
smoothly into the bins, in the following manner:
345 mm/s (A246) or 450 mm/s (A247/A248): When the sorter exit roller [B] catches
the leading edge of the paper
1,000 mm/s: After the jam sensors [C] detects the leading edge of the paper
600 mm/s: When releasing the trailing edge of the paper
The transport roller [D] turns at a constant speed of 345 mm/s (A246) or 450 mm/s
(A247/A248). However, when the sorter exit roller [B] rotates quickly, the transport
rollers do the same with the pulled paper. This occurs because of the one-way
clutch in the drive gear [E].
Jogger off Conditions

1. Under the following conditions, the jogger plate does not jog after copies are
delivered to the bins.
If paper is loaded in a bin by hand while the selecting sort/stack or staple
mode.
If the selected paper size does not match stapling specifications.
If copy of smaller width is delivered in the bins later in the Mixed sizes
mode.
2. If paper is in a bin before turning on the main switch, the sort/stack mode is
disabled after the user touches the sort key.
SM
9-17
A246/A247/A248
BIN REAR PLATE DRIVE SECTION
2.6 BIN REAR PLATE DRIVE SECTION

Fig. 1
[I]
[C]
[A]
[G]
[F]
[J]
[B]
Fig. 2
[D]
[E]
[H]
[A]
[I]
[F]
[G]
A821D515.WMF
The bin rear plates [A] stand up as shown (Fig. 1). They are lowered only during
stapling as shown (Fig. 2).
In staple mode, when the jogger plate has jogged all copies, the bin rear plate drive
motor [B] rotates a gear [C]. The gear [C] drives the piston rod [D], pushing the
lever [E] down.
The holder [F] engaging the pin [G] on the bin rear plate lowers in accordance with
the lever [E] position. Thus, the bin rear plate becomes flat so as not to interfere
with the copies brought to the staple position by the grip assembly.
During stapling, the actuator [I] interrupts the rear plate open sensor [H] (Fig. 2) for
the bin.
When the bin rear plates are in their home position, the actuator [I] interrupts their
HP sensor [J] (Fig. 1).
Under this condition, a pin [G] enters the holder [F] or passes through it.
After stapling is complete and the stapled paper returns to the bin, the gear [C]
rotates 180 degrees and the bin rear plate returns to its home position.
A246/A247/A248
9-18
SM
2.7 GRIP ASSEMBLY

The grip assembly catches the jogged copies and moves them to the staple unit.
After stapling, the grip assembly catches the copies again and moves them back.
The grip assembly consists of grip arms, and the grip and grip shift motors. The
grip arms catch the paper. The grip motor moves the grip arms inside and outside,
and enables the grip arms to catch the paper. The grip shift motor causes the grip
arms to carry the paper to the staple unit.
SM
9-19
A246/A247/A248
Sorter Stapler
A821
GRIP ASSEMBLY
GRIP ASSEMBLY
2.7.1 GRIP MOTOR

[B]
[A]
[C]
[F]
A821D516.WMF
[C]
[E]
[D]
A821D517.WMF
When the grip motor [A] rotates several times, the lever [B] moves inside and
pushes the grip arms [C]. After the grip motor rotates some more, the bracket [D]
moves upward and pushes the pressure arm [E]. When the pressure arm move
upward, the grip springs [F] attract the upper grip arms, then the grip arms catch
the paper.
A246/A247/A248
9-20
SM
GRIP ASSEMBLY
Sorter Stapler
A821
2.7.2 GRIP SHIFT MOTOR
[A]
[B]
A821D518.WMF
The grip shift motor [A], a stepper motor, enables the grip arms to carry the paper
to the staple unit and after stapling make it carry them back. The grip shift motor
HP sensor [B] is actuated while the gripper is in the home (grip) position. The
sorter/stapler main control board sends the appropriate pulses to the grip shift
motor to determine the grip and staple positions. Vertical staple positions are
adjusted by changing the number of the stepping motor pulses from the home
position (SP1-11-1 Staple Position Adjustment).
SM
9-21
A246/A247/A248
STAPLE UNIT
2.8 STAPLE UNIT

2.8.1 STAPLE UNIT DRIVE MECHANISM
[B]
[A]
A821D519.WMF
The staple unit moves from the home position (top slant position) to the rear side of
the machine in order to change the staple position. The staple HP sensor [A]
activates when the staple unit is in the home position. In Top Slant mode, the
stapler is only at the home position. In Top (or Bottom) single staple mode, the
staple unit moves to the front (or rear) single staple position and stays there until
stapling is complete. It then returns to the home position. In 2 Staples mode or
Bottom single staple mode; the staple positions differ according to the paper size.
The staple unit drive motor [B] is a stepper motor, and the number of steps from
the home position determine the staple position.
In 2 Staples mode, the staple unit goes back and forth to staple the two positions.
Horizontal staple positions are adjusted by changing the number of stepping motor
pulses from the home position (SP1-11-1Staple Position Adjustment).
A246/A247/A248
9-22
SM
STAPLE UNIT
Sorter Stapler
A821
2.8.2 STAPLER
[D]
[B]
[C]
[I]
[E]
[A]
A821D520.WMF
[F]
[H]
[G]
A821D521.WMF
The stapler motor [A] drives the staple sheet drive belt.
The staple sheets go under the hammer [B].
The stapler motor drives the staple hammer via gears [C], two eccentric cams [D].
When the grip brings the aligned copies to the staple position, the stapler motor
starts rotating. When the cams complete one rotation, the staple HP sensor [E] is
de-actuated. The stapler motor then stops.
When the paper sensor [F] in the grip assembly does not detect that the copies are
under the hammer, the stapler motor does not rotate.
There are two sensors in the staple unit. One is the staple end sensor [G], which
detects staple end conditions. The other is the cartridge set sensor [H],which
detects when the staple cartridge is not installed.
The staple cartridge has a clinch area [I], a deposit for jammed staples. Operators
can remove the jammed staples from the cartridge.
SM
9-23
A246/A247/A248
STAPLE UNIT
Staple Prohibit Conditions

1. Under the following conditions, staple mode is disabled after pressing the
staple key on the operation panel:
If paper is in the bin before turning on the main switch.
If the selected paper size does not match stapling specifications.
If the paper comes from the by-pass feed table.
2. Under the following conditions, staple mode is canceled:
If paper is manually loaded into a bin after selecting staple mode.
If only one sheet is delivered to the bin.
If the stack, slip-sheet or interrupt modes are selected.
3. Under the following conditions, manual stapling mode in sort mode is
prohibited:
If paper is manually loaded into a bin after selecting sort mode.
If the paper size in the bin does not match stapling specifications.
The delivery of a smaller width paper to the bin later in Mixed Sizes mode.
If copies already stapled, remain in the bin.
A246/A247/A248
9-24
SM
STAPLE UNIT
Sorter Stapler
A821
2.8.3 PUNCH MECHANISM

[C]
[E]
[B]
[D]
[A]
A821D522.WMF
[G]
[F]
A821D523.WMF
The punch unit [A], which is in the copy transport path, makes punched holes for
every copy paper in the punch mode. The punch drive motor [B] (stepping motor)
drives the punch unit. At the appropriate timing after the entrance sensor [C]
detects the trailing edge of the copy paper, the punch drive motor rotates and the
hole puncher [D] makes holes in the paper. The punch HP sensor [E] detects if the
hole puncher is in the home position. The punch collection cartridge [F] collects
punch rubbish (waste). When the punch rubbish (waste) overflow sensor [G]
detects the overflow condition, the machine indicates the condition in the operation
panel after the punch job is done.
SM
9-25
A246/A247/A248
STAPLE UNIT
2.8.4 STAPLE UNIT PULLED-OUT MECHANISM
[C]
[B]
[D]
[A]
A821D524.WMF
For easy staple cartridge replenishment, the staple unit can be pulled-out from the
front. Pulling out the R3 release grip [A] releases the stopper and enables the
staple unit to be removed (staple unit pulled-out position). In this position, the
stopper arm [B] locks the staple unit by dropping the arm to the edge of bracket [C].
When the staple unit is not in completely (the staple unit is between the staple unit
HP and the staple unit pulled-out positions [D]), the LCD displays a message
advising the user to set the staple unit in the home position.
A246/A247/A248
9-26
SM
JAM DETECTION
Sorter Stapler
A821
2.9 JAM DETECTION

Copier Exit
Sensor
Entrance
Sensor
Proof Exit
Sensor
Jam
Sensor
* Timing depends on the paper sizes.
A821D525.WMF
Sorter Jams
The main control board for the sorter/stapler detects jams under the following
conditions: (In these cases, a jam signal is sent to the copier, the copier stops the
paper feed and indicates a sorter miss-feed.)
Normal (Proof) Mode

J1: The entrance sensor has not turned on for the 700 ms after the copier exit
sensor turns on.
J2: The entrance sensor stays on for the appropriate number of pulses (for
example, 280 pulses for A4 sideways) or more.
J3: The proof exit sensor has not turned on for 300 pulses after the entrance
sensor turns on.
J4: The proof exit sensor stays on for the appropriate number of pulses (for
example, 280 pulses for A4 sideways) or more.
In Sort/Stack or Staple Mode

J1 and J2: Same as the Normal mode.
J5: The jam sensor has not turned on for 600 pulses after the entrance sensor
turns on.
J6: The jam sensor stays on for the appropriate number of pulses (for example,
280 pulses for A4 sideways) or more.
J7: The jam sensor turns on while the bin drive motor turns on.
SM
9-27
A246/A247/A248
TIMING CHART
2.10 TIMING CHART

2.10.1 SORTER/STAPLER TIMING CHART (PROOF MODE)
Signal
Timing Chart
Motor ON
Proof mode
Paper size
data
Exit signal
Sorter busy
S/S exit
signal
S/S main
motor ON
Entrance Sensor
Proof exit Sensor
A821D526.WMF
A246/A247/A248
9-28
SM
2.10.2 SORTER/STAPLER TIMING CHART (STAPLE MODE)

Motor ON
Staple ON
Proof mode
Staple mode
Exit signal
Paper size data
Bin data
Sorter busy
S/S Exit signal
Proof count
Job complete
Entrance sensor
Jam sensor
Sorter exit motor
Sorter main motor
300 ms
Jogger motor
NOTE 1
NOTE 1
Staple unit drive

motor
NOTE 2
Grip shift motor

Grip shift motor
HP sensor
Grip motor
Grip motor HP
sensor
Staple motor
Bin rear plate drive
motor
Bin drive motor
NOTE 3
A821D527.WMF
NOTE: 1) Jogger motor on/off time differs depending on the paper size.
2) Staple unit drive motor off time differs depending on the paper size.
3) Bin drive motor off time differs depending on the number of copy sets.
SM
9-29
A246/A247/A248
Sorter Stapler
A821
TIMING CHART
SERVICE TABLES (MAIN CONTROL BOARD)
3. SP MODE
3.1 SERVICE TABLES (MAIN CONTROL BOARD)
3.1.1 DIP SWITCHES
DIP SW 100
0: OFF 1: ON
Function
Standard setting
Raises all bins to the top position.
Free run
Initialization
2 Hole punch setting (Europe)
3 Hole punch setting (U.S.A.)
DIP SW 101
DIP SW 102
1
0
1
0
1
2
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
Vertical Staple Position Adjustment

Horizontal Staple Position Adjustment
Adjustment Value
Standard Position
0.5 mm
0.1 mm
1.5 mm
2.0 mm
2.5 mm
3.0 mm
3.5 mm
direction (See the illustration below.)
+ direction (See the illustration below.)
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
2
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
3
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0/1
0/1
0/1
0/1
0/1
0/1
0/1
0
1
NOTE: The adjustment value and the combination of the dip switch positions are
the same on DIP SW 101 and DIP SW 102.
Feed direction
Feed direction
+ direction
direction
+ direction
direction
A821M500.WMF
A246/A247/A248
9-30
SM
SERVICE TABLES (MAIN CONTROL BOARD)

Sorter Stapler
A821
3.1.2 PUNCH POSITION

DPS 100
Adjustment value
Standard (3 Holes)
9.5 mm from trailing edge
Standard (2 Holes)
12 mm from trailing edge
Feed direction
A821M501.WMF
3.1.3 TEST POINTS

Number
TP100
TP101
Function
GND
+5 V
3.1.4 FUSES
FUSES
FUSES100
SM
Connected Point
CN100-1 (+24 V)
Rated Current and Voltage

250 V T5A
9-31
A246/A247/A248
EXTERIOR COVER REMOVAL

4.1 EXTERIOR COVER REMOVAL
[A]
[D]
[B]
[E]
[C]
A821R500.WMF
Front Door Removal

1. Remove the proof tray [A] (2 screws).
2. Open the front door [B] and push away the staple unit.
3. Remove the front inner cover [C] (3 screws).
4. Lift up the front door and remove it.
Bottom Plate Removal

1. Remove the rear cover [D] (4 screws).
2. Remove the bottom plate [E] (2 screws).
NOTE: The proof tray, front inner cover, front left cover, and rear cover can be
removed without removing any other parts.
A246/A247/A248
9-32
SM
STAPLER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION

Sorter Stapler
A821
4.2 STAPLER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION
[A]
[F]
[D]
[B]
A821R501.WMF
[C]
[E]
A821R502.WMF
1. Return the staple unit [A] to the home position by pulling out the staple unit.
2. Pull out the R3 release lever [B] and pull out the staple unit.
3. Remove the harness cover [C].
4. Remove the staple unit [D] (1 connector and 1 screw).
NOTE: When re-assembling the parts, hook the cutout [E] to the shoulder screw
[F].
SM
9-33
A246/A247/A248
JOGGER PLATE REMOVAL AND INSTALLATIOIN
4.3 JOGGER PLATE REMOVAL AND INSTALLATIOIN

[A]
[B]
[C]
[E]
A821R503.WMF
[D]
A821R504.WMF
Removal
1. Remove the proof tray. (Refer to Exterior Cover Removal, section 4.1.)
2. Release the spring [A] of the upper jogger holder [B], and then pull out the
jogger plate [C].
Installation
1. Insert the jogger plate through the upper holder [B].
2. Push down the jogger plate towards the lower holder [D].
3. Set the jogger plate in the lower holder [D].
4. Hook the spring [A] of the upper jogger holder to the stopper [E].
A246/A247/A248
9-34
SM
4.4 BINS REMOVAL

Removal
[A]
[D]
A821R505.WMF
[C]
[B]
A821R542.WMF
1. Remove the rear cover.

2. Raise all bins to the highest position by turning on DIP SW100-1 on the main
PCB for the sorter, then turn off the main switch of the copier.
3. Remove the jogger plate (refer to Jogger Plate Removal) then move the upper
jogger holder [A] to the front side.
4. Remove the rear cover then remove the bottom plate to access the drive belt.
(Refer to Exterior Cover Removal section.)
5. Manually rotate the helical wheel drive belt [B] and move up the top guide [C]
until the three guide pins [D] reach the top of the helical wheel as shown.
SM
9-35
A246/A247/A248
Sorter Stapler
A821
BINS REMOVAL
BINS REMOVAL
[B]
[D]
[A]
[C]
A821R507.WMF
[F]
[H]
[E]
[G]
A821R508.WMF
6. Remove the top guide by releasing two pins [A and B] from the cutouts [C and
D] at the end of the bin guide slots. Then remove the pins [E and F] from the
cutouts [G and H].
7. Move the next bin to the top position by manually rotating the helical wheel
drive belt and remove it according to the removal procedure for the top guide
(step 5 and 6).
8. Remove the other nineteen bins by repeating step 7.
A246/A247/A248
9-36
SM
BINS REMOVAL
[H]
Sorter Stapler
A821
Installation
[A]
[F]
[E]
[B]
[G]
[E]
[J]
A821R509.WMF
[D]
[I]
A821R510.WMF
1. While holding the bin rear plate [A] straight, insert the rear right guide pin [B]
into the slot [C], and then lower the rear guide pin to the corner [D].
2. While still holding the bin rear plate straight, insert the front right guide pin [E] to
guide slot [F].
3. Insert the other guide pins [G] and [H] to the slots [I] and [J].
SM
9-37
A246/A247/A248
BINS REMOVAL
[B]
[A]
A821R511.WMF
Good
No Good
A821R512.WMF
4. Manually rotate the helical wheel drive belt [A] and lower the bin.
NOTE: Before installing the next bin, rotate the helical wheels only once.
Otherwise, the distance between the guide pins [B] become uneven
and the bin tilts.
5. Set all bins and the top cover by repeating steps 1 to 4.
6. Re-install the jogger plate and all covers.
A246/A247/A248
9-38
SM
MAIN MOTOR REMOVAL

Sorter Stapler
A821
4.5 MAIN MOTOR REMOVAL
[A]
[B]
A821R513.WMF
1. Remove the rear cover (4 screws).

3. Remove the bracket [B] (4 screws) for the main motor.
SM
9-39
A246/A247/A248
GRIP ASSEMBLY REMOVAL
4.6 GRIP ASSEMBLY REMOVAL
[A]
[B]
[D]
[C]
A821R514.WMF
1. Open the front door then remove the front inner cover. (Refer to Exterior Cover
2. Disconnect the four connectors [A to D].
NOTE: When re-connecting the connectors, connect the longer harness [A] to
grip shift motor HP sensor and the shorter harness [B] to grip motor HP
sensor.
3. Remove the grip assembly.
A246/A247/A248
9-40
SM
UPPER GRIP ASSEMBLY REMOVAL

Sorter Stapler
A821
4.7 UPPER GRIP ASSEMBLY REMOVAL

[C]
[A]
[B]
A821R515.WMF
1. Remove the grip assembly. (Refer to Grip Assembly Removal, section 4.6.)
2. Remove the timing belt securing bracket [A] (1 screw).
3. Remove the grip shift shaft [B] (1 E-ring).
4. While closing the upper-grip assembly [C], remove it.
SM
9-41
A246/A247/A248
GRIP SHIFT MOTOR REMOVAL
4.8 GRIP SHIFT MOTOR REMOVAL
[A]
[B]
A821R516.WMF
1. Remove the upper grip assembly. (Refer to Upper Grip Assembly Removal,
section 4.7.)
2. Mark the original position of the screw [A] securing the grip shift motor [B].
3. Remove the grip shift motor.
NOTE: When re-installing the grip shift motor, place the motor at the original
position by referring to the mark you made.
A246/A247/A248
9-42
SM
4.9 GRIP MOTOR AND SENSORS REMOVAL

4.9.1 GRIP MOTOR/GRIP MOTOR HP SENSOR/GRIP SHIFT
MOTOR HP SENSOR REMOVAL
[D]
[B]
[C]
[A]
A821R517.WMF
1. Remove the grip assembly. (Refer to Grip Assembly Removal, section 4.6.)
2. Replace the grip motor HP sensor [A].
3. Replace the grip shift motor HP Sensor [B].
4. Mark the original position of the screw [C] securing the grip motor [D].
5. Remove the grip motor.
NOTE: When re-installing the grip motor, place the motor at the original
position by referring to the mark you made.
SM
9-43
A246/A247/A248
Sorter Stapler
A821
GRIP MOTOR AND SENSORS REMOVAL
MAIN CONTROL BOARD REPLACEMENT
4.10 MAIN CONTROL BOARD REPLACEMENT
[A]
A821R518.WMF
1. Remove the rear cover (refer to Exterior Cover Removal, section 4.1) then
disconnect all connectors (15 connectors and 1 fiber optics connector).
2. Remove the main control board [A] (6 studs).
3. Install the new main control board and set all connectors.
4. Position DIP SW 100, 101 and 102 as on the original main control board (DIP
SW 101 and 102 are for staple position adjustment and DIP SW 100 is for SP
mode).
5. Turn on the main switch for the copier, and then confirm the staple position. If
incorrect, adjust the staple position. (Refer to the Staple Position Adjustment,
section 4.11.)
A246/A247/A248
9-44
SM
STAPLE POSITION ADJUSTMENT

Sorter Stapler
A821
4.11 STAPLE POSITION ADJUSTMENT

Adjustment Standard
Staple Position:
a
c
g
d
e
f
g
A821R539.WMF
A821R540.WMF
a = 6 3 mm
e = 132 2 mm
b = 6 3 mm
f = 6 3 mm
c = 6 3 mm
g = 116.5 2 mm
d = 66 3 mm
= 45 5
Adjustment
[A]
[B]
A821R538.PCX
Both the vertical and the horizontal staple positions are adjustable as follows:
1. Enter SP1-11-1 (Staple Position Adjustment).
2. Adjust the vertical staple position by touching the , + keys [A] and the
horizontal staple position by touching the , + keys [B].
NOTE: 0.5 mm/step
SM
9-45
A246/A247/A248
PUNCH POSITION ADJUSTMENT STANDARD
4.12 PUNCH POSITION ADJUSTMENT STANDARD

Punch Position:
a
2 Holes (European version)
a = 12 3 mm
b = 40 3 mm
c = 80 1 mm
d
3 Holes (U.S.A. version)
a = 9.5 (3/8") 3 mm
c = 216 (81/2") 1 mm
d = 108 (41/4") 1 mm
d = 3 mm
Punch Hole Size
A821R541.WMF
2 Holes: = 6.5 0.5 mm

3 Holes: = 8.0 0.5 mm
Adjustment
[A]
A821R538.PCX
1. Enter SP1-11-2 (Punch Hole Position Adjustment).

2. Adjust the punch position by touching the , + keys [A] (vertical position
only).
NOTE: 1 mm/step
A246/A247/A248
9-46
SM
HELICAL WHEELS REMOVAL

Sorter Stapler
A821
4.13 HELICAL WHEELS REMOVAL

Removal
Before removing the helical wheels, remove all bins and all exterior covers.
(Refer to Exterior Cover, section 4.1, and Bins Removal, section 4.4.)
Front Helical Wheel

[A]
[F]
[D]
A821R523.WMF
[B]
[B]
A821R524.WMF
[C]
[C]
[E]
A821R525.WMF
1. Remove the bracket [A] (4 screws).

2. Unhook the two springs [B].
3. Loosen the two Allen screws [C].
4. Remove the wheel sensor bracket [D] (1 screw).
5. While holding the pulley [E] to keep it in position, remove the helical wheel [F].
SM
9-47
A246/A247/A248
Rear Helical Wheel
[A]
[D]
[C]
[B]
A821R527.WMF
A821R526.WMF
1. Remove the bracket [A] (3 screws).

2. Loosen the two Allen screws [B] on the drive pulley.
3. While holding the pulley [C] to keep it in position, remove the helical wheel [D].
A246/A247/A248
9-48
SM
Installation
NOTE: After installing the helical wheels, perform the helical wheels alignment
which is explained later.
Rear Helical Wheel
[B]
[D]
[E]
[A]
[C]
A821R528.WMF
[B]
[F]
A821R529.WMF
1. Place the bearing [A] on the notch on the bottom plate.

2. Set the helical wheel [B] into the pulley [C] then set the helical wheel on the
bearing [A].
3. Set the bracket with the bushing [D] on top of the helical wheel then install and
slightly tighten three screws [E].
4. Place a 0.4-mm thickness gauge [F] between the helical wheel [B] and the
bushing [D] on the bracket. While holding the bushing down to the helical
wheel, tighten the three screws [E].
SM
9-49
A246/A247/A248
Sorter Stapler
A821
Front Helical Wheel
[F]
[D]
[K]
[G]
[D]
[H]
[A]
[C] [B]
A821R530.WMF
A821R531.WMF
[J]
[I]
[E]
[L]
A821R532.WMF
1. Place the bearing [A] on the notch [B] on the bottom plate.
2. Set the pulley [C] on the bearing. The direction of the pulley should be as
shown in the illustration.
3. Set the helical wheel [D] in the pulley [C]. Leave the Allen screws [E] loosened.
4. Set the bracket with a bushing [F] on top of the helical wheels then install and
slightly tighten the four screws [G].
5. Place a 0.4-mm thickness gauge [H] between the helical wheel and the bushing
on the bracket. While holding the bushing down to the helical wheel [D], tighten
the four screws [G].
6. Hook tension springs [I and J] then tighten the screw [K].
7. Install the wheel sensor bracket [L].
A246/A247/A248
9-50
SM

Sorter Stapler
A821
Alignment of the 2 Helical Wheels

[B]
[A]
[C]
[C]
A821R533.WMF
[E]
[D]
Front
Rear
D = 1.7 0.5 mm
E = 22.5 0.5 mm
A821R534.WMF
1. Confirm all belts are set correctly.

2. Align all holes [A] at the middle of the helical wheels at the center of the bin
guide slots [B], as shown.
3. In this condition, tighten all Allen screws [C] on the helical wheel drive pulleys
(2 Allen screws on each drive pulley).
4. Make sure that the gaps [D and E] between the base plates and the pulleys are
as shown in the illustration.
SM
9-51
A246/A247/A248
PUNCH UNIT REMOVAL
4.14 PUNCH UNIT REMOVAL
[B]
[E]
[C]
[A]
A821R535.WMF
[A]
[D]
A821R536.WMF

2. Remove the knob [A] (1 screw).
3. Remove the shoulder screw [B].
4. Remove the rear cover.
5. Remove the punch unit [C] (4 screws and 3 connector).
NOTE: To prevent the punch unit from being distorted, re-assemble the parts
as follows:
1) Push in the punch unit and install the shoulder screw [B].
2) Install the knob [A] (1 screw).
3) Temporarily secure the lower screw [D] for the rear.
4) Secure the upper screw [E] for the rear.
5) Set the connectors.
6) Leave the lower screw [D] un-tightened.
A246/A247/A248
9-52
SM
BIN SORTER STAPLER A658
SPECIFICATIONS

1.1 SPECIFICATIONS
Sort/Stack Modes:
Minimum: B5, 81/2" x 11"
Paper Weight for Bins:
Sorting: 52 ~ 157 g/m2 (14 ~ 42 lb)

Stacking: 52 ~ 157 g/m2 (14 ~ 42 lb)
Stapling: 52 ~ 157 g/m2 (14 ~ 42 lb)
Bin capacity:
Sorting: A4, 81/2 x 11" or smaller: 30 copies

B4, 81/2 x 14" or larger: 25 copies
Stacking: A4, 81/2 x 11" or smaller: 25 copies
B4, 81/2 x 14" or larger: 20 copies
stapler Capacity:
2 ~ 20 copies
Proof Tray Capacity:
100 sheets (80g/m2, 20 lb)
Number of Bins:
20 bins + proof tray
Stapling Position:
a = 6 3 mm b = 6 3 mm
Bin Sorter
Stapler A658
Paper Size for Bins
A658V500.WMF
Staple Replenishment:
Cartridge exchange (2,000 staples/cartridge)
Power Source:
DC 24 V (from the copier)
Power Consumption:
Average:
less than 35 W
Average for Sorting: less than 30 W
Average for Stapling: less than 33 W
Weight:
20.5 kg (27.4 lb)
430 x 570 x 680 mm (15.0" x 21.6" x 17.5")
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
SM
10-1
A246/A247/A248
COMPONENT LAYOUT

1
7
3
4
6
5
A658V501.WMF
1. Helical Wheels
2. Jogger Plate
3. Grip Assembly
4. Transport Rollers
5. Staple Unit
6. Bins
7. Proof Tray
A246/A247/A248
10-2
SM
COMPONENT LAYOUT
1.2.2 DRIVE LAYOUT

2
Bin Sorter
Stapler A658
A658V502.WMF
1. Jogger Drive Belt

2. Transport Roller
3. Wheel Drive Belts
4. Helical Wheels
SM
10-3
A246/A247/A248
COMPONENT LAYOUT
1.2.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

Refer to the electrical component layout on the reverse side of the Point to Point
Diagram (on waterproof paper).
Symbol
Motors
M1
M2
M3
M4
Name
Main Drive
Jogger
Bin Drive
Stapler
Grip
M5
Function
Drives the transport roller
Drives the jogger plate to square the copies
Drives the bins
Drives the stapler hammer
Drives the grippers forwards and back into
the bin to grip the copies and bring them to
the stapling position
Index No.
16
9
14
7
3
Sensors
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
S9
S10
Bin
(Phototransistor)
Grip Home
Position
Bin Home
Position
Sorter Entrance
Jogger Home
Position
Wheel
Bin (LED)
Stapler Paper
Staple End
Staple Hammer
Home Position
Detects whether there is any paper in the

bins (light receiving element)
Detects when the grip assembly cam gear
has rotated once
Detects whether the bins are at home
position
Detects paper jams
Detects whether the jogger plate is in its
home position
Detects the bin position.
Detects whether there is paper in the bins
(light emitting element)
Detects whether any copies are under the
hammer.
Detects when the staples run out
Detects whether the stapler hammer is at
home position
1
6
11
2
13
12
10
4
18
17
Switches
SW1
SW2
Door Safety
Stapler
Circuit Board
PCB1
Main
A246/A247/A248
Cuts the dc +24 V supply when either the

unit or the stapler cover is opened.
Cuts the signals to the stapler.
Controls all sorter/stapler functions
15
10-4
SM
BASIC OPERATION
2.1 BASIC OPERATION
Bin Sorter
Stapler A658
2.1.1 NORMAL MODE AND SORT/STACK MODE

[F]
[E]
[A]
[C]
[B]
[D]
A658D500.WMF
Copies exiting the copier pass through the entrance guide plate [A]. The transport
roller will send copies either to the proof tray or to each bin, depending on the
selected mode.
During copying, all rollers in the sorter stapler transport the paper at a speed which
depends on the copier. When the trailing edge of the copy passes the fusing exit
sensor, the speed of the rollers changes to 600 mm/s. This makes enough time for
the jogger plate to square the stack of paper and to stack the paper smoothly into
the bins.
Normal (Proof) Mode

When the Start key is pressed, the transport motor [B] energizes to rotate the
transport rollers [C]. The transport rollers send copies to the proof tray directly.
Sort Mode
When sort mode is selected, the bin drive motor [D] energizes to rotate the helical
wheels. The helical wheels [E] rotate twice to move the top bin to the transport
roller position, then the first copy is delivered to the top bin.
After the first copy of the first original has been fed to the top bin, the bin drive
motor moves the bins up one step (the helical wheels rotate once) so that the
second copy of the first original will be delivered to the next bin.
The jogger plate [F] squares the copies after each copy has been fed to a bin. After
the copies of the first original have been delivered to each bin, the sorter stapler
maintains its status (the bin drive motor does not rotate).
SM
10-5
A246/A247/A248
BASIC OPERATION
The first copy of the second original is delivered to the final bin that was used for
the first original, then the final bin descends one step. The bins descend each time
a copy of the second original is delivered.
The direction of motion of the bins alternates for each page of the original until the
copy run is finished.
Stack Mode
[A]
A658D501.WMF
When stack mode is selected, the top bin advances to the transport roller position
in the same way as in sort mode.
After the first copy is delivered to the top bin, the jogger plate [A] moves across to
square the copy. The jogger plate squares the copies after each copy has been fed
to a bin.
After one set of copies for the first original has been delivered to the top bin, the bin
drive motor moves the bins up one step. Then, one set of copies of the second
original will be delivered to the next bin.
A246/A247/A248
10-6
SM
BASIC OPERATION
Bin Sorter
Stapler A658
2.1.2 STAPLE MODE
[B]
A658D502.WMF
[A]
[C]
[D]
A658D503.WMF
The stapler is only available in sort mode.

When the jogger plate has squared the final set of copies, the grip arms [A] move
inside the front side frame and catch the paper. The grip assembly brings the
copies into the stapler [B], and the stapler staples the copies.
After stapling, the grip assembly [C] brings the stapled copies back to the bin and
releases the copies. Then the grip assembly goes back to the normal position. The
bin either advances or descends one step [D] (depending on whether the page is
an odd or even numbered page of the original).
When the final set of copies has been stapled, the bins go back to the standby
position.
There are two staple modes.
Automatic Stapling
In ADF mode, when staple mode is selected before pressing the Start key, copies
will be delivered to each bin and stapled automatically.
SM
10-7
A246/A247/A248
BASIC OPERATION
Manual Stapling
In platen cover mode, after the copies have been sorted into the bins, the staple
mode LED starts to blink. If the sort key is pressed while this LED is blinking, the
copies will be stapled.
A246/A247/A248
10-8
SM
BASIC OPERATION
2.1.3 BIN DRIVE MECHANISM

[C]
Bin Sorter
Stapler A658
[A]
[E]
[D]
[B]
A658D504.WMF
The bin drive mechanism moves the bins up and down to receive copies.
There are four pins on each bin. Two pins fit into the slots [A] in both the front and
rear side frames; the pins slide up and down in these slots. The other two pins fit
into the slot in the helical wheels; as the helical wheels turn, these pins move up
and down, and the other pins move up and down in the slots at the other end of the
bin.
The bin drive motor [B] drives the helical wheels [C] through timing belts as shown.
When the motor rotates clockwise, the bins lift; when it rotates counterclockwise,
the bins lower. There is a wheel sensor [D] located under the actuator [E] on the
rear helical wheel; the actuator has a slot which detects when the helical wheel has
rotated once.
When the bins are advanced, the helical wheels rotate once for each step. As the
pitch of the spiral on the helical wheel is greater when the bins are at the stapling
and paper exit area than when the bins are elsewhere, the amount of bin shift is
greater when the bins are at the stapling and paper exit area. This leaves enough
space to staple and stack the copies. Also, this reduces the total machine height.
SM
10-9
A246/A247/A248
BASIC OPERATION
2.1.4 BIN HOME POSITION
[A]
A658D505.WMF
The bin home position sensor [A] ensures that the proof tray is lower than the
transport roller when the bins are in the home position.
When the main switch is turned on, the sorter stapler initializes itself to check
whether the component parts work or not. At this time, the bin drive motor raises
the bins for a few moments, then it lowers the bins until the bottom bin actuates the
bin home position sensor.
A246/A247/A248
10-10
SM
BASIC OPERATION
2.1.5 JOGGER MECHANISM
Bin Sorter
Stapler A658
[B]
[C]
[E]
[A]
[D]
A658D506.WMF
The jogger motor [A] drives the jogger plate [B] through the timing belts [C].
The jogger is at home position when the actuator on the jogger plate goes into the
jogger home position sensor [D].
At standby, the jogger plate is at the home position. When the Start key is
pressed, the copier sends the paper size information to the sorter stapler.
In sort, staple, and stack modes, the jogger moves three times to square the stack
of paper. First, when the paper has been fed completely into the bin (at the proper
time after the copy has passed through the entrance sensor [E], depending on the
paper length), the jogger motor moves the jogger plate out of the jogger home
position. Then, the jogger motor drives the jogger plate to the width of the copy.
Finally, the jogger plate moves inward to push all the copies against the front side
frame, which squares the sheets of paper. Then the jogger plate returns to the
home position.
SM
10-11
A246/A247/A248
BASIC OPERATION
2.1.6 GRIP ASSEMBLY
[G]
[H]
[J]
[D]
[I]
A658D507.WMF
[B]
[E]
[C]
[F]
[A]
A658D508.WMF
A658D509.WMF
The grip assembly consists of the grip motor [A], the timing belt [B], the drive gear
[C], the grip home position sensor [D], and the cam gear [E].
The grip motor drives the cam gear through the timing belt and drive gear. Cam
gear rotation drives the mechanism that catches the copies and moves the grip
arm unit [F]. When the cam gear rotates clockwise one full turn, the grip arm moves
to catch the copies and returns to the home position to prepare for stapling. After
stapling, the cam gear rotates counterclockwise once so that the stapled copies go
back to the bin, and the cam gear returns to its home position.
When the cam pushes the roller [G] on the lever [H] and the lever pushes the grip
arm, the grip arm can catch the copies.
A pin [I] on the cam gear fits into the slot in the grip arm unit. So, when the cam
gear rotates, the slot moves the grip arm unit inward and outward.
The actuator [J] on the cam gear activates the grip home position sensor once
every rotation of the cam gear. This allows the sorter stapler to determine that the
cam gear has rotated once.
A246/A247/A248
10-12
SM
BASIC OPERATION
2.1.7 STAPLER UNIT

[C]
[D]
[G]
[F]
[H]
[B]
[E]
A658D510.WMF
The stapler motor [A] drives the staple hammer [B] using the gears [C] and the
eccentric cam [D].
The roller [E] feeds the staple sheets under the hammer.
When the aligned copies are brought to the staple position by the grip unit, the
stapler motor starts rotating and the copies are stapled. When the cam completes
one rotation, the staple hammer home position sensor [F] is deactuated and the
stapler motor stops.
When the stapler paper sensor [G] in the grip assembly does not detect any copies
under the hammer, the stapler motor does not rotate.
When the trailing edge of the last staple sheet pass through the staple end sensor
[H], the sorter stapler enters the staple near end condition. After the current job is
completed, the Add Staples indicator lights on the operation panel. Then the copier
cannot be used whenever the staple mode is selected.
SM
10-13
A246/A247/A248
Bin Sorter
Stapler A658
[A]
BASIC OPERATION
2.1.8 STAPLER SWITCH
[A]
[B]
A658D511.WMF
The stapler switch [A] below the grip assembly cuts the dc +24 V supply to the
stapler. In proof mode, all bins lower and push the lever [B]. This opens the stapler
switch so that the signal to the stapler is cut. In sort and staple modes, all bins are
advanced and the switch is closed so that the signal can be supplied to the stapler.
Staple Mode Disabling Conditions

1. Under the following conditions, staple mode is disabled.
If there is paper in a bin before the main switch is turned on.
If the selected paper size does not match the stapling specifications.
If the paper is fed from the by-pass feed table.
If the stack or interrupt modes are selected.
2. Under the following conditions, staple mode is canceled if it had been selected.
If paper is inserted into a bin by hand while the staple mode is selected.
If the number of sheets to be stapled exceeds the stapler capacity.
A246/A247/A248
10-14
SM
BASIC OPERATION
2.1.9 PAPER FEED AND MISFEED DETECTION TIMING
Bin Sorter
Stapler A658
Proof Mode A4 sideways, five copies, 150 mm/s
A658D512.WMF
*1: The value of the low speed depends on the copier.
Sorter Mode A4 sideways, two copies a of two-page original, 150 mm/s
A658D513.WMF
*1: The start times of the bin drive and the jogger motors depend on the paper size
as shown in the following table.
*2: Bin No.
SM
10-15
A246/A247/A248
BASIC OPERATION
Paper Size
Bin drive
Jogger
motor timing motor timing
A3/11" x 17"
80 ms
270 ms
B4
A4 sideways/
11" x 81/2"
160 ms
190 ms
80 ms
270 ms
Paper Size
A4
lengthwise/
81/2" x 11"
B5 sideways
B5
lengthwise
Bin drive
Jogger
motor timing motor timing
24 ms
96 ms
160 ms
190 ms
310 ms
40 ms
Staple Mode A4 sideways, two copies of a two-page original, after sorting, 150 mm/s
A658D514.WMF
A246/A247/A248
10-16
SM
BASIC OPERATION
2.1.10 JAM DETECTION
Bin Sorter
Stapler A658
Paper Jam A4 sideways
A658D515.WMF
J1: The sorter entrance sensor does not turn on within 2 s after the fusing exit
sensor has turned on.
J2: The fusing exit sensor does not turn off within 11.4 s after the sorter entrance
sensor has turned on.
J3: The sorter entrance sensor does not turn off within 1 s after the fusing exit
sensor has turned off.
Staple Jam
In the following conditions, a staple jam will occur and the sorter jam indicator on
the operation panel will light.
1. If the stapler paper sensor is on when the main switch turns on or just as the
stapler cover is closed.
2. If the stapler paper sensor stays on after the stapling job has been finished.
SM
10-17
A246/A247/A248
3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTEMENT

[D]
[C]
[B]
[A]
[E]
A658R506.WMF
3.1.1 FRONT COVER

1. Remove the front cover [A] (2 screws).
3.1.2 REAR COVER

1. Remove the rear cover [B] (3 screws).
3.1.3 TOP COVER

1. Remove the rear cover [B].
2. Remove the top cover support bracket [C] (1 screw).
3. Remove the top cover [D] (1 screw).
3.1.4 LOWER COVER

1. Remove the front cover [A] and the rear cover [B].
2. Remove the lower cover [E].
A246/A247/A248
10-18
SM
[A]
[B]
[A]
A658R500.WMF
1. Remove the front cover. (See Exterior Cover Removal.)

2. Loosen the screws [A].
3. Remove the staple unit [B], as shown (1 screw and 1 connector).
SM
10-19
A246/A247/A248
Bin Sorter
Stapler A658
STAPLER UNIT REMOVAL
GRIP ARM REPLACEMENT
3.2 GRIP ARM REPLACEMENT
[A]
[B]
[D]
[C]
A658R501.WMF
[F]
[E]
A658R502.WMF
1. Remove the front cover. (See Exterior Cover Removal.)

2. Remove the grip assembly [A] (4 screws, 2 connectors, and 1 grounding wire).
3. Remove the spring [B] and remove the slider [C].
4. Remove the grip arm unit [D] (1 screw and 1 clip).
5. Remove the grip arm plate [E] (2 screws).
6. Replace the grip arms [F].
A246/A247/A248
10-20
SM
BIN REMOVAL
3.3 BIN REMOVAL
[C]
Bin Sorter
Stapler A658
[A]
[D]
[B]
[D]
A658R503.WMF
[E]
[F]
[E]
A658R504.WMF
1. Remove the front, rear, and top covers. (See Exterior Cover Removal.)
2. Remove the upper stay bracket [A] (4 screws and 1 connector).
3. Loosen the two screws [B], then remove the timing belt [C].
4. Remove the brackets [D] (3 springs each).
5. While moving the helical wheels [E] outward, remove the bins [F].
SM
10-21
A246/A247/A248
TRANSPORT MOTOR REMOVAL
3.4 TRANSPORT MOTOR REMOVAL
[A]
A658R505.WMF
1. Remove the sorter stapler (1 screw and 1 chain).

2. Remove the rear cover. (See Exterior Cover Removal.)
3. Remove the transport motor [A] (2 screws and 4 washers).
A246/A247/A248
10-22
SM
SPECIFICATIONS

Copy Paper Size:
A4 sideways
B5 Sideways
81/2" x 11" sideways
Copy Paper Weight:
64 ~ 105 g/m2 16~24 lb
Power Source:
DC 24 V, 5 V (from the copier)
Power Consumption:
48 W
Dimensions (W x D x H ):
403 x 529 x 608 mm (15.9" x 20.9" x 24.0")
Weight:
22.0 kg (48.5 lb)
Tray Capacity:
3,500 sheets (may vary slightly depending on

paper weight)
SM
11-1
A246/A247/A248
Large
Capacity Tray
A822
1.1 SPECIFICATIONS
1.2 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT

6
5
4
3
A822V500.WMF
1. Bottom Plate
2. Tray Drive Belt
3. Separation Roller
4. Transport Rollers
5. Feed Roller
6. Pick-up Roller
A246/A247/A248
11-2
SM

Name
LCT
M1
M2
Feed
Magnetic Clutches
MC1
Feed
Function
Index No.
Lifts and lowers the LCT bottom plate to

bring the paper to the feed position and
allow loading of the paper.
Drives all feed and transport rollers.
Starts the paper feed from the LCT.
11
5
Switches
LCT Cover 1
SW1
SW2
SW3
SW4
SW5
SW6
LCT Cover 2
LCT Cover 3
Feed Unit Cover 1
Feed Unit Cover 2
Tray Down
Ensures that +24V can be passed to the

LCT motor whether the cover is open or
closed.
Detects if the LCT cover is opened or not.
Cuts the power line for LCT when the LCT
cover is opened.
Detects if the feed unit cover is opened or
not.
Cuts the power line for LCT when the LCT
cover is opened.
Lowers the LCT bottom plate
15
14
13
6
7
16
Solenoids
SOL1
Pick-up

pick-up roller.
Paper End
Informs the CPU that there is no paper on

the LCT bottom plate.
Informs the CPU that about 60 sheets of
paper remain on the LCT bottom plate.
Detects the paper position.
Informs the CPU that the LCT bottom plate
is in the lowest position.
Control the paper feed clutch off-on timing
and the pick-up solenoid off timing.
Detects the correct paper feed height.
Sensors
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
SM
Paper Near End

Paper Position
Tray Down
Feed
Lift
11-3
8
9
10
12
1
2
A246/A247/A248
Large
Capacity Tray
A822
Symbol
Motors
MECHANICAL OPERATION
2.1 MECHANICAL OPERATION
[G]
[F]
[E]
[D]
[C]
[A]
[B]
A822D500.WMF
The LCT uses an FRR feed system which uses three rollers. The pick-up [A],
separation [B] and feed [C] rollers are common with those of the by-pass feed unit
of the mainframe but different from those of the paper feed stations in the paper
tray unit.
The LCT feed motor [D] drives the pick-up, separation, feed, and transport [E]
rollers.
The pick-up and feed rollers rotate only when the LCT feed clutch [F] activates.
Paper feeding starts when the LCT pick up solenoid [G] activates.
A246/A247/A248
11-4
SM
PAPER LIFT MECHANISM
2.2 PAPER LIFT MECHANISM
[C]
[D]
[C]
[F]
[A]
A822D501.WMF
[E]
A822D505.WMF
The bottom plate [A] of the LCT is raised and lowered by the LCT motor [B] and the
drive belts [C]. When the main switch is on and the LCT cover is closed, the pickup solenoid [D] activates and the LCT motor [B] rotates clockwise to raise the
bottom plate until the top sheet pushes up the pick-up roller [E]. When the lift
sensor [F] is de-actuated, the copier CPU de-activates the LCT motor [B] and the
pick-up solenoid [D].
SM
11-5
A246/A247/A248
Large
Capacity Tray
A822
[B]
PAPER LIFT MECHANISM
[C]
[A]
[B]
A822D503.WMF
If the tray down switch [A] is pressed, or paper runs out, or a paper jam occurs in
the LCT, the LCT motor [B] rotates counterclockwise to lower the bottom plate.
However, it is not lowered all the way down at this time. When the paper position
sensor [C] activates, the LCT motor stops once. At this point, the bottom plate (or
the top sheet of paper) is positioned about 5 cm below the top. This gives enough
space for the customer to replenish about 500 sheets of paper. If the tray down
switch is then pressed again, the bottom plate moves down and stops once again
when the top sheet of paper just passes the paper position sensor. In this way, the
bottom plate is lowered 5 cm at each press of the tray down switch. This allows the
customer to replenish paper in convenient amounts and at the same position.
A246/A247/A248
11-6
SM
PAPER END DETECTION
2.3 PAPER END DETECTION
[B]
A822D504.WMF
The paper end sensor [A] detects paper on the bottom plate. If there is paper on
the table, reflected light from the paper activates the paper end sensor. When the
paper runs out, the paper end sensor de-activates and informs the copier CPU of
the paper end condition.
The paper near end sensor [B] also detects the paper and the tray bottom plate. If
there is enough paper on the table, reflected light from the paper activates the
paper near end sensor. If less than about 60 sheets of paper remain, the paper
near end sensor de-activates because the black colored bottom plate does not
reflect the light from the sensor LED.
SM
11-7
A246/A247/A248
Large
Capacity Tray
A822
[A]

[D]
[G]
[E]
[F]
[C]
[B]
[A]
A822R500.WMF
3.1.1 FRONT COVER REMOVAL

1. Remove the right cover [A] (2 screws).
2. Remove the front cover [B] (3 screws).
3.1.2 REAR LOWER COVER REMOVAL

1. Open the LCT cover [C], then remove it (1 screw).
2. Remove the rear upper cover [D] (1 screw).
3. Remove the rear lower cover [E] (3 screws).
3.1.3 TOP COVER REMOVAL

1. Remove the right cover.
2. Remove the front cover.
3. Remove the hinge bracket [F] (1 screw).
4. Remove the top cover [G].
A246/A247/A248
11-8
SM
PAPER FEED ROLLERS REPLACEMENT
3.2 PAPER FEED ROLLERS REPLACEMENT

[C]
[D]
Large
Capacity Tray
A822
[A]
[B]
A822R501.WMF
1. Open the top cover [A].

2. Remove the pick-up roller [B] (1 snap ring).
3. Remove the feed roller [C] (1 snap ring).
4. Remove the separation roller [D] (1 snap ring).
NOTE: Do not touch the surface of the rollers with oily hands.
The paper feed rollers used in the LCT are different from rollers used in
the 1st ~ 3rd feed units in the paper tray unit. They are not
interchangeable.
SM
11-9
A246/A247/A248
LCT FEED CLUTCH REMOVAL
3.3 LCT FEED CLUTCH REMOVAL

[A]
[C]
[B]
[E]
[D]
[B]
A609R501.WMF
1. Remove the rear upper cover [A] (2 screws).

3. Remove the harness bracket [C] (2 screws).
4. Remove the bracket [D] with the LCT feed motor (3 screws).
5. Replace the LCT feed clutch [E] (2 Allen screws).
NOTE: When installing the LCT feed clutch, set the stopper pin on the clutch in
the cut-out [F] on the bracket.
A246/A247/A248
11-10
SM
UPPER COVER SWITCHES REMOVAL
3.4 UPPER COVER SWITCHES REMOVAL

[D]
[E]
[C]
[B]
Large
Capacity Tray
A822
[G]
[F]
[A]
A822R503.WMF
[B]
A822R504.WMF
1. Shade the paper position and paper end sensors with a hand, then push the
tray down switch. (The tray go down to tray down sensor position.)
3. Remove the front cover. (Refer to Front Cover Removal, section 7.1.)
4. Remove the screws [A] securing the side fences [B].
5. Mark the original position of the screws [C] securing the bracket [D].
6. Remove the bracket [D] (2 screws).
7. Remove the paper end sensor [E] (1 connector, 1 screw).
NOTE: When removing the paper end sensor, do not bend the stay [F].
8. Replace the upper cover switches [G] (7 connectors, 2 screws).
NOTE: When re-installing the switches, set the connectors correctly.
Yellow
Blue
Green
Small white
Large white
9. Re-assemble and check copy quality.

SM
11-11
A246/A247/A248
SIDE-TO-SIDE REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT
3.5 SIDE-TO-SIDE REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT
A822R505.WMF
1. Follow the copiers side-to-side registration adjustment.

Adjustment standard: less than 2 mm difference between the original and the
copy.
A246/A247/A248
11-12
SM
Rev. 05/99
APPENDIX
1.0 DUPLEX JAM TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

STACKING IN THE DUPLEX FEED SECTION
Outer Inverter Guide [A]
[B] Inner Inverter

Guide
[C] Duplex Transport

Brush Roller
[E] Upper Position
of Paper Guide
Duplex Entrance [D]

Sensor
[G] Lower Position

of Paper Guide
Paper Hold Mylar [F]
[I] Positioning Roller

Separation Belt [H]
[J] Feed Roller
Fig. No.1
Stacking Mechanism
SM
Paper pushes the paper guide up [E].

Paper starts to enter the duplex tray.
After the trailing edge of the paper passes the duplex transport sensor [D], the
paper guide falls into place [G].
The brush roller [C] pushes the trailing edge of the paper so that the paper is
not caught in the inverter guides [A and B].
After the appropriate time after the trailing edge of the paper passes through the
duplex transport sensor, the positioning roller starts to rotate to deliver the
paper to the duplex feed section.
During this period, the paper guide directs the paper under the Mylar ([F] on the
previous page) so that the paper stacks correctly in the duplex feed section.
A1
A246/A247/A248
Appendix
APPENDIX
Rev. 05/99
Rev. 05/99
APPENDIX
Correct Stacking Condition

The paper delivered by the positioning roller in the duplex feed section are
stacked along the separation belt like staircase stack in the fig. No 2. The
paper hold Mylar guides the paper and holds the leading edge in the duplex
feed section.
Staircase stacking
Correct stacking condition
Fig. No.2
Duplex Jam Troubleshooting

Duplex jams can be caused by differences in the width of various paper
brands, bad condition of the inner inverter guide, or curled paper. The
following troubleshooting information is for these causes.
A246/A247/A248
A2
SM
Rev. 05/99
APPENDIX
Appendix
Problem 1
If the jogger fence span is less than the paper width, the positioning roller
cannot deliver the paper to the duplex feed section due to the friction of the
narrower jogger span. Then, duplex jams occur.
Fig. NO.4
Friction
Paper is not delivered to the

feed section.
Fig. No.5
Fig. No.3 The jogger

fence span is less than
paper width
Pattern 1
The paper hold Mylar does not hold stacked

paper completely. The next sheet pushes
the stacked paper back.
Non staircase
Pattern 2
This condition causes double feed

and/or non feed.
Solution 1
Fig. No. 8
A
Duplex Jogger Fence Span Adjustment

1) By accessing SP1-7-1 (jogger span adjustment), check
the jogger span adjustment setting.
2) Feed and stack one sheet of the paper of the size and
brand normally used in the duplex tray.
3) Open the front door, and gently pull out the duplex tray.
4) Confirm and measure the distance between rear jogger
fence and paper (3 times or more).
Adjustment standard: A=0.5~1.5mm
If the span is incorrect, adjust the jogger fence span by
changing the SP mode data. Make the adjustment from wider to narrower. This is
necessary because there is a little play in the mechanism. (To increase the span,
first make it wider than you want and then adjust it down.) If the SP mode is
changed from narrower to wider, paper buckle may appear.
SP1-7-1: 0.3mm/1 step
- key wider + key narrower
SM
A3
A246/A247/A248
Rev. 05/99
APPENDIX
Problem 2
If the inner inverter guide (A2474433: Inverter Guide Plate) in the inverter unit
deforms due to manufacture's error or something else, the magnets on the
inner inverter guide may not attract to the outer inverter guide. Then, jams may
occur when the paper enters the duplex unit.
Solution 2
Check Points For The Inner Inverter Guide
1) When paper is stacking in the duplex unit, check if the inner inverter guide
vibrates.
2) Remove the paper exit unit (refer to paper exit unit removal in page 6-121 of the
service manual). Check if the magnets on the inner inverter guide attract the
outer inverter guide.
3) If the magnets do not attract the outer inverter guide, replace the inner inverter
guide with a new one. Make sure that the magnets on the new inverter guide
attract the outer inverter guide.
To verify proper alignment, remove the

Inverter Unit and insert a strip of paper
on each end of the Inverter Guides as
shown above. There should be an even
amount of "pull" on both strips.
A246/A247/A248
A4
SM
Rev. 05/99
APPENDIX
It is possible that paper with a large curl (height:15mm or more) may cause
stacking failure.
There are two stacking failure patterns. Refer to patterns 1 and 2.
Procedure For Checking Curl Height
1) Raise the positioning roller by securing the positioning roller bracket using tape
so that the positioning roller does not drop.
2) Feed and stack one sheet of the paper of the size and brand normally used in
the duplex tray.
3) Open the front door and pull out the duplex unit quickly.
4) Measure the height of the curl at the front and rear edges of the curled side of
the paper.
NOTE: During measurement the curl height may change; measure the
height quickly. Turn the paper upside-down and repeat the above
procedure three times. Find the smaller curl height and set the paper so
that the curl height is smaller when paper enters the duplex tray.
Problem 4
When the paper guide work as a guide, paper can be stacked well as shown in
Fi. No.9. However, strongly curled paper cannot be guided completely, thus
jams may occur. In this case, set the paper in accordance with the above
procedure.
Fig. No. 9
Paper is guided
Even if the face-curled paper is

delivered to the feed section, the
paper is guided and stacked in the
feed section correctly when the paper
guide is at the lower position.
SM
A5
A246/A247/A248
Appendix
Problem 3
Rev. 05/99
APPENDIX
Problem 5
If the curl is larger than 15mm and the returning distance, (see Fig.No.10) is too
long or too short, the paper guide does not work. Thus, duplex jams may occur.
In this case SP1-9-2 (Positioning roller ON) should be adjusted so that the
paper is stacked as Fig No. 2.
Adjustment Standard For The Returning Distance: 10~30mm

Fig. No. 10
Returning distance
Fig. No. 11
Pattern 3 and 4
Hits
incoming
paper
If the returning distance is too

long, the paper guide is raised by
the next paper when the
positioning roller delivers the
paper. The paper guide cannot
work as a guide. Stack failure
occurs. (Pattern 3)
short, the paper guide is still at
the upper position when the
occurs. (Pattern 4)
A246/A247/A248
A6
SM
Rev. 05/99
APPENDIX
Measuring The Returning Distance

2) Feed and stack one sheet of the paper of the normally used size and brand into
the duplex tray.
3) Open the front door and pull out the duplex unit gently.
4) Measure the length of the returning distance as shown in Fig. No.10.
Adjustment for SP1-9-2
1) Access SP mode and change the value of SP1-9-2 (Positioning Roller ON).
Returning distance is too long. Decrease the value.
Returning distance is too short. Increase the value. (5 ms/step)
- key: The positioning roller works early + key The positioning roller works late.
SP1-17-1 No10: 0 to 1
The factory default setting for SP1-9-2

A246/A247 machines: 0 (no change)
A248 machine: from -6 to 8
Also, SP1-17-1 No.10: set to 0 from 1)
Note for A248 machine

We found that curled paper in the A248 machines may push the paper guide more
strongly than in A246/A247 machines and then the paper guide may bounce back
more. This may cause stack failures. We found that the shorter distance between
2 sheets of paper stacked may cause returning paper to hit the paper guide. To
correct this, by setting SP1-9-2 and SP1-17-1.
NOTE: If RAM clear is done accidentally, the SP data will go to "Zero".
SM
A7
A246/A247/A248
Appendix
Solution 3
TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS
8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2
&900)8-2#291&)6U
%FHJf%FHKf%FHL#g#NNE
NFfEEfMM
%440-'%&0)#13()0U
####+)78)82)6#h#FLIEfFLJNfFLKN
####6-'3,#h#*8KMINfKMJNfKMKN
####7%:-2#h#FNINfFNJNfFNKN
DC MAIN HARNESS SHORT CIRCUIT
SYMPTOM:
SC104 or SC105 may occur as a result of damage to the wiring harness.
NOTE: Damage to the DC Main Harness may result in Main Board failures. The symptoms are as follows:
ELECTRICAL
1. The exposure lamp may not illuminate.

2. The Registration Roller Motor may not energize.
CAUSE:
The Branch Harness of the DC Main Harness short-circuits. This occurs because the wiring harness is
routed too close to the By-pass Feed Motor Rotor. The Rotor may contact the harness which then cuts into
the insulation causing a short-circuit.
Incorrect Routing of Branch Harness
Main Board
Point of Contact
between the Harness an
By-pass Feed Motor
Continued
CONTROL NO. 330
MANDATORY
RETROFIT
Note: This copy is intended as a master original

for reproduction of additional bulletins.
SUBJECT:
Tech Service Bulletin No.A246/A247/A248 001

Page 2 of 2
SOLUTION:
Repair the portion of the harness that has been damaged with electrical tape, and replace the Main Board if
necessary.
FIELD COUNTERMEASURE (PREVENTIVE):
At installation or next service call, inspect the routing of the branch harness, and re-route if necessary.
PROCEDURE:
1. Disconnect CN102 & CN113 on the Main Board.
2. Route the branch harness that connects to CN102 & CN113 so that it passes under the Main harness
before connecting it to the Main Board. Then reconnect CN102 & CN113.
PRODUCTION COUNTERMEASURE:
The routing of the harness has been changed at the factory.
Correct Routing of Branch Harness
Main Board
Note how the

Main Harness is
routed over the
Sub-harness.
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A246/A247/A248 copiers manufactured after the February 9th production run will have the harness routed
in the correct direction.
8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2
&900)8-2#291&)6U
%FHJf%FHKf%FHL#h#NNE6)-779)#+
NGfEMfMM
%440-'%&0)#13()0U
DC MAIN HARNESS SHORT CIRCUIT
SYMPTOM:
SC104 or SC105 may occur as a result of damage to the wiring harness.
NOTE: Damage to the DC Main Harness may result in Main Board failures. The symptoms are as follows:
ELECTRICAL
1. The exposure lamp may not illuminate.

2. The Registration Roller Motor may not energize.
CAUSE:
Incorrect Routing of Branch Harness
Main Board
Point of Contact
between the Harness an
By-pass Feed Motor
Continued
CONTROL NO. 335
MANDATORY
RETROFIT
The Branch Harness of the DC Main Harness short-circuits. This occurs because the wiring harness is
routed too close to the By-pass Feed Motor Rotor. The Rotor may contact the harness which then cuts into
the insulation causing a short-circuit.

SUBJECT:
Tech Service Bulletin No.A246/A247/A248 001 Reissue +

Page 2 of 2
SOLUTION:
Repair the portion of the harness that has been damaged with electrical tape, and replace the Main Board if
necessary.
FIELD COUNTERMEASURE (PREVENTIVE):
At installation or next service call, inspect the routing of the branch harness, and re-route if necessary.
PROCEDURE:
1. Disconnect CN102 & CN113 on the Main Board.
2. Route the branch harness that connects to CN102 & CN113 so that it passes under the Main harness
before connecting it to the Main Board. Then reconnect CN102 & CN113.
The routing of the harness has been changed at the factory.
Correct Routing of Branch Harness
Main Board
Note how the

Main Harness is
routed over the
Sub-harness.
+ UNITS AFFECTED:
All A246/A247/A248 copiers manufactured after the February 9th production run (See the Serial Numbers
listed below) will have the harness routed in the correct direction.
MODEL NAME
Gestetner 2851
Gestetner 2860
Gestetner 2870
Ricoh FT7950
Ricoh FT7960
Ricoh FT7970
Savin 2050
Savin 2060
Savin 2070
SERIAL NUMBER
1st Production Run
1st Production Run
1st Production Run
A7969420224~
A7979420001~
A7989420001~
2B69420037~
2B79420001~
2B89420001~
8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2
&900)8-2#291&)6U
%FHJf%FHKf%FHL#g#NNF
NIfFLfMM
%440-'%&0)#13()0U
ENTRANCE SEAL AND HEAT SHIELD COVER
GENERAL:
The following Parts Corrections are being issued for all A246, A247, and A248 Parts Catalogs.
OLD PART NO.

A2293092
A2473257
NEW PART NO.

A2293091
A2473263
DESCRIPTION
Entrance Seal
Heat Shield Cover (OEM)
Heat Shield Cover (RIC, OEM)
REFERENCE
QTY PAGE ITEM
1-1
77
4
1-0
13
12
0-1
13
12
CONTROL NO. 353
PARTS

SUBJECT:
8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2
&900)8-2#291&)6U
%FHJf%FHKf%FHL#g#NNG
NJfNLfMM
%440-'%&0)#13()0U
DUPLEX UNIT FEED OUT JAMS
SYMPTOM:
PARTS
Duplex Unit feed out jams in the A248 machines.
CAUSE:
Curled paper
SOLUTION:
1. A stopper [A] has been extended to the front of the inverter plate. (There is already a stopper on the rear
side.)
2. A cutout [B] has been added to the inverter guide to prevent the stopper [A] from striking it.
Inverter
Guide Plate
Inverter
Plate-Assy
NOTE: This modification is applied to the A248 version machines. To ensure good paper stacking for
A246 and A247 machines and to standardize the parts with A248 machines, the same
modification has been applied to the A246 and A247 machines.
Continued
CONTROL NO. 358
MECHANICAL

SUBJECT:
Tech Service Bulletin No. A246/A247/A248 003

Page 2 of 2
3. Change SP SP1-9-2 and SP1-17-1 as follows:
SP 1-9-2: set to 6 to 8
SP 1-17-1 No. 10 from 0 to 1
SP1-17-1 No.10: 0 to 1
NOTE: If RAM clear is done accidentally, the SP data will go back to "Zero".
GENERAL:
The following Parts Corrections are being issued for all A246, A247, and A248 Parts Catalogs.
OLD PART NO.

A2474433
A2474442
NEW PART NO.

A2484433
A2484442
DESCRIPTION
Inverter Guide Plate
Inverter Plate - Ass'y
QTY
1
1
INT
3
3
REFERENCE
PAGE ITEM
93
10
93
14
NOTE: When the old style Inverter Guide Plate or Inverter Plate Assy is to be replaced, both parts the
Inverter Guide Plate and the Inverter Plate Assy should be replaced as a set.
UNITS AFFECTED:
Serial Number cut-in not available at time of publication.
INTERCHANGEABILITY CHART:
0
1
3/S
OLD and NEW parts can be used in both OLD and

NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.
2
NEW machines.
OLD parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines.
NEW parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines.
OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines.
3
Must be installed as a set on units manufactured prior to the S/N cut-in. On units manufactured after the S/N cut-in or
previously modified, use the new part numbers individually.
8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2
&900)8-2#291&)6U
%FHJf%FHKf%FHL#g#NNH
NJfNLfMM
%440-'%&0)#13()0U
SUBJECT:
SERVICE MANUAL - INSERT
The Service Manual page(s) listed below must be replaced or added with the page(s) supplied.
Each bulletin package contains 1 set of replacement pages.
SERVICE
MANUAL
PAGES:
xi
Tab Index Page
A1 ~ A7

GENERAL:
Updated Information (Table of Context Page)

Updated Information
Appendix Pages (Duplex Jam Troubleshooting Guide)
CONTROL NO. 359
REV. 05/99
3.1.3 TOP COVER.................................................................................10-17

3.1.4 LOWER COVER ...........................................................................10-17
3.2 GRIP ARM REPLACEMENT .................................................................10-19
3.3 BIN REMOVAL ......................................................................................10-20
3.4 TRANSPORT MOTOR REMOVAL ........................................................10-21

1. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION ....................................... 11-1
1.1 SPECIFICATIONS .................................................................................. 11-1
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTION......................................................... 11-4

2.1 MECHANICAL OPERATION .................................................................. 11-4
2.2 PAPER LIFT MECHANISM .................................................................... 11-5
2.3 PAPER END DETECTION ..................................................................... 11-7
3. REPLACEMENTS AND ADJUSTMENTS.................................. 11-8

3.1 EXTERIOR COVER REMOVAL ............................................................. 11-8
3.1.1 FRONT COVER REMOVAL .......................................................... 11-8
3.1.2 REAR LOWER COVER REMOVAL............................................... 11-8
3.1.3 TOP COVER REMOVAL ............................................................... 11-8
3.2 PAPER FEED ROLLERS REPLACEMENT............................................ 11-9
3.3 LCT FEED CLUTCH REMOVAL ...........................................................11-10
3.4 UPPER COVER SWITCHES REMOVAL ..............................................11-11
3.5 SIDE-TO-SIDE REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT ..................................11-12
APPENDIX
1.0 DUPLEX JAM TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE ............................A1
SM
xi
A246/A247/A248
INSTALLATION
SERVICE TABLES
TROUBLESHOOTING
TAB
POSITION 7
TAB
POSITION 8
TAB
POSITION 2
20 BIN SORTER STAPLER A658
TAB
POSITION 3
TAB
POSITION 4
APPENDIX
TAB
POSITION 5
SORTER STAPLER A821
TAB
POSITION 6
OVERALL INFORMATION
TAB
POSITION 1
Rev. 05/99
Rev. 05/99
APPENDIX
1.0 DUPLEX JAM TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

STACKING IN THE DUPLEX FEED SECTION
Outer Inverter Guide [A]
[B] Inner Inverter

Guide
[C] Duplex Transport

Brush Roller
[E] Upper Position
of Paper Guide
Duplex Entrance [D]

Sensor
[G] Lower Position

of Paper Guide
Paper Hold Mylar [F]
[I] Positioning Roller

Separation Belt [H]
[J] Feed Roller
Fig. No.1
Stacking Mechanism
SM
Paper pushes the paper guide up [E].

Paper starts to enter the duplex tray.
After the trailing edge of the paper passes the duplex transport sensor [D], the
paper guide falls into place [G].
The brush roller [C] pushes the trailing edge of the paper so that the paper is
not caught in the inverter guides [A and B].
After the appropriate time after the trailing edge of the paper passes through the
duplex transport sensor, the positioning roller starts to rotate to deliver the
paper to the duplex feed section.
During this period, the paper guide directs the paper under the Mylar ([F] on the
previous page) so that the paper stacks correctly in the duplex feed section.
A1
A246/A247/A248
Appendix
APPENDIX
Rev. 05/99
Rev. 05/99
APPENDIX
Correct Stacking Condition

The paper delivered by the positioning roller in the duplex feed section are
stacked along the separation belt like staircase stack in the fig. No 2. The
paper hold Mylar guides the paper and holds the leading edge in the duplex
feed section.
Staircase stacking
Correct stacking condition
Fig. No.2
Duplex Jam Troubleshooting

Duplex jams can be caused by differences in the width of various paper
brands, bad condition of the inner inverter guide, or curled paper. The
following troubleshooting information is for these causes.
A246/A247/A248
A2
SM
Rev. 05/99
APPENDIX
Appendix
Problem 1
If the jogger fence span is less than the paper width, the positioning roller
cannot deliver the paper to the duplex feed section due to the friction of the
narrower jogger span. Then, duplex jams occur.
Fig. NO.4
Friction
Paper is not delivered to the

feed section.
Fig. No.5
Fig. No.3 The jogger

fence span is less than
paper width
Pattern 1
The paper hold Mylar does not hold stacked

paper completely. The next sheet pushes
the stacked paper back.
Non staircase
Pattern 2
This condition causes double feed

and/or non feed.
Solution 1
Fig. No. 8
A
Duplex Jogger Fence Span Adjustment

1) By accessing SP1-7-1 (jogger span adjustment), check
the jogger span adjustment setting.
2) Feed and stack one sheet of the paper of the size and
brand normally used in the duplex tray.
3) Open the front door, and gently pull out the duplex tray.
4) Confirm and measure the distance between rear jogger
fence and paper (3 times or more).
Adjustment standard: A=0.5~1.5mm
If the span is incorrect, adjust the jogger fence span by
changing the SP mode data. Make the adjustment from wider to narrower. This is
necessary because there is a little play in the mechanism. (To increase the span,
first make it wider than you want and then adjust it down.) If the SP mode is
changed from narrower to wider, paper buckle may appear.
SP1-7-1: 0.3mm/1 step
- key wider + key narrower
SM
A3
A246/A247/A248
Rev. 05/99
APPENDIX
Problem 2
If the inner inverter guide (A2474433: Inverter Guide Plate) in the inverter unit
deforms due to manufacture's error or something else, the magnets on the
inner inverter guide may not attract to the outer inverter guide. Then, jams may
occur when the paper enters the duplex unit.
Solution 2
Check Points For The Inner Inverter Guide
1) When paper is stacking in the duplex unit, check if the inner inverter guide
vibrates.
2) Remove the paper exit unit (refer to paper exit unit removal in page 6-121 of the
service manual). Check if the magnets on the inner inverter guide attract the
outer inverter guide.
3) If the magnets do not attract the outer inverter guide, replace the inner inverter
guide with a new one. Make sure that the magnets on the new inverter guide
attract the outer inverter guide.
To verify proper alignment, remove the

Inverter Unit and insert a strip of paper
on each end of the Inverter Guides as
shown above. There should be an even
amount of "pull" on both strips.
A246/A247/A248
A4
SM
Rev. 05/99
APPENDIX
It is possible that paper with a large curl (height:15mm or more) may cause
stacking failure.
There are two stacking failure patterns. Refer to patterns 1 and 2.
Procedure For Checking Curl Height
2) Feed and stack one sheet of the paper of the size and brand normally used in
the duplex tray.
3) Open the front door and pull out the duplex unit quickly.
4) Measure the height of the curl at the front and rear edges of the curled side of
the paper.
NOTE: During measurement the curl height may change; measure the
height quickly. Turn the paper upside-down and repeat the above
procedure three times. Find the smaller curl height and set the paper so
that the curl height is smaller when paper enters the duplex tray.
Problem 4
When the paper guide work as a guide, paper can be stacked well as shown in
Fi. No.9. However, strongly curled paper cannot be guided completely, thus
jams may occur. In this case, set the paper in accordance with the above
procedure.
Fig. No. 9
Paper is guided
Even if the face-curled paper is

delivered to the feed section, the
paper is guided and stacked in the
feed section correctly when the paper
guide is at the lower position.
SM
A5
A246/A247/A248
Appendix
Problem 3
Rev. 05/99
APPENDIX
Problem 5
If the curl is larger than 15mm and the returning distance, (see Fig.No.10) is too
long or too short, the paper guide does not work. Thus, duplex jams may occur.
In this case SP1-9-2 (Positioning roller ON) should be adjusted so that the
paper is stacked as Fig No. 2.
Adjustment Standard For The Returning Distance: 10~30mm

Fig. No. 10
Returning distance
Fig. No. 11
Pattern 3 and 4
Hits
incoming
paper

long, the paper guide is raised by
the next paper when the
occurs. (Pattern 3)
short, the paper guide is still at
the upper position when the
occurs. (Pattern 4)
A246/A247/A248
A6
SM
Rev. 05/99
APPENDIX
Measuring The Returning Distance

2) Feed and stack one sheet of the paper of the normally used size and brand into
the duplex tray.
3) Open the front door and pull out the duplex unit gently.
4) Measure the length of the returning distance as shown in Fig. No.10.
Adjustment for SP1-9-2
1) Access SP mode and change the value of SP1-9-2 (Positioning Roller ON).
Returning distance is too long. Decrease the value.
Returning distance is too short. Increase the value. (5 ms/step)
- key: The positioning roller works early + key The positioning roller works late.
SP1-17-1 No10: 0 to 1
The factory default setting for SP1-9-2

A246/A247 machines: 0 (no change)
A248 machine: from -6 to 8
Also, SP1-17-1 No.10: set to 0 from 1)
Note for A248 machine

We found that curled paper in the A248 machines may push the paper guide more
strongly than in A246/A247 machines and then the paper guide may bounce back
more. This may cause stack failures. We found that the shorter distance between
2 sheets of paper stacked may cause returning paper to hit the paper guide. To
correct this, by setting SP1-9-2 and SP1-17-1.
NOTE: If RAM clear is done accidentally, the SP data will go to "Zero".
SM
A7
A246/A247/A248
Appendix
Solution 3
8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2
&900)8-2#291&)6U
%FHJf%FHKf%FHL#g#NNI
NJfFIfMM
SERVICE
MANUAL

SUBJECT:
%440-'%&0)#13()0U
GENERAL:
The Service Manual page listed below must be replaced with the page supplied. Each bulletin package
contains 1 set of replacement pages.
PAGES:
The revised areas have been highlighted by an arrow .
1- 6
Updated Information
CONTROL NO. 361
Rev. 06/99
1.2 MACHINE CONFIGURATION

1.2.1 COPIER OVERVIEW
- A246/A247/A248 copiers -
50
Tandem LCT
(including two 1,550-sheet LCT
Two 550-sheet paper trays
Optional 3,500-sheet large capacity tray
By-pass (approx. 50 sheets)
1,550 x 2
(3,500)
550
550
A246V500.WMF
1.2.2 SYSTEM OVERVIEW

DJF
Hanging S/S
S/S with Punch
Original Tray
S/S
Tandem LCT
Hanging Sorter Stapler
(A658) (A246 only)
Universal
Fixed
3,500 sheets
LCT
Floor type Sorter Stapler (A821-17, -15, -22, -26)

Floor type Sorter Stapler with Punch (A821-57, -67, -55, -62, -66)
Note: Sorter Adapter Type L (A902) needed for ST29 (A658)
A246/A247/A248
1-6
A246V501.WMF
SM
8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2
&900)8-2#291&)6U
%FHJf%FHKf%FHL#g#NNJ
NKfNMfMM
%440-'%&0)#13()0U
GENERAL:
The Service Manual page(s) listed below must be replaced with the page(s) supplied. Each bulletin package
PAGES:
3-49, 3-50
Updated Information (Transportation Remarks)
CONTROL NO. 367
SERVICE
MANUAL

SUBJECT:
Rev. 07/99
TRANSPORTATION REMARKS
3.10 TRANSPORTATION REMARKS

3.10.1 TONER RECYCLING TUBE CLEANING
NOTE: 1) When transporting the machine, perform the following operations.
Otherwise the toner may be blocked.
2) When installing a new machine or transporting the machine which
copied less than 1,000-sheets, these actions are not necessary.
3) Be careful not to drop the toner.
Installation
Access SP mode and perform SP2-2-2 (Toner Collection Mode). After the
toner collection motor stops rotating, exit SP mode. Continue at Step 1
below.
[A]
[B]
A246I531.WMF

6.1.4.)
3. While unhooking the tube clip [A] disconnect the end of tube [B], as shown.
4. While putting the end of the tube into a plastic bag, unhook the tube (1 clamp),
and set it vertically.
5. Tap the tube to remove the toner, as shown.
6. Reinstall the tube.
SM
3-49
A246/A247/A248
TRANSPORTATION REMARKSr 1998
Rev. 07/99
3.10.2 OTHER OPERATIONS

1. Remove the development unit and pack it.
2. Set the clamps which were removed at installation.
A246/A247/A248
3-50
SM
8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2
&900)8-2#291&)6U
%FHJf%FHKf%FHL#g#NNK
NKfFNfMM
%440-'%&0)#13()0U
CASE OPERATION PANEL
GENERAL:
The following part correction is being issued for all A246, A247 and A248 Parts Catalogs. Please update
your Parts Catalogs with the following information.
OLD PART NO.

A2471471
A2471471
NEW PART NO.

A2471472
A2471473
DESCRIPTION
Case Operation Panel English & Symbol
Case Operation Panel Symbol
QTY
1
1
REFERENCE
PAGE ITEM
17
2
17
2
CONTROL NO. 368
PARTS

SUBJECT:
TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN

BULLETIN NUMBER:
A246/A247/A248 - 008
09/07/99
APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER 2851/2860/2870
RICOH FT7950/7960/7970
SAVIN 2050/2060/2070
ABNORMAL SOUND OPENING TONER BOTTLE HOLDER
!
SYMPTOM:
An abnormal sound occurs when the Toner Bottle Holder Assembly is opened too far to the right.
CAUSE:
MECHANICAL
The original Toner Bottle Holder Assembly design would allow the assembly to be opened too far to the right.
SOLUTION:
Spacer M6
Joint Gear Toner Bottle

Motor Joint Gear
Spring
Toner Bottle Bracket
OLD PART NO.

A2293245
AB017464
NEW PART NO.

A2293240
A2293242
A2293243
AA060291
AA132024
DESCRIPTION
DC Motor
Connecting Gear
Motor Joint Gear
Spring
Spacer M6
Idler Shaft Toner Bottle
QTY
1
1!0
1
1
1
1
INT
3
1
3/S
3/S
3/S
3/S
REFERENCE
PAGE ITEM
73
4
73
3
73
35
73
36
73
37
73
38
Continued
CONTROL NO. 374
PARTS
To prevent this from occurring, the Toner Bottle Joint Gear has been changed so that it will only rotate in one
direction, even if the assembly is opened to the right. A Spring and a Spacer has been added to the
assembly. See the diagram below. Also, the Toner Bottle Motor has been changed to P/N A2293240.

SUBJECT:

Page 2 of 2
UNITS AFFECTED:
A246, A247 and A248 Serial Number cut-ins not available at time of publication.
0
1
3/S

2
NEW machines.
3

BULLETIN NUMBER:
A246/A247/A248 008 REISSUE
09/07/99
APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER 2851/2860/2870
RICOH FT7950/7960/7970
SAVIN 2050/2060/2070
ABNORMAL SOUND OPENING TONER BOTTLE HOLDER
!

SUBJECT:
An abnormal sound occurs when the Toner Bottle Holder Assembly is opened too far to the right.
CAUSE:
MECHANICAL
SYMPTOM:
The original Toner Bottle Holder Assembly design would allow the assembly to be opened too far to the right.
SOLUTION:
Spacer M6

Motor Joint Gear
Spring
Toner Bottle Bracket
OLD PART NO.

A2293245
AB017464
NEW PART NO.

A2293240
A2293242
A2293243
AA060291
AA132024
DESCRIPTION
DC Motor
Connecting Gear
Motor Joint Gear
Spring
Spacer M6
Idler Shaft Toner Bottle
QTY
1
1!0
1
1
1
1
INT
3
1
3/S
3/S
3/S
3/S
REFERENCE
PAGE ITEM
73
4
73
3
73
35 *
73
36 *
73
37 *
73
38 *
* Denotes new item.

Continued
CONTROL NO. 376
PARTS
To prevent this from occurring, the Toner Bottle Joint Gear has been changed so that it will only rotate in one
direction, even if the assembly is opened to the right. A Spring and a Spacer has been added to the
assembly. See the diagram below. Also, the Toner Bottle Motor has been changed to P/N A2293240.
Tech Service Bulletin No. A246/A247/A248 008 REISSUE

Page 2 of 2
UNITS AFFECTED:
A246, A247 and A248 Serial Number cut-ins not available at time of publication.
0
1
3/S

2
NEW machines.
3

BULLETIN NUMBER:
A246/A247/A248 - 009
10/04/99
APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER 2851/2860/2870
RICOH FT7950/7960/7970
SAVIN 2050/2060/2070
GENERAL:
The Service Manual page listed below must be replaced with the page supplied. Each bulletin
package contains 1 set of replacement pages.
PAGES:
7-23
Updated Information (SC703 Possible Causes)
CONTROL NO. 384
SERVICE
MANUAL

SUBJECT:
8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2
&900)8-2#291&)6U
%FHJf%FHKf%FHL#h#NEN
ENfFEfMM
%440-'%&0)#13()0U
PARTS CATALOG UPDATE
GENERAL:
To prevent Toner leakage from the Seal of the Cleaning Blade Bracket, the Seals have been thickened.
The following Part Correction is being issued for all A246/A247/A248 Parts Catalogs.
Seal
OLD PART NO.

A2473565
NEW PART NO.

A2473573
DESCRIPTION
Bracket Cleaning Blade
QTY
1
INT
1
REFERENCE
PAGE ITEM
65
15
UNITS AFFECTED:
A246/A247/A248 Serial Number cut-ins not available at time of publication.
0
1
3/S

2
NEW machines.
3
CONTROL NO. 389
PARTS

SUBJECT:
8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2
&900)8-2#291&)6U
%FHJf%FHKf%FHL#h#NEE
ENfFEfMM
%440-'%&0)#13()0U
GENERAL:
To prevent Toner blockage above the Steel Ball of the Toner Recycling Unit, a spring has been attached to
the ball (as shown below).
The following Parts Corrections are being issued for all A246A/247/A248 Parts Catalogs.
OLD PART NO.

A0963736
NEW PART NO.
A2473502
A2473797
A2473501
DESCRIPTION
Steel Ball M11
Toner Recycling Steel Ball
Toner Recycling Unit
QTY
1-1
INT
1
1-1
REFERENCE
PAGE ITEM
71
22
71
UNITS AFFECTED:
A246/A247/A248 Serial Number cut-in not available at time of publication.
0
1
3/S

2
NEW machines.
3
CONTROL NO. 389
PARTS

SUBJECT:
8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2
&900)8-2#291&)6U
%FHJf%FHKf%FHL#h#NEF
ENfFEfMM
%440-'%&0)#13()0U
PARTS

SUBJECT:
GENERAL:
The following Parts Corrections are being issued for all A246/A247/A248 Parts Catalogs.
DESCRIPTION
QTY
REFERENCE
PAGE ITEM
Incorrect
A2295215
HVGA LCD
17
11
Correct
A2295216
Touch Panel
17
11
DESCRIPTION
QTY
REFERENCE
PAGE ITEM
Incorrect
A0962633
Front Lock
99
36
Correct
A0602633
Guide Plate Holder
99
36
DESCRIPTION
QTY
REFERENCE
PAGE ITEM
Incorrect
AF013002
Bottom Plate Pad
43
Correct
AF013005
Bottom Plate Pad
43
CONTROL NO. 389

BULLETIN NUMBER:
A246/A247/A248 - 013
01/11/2000
APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER 2851/2860/2870
RICOH FT7950/7960/7970
SAVIN 2050/2060/2070
CAP PAPER TRAY
!
GENERAL:
Due to parts standardization, the shape of the Paper Tray has been changed and a Cap Paper Tray has
been added. The part number of the Paper Tray Assembly has not been changed because the
interchangeability is 0. The following part update is being issued for all A246, A247 and A248 Parts
Catalogs. Please update your Parts Catalogs with the following information.
PART NUMBER
AF010073
DESCRIPTION
Cap Paper Tray
QTY
1
INT
3
REFERENCE
PAGE ITEM
43
19 *
* Denotes new item.
Continued
CONTROL NO. 012ABW
PARTS

SUBJECT:

Page 2 of 2
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A246, A247 and A248 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style
Cap Paper Tray installed during production.
MODEL NAME
Gestetner 2851
Gestetner 2860
Gestetner 2870
Ricoh FT7950
Ricoh FT7960
Ricoh FT7970
Savin 2050
Savin 2060
Savin 2070
SERIAL NUMBER
2B6912xxxx
2B7912xxxx
2B8912xxxx
A796912xxxx
A797912xxxx
A798912xxxx
2B6912xxxx
2B7912xxxx
2B8912xxxx
0
1
3/S

2
NEW machines.
3

BULLETIN NUMBER:
A246/A247/A248 013 REISSUE !
07/21/2000
APPLICABLE MODEL:
MODEL:
GESTETNER 2851/2860/2870
RICOH FT7950/7960/7970
SAVIN 2050/2060/2070
CAP PAPER TRAY
!
GENERAL:
! Due to parts standardization, the shape of the Paper Tray has been changed, a Cap Paper Tray and a Set
Sensor Bracket have been added. The part number of the Paper Tray Assembly has not been changed
because the interchangeability is 0. The following part update is being issued for all A246, A247 and A248
Parts Catalogs. Please update your Parts Catalogs with the following information.
Set Sensor Bracket Paper Tray
Paper Tray
108
Cap Paper Tray
!
!
PART NUMBER
AF010073
A2936580
04504008B
DESCRIPTION
Cap Paper Tray
Set Sensor Bracket Paper Tray
Tapping Screw M4x8
QTY
1
1
-
REFERENCE
PAGE ITEM
45
19 *
45
20 *
45
108 *
* Denotes new item number.
Continued
CONTROL NO. 046ABW
PARTS

SUBJECT:
Tech Service Bulletin No. A246/A247/A248 013 REISSUE !

Page 2 of 2
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A246, A247 and A248 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style
Cap Paper Tray installed during production.
MODEL NAME
Gestetner 2851
Gestetner 2860
Gestetner 2870
Ricoh FT7950
Ricoh FT7960
Ricoh FT7970
Savin 2050
Savin 2060
Savin 2070
SERIAL NUMBER
2B6912xxxx
2B7912xxxx
2B8912xxxx
A796912xxxx
A797912xxxx
A798912xxxx
2B6912xxxx
2B7912xxxx
2B8912xxxx
0
1
3/S

2
NEW machines.
3

BULLETIN NUMBER:
A246/A247/A248 014
01/11/2000
APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER 2851/2860/2870
RICOH FT7950/7960/7970
SAVIN 2050/2060/2070
SC940
SYMPTOM:
SC940 occurs when the copier reaches the Energy Star Auto Off mode. The default time is 90 min.
CAUSE:
The 24 VDC wires on the Main Switch are incorrectly attached. If the wires on connections 5 and 6 of the
Main Switch are reversed, the Main Switch will not turn off by the Auto Off Mode and an SC940 occurs.
SOLUTION:
Correctly reconnect the 24 VDC wires on connections 5 and 6. The following table and illustration show the
correct connections for the Main Switch.
Main Switch
Connector No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Color of the
Connector
Yellow
Yellow
White
White
White
White
Color of the
Cable
White
White
Black
Black
White (White)
Black (Blue)
Continued
CONTROL NO. 012ABW
ELECTRICAL

SUBJECT:

Page 2 of 2
FIELD COUNTERMEASURE:
During installation, or the next visit, check the Main Switch Harness 24VDC wires.
NOTE: The serial number range for affected units is not available. Check all units manufactured prior to
November 1999 production.
The improper cable connections have been acknowledged by the factory and steps have been taken to
prevent future occurrences of this issue.
AFFECTED UNITS:
All A246, A247 and A248 copiers manufactured starting from November 1999 will have the Main Switch
Harnesses correctly installed during production.

BULLETIN NUMBER:
A246/A247/A248 015
01/12/2000
APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER 2851/2860/2870
RICOH FT7950/FT7960/FT7970
SAVIN 2050/2060/2070
GEAR 35Z
PARTS

SUBJECT:
GENERAL:
Due to parts standardization, Gear 35Z has been changed to a one-way clutch type. The following Parts
Update is being issued for all A246/A247/A248 Parts Catalogs.
OLD PART NO.

A2473075
NEW PART NO.

A0963069
DESCRIPTION
Gear 35Z
Development Knob
QTY
INT
REFERENCE
PAGE ITEM
77
UNITS AFFECTED:
0
1
3/S

2
NEW machines.
3
CONTROL NO. 013ABW
Rev. 05/99
33. Development Unit 1 (A246/A247/A248)

Index
No.
*
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Part No.
A247 3050
AB01 3785
A247 3075
A096 3141
A229 3091
A096 3104
A247 3081
AA01 2060
AB01 3788
AB01 3786
AB01 3790
A247 3074
A096 3059
AW23 0006
A246/A247/A248
Description
Development Unit
Gear - 43Z
Gear - 35Z
Development Filter Case
Entrance Seal
Development Guide Rail
Gear - 17Z
Development Filter
Gear - 23Z
Gear - 18Z
Gear - 25Z
Gear - 34Z
Toner Sensor Guide
Toner Density Sensor
Qty Per
Assembly
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Index
No.
101
102
103
104
105
106
77
Part No.
Qty Per
Assembly
Description
0951 3006B Philips Screw With Flat Washer - M3x6

0951 4008B Philips Screw With Washer - M4x8
0450 4008B Tapping Screw - 4x8
0727 0090E Retaining Ring C - M9
0313 0050B Philips Pan Head Screw - M3x5
0720 0030B Retaining Ring - M3
Parts Location and List

BULLETIN NUMBER:
A246/A247/A248 016
01/12/2000
PARTS

SUBJECT:
APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER 2851/2860/2870
SAVIN 2050/2060/2070
Power Relay DC24V
GENERAL:
115
OLD PART NO.

12080479
11040224
NEW PART NO.
A2475369
DESCRIPTION
Power Relay DC24V
Relay Bracket
Relay G7J DC24V
QTY
10
1 -- 0
0-1
INT
1
1
3/S
REFERENCE
PAGE
ITEM
111
107
111
109
111
115
Denotes a New Item

UNITS AFFECTED:
CONTROL NO.013ABW
50. Electrical Section 2 (A246/A247/A248)

Index
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
21
22
23
Part No.
A176 5503
A247 5514
A247 5554
A175 5448
A247 5446
AZ30 0048
A175 5439
A247 5447
A096 5453
A247 5450
A247 1084
A247 5431
5446 5832
AA06 3068
A096 5521
A096 7635
AX64 0086
A247 5555
A247 5506
A096 5519
A247 7595
A175 7580
A096 5516
A247 7606
A246/A247/A248
Description
High Voltage Board Bracket
Middle Stay - Main Control Board
Air Blocking Plate
Pp Relay Harness
High Voltage Cable - Development
T & S High Voltage Supply Board
Dram Harness
DC Harness - PP
Anticondensation Heater Harness 1
AC Harness
Connector Stay
DC Harness - Duplex Relay
Connector Guide Pin
Spring Connector
AC Harness Bracket
Main Relay Harness - 230V
DC Motor - 3.36W
Bracket - Optics Cooling Fan
Left Hinge - Main Board
Relay Bracket
AC Drive Board - 120V
AC Drive Board - 230V
AC Drive Board Bracket
Fusing Unit Relay Harness
Qty Per
Assembly
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Index
No.
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
111
Part No.
1105 0230
0434 0080B
1105 0192
0951 3006B
1105 0310
0314 0060B
1208 0479
0314 0300B
1104 0224
1105 0367
1105 0292
1105 0087
1105 0316
1105 0291
Qty Per
Assembly
Description
Clamp
Pan Head Self-tapping Screw - M4x8
Locking Support
Philips Screw With Flat Washer - M3x6
Harness Clamp - LWS-1S
Philips Pan Head Screw - M4x6
Power Relay - DC24V
Relay Bracket
Spacer
Wire Saddle
Clamp
Clamp
Harness Clamp - LWS-3S

BULLETIN NUMBER:
A246/A247/A248 017
01/12/2000
APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER 2851/2860/2870
SAVIN 2050/2060/2070
CONNECTOR 3P
GENERAL:
The connector has been changed due to parts standardization. The following Parts Corrections are being
issued for all A246/A247/A248 Parts Catalogs.
OLD PART NO.

11010473
NEW PART NO.

A2474249
DESCRIPTION
Connector 3P
QTY
1
INT
0
REFERENCE
PAGE ITEM
89
110
UNITS AFFECTED:
CONTROL NO.013ABW
PARTS

SUBJECT:
39. Fusing Unit 3 (A246/A247/A248)

Index
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Part No.
A097 4225
A247 4224
A247 4121
AA12 0088
AA12 0091
A096 4115
A096 4231
A097 4170
AE03 0017
AE03 2020
AB01 3792
AA06 6232
5215 4444
A097 4133
AE03 0018
A247 4174
AA06 0540
AA06 0562
A096 4181
A247 4101
A176 4135
A097 4112
AE02 0078
AE01 1042
AX43 0021
AX43 0034
A096 4185
A175 7617
A097 4173
AB01 7357
A247 4176
A247 4105
A413 1670
A246/A247/A248
Description
Thermofuse - 169C
Fusing Thermistor
Fusing Rail
Antistatic Spacer
Antistatic Brush
Fusing Left Stay
Fusing Connector Bracket
Front Heater Holder
Ball Bearing - 35x50x10
Bushing - M30
Gear - 49Z
Lock Lever Spring
Pin
Lock Lever
Front Pressure Lever
Pressure Spring (A246)
Pressure Spring (A247/A248)
Front Release Bracket
Front Side Plate - Fusing
Lower Entrance Guide
Fusing Right Stay
Pressure Roller
Hot Roller
Heater - 550W/120V
Fusing Lamp - 550W 230V
Rear Release Bracket
Fusing Unit Harness
Rear Heater Holder
Gear - 31Z
Rear Pressure Lever
Rear Side Plate - Fusing
Antistatic Brush
Qty Per
Assembly
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Index
No.
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
89
Part No.
0314 0060B
0951 4006B
0725 0300E
0720 0040B
0727 0080G
0807 5056
0313 0080B
0951 3005B
0314 0100B
1101 0473
Qty Per
Assembly
Description
Philips Screw With Washer - M4x6
Retaining Ring C - M30
Retaining Ring - M4
Retaining Ring - M8
Washer - 8.1mm
Philips Screw With Flat Washer M3x5
Connector - 3P

BULLETIN NUMBER:
A246/A247/A248 018
01/12/2000
APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER 2851/2860/2870
SAVIN 2050/2060/2070
PAPER FEED GUIDE/PAPER FEED STAY
GENERAL:
Due to parts standardization, the Paper Feed Guide and Stay have been changed. The old parts are no
longer available. Please replace both of them as a set.
OLD PART NO.

A1766337
A0966346
NEW PART NO.

A2476337
A2476346
DESCRIPTION
Paper Feed Guide
Paper Feed Stay
QTY
1
1
INT
3/S
3/S
REFERENCE
PAGE ITEM
47
16
47
9
UNITS AFFECTED:
CONTROL NO.013ABW
PARTS

SUBJECT:
18. Paper Feed Unit 2 (A246/A247/A248)

Index
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Part No.
A096 6335
5447 2681
AF03 0040
AA08 2046
A096 6352
5447 2706
A247 6351
AA06 0523
A096 6346
AA14 0498
AA06 0522
A096 6353
AA08 2070
AF02 0289
A096 6330
A176 6337
AA16 1095
AF02 0290
AF03 1040
A246/A247/A248
Description
Front Side Plate
Snap Ring
Pick-up Roller
Bushing - 6x12x6
Feed Roller Bracket
Gear - 15T
Pick-up Arm
Pick-up Pressure Spring
Paper Feed Stay
Feed Roller Shaft
Stopper Spring
Feed Roller Lever
Bushing - 8x16x7
Grip Drive Roller
Rear Side Plate
Paper Feed Guide
Pad - 2x8x8
3rd Grip Roller
Feed Roller
Qty Per
Assembly
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Index
No.
101
102
103
104
105
47
Part No.
0434 0060B
0720 0060B
0742 3808
1105 0087
0805 0088
Qty Per
Assembly
Description
Retaining Ring - M6
Clamp
Retaining Ring - M6

BULLETIN NUMBER:
A246/A247/A248 019
01/12/2000
APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER 2851/2860/2870
SAVIN 2050/2060/2070
PAPER END FEELER
PARTS

SUBJECT:
GENERAL:
Due to parts standardization, the Paper End Feeler has been changed.
OLD PART NO.

A0966362
NEW PART NO.

A2296362
DESCRIPTION
Paper End feeler
QTY
1
INT
0
REFERENCE
PAGE ITEM
45
10
0
1
3/S

2
NEW machines.
3
UNITS AFFECTED:
CONTROL NO.013ABW
17. Paper Feed Unit 1 (A246/A247/A248)

Index
No.
*
*
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
18
19
20
Part No.
A247 6379
A247 6400
A096 5411
A096 5412
A096 6375
A096 6381
AB01 3780
AB01 3778
AW02 0056
A096 6345
A096 6344
A096 6362
5447 2681
A096 6363
A096 6360
A096 6358
A096 6355
AB01 3774
AX20 0155
AB01 3777
AB01 3779
A096 6366
AB01 3775
A246/A247/A248
Description
Paper Feed Unit - 2nd Bank (Universal)
Paper Feed Unit - Paper Bank (1ST & 3rd)
Upper Feed Unit Harness
Lower Feed Unit Harness
Unit Fixing Plate
Unit Fixing Plate - 3rd
Gear
Gear - 32Z
Photointerruptor - EE-SX4235A-P1
End Sensor Bracket
Paper End Actuator
Paper End Feeler
Snap Ring
Front Paper Flattener
Paper Flattener
Photointerrupter Bracket
Pick-up Solenoid
Gear - 18Z
Magnetic Clutch
Gear - 32Z
Gear - 32Z
Clutch Stopper Arm
Gear - 33Z
Qty Per
Assembly
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Index
No.
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
45
Part No.
0434 0060B
1102 6250
1102 6265
0720 0040B
0720 0060B
0573 0040E
1102 6245
Qty Per
Assembly
Description
Connector - 7P
Connector - RED 8P
Retaining Ring - M4
Retaining Ring - M6
Hexagon Headless Set Screw - M3x4
Relay Connector - 2P

BULLETIN NUMBER:
A246/A247/A248 - 020
05/08/2000
APPLICABLE MODEL:
MODEL:
GESTETNER 2851/2860/2870
RICOH FT7950/7960/7970
SAVIN 2050/2060/2070
TONER SUPPLY CLUTCH
GENERAL:
!
The Toner Supply Clutch has been made available as a service part. The following part addition is being
issued for all A246/A247/A248 Parts Catalogs.
25
PART NUMBER
AX200093
DESCRIPTION
Magnetic Clutch
QTY
1
REFERENCE
PAGE ITEM
101
25 *
* Denotes new item number.
CONTROL NO. 033ABW
PARTS

SUBJECT:

BULLETIN NUMBER:
A246/A247/A248 - 021
08/25/2000
PARTS
SC193 DURING INSTALLATION
SYMPTOM:
An SC193 (APS abnormal) occurs while making copies at installation.
CAUSE:
Under the following conditions, the APS sensor detects an abnormal APS value due to interference,
triggering an SC193:
When drive is supplied to the Registration Motor.

When the APS Sensor Harness and Registration Motor Harness are very close to each other.
NOTE: This cause only refers to SC193 occurrences at or just following machine installation. Other
occurrences of SC193 are due to other causes, such as a defective APS Sensor (P/N AW010080).
SOLUTION:
Replace the Optics Control Board (P/N A2475140) with a new board that contains a resistor and condenser,
which were added to act as a noise filter.
Old Style
R=4.7K
R=470
LS240
LS244
Harness
R=680
Optics Board
APS Sensor
New Style
R=4.7K
LS240
R=4.7K
Harness
R=510
LS244
C=4700P
APS Sensor
Optics Board
Continued
CONTROL NO. 052ABW
ELECTRICAL

SUBJECT:
APPLICABLE MODEL:
MODEL:
GESTETNER 2851/2860/2870
RICOH FT7950/7960/7970
SAVIN 2050/2060/2070

Page 2 of 2
GENERAL:
NOTE: The part number for the Optics Control Board has not changed.
PART NUMBER
A2475140
DESCRIPTION
UNITS AFFECTED:
A246/A247/A248 Serial Number cut-ins were not available at time of publication.
QTY
1
REFERENCE
PAGE ITEM
109
16

BULLETIN NUMBER:
A246/A247/A248 - 022
10/11/2000
APPLICABLE MODEL:
MODEL:
GESTETNER 2851/2860/2870
RICOH FT7950/7960/7970
SAVIN 2050/2060/2070
GENERAL:
PAGES:
SERVICE
MANUAL
The Service Manual pages listed below must be replaced with the pages supplied. Each bulletin package

SUBJECT:
vii
7-36
Updated Information (Table of Contents)

Updated Information (Firmware History)
CONTROL NO. 059ABW
Rev. 10/2000
6.9.4 SEPARATION CLUTCH/TRANSPORT CLUTCH REMOVAL ......6-132

6.9.5 JOGGER MOTOR REPLACEMENT ............................................6-133
6.10 COPY QUALITY ADJUSTMENT .........................................................6-138
6.10.1 SP ADJUSTMENT MODE ..........................................................6-138
6.10.2 SIDE-TO-SIDE REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT.......................6-140
6.10.3 UNEVEN EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT.......................................6-141
6.10.4 IMAGE DENSITY ADJUSTMENT...............................................6-143
6.10.5 SCANNER HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT...........................................6-144
6.10.6 APS SIZE CALIBRATION...........................................................6-145
ADJUSTMENT ...........................................................................6-146
TROUBLESHOOTING
7. TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................ 7-1
7.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS .................................................................7-1
7.1.1 SUMMARY .......................................................................................7-1
7.1.2 EXPOSURE......................................................................................7-3
7.1.3 SCANNER ........................................................................................7-5
7.1.4 LENS MAGNIFICATION...................................................................7-8
7.1.5 OPTICS THERMISTOR..................................................................7-10
7.1.6 CHARGE CORONA UNIT ..............................................................7-10
7.1.7 DEVELOPMENT ............................................................................7-11
7.1.8 PROCESS CONTROL SENSORS .................................................7-12
7.1.9 TRANSFER CURRENT..................................................................7-15
7.1.10 DRUM...........................................................................................7-15
7.1.11 PAPER FEED...............................................................................7-16
7.1.12 DUPLEX .......................................................................................7-19
7.1.13 FUSING ........................................................................................7-20
7.1.14 SYSTEM CONTROL ....................................................................7-22
7.1.15 DUAL JOB FEEDER.....................................................................7-23
7.1.16 SORTER STAPLER .....................................................................7-24
7.1.17 OTHERS.......................................................................................7-28
7.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS ................................................7-30
7.2.1 SENSORS ......................................................................................7-30
7.2.2 SWITCHES.....................................................................................7-34
7.2.3 FUSES............................................................................................7-35
7.3 FIRMWARE HISTORY ............................................................................7-36

1.1 SPECIFICATIONS.....................................................................................8-1
1.2 COMPONENT LAYOUT............................................................................8-2
1.2.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT...........................................8-2
1.2.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT ............................................8-3
1.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION...........................................8-4
SM
vii
A246/A247/A248
Rev. 10/2000
FIRMWARE HISTORY
7.3
FIRMWARE HISTORY
7.3.1 A246/A247/A248 FIRMWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY

A246/A247/A248 FIRMWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY
FIRMWARE
LEVEL
SERIAL
NUMBER
FIRMWARE
VERSION
Initial Production
A2475151 D
From 1st
Production
Corrects the following:
A2475151 E
July 00
Production
DESCRIPTION OF MODIFICATION
Correct the remaining time calculation

<Symptom>
If small paper (A4) is fed in APS mode, a
longer remaining time is displayed on the
operation panel. This is because the
machine calculates the remaining time in
APS mode for A3 paper.
Example: After an original is set in the
DF, 220 copies is selected and
the Start key is pressed, the
machine displays 7 minutes as
the remaining time.
The correct value is 3.7 min
(220 / 60 = 3.7 min.) .
No paper jam indication
<Symptom>
Even if the sensor is stuck in the ON
position (hook loose, separated), copies
are exited from the copier and a jam is
not indicated. When the front door is
opened and closed, a jam is indicated
(even though there is no jammed paper in
the machine).
<Countermeasure>
The new software contains a sensor Offcheck, which will cause the sensor to
turn off after a certain time has expired
(even if it is physically stuck in the ON
position).
A246/A247/A248
7-36
SM

BULLETIN NUMBER:
A246/A247/A248 023
12/12/2000
APPLICABLE MODEL:
MODEL:
GESTETNER 2851/2860/2870
RICOH FT7950/7960/7970
SAVIN 2050/2060/2070
BOTTLE DRIVE UNIT
!
GENERAL:
If the Shutter Cover is not hung on the hook of the Right Inner Cover, vibration may cause the Inner Shutter
to move and cover the entrance to the Toner Hopper.
MECHANICAL
To secure the Shutter Cover in place, a boss has been added to the bottom of the Shutter Cover. The part
number for the Bottle Drive Unit has changed. When installing the Right Inner Cover, be sure to place the
boss in the Guide Rail. See drawings below.
Guide Rail
!
PARTS

SUBJECT:
Shutter Cover
Boss: Shutter Cover
Right Inner Cover
Hook: Right Inner Cover
The following parts updates are being issued for all A246/A247/A248 Parts Catalogs.
OLD PART NO.

A2473180
A2473182
A2473183
NEW PART NO.

A2473193
A2473194
A2473195
DESCRIPTION
Bottle Drive Unit Ricoh USA
Bottle Drive Unit Ricoh Asia & EU
Bottle Drive Unit OEM Partner
QTY
1
1
1
INT
1
1
1
REFERENCE
PAGE ITEM
73
1
73
1
73
1
Continued
CONTROL NO. 072ABW

Page 2 of 2
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A246/A247/A248 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style
Bottle Drive Unit installed during production.
MODEL NAME
Gestetner 2851
Gestetner 2860
Gestetner 2870
Ricoh FT7950
Ricoh FT7960
Ricoh FT7970
Savin 2050
Savin 2060
Savin 2070
SERIAL NUMBER
2B60050001
2B7006xxxx
2B80070001
A796010xxxx
A797010xxxx
A798010xxxx
2B60050001
2B7006xxxx
2B80070001
0
1
3/S

2
NEW machines.
3

Ricoh FT-7950 Service Manual

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Ricoh FT-7950 Service Manual

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

A246/A247/A248

RICOH GROUP COMPANIES

2000 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.

Product Comparison Chart

A246/A247/A248 and A175/A176/A177

The tandem LCT (capacity: 1,550 x 2) is the

First duplex sheet

First duplex sheet

Transfer Belt Cleaning Blade

Cleaning Bias Roller

Bias Roller Blade

The positively charged

The A229 (digital copier)

Refer to SM, pg. 2-65/67

Refer to the Operating

The process control only starts when the

The operators have to input 2 actions of the

New developer is used to stabilize the

To ensure good stacking in the duplex unit,

Refer to SM, pg. 4-16 for

The new type drum can be installed in the

See illustration. Refer to

Toner, Type 6105

For exit jam removal, it is necessary to open

The upper and lower transport guides have

Vertical thin line may be thicker than original

When removing misfed paper in the vertical

Key Counter Holder

Refer to SM, pg. 4-18 for

Refer to SM, pg. 2-91 for

Refer to SM, pg. 3-16/17

High durability rubber is used for the

To remove the right or the left cover, it is

Refer to SM, pages 6 1 to

Duplex/Separation The number of separation belts has been

Three separation belts are used for duplex

The two types of belt are

Drum Grounding Plate

To ensure good copy quality in proof mode,

For easier operation of the next job or in the

Refer to SM, pg. 4-52 for

When making more than 20 sets of copies,

In the proof mode the proof exit roller (driving

Refer to SM, pg. 9-8 for

The operator can selects 4 staple positions

In addition to the 4 staple positions (top,

Refer to SM, pg. 2-95 for

2.4.7 OPTICS CONTROL CIRCUIT........................................................ 2-43

2.9.2 DRIVE MECHANISM ................................................................... 2-108

REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

6.1.2 REAR SIDE...................................................................................... 6-2

6.4.2 TONER RECYCLING CLUTCH REPLACEMENT ......................... 6-82

6.9.4 SEPARATION CLUTCH/TRANSPORT CLUTCH REMOVAL ......6-132

DUAL JOB FEEDER A610

2. DETAILED DESCRIPTION.......................................................... 8-6

ORIGINAL PICK-UP MECHANISM .......................................................... 8-6

3. SP MODE .................................................................................. 8-25

4. REPLACEMENTS AND ADJUSTMENTS ................................. 8-27

UPPER COVER REMOVAL ................................................................... 8-27

4.17 STOPPER SOLENOID REPLACEMENT ............................................. 8-44

SORTER STAPLER A821

2. DETAILED DESCRIPTION.......................................................... 9-8

3. SP MODE .................................................................................. 9-30

4. REPLACEMENTS AND ADJUSTMENTS ................................. 9-32

IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICES